Master Class:
How to get more done
(Even if you get distracted easily and feel overwhelmed)
Taught by Dave Crenshaw of “The Myth of Multitasking”

Report issues here

Master Class:
No Multitasking


About the course leader

It’s led by Dave Crenshaw who is the master of helping business owners harness chaos, and harvest personal freedom. He’s the author of “The Myth of Multitasking: How doing it all gets nothing done” and “The Secret to Becoming Irreplaceable”.

Master Class Toolbox

Course Cheat Sheet

Multitasking exercises

Transcript

Download the transcript here

Andrew: This program is about how to be more productive by not multitasking. It’s led by, there he is, Dave Crenshaw. I got all kinds of camera work here, Dave. Dave Crenshaw, he is the master of helping business owners harness chaos, so harness chaos and harvest personal freedom.

He’s the author of “The Myth of Multitasking: How doing it all gets nothing done” and “The Secret to Becoming Irreplaceable”. I’ll help facilitate and sometimes trip over my own words. I’m Andrew Warner, founder of Mixergy.com.

Dave, I invited you here because this is an issue that a lot of people on the audience have asked for help with, how to be more productive, how to get more done, don’t have enough time in the day, you know the stuff. And my concern in having you come to teach it is I know my audience. They’re going to be thinking “Dave is a master at this. It comes natural to some people but not to me. I have a lot to do. Not to me. I do more, I do more when I focus on a few things at the same time.” What do you say to that?

Dave: Well, the interesting thing, Andrew, is when I speak to corporate audiences and really any audience I found that there are three groups of people that I speak to. And the first of group of persons is the person who is inherently organized, the Zen Master. And the other one is I call them the Lost Souls. They’re someone who used to be organized and then lost their way. And then there’s the group who is the inherently disorganized person and that’s the Pig Pen.

And in my case what happened was I was having a really hard time with my career. I began coaching businesses back in ’98 and really found myself just pulled in lots of different directions. And if you looked at my family history, other people around me, they would do the same thing. They’d jump from career to career. And I did a stint as a rock star. I had a band but it was about the time that my son was going to be born, so this was about 8 years ago, I realized something needed to change.

And so I went and saw a psychologist and said ‘Hey, something is wrong with me’ and he gave me a couple of tests and at the end of the tests he said words that I’ll never forget. He said “Has anyone ever talked to you about ADHD?” And I said well, I don’t know if that really applies to me. And he said, “Look, you are freaking off the charts ADHD” those were his exact words. He said, “If there were a fifth standard deviation, you’d be in it.” And that was really the point when I started to get much more interested in productivity and in developing these systems. And I think that’s really important for people to recognize when I’m talking to them. That first of all, I’m an entrepreneur like you. I know what it’s like to have all these different bright shiny objects floating across your space. And I also am off the charts ADHD.

So the techniques that I share, they’re gleaned from some of the best time management and productivity teachers and tips out there in the world. But they’re adapted for the most disorganized people in the world and I’m one of them.

Andrew: Perfect. Perfect.

And we actually have a bunch of very specific tactics, big ideas but also very specific actionable tactics that are up here on the board and that we’re going to go through. And can you give us an example of one of the people who you’ve worked with who used the tactics that we’re going to teach the audience today and what you were able to do for them?

Dave: Yes. Well, I’ll give many examples as I go thorough this but one of the people that I helped was a business owner in particular who, when I went into his office, I thought he had ADHD. Now, I don’t have a background in psychology but having gone through a lot of this and studying quite a bit of it, I thought ‘My gosh, this guy has got it. He’s all over the place. He can’t concentrate. His desk is messy. People come in, he’s constantly multitasking on them’.

Well, one of the best testimonials I’ve ever received, I’ll never be able to use their name and face and you’ll know why in a second. I was at dinner with a group of business owners, including this gentleman and his wife. At one point, his wife took me aside and took me by the hand, and she had tears in her eyes, and she said, “I don’t know what you did to my husband, but thank you,” because he was someone who was bringing this chaos home with him all the time. And after I had finished working with him – now if you met him, you would have no idea who I was describing, because he can focus on you. He can pay attention. He’s calm. He deals with one item in his business at a time. And that’s the kind of result that I experienced personally and then began helping others create in their business, whether or not they were diagnosed as ADHD.

Andrew: You know what? I was looking over to the side as you were saying that, because I know that there’s a point here on the boards, that we’re going to get to about how – there it is – keep a clear mind, so you can sleep. And as you were talking about this gentleman, I realized, that happens to me, too. When work is chaos, I don’t sleep well at night. I feel like, “Oh, there’s one other thing that I forgot to do. And I’ve got to do this other thing over here tomorrow. And why didn’t I do this two days ago, or the person that I promised is going to be upset with me?” I don’t get enough sleep, and I don’t get enough done. All right, I want to be like that guy by the end of the session.

And more importantly, I want the person who’s watching us, who’s investing the time and energy in this program, to get that kind of result. So, let’s go to the big board right now, and take a look at the first big tactic that we’re going to be discussing here today, which is, you say, “Identify your personality to know your tendencies.” Now, there are different kinds of personalities. Let’s talk about them again, and then we’ll know how to figure out which one we are.

Dave: Yeah, I mentioned them briefly. So first of all, now I’m not talking about personality types like the disk assessment, and that sort of thing. I’m talking about productivity personality types. And this is how you’re inherently hardwired. There’s a group of people that I call the Zen master.

Andrew: Let me bring up this image as you talk about it.

Dave: Please do.

Andrew: Here it is. These are the three people, and I’m sure as we put this up on the screen that people are going to say, “Yeah, that is me.”

Dave: Exactly.

Andrew: So the first one you said is the Zen master. And, we see that lady there on the beach.

Dave: Exactly, she’s perfectly in tune with her environment. The Zen master has never been late for anything. Their office has always been immaculate. It’s been immaculate since they were a small child, and that’s the key, is how you were from the beginning, and the Zen master . . . This concept, Andrew, they probably when saw that you were interviewing me, thought, “This is a waste of time,” which is a big part of the problem for the Zen master. Because they do not comprehend that other people have a problem with time management because they never have.

Andrew: So, in your experience we’re probably not likely to have many Zen masters who are watching this. They don’t need this. They’re good.

Dave: One out of a hundred has been my experience. I mean, I’ll get in an audience of 1000 people and I’ll say, “How many of you identify with this,” and maybe five to ten will raise their hand. And so, what I say to this group who is listening to this right now, “If I can help the rest of the screwed up people around you stop making your life miserable would that be of value to you?”

Andrew: Right. And maybe you want to, if you happen to be listening to this, and it doesn’t connect with you because you’re one in a hundred, then maybe you want to give this to the other 99 people, who you work with.

Dave: Exactly, because you don’t know how to talk them, because you cannot comprehend them. But I know how to talk to them, because I know exactly . . .

Andrew: Well, I feel like sometimes everyone’s a Zen master, and I’m the only one who is in chaos. Let me bring up this image again. As we talk I realize, I’m more like the person in the middle there. Who’s that second category again?

Dave: I call them the lost soul. And the lost soul to someone who is inherently organized, from the beginning, they have been someone who has always been on time, and likes order, and likes organization. But about in the last ten to fifteen years or so, in particular everything; the stuff hit the fan. They stopped losing that control and it’s extremely frustrating to this group: because they crave order, because they crave organization, because they crave time management. And they can’t seem to figure out how to get to that point again, and so my job with that group is to show them where they got off track, and how to get back to that point that they used to know.

Andrew: And this last person over here, the one who you call the pigpen, right?

Dave: Right, the pigpen, yeah, they’re apparently disorganized.

Andrew: Can you help the pigpen?

Dave: Well, absolutely, because I am the pigpen. And it’s important to understand, that it’s not to say that the pigpen hasn’t been successful, or can’t be successful, but they’ve done it in spite of their natural tendency to create disorder and chaos, wherever they go. And so my job with the pigpen is to help them come up with the most simple solutions to still succeed, in spite of their natural tendency to create chaos. And I would also add that the Pig Pen also has the tendency to be really outgoing and gregarious and build relationships, so I would say my job is to help them to be organized without getting in the way of building those important relationships with the people that they care about.

Andrew: OK. Alright, actually before we go to the next tactic do you have an example of one thing that you can tell, one tip that you can give someone who thinks of themselves as a pig pen that shows them how they can use who they are to become more organized, to be more productive.

Dave: Yeah, well, the big thing is to recognize that you have strengths and what we need to do is eliminate everything in your life or as much as possible from your life that’s pulling away from your most valuable activities. And this is something I talk about a little bit more in my second book “Invaluable”, there are certain things that you do that are worth hundreds or thousands of dollars per hour but when you allow your time to get sucked into these low value, what I call the LVA’s, the less valuable activities, you’re wasting not only your own time but your wasting the precious resources of your business when you do that. So the first tip that I would have you in mind, and I think this applies really to all three categories as well is start to be aware of what are those high value activities and also be aware of when your spending time in the low value activities and just begin asking yourself the question, should I be doing this right now?

Andrew: I see, so its not necessarily what’s wrong with me that I’m not able to manage the high value activities and all the other activities in my life, it’s hey maybe you don’t need all those other activities, or maybe you don’t need some of them.

Dave: Right

Andrew: And I know that from looking at the big board that were going to be getting to more of that throughout but I wanted people in that category to know that this is for them too.

Dave: Exactly.

Andrew: So, on to the next big idea here. You say stop multitasking, which is kind of controversial in this world where we have iPhones, where we feel like we can check our iPhone while were talking to somebody and maybe write out an email at the same time. You say stop multitasking and acknowledge the problem.

Dave: Right. The first thing that I want to clarify is I do not view myself as a multitasking expert. There are a lot of people who are much more intelligent and a lot more patient than I am who have done the studies, who have done the research and on my book in the myth of multitasking I cite references aplenty in the back, and more and more studies come out all the time. I view myself as the evangelist and what that means is my job is to convince people that it’s wrong and to change their behavior. Because I think a lot of your audience has heard at some point that multitasking is bad for you, I mean they may have heard it on NPR, they might have read the study by Stanford, I mean it’s been all over the place. But there’s a big problem with that. Understanding it intellectually has not changed people’s behavior and if you want evidence of that just go to any public place and see how many people are doing this.

Andrew: Head down in their phones.

Dave: All the time, constantly. Yeah, or go to a classroom, I even saw a professor who wrote a sign and it said “Dear Student, I know when you’re multitasking or I know when your texting because no one looks down at their crotch and smiles”. Right, well that is the world that we live in right now. We have a world that is addicted to the concept of multitasking. So what I do in my book and actually on the site and anyone can take this for free, I have a little exercise they can go through and I recommend that you go through this. If you have employees, have your employees go through this. If you have a spouse, go through it with them and in a matter of about four minutes you’re going to understand very clearly the three costs of multitasking because when you multitask what your really doing is your switching rapidly back and forth and when I work with people all I’m really trying to do is to help them reduce the number of switches taking place in their day because if we can do that three things are going to happen.

Number 1, your going to get more done in less time. Number two, you’re going to make less mistakes. And number 3, your stress levels are going to dramatically decrease. And that is why multitasking is my number one target and why I rephrase it as switch tasking because what your really doing switching back and forth.

Andrew: OK. So what will this allow us to do, and of course we’ll include a link to this page and to this test with the program. What is the test going to show us and what will it allow us to do?

Dave: You’re going to do a simple exercise something that’s very, you’ve been doing since you were a small child. You’re going to do it once with just one thing at time and then you’re going to do it again, and the second time you’re going to switch tasks. Then you’re going to compare the results, and you’re going to see those three effects. Things take longer, you make more mistakes and your stress level is increased. Everyone experiences that to some degree. Some experience it less than others, but everyone experiences it because it’s simply math. You cannot ignore the fact that when you try to do two things at the same time you have to make a transition, and that transition, that switching cost, is costing you. Most people are doing it constantly.

They’re probably, a lot of people are probably doing it right now as their listening to this interview, and they’re missing out on a lot of value that they could gain by just focusing on one thing at a time.

Andrew: All right, I see, and what you’re saying is; hey, Andrew, we could spent 5-10 minutes, maybe even 15 minutes, and convince people of this. Or we could send them over to this exercise where they can see if for themselves, and really see in their own lives what kind of an impact multi- tasking has.

Dave: Exactly, the most jaded mutitaskers in the world, after they take this, it’s like they just got hit across the face with a sack of bricks. The evidence does not lie, and it’s right in front of them, and they just did it to themselves.

Andrew: All right, for anyone who didn’t see that screenshot, for whatever reason, and needs the URL it’s davecrenshaw.com/multitasking-example. On to the big board, let’s take a look at the next big idea that we’re going to be covering here is. You say shut of e-mail, text, phones and any other interruptions. (?) like this dude right here.

Dave: You probably saw him driving on the road. In fact, there’s a great video, if you like watching good things on YouTube. If you search for video guy texting while driving, there’s actually, someone was in one car and they took a shot of someone else in their car driving and texting at the same time. You see these people all the time, but more, I think more damaging to us is that we are those people. I remember I said, my primary goal is to get people to reduce the number of switches that take place in their day.

If we can reduce the number of switches that take place in your day we’re going to increase the amount of available time that you have. In the neighborhood, when I take someone a business (?), or I take them through a two day boot camp. Usually at the end of that day they end up with an extra 20% of disposable time. There’s actually research that bares this out by a company called Base Text Research, out of New York, that found that the average knowledge worker, and entrepreneurs certainly fall into that category, loses 28% of their time due to interruptions and recovery time associated with those interruptions.

I just call it switches and switching cost. I have a great example of that, it’s actually a client that I was working with and he told me that it happened just a week before I worked with him. He was in Buffalo, so he was going to get on the plane to fly to New York. What happened was is that he was really involved in his conversation that he was having, and so he wasn’t really paying attention where he was. He handed his ticket to the person at the gate and then went through. Well, it turned out he got on the wrong plane and ended up in Boston.

Now a lot of people hearing that are going to say; how in the world is that possible in today’s super high security, attention to detail world that we live in right now? Well, here’s what happened, there was a slight problem with the ticket scanner, and the attendant was multi-tasking at the same time. So only was he not paying attention, but she was not paying attention.

He got on the plane, sat on the seat, and ended up in Boston. I mean, that is just amazing to me, and it’s one of the most dramatic examples I’ve heard of how multi-tasking costs you so much. So if you can get rid of these digital distractions it’s going to help you reduce the switches.

Andrew: What about this Dave, I understand that, that’s a danger, but when I think; should I look at my phone while I’m getting on the plane? I think, I’m not going to be the one guy who gets on the wrong plane. It’s not going to happen today. When I get a text message while I’m driving, I’m not the person who’s going to get into an accident. Frankly, those the big points where I multi-task and where the person listening to us is likely to multi- task. I might be; hey I have to keep my IM program going during the day because if someone needs me I have to be around. Or I have to keep my phone available, if someone calls me I have to be around, and of course e-mail has to be available. More and more people are on Twitter and Facebook so I have to be available there. What about those? In those situations we’re not likely to get into an accident. In those situations, we’re not likely to get into an accident. In those situations we’re not likely to have the dramatic bad ending.

Dave: Right.

Andrew: So what’s wrong with doing it at that point?

Dave: Well, here’s the most simple example. Let’s say I’m typing an e-mail on my screen, I’m typing away and the phone rings. I pick up the phone, I say hey how you doing, I answer the question, I say the answer’s 42 thank you very much, I hang up. Now what do I need to do? I need to figure out where was I in that e-mail, what was I thinking about, where was I typing? So that 30 second phone call will actually end up costing me several minutes or more.

In fact, there was a study out of Microsoft with programmers, that found it took them 15 minutes to recover from an interruption back to programming activities. Now the Mac fans would say, well that’s because they’re from Microsoft. But you get the idea. These little tiny quick questions, I call them the dreaded double queue, these little quick questions. Actually cost you huge amounts of time and you’re not aware of it.

This is where that feeling comes from at the end of the day, when you put your feet up on the couch, and you say; man I’ve been working really hard and perhaps your spouse says; well what were you doing today? You kind of think about it and you say; I don’t know but I was working. That’s because all you were doing all day long was switching, paying switching cost. So it’s much better to stage the time that you spend on these things. You can answer e-mail, have a set time to answer e-mail. You can answer your phone, but have a set time to go through the voicemail, and reduce the number of switches that are taking place.

Andrew: I find in my life when I do it, it’s often because what I’m working on I don’t want to finish because it’s tough or because I can’t think of the next step really quickly. So if I’m writing an e-mail and I can’t think of how to say no to somebody, I might say; I better make sure there’s nothing going on, on Twitter. Because if someone’s complaining on Twitter I have to handle it, and if I see some issue on Twitter that I can’t respond to I think; maybe I should check the customer support message boards and see if there is an issue there. It’s me giving myself an out of a touch process, where if I really would have focused on it I would have figured out that it wasn’t so tough after all. I could say no to people.

Dave: You mentioned a great phrase there, when I have difficulty figuring out the next step. I mentioned that my training is based on the best training in the world, that’s the great thing that David Allen teaches in getting things done. Is focusing on the next step, and what I would say is you have to stick with it, just like you said, until you’ve got that figured out and then move on.

Andrew: All right, on to the next big idea which is to get rid of gathering points, reduce gathering points. What do you mean by that?

Dave: Well, what I mean is there are lots of different places, let’s reference Dave Allen again. He talks about all these different, he calls them collecting points, they’re from places where things collect that need to be dealt with, unprocessed stuff.

I dealt with a client once, what we do is we actually measure how many of these gathering points that they actually have. She had 161 different gathering points, different places she had to go. (?) paper, piles stuffed in her drawers, different places where she had to go to get things. Now let’s look at this in the context of multitasking or switch tasking. If I have to switch back and forth to go back and forth to all these different places to get things, I’m incurring switching cost. I use a metaphor, just kind of an example, imagine that you and I, Andrew, are in an apple picking contest. Our job is to pick 100 apples and put them into one basket. All right? Same number, same basket, but you have to go to 20 trees to get your apples and I have to go to five trees to get my apples. Who’s going to win? It’s very simple, right? Because you’re going like this, picking all your stuff and I’m just going back and forth, back and forth to get my stuff and I put it all in one spot.

A lot of people, especially the pig pens, use the excuse of; well I know where everything is. They use that saying I can still be productive. Yes, you know where everything is, but you have to go to so many different places. You have to go to five different e-mail accounts to get things, you have to look through five different drawers. All this time is wasted. So what I do is that I recommend people take the number of gathering points, and the average person has about 30-40 and I recommend that you get it down to about six. Six or less if you can do it.

Andrew: Can you give me an example of what gathering points are? In fact actually I think we have a visual of it that will give us a sense of what some of these are. Let me bring these up.

Dave: Sure. I recommend that the six recommended gathering points are as follows; number one is a physical inbox. One place where everything goes that is paper, or even cords or cables, whatever it is, one place. So you might need a really big inbox.

Andrew: Even cords, I was thinking of an inbox as a place where I got paper mail that’s where it would go. You’re saying even cords, anything that’s not organized.

Dave: Yes, I worked with an interior design company once, their dealing with huge swatches of fabric and pieces of granite tabletops. So they have these massive inboxes because you want to leave plenty of room, you just throw something in if you see it out of place.

Andrew: I see. Anything that is out of place goes right into this bucket.

Dave: Exactly. Number two is the portable inbox, the mobile extension of the inbox. You want to carry it with you wherever you go, you have it with you at all times. It’s just one slot within the briefcase, not the entire briefcase. Number three is a notepad, and that can be either digital or physical, but I would not recommend both. What I prefer to use myself is Evernote, but what I would tell everyone listening you don’t need to go out and get Evernote. If you are in the habit of writing physical notes, use a notepad, but one notepad. Don’t breed notepads like rabbits.

Andrew: You know what, you use Evernote and it’s like many new programs today that allow you to create lots of different notes within the one program and tag them and so on. Do you keep one note, or when you say keep one notepad, Evernote’s the one notepad and you can have lots of different notes within that program?

Dave: Yes. For Evernote I created a notepad called inbox, and when you create the notepad it asks you do you want to make this the default notepad, and I click yes. So I just create new notes and they go into inbox and I have a set time each week that I go through that and I bring it to zero.

Andrew: I see, OK. So if you scan something in it automatically goes into the default notepad. If you type something up in the middle of a conversation it goes into that default notepad. You just want one bucket for all of these notes to go into and later on you sort them.

Dave: Exactly.

Andrew: All right, let’s go on and take a look at the next one. The next one is.

Dave: Email, one email inbox.

Andrew: One email inbox.

Dave: Not multiple ones, you can have multiple email accounts, that’s not the issue. Personally my company uses Google Apps, so we use the Gmail inbox and I’ve got probably seven different email accounts, but they all go into that one email inbox. So that again saves me time I don’t have to jump back and forth log into Hotmail and Gmail, and all these different things. Just one spot. Then voicemail, one voicemail. Not a home voicemail, a cell phone voicemail and an office voicemail, one. Make sure all of your messages go in that one spot, and incidentally this is one gathering point I no longer have. I use a service called YouMail, what it does is it takes all of those messages and sends them to my email inbox. I can still access them through my phone, but the point is I don’t have to. I don’t have to go to that spot to access them.

The last, I just call it the wild card, and the wildcard is you choose. Some people feel that they need to use text messaging as a gathering point, or some people have a dedicated personal assistant. They tell the assistant; hey remind me to do this, by the way when you tell someone hey remind me to do this, you’re trying to use them as a gathering point. So you can choose whatever it is. Maybe you need two inboxes, you need one for home and one for personal, but that’s up to you.

The idea is to get down from that 30-40, which most people have, get it down to six or less. That will dramatically reduce the number of switches that are taking place in your day.

Andrew: I see. When you talk to someone who is unproductive you will often find that they have multiple places that they go to check email, they will have that message within Facebook, that inbox there, and they’ll have the inbox in e-mail and maybe another random site. It’s just too many places and that’s why they’re not productive.

Dave: Yes. Just yesterday I just worked with somebody who has 80.

Andrew: Eighty, I can’t even imagine 80. What’s the most outrageous one that they have?

Dave: One hundred sixty-one, I think I mentioned that at the beginning. 161 is still the winner.

Andrew: I mean, what’s the most out of all of that? I can’t even imagine that there would be 161 possible places to store things. What’s the most unique place that people store things?

Dave: I think, if I were to pick the top two worst or, I wouldn’t say unusual, but they really become problems is the car. Now remember I said that I’m ADHD and anyone who knows ADHD is that it’s genetic. Right? Well my dad uses the entire car as one gathering point. Now that might sound good in theory, but what we’re talking about is it’s all stuffed in the glove box and underneath the seats, and in the trunk. I mean it’s just filled to the top. You can’t even see out the window. That’s his tendency to do that.

Andrew: I see.

Dave: I would have to say, honestly, when I see people do that, that’s usually the worst. I would say number two is people who are constantly stuffing things in their pockets. When you do that you’re making every single pocket a separate gathering point.

Andrew: You know what, I identify with that now. You’re right, and I don’t do this on a regular basis, but I’ll occasionally find myself making something and extra gathering point for receipts. Then if we happen to be taking notes on paper, I’ll make another place of gathering, and I do this on business trips all the time. Got a receipt I don’t have time to do anything with it, this inside jacket is going to be my place to store receipts on this trip. When people who are handing you their business cards, this pocket over here is for business cards that I care about, this pocket in the back is for business cards that I don’t really need. Now I’ve created three gathering places within a day of being at this business trip.

Dave: You’ve got it. That brings up another principle, it’s not on the bullet point list, but I think it’s important to understand. People will say; well Dave you must be really disciplined to do this, and in fact I think I’m one of the most undisciplined people in the world. What I teach is that conditioning matters more than discipline. If you think about how to become a great athlete or musician, you repeat the same activity over and over until it becomes second nature. So what you were just describing there, Andrew, is a matter of conditioning. If I could help you through working with you to put it in one spot through repetition, then it becomes automatic to you. Then you don’t have to think about it anymore when you go to those meetings.

Andrew: All right. That makes sense. On to the big board again. Let’s look at the next big idea, which is to huddle at a consistent regular, scheduled time.

Dave: Right. So one of the most common problems in workplaces, and if you have employees, is the fact that you’re getting these little quick questions. The dreaded double queue. Sorry I’ve got just a quick question. As we establish that’s chewing up a lot of your time so what you want to do instead, first I will give you an example. I was working with the vice president of a major financial company, and one of the things that we do when we set up the boot camp is we say; hey you’re not to be interrupted during that time. You’re going to get work done, but we can’t have people coming in and interrupting you. So at his office he had this little window by the door so you could see people. Every little bit, and let’s see if I can do this on camera, every couple of minutes I’d see this out of the window. Right? This would happen over and over. The vulture swirling around waiting to swoop in.

Andrew: Just waiting for him to be done so that.

Dave: Exactly, so they could ask the question. We’ve all experienced that right, at least a lot of people experience that. So I said hey; Mr. Vice President I can see this person needs your attention let’s bring her in and see what she has. She comes in, what does she say? Sorry I’ve got just a quick question. Right? It really was something that could have waited. So the question is why, when she was told that she was not to interrupt him during this time, why did she still do this?

This comes down to a principle that I call the culture of now versus the culture of when. The culture of now is that if you have a question you need it answered now, if the phone rings I answer it now, if an e-mail comes in I answer it now. The culture of when says; no we’re going to answer all of these questions, we’re going to answer every single e-mail, we’re going to deal with every single piece of paper, this is when we’re going to do it.

So this principle that you have on the board of establishing a huddle, I call it the one to one huddle, is saying; let’s set up a time, a when you and I are going to meet. Andrew, let’s say you and I worked together, we have a set time every Thursday at 3 o’clock for thirty minutes, and we’re going to bring all of our quick questions to that meeting, and I’m not going to allow anything else to distract me, and we’re just going to share these quick questions back and forth.

One manufacturing company that I work with implemented this and this one thing, just the one to one huddle, increased productivity in the company overall by 20%.

Andrew: You know what? I can totally see how we can use this here within Mixergy. In fact, I was looking at the board and I saw that, this is a little redundant why did Jeremy, our producer write consistent, regular? Then I realized this is the one thing that makes my work with Jeremy go so well, the producer. He has this once a week meeting that is pretty much sacrosanct. We sit and we talk about all the issues that he’s had talking to guests, pre-interviewing guests, how can we improve them and it avoids a lot of back and forth.

Now when I think of my Inbox and all the back and forths that we have in there with people who are trying to figure out Should I post, should we post that, we should do just one once a week meeting for half an hour where we handle all the questions at that point, there’s rarely a crisis that can’t wait until that point. And as you say, if we condition ourselves and condition the company internally to wait until that meeting, I think we can reduce the back and forth that distracts me. The “Hey, Andrew. I couldn’t find you on email you so I’m pinging you on Skye. You didn’t answer my Skype so I’m texting you to say this potential guest PR person has a question.” No, let’s handle it once a week. It can wait.

Dave: You got it. Most of the fires that people are getting are fires because you don’t have this meeting. If you established it, the fires would go away.

Andrew: You know what? We always do images here. We’ve got an image for this, there is Google Calendar.

What do you think of this, by the way? The need for constantly have images for each one of these tactics. Does it feel a little bit overkill when I suddenly say when you make that point and I bring up Google calendar?

Dave: Hey man, it’s your style. I’m not going to crimp your style.

Andrew: Has a higher perceived value. Let people know that it’s just not word, we give them images and we show them where we’re going with this big board here [??]to.

Next big idea. This is the one that captured my attention earlier, which is keep a clear mind so you can sleep. Eliminate internal distractions by putting unresolved stuff into one of the six gathering points that we talked about earlier.

Dave: Yes. Now, you got a great image for that. Let’s bring that one up because I can tell story about that.

This actually came from my nephew who was in Toronto a couple of years back, they had this sanitation workers strike. And so you see this picture of all, they weren’t gathering the trash. People were just stuffing more and more trash in. This is a perfect example of what most of the people are listening to, most of your minds look like.

Now I ‘m not saying you have a dirty mind. What I’m saying is you have all of these tasks and to-do’s in your head but here, I want you to understand the real cost is with this and goes back to the myth of multitasking. When you have these thoughts in your mind, you’re causing yourself to switch task. So you’re incurring that loss of time, you’re incurring an increase on mistakes, and you’re increasing stress levels because you are switch tasking on yourself throughout the day and throughout the night.

And so the real solution to this is to take all of these ideas, all these tasks and to-do’s and put them into an approved gathering point, one of those six places we talked about before. It doesn’t matter which one you put it into. It really doesn’t. Whatever is most convenient, just chose one of those six and put it in. Now I will say, you wan to be careful to consider the context. For instance, if I want to leave myself a voice mail message, right now something came to mind. I want to say “Andrew, pause the interview a message so I can leave myself a voice mail message” or one time when I was asleep or it was at night and I had an idea come to my head and I recorded myself a message, next morning I listened to the message and it was [inaudible]. I don’t know what that idea was, it’s gone forever. So maybe writing down on that context would have been a little better. But just get them out of my head. And then have a time to process them later.

Andrew: so I understand the need to get it out of your head because when it’s in your head it feels bigger than it actually is and it’s constantly distracting and it’s no way to make sure that you actually do everything that you need to.

One of the problems though with putting things out of your head onto a list or onto one of the gathering spots that we talked about earlier is that list, that to-do list becomes so big that it becomes overwhelming on its own. Those gathering spots become so big that they become another big giant obligation that just feels like it’s hanging over your head and hanging over everything that you do.

So how do you eliminate that problem? And by the way, the benefit of that is that it gets really exciting. Someone is going to finish watching us right now, they’re going to start putting things into the right buckets. They’re going to start making to-do lists, everything will look so great, I’ll get all the compliments, you’ll get all the compliments and appreciation for having done this. But a month in the future those things will be overwhelming. What do we do then?

Dave: Right. So what you want to do is have a consistent time and schedule, now we’re going back to that schedule, to clean these things out. I recommend that the average person spends about five hours a week. It could be a little bit more, a little bit less, depending on how many hours a week you’re working. You have a set time and a set place each week to go through each of these gathering points, and clear them out and bring them to zero.

In my book “Invaluable”, I actually give you the processing system that I use. It’s very, very simple. I can tell it to you right now; it’s what, when, where. What, when, where, that’s all you need to know. What’s the next step, when are we going to do it, and where’s it’s home, and if you can answer those three questions about every single item that comes through, you’re processing, you’re taking care of them. Doesn’t have to be more complex than that. We don’t need some dramatic flow chart with defer and all that kind of stuff. What, when, where, that’s all you need

Andrew: You mentioned earlier that you will go through your electronic list, your electronic gathering place, Evernote, and organize it once a week. When do you do that?

Dave: My processing time is Monday and Friday. So I have a big chunk of time that I spend on Monday and a big chunk of time that I spend on Friday. I find that I work best in large chunks of time. One of the keys in success and productivity is understanding what works best for you. Productivity is more about rhythm than perpetual motion. So you need to figure out what rhythm is best for you, and this, like I said I draw from lots of different sources. Ed Howell, who is an expert on ADHD, talks about this. Of understanding your flow and your best time of the day to do these things. So find your best time of the day, and one of the best times to process is when you’re least likely to be interrupted.

Processing time in my opinion is absolutely sacred. I talked about your most valuable activities, it is equal to the highest valued activity that you could be doing. So if you’re doing something, you’re worth $2,000 dollars per hour, processing value is equal to that because it leverages your time to be able to stay in those $2,000 per hour activities.

Andrew: How long before, I have to get to the next item on the big board, but I’ve got one other question. How long before we start to see results? We have brought people into this session who are saying to themselves; I can’t get enough done and now Andrew is making me listen to, roughly, an hour long program. All right, I’ll find the time, I made the time. Now Dave Crenshaw is telling me that I need to find time to process, how am I going to find that time? At what point do they start to see the payoff for all this invested time?

Dave: Ok, there are two different questions here. I love this question. The first thing is it’s an illusion that it’s going to take you more time to process. Here’s why it’s an illusion, because remember that statistic that I said before about basics. 28% of your time is lost to switches and switching cost well, a big part of that is the fact that you’re making these processing decisions. You’re already doing that, remember processing is just what, when, where. You’re making what, when, where decisions throughout your day. The only difference is, is what I’m telling you to do is stop making those decisions throughout the day and make them at a set time.

So most of the people listening to this are already spending in the neighborhood of 10-15-20 hours a week processing. They don’t think they’re doing it because they are doing it haphazardly all over the place. So when you do 5 hours a week it’s actually less time, it’s a paradox.

Andrew: We may not be aware of it at first, and I can see myself thinking; well suddenly there’s this big chunk of my day that’s spent doing this work that Dave suggested. But, the other part is invisible, it’s there, it’s painful, it’s distracting, it’s causing all kinds of problems, but just because it’s invisible doesn’t mean that it’s not impacting me. Just because I’m less aware of it. Sorry you were going to saw something else.

Dave: That’s fine. The other part of the question is; how long? Really it depends on how you go about doing it. This is probably not going to be the politically correct answer, but it’s a true answer. When I work with someone, when I take someone through my boot camp usually it takes two weeks, two weeks or less. The reason is, you have accountability. I’m a big believer in accountability, I have coaches for a variety of areas of my life. Because when you have someone outside of you, holding you accountable, pushing you through the activities it helps you perform better.

So if you do it with that kind of accountability you’re going to get results really fast. If you try to do it by yourself, you might succeed. I would give you a 50/50 chance of success, and if you succeed it’s probably going to take you, in the neighborhood, of several months, 2-3 months to do it. So you can succeed with it, I’m not going to say you can’t.

Andrew: If you can succeed without accountability, you’re just less likely to do it, and it will take longer to succeed with accountability. If we want to get accountability, what’s an easy way for us to do it?

Dave: Well, the easiest way, and I am giving this option at the end, is to take the chaos assessment on my site. What that will do is it will tell you the path that you can take to get accountability. There’s certain things that aren’t going to, it’s not cost effective for everyone listening to this to work with me, and it’s not going to be my time isn’t available for that. For some people it’s worth it. What that would do is tell them how they can get accountability in a way that is custom fit for their situation where they’re at right now.

Andrew: Ok. I’ve got that as a last item that we’re going to talk about today, and we’re going to show people where they can go to take this assessment. I want to make sure that we’re giving people a full enough answer to the accountability issue. Are you saying if they can’t work with you that they can work with someone else in their office, or another entrepreneur, or a family member who’s willing to help them be accountable?

Dave: Yes. You have three options; you have friends, mentors, and coaches. Friends are great because they are easy to access and they are free. The downside is that friends have their own life going on, and because they are your friends they are not going to push you as much as they should. Mentors are great because they have been there and done that, but again they have their own life and schedule. Sometimes they’re a little bit harder to pin down. I mean getting Andrew to mentor me, I’m going to really have to smooze you quite a bit, convince you that it’s worth your time.

Andrew: Well, you’re Dave Crenshaw you can get me to do just about anything, but I understand what you’re saying getting someone who doesn’t know me to give that time, it’s rough. So you’re suggesting a coach, someone who’s prepared to do this, whose job it is to do this, is going to be much more consistent.

Dave: A coach’s success is depended upon your success. That means they have not other interests in mind except for you, and it’s much easier to get a regular set time to work with them. So, yes. Can I build a great body on my own? Yes I can, but I’m going to do a whole lot better if I have a personal trainer kicking me in the rear in a friendly nice way.

Andrew: But it is possible to do with friends, it’s possible to do with mentors if you’ve got them. Just make sure that you work out a plan to hold, to get them to hold you accountable, and maybe if it’s friends to hold each other accountable.

Dave: Yes, and in the assessment we’ll show you how to get a system that you can use with a friend or mentor on your own.

Andrew: Perfect, I want to make sure that we leave people with that option. Alright, on to the big board, the next big idea is to budget your time. Budget your time by pulling out your calendar to schedule everything or you’re going to repay with interest.

Dave: Exactly, and I compare this to money, and I will try to be brief about this. If you go into debt with money what’s the cost? The cost is interest. Right? I don’t just repay it, I repay it plus the interest rate. So the trick question is can you go into debt with time? Can I borrow time? The answer is yes. I borrow though from one thing to pay something else. I borrow from sleep to pay work. I borrow from my friends to pay my family. If I, and you always have to repay it with interest. If I borrow a date with my wife, Andrew, you know I’m going to have to repay that with interest over a long period of time. Right?

Andrew: Yes.

Dave: So, the key is to stay within budget, to live within our means.

Andrew: I was just patting down my head, I realized that I scratched my head and it made my hair (?).

Dave: You were giving me football signals man. I’m like pass, run.

Andrew: (?) a CEO mom who you were working with?

Dave: Yes.

Andrew: (?) been doing this?

Dave: So what we did was we sat down and looked at how much time she was spending on all of her different activities. There are only 168 hours in a week, right, well she had accounted for 190 hours of activity.

Andrew: What does that mean that she accounted for 190 hours?

Dave: It means that based upon her estimates, the amount of time she was spending on all the different things that she was doing, she thought she was spending 190 hours a week. Well, what it turned out was she was switch tasking to account for that. Every evening she thought she was spending time with her family what she was really doing, she was spending time in the presence of her family doing stock research.

Andrew: I see.

Dave: She was borrowing from family to pay work.

Andrew: I see.

Dave: So, there was a huge cost to her children and she realized it. I can’t tell you, Andrew, how many stories I hear of entrepreneur after entrepreneur who has bought into, what I call the con. The con is that if I sacrifice my family, if I sacrifice my time, in the end I’m going to get this payoff. When in fact what happens is that you just sacrifice yourself and get nothing.

The good news is, the CEO, once she realized this, she began to establish a budget. She went home that night and said to her children; I’m here for you I want to focus on you. What was her children’s reaction, what, who are you, who is this person? They were shocked at first, but then they believe her and more important she delivered on the promise.

If we live our life in budget we’ll not spend so much budget. Right now a lot of people are just playing catch up all the time, with everything that they’re borrowing from and just repaying interest.

Andrew: The visual that I had for this, I was supposed to have two visuals for it, not suppose to but Jeremy suggested two. So of course the cover of The Myth of Multitasking, your book, the second things is he was thinking we might want to show a page in the book, and I wasn’t sure exactly how to do that right. So for anyone who has the book, what page, or what section do you think they should look at for this topic?

Dave: There’s a series of worksheets at the end of that, and it’s called the time budgeter worksheet. You can find that in there and the “Myth of Multitasking” is a story. So in the story you’ll see the coach take the CEO through that experience. The experience that I told you is actually part of the mash up of the story that’s in “Myth of Multitasking”. Then you can actually go through the same exercise that I took the CEO through.

Andrew: By the way, I used to do that once. I remember being out on a date with someone, I have this memory in my mind, Soho, New York I remember the exact restaurant. I remember how I pulled out my phone and was checking e- mails and talking to someone while she was sitting there. I didn’t understand why she was frustrated, not about that night, but I didn’t understand the frustration because she said; we’re not spending enough time together. I kept thinking, yes we are, what is wrong with you?

Dave: Right. We’ll touch on that a little bit more. You can see it in other examples as well. I once was racing because I forgot something and I was trying to borrow from the amount of travel time that it really should take. In order to get from this meeting that I was attending back, because I forgot this important tool. Well, because I was racing I got a speeding ticket. Right? So I tried to save five minutes of time, I got the speeding ticket, so I had to go to traffic school, it took me three hours.

So borrowing from that, borrowing five minutes, it cost me three hours. No one in their right mind would pay that kind of interest rate with money. But we pay that with time all the time.

Andrew: On to the big board again. The next big idea is to establish expectations. In fact, let me read this one thing that Jeremy wrote down here in his notes from your pre-interview conversation. Your voicemail should say exactly when you’ll get back to them not fall back on I’ll get back to you as soon as possible, and that’s just one example of how you’re saying; establish expectations for people let them know what they can count on as a response.

Dave: Right. This is back to the culture of now the culture of when. If you call the average person’s voicemail it will say; I’ll get back to you as soon as possible. When is that? In their mind, that’s five minutes. So if you don’t get back to them in five minutes, what do they do? They call you again, or they text you, or they send you an e-mail; did you get my message? So instead if we establish the expectation we move it to the culture of when. In my case my voicemail message says; I return my calls at noon and 4 p.m. Mountain Time and if you call me after 4:30 Mountain time I’ll return your call the next morning. Now, that doesn’t have to be your schedule but you want to establish some kind of expectation that you know you’re going to meet or exceed. Then you’ll see that the number of interruptions you’re getting from all these people, who seem to be bothering you, they’ll start to disappear.

Andrew: What about this? One of the reasons why people are afraid to do that is that if for some reason one day they can’t answer their phone (?). They feel like they’ve committed themselves to letting people down, they’ve let people down that day. They keep imagining that by setting those kinds of expectations, they are going to one day set themselves up for failure. It’s one thing to say, hey I’ll call you back as soon as possible and not return for a week. When you set a clear expectation and don’t return and then don’t do it again, you’ve let people down.

Dave: Right. Well, I think in both cases you’re in trouble, right? So the key is to set expectations that you know you can meet. So, if you’re at the beginning of this and you feel like you’re always behind, then set an expectation that’s going to take you two business days, to return their call. Now at least, you’ve taken control of the conversation and you’ve moved it to the culture of when. If they don’t like two business days, then they’ll reach out to you, they’ll try to get you some other way. But, at least they know what to expect, rather than just guessing, which is going to cause them to switch task a lot too, by the way.

Andrew: Got this. What is this and who put this where?

Dave: This is actually from my son, Stratton [SP], so funny, the things that kids pick up from you, from osmosis. I saw that outside of his door one day when he left for school. So, he had heard dad talking about this and he established an expectation for us so that we knew when he was going to get back to his room from school. I just think it’s a great picture to illustrate.

Andrew: Do you train your son and your family in these ideas too?

Dave: Absolutely. I wouldn’t say I’m some crazy, militant guy about it. But, absolutely, because I know that he’s got the same genetic stock as me. So, if he can start learning these things early . . . I mean he’s already got the same pig pen tendencies, with the messy desk and everything. We talk to him a lot about the myth of multitasking and in his home, excuse me, in his room, he’s got probably about 30 different homes. Homes are those places where things should be put, so you know where they go. We do try to teach him about it.

Andrew: Thanks for including that personal shot in here. Next big point is, stop showing people that they’re unimportant. That’s what I was talking about a moment ago. Essentially this, though we weren’t living together.

Dave: Yeah. When I speak, ‘cuz I speak at a lot of corporate events and associations and large entrepreneur groups, one of the things that we’ll do is another little exercise. I’ll just explain it to you, for 30 seconds you turn to a partner and you tell them about your favorite hobby and then you switch roles. The other person tells you about a favorite hobby, but this time you multitask on that person. You play with their phone, you shuffle your papers, you give them partial attention and then at the end of that I ask the audience in one word, how did that make them feel? When someone was multitasking on you, how did that make you feel? The one word I hear every time is unimportant. Now imagine, you start your day, you turn to a loved one, you say, “Hi, you’re unimportant, what are you going to do today?” Or, you pick up the phone at work and you say, “Thanks for calling XYZ Company, your unimportant, how can I help you?” Now, we would never do that, but we do that.

When we multitask on people, that’s exactly what we’re communicating to them, that they’re unimportant. I talked about the three costs of multitasking, but there’s really a forth effect, which is it damages relationships. It damages them in very severe ways, if we continue to do this over a long period of time. Instead, if we could be someone who focuses on individuals and gives them our full attention, we build relationships faster and stronger then we ever did before.

Andrew: So painful to think about. The times that I didn’t do that. In the moment you don’t recognize that there’s a problem, it takes some time. This isn’t an internal pain from this one relationship, but I just keep thinking about times when I did do it. When I got really excited about email, when I made the mistake that this gentleman right here is making.

Dave: Yeah. Can I tell a brief story about this to wrap it up?

Andrew: Absolutely.

Dave: I’m a big football fan, in particular NFL, so obviously the Super Bowl would be a big deal. We had family and friends over, this happened a few years ago. This was the first Giants/Patriots game for the Super Bowl and we had friends over and I’m watching the game and I’m into it and I look down and see my then two year old son look up at me. He’s got a book about Eskimos, he says, “Daddy, read story.” in the middle of the Super Bowl, right? So, what do I do, what can I do in this situation? Three options went through my head immediately. Number one, is to tell him to go away, I’m watching the Super Bowl, right? Which I suppose I could have done. Number two was multitask, right? I put him on my lap, I read the story to him and then touchdown, I’m sorry, where were we? There are four effects, right? Things take longer, I’d make more mistakes, I would increase both of our stress levels and I’d damage the relationship. In that case and by the way for you smart alecs, a DVR was not an option, because we had friends there. I’m not going to pause the video why I read the book to my son. The third option, was, to just read him the story. Do you know how long it took me to read that story? It took me three minutes. Three minutes, to read this book to him. I don’t know what I missed during that time. Whether it was a sac, a fumble, or a funny beer commercial, but he knew, and I knew, that we were together. That I was focused on him. You know what he said at the end of the story, “Thank you Daddy,” and went off to do what two year olds do.

Everybody listening to this, we have these opportunities every single day. You’re going to have these within an hour of ending this call. If you can be the person who focuses on others, and gives them your full attention and says with your eyes, your ears, and your intent, I have nothing better to do than listen to you right now. You, differentiate yourself, in a world right now, that is addicted to multitasking.

Andrew: That is really powerful by the way. You’re right, because I do want to find places to differentiate myself. I do want to find ways to stand out and, that’s an easy thing to do.

Dave: Yes

Andrew: All right, that’s an easy way to do it with someone. I don’t have to remember every bit of their history. I don’t have to have to do a lot of work. I just focus on what they are saying.

Dave: Yes, just be there. Just be there with them.

Andrew: All right, here it goes. The final thing we talked about this earlier. Let me show the website.

Dave: We will just get right to it.

Andrew: This is where the assessment is, right?

Dave: Yes.

Andrew: The URL is? I thought I had it on here.

Dave: Harnesschaos.com

Andrew: Harnesschaos.com, and, of course, we will link to it. Can you tell us a little more about this?

Dave: Yes, this is a really cool thing we put together this year. We’ve gotten great results form it. What it is, is a brief assessment. You can watch a little video that will explain about it on the site. You answer a series of questions about your personal productivity and your business productivity. Then we will get your answers. Actually, a live person goes through your answers and sends you a custom action plan, based upon the actions you put down. This is completely free. What you will get with the action plan is, two columns on one side that tells you want you can do, it doesn’t cost you a dime. The other side, will tell you what you can do, but will be a bit of an investment, but it’s a fast track. It will get your results faster and more reliable. I would encourage everyone ti take that assessment. That will let you know what resources are available to help you to get more conditioned to be more productive. Regardless if you are a Zen master trying to help other people, a lost soul trying to get back on track, or your inherently a pig pen.

Andrew: I was surprised when you told me before we started, you said that was an actual human being who goes through all those responses. I thought you had the whole thing automated. I figured you probably wouldn’t do it.

Dave: No, I think that again, as differentiator right now, where we live in an automated world. It’s not that hard for us to do it. It just insures that the results you get are accurate and fit for you.

Andrew: All right, that’s a great way to leave it and a great follow up on what we’ve all been watching here. I always like to have one step people can take at the end of a program and that’s a great one.

Dave: Yes.

Andrew: Thank you so much, Dave, for doing this.

Dave: Thank you, Andrew. It has been a lot of fun.

Andrew: Thank you all for being a part of it.

Master Class:
How to get more links to your site
(Especially if you don’t buy into SEO)
Taught by Zeke Camusio of Outsourcing Company

Report issues here

Master Class:
Link Building


About the course leader

The course is led by Zeke Camusio. He is the author of “The Internet Marketing Bible” and the founder of the Outsourcing Company, a digital marketing agency.

Master Class Toolbox

Course Cheat Sheet

Mixergy Link Building Course PDF

ProProfs Quiz Maker

Facebook Recommendation Tool

Open Site Explorer

Topsy

Followerwonk

BuzzStream

CapsuleCRM

Link Checker

Archive.org

Transcript

Download the transcript here

Andrew: This course is about how to get back links to your site so that it can rise higher in search results and get you more traffic. The course is led by Zeke Camusio. He is the author of “The Internet Marketing Bible” and the founder of the Outsourcing Company, a digital marketing agency. Zeke, there you are. Thanks for doing this.

Zeke: Yes. You’re very welcome.

Andrew: So unlike, I mean, everybody who comes and does a course here puts in a lot of work into this but you went above and beyond. Here’s what you did. You put together this whole presentation, specifically for this course and this audience based on the questions that people asked before we started and so we’re going to use your notes here. I’m going to go through this for the first time with you so I can ask the kinds of questions that the audience asked us and the kinds that they’ll be thinking of as they’re listening to this. All right. Let’s take a look. First of all, this is what we’re going to be covering. Do you want to give us a quick overview? What are some of the things that we should be especially aware of that are coming up?

Zeke: Yes, definitely. So I want to start talking about why link building is important. Because if you don’t buy into why you should do this, you’re never going to do it. The next thing I’ll be talking about is basically changing the way people look at link building. The old way got a lot of websites in trouble with Google. A lot of websites got penalized so I’m here to present a different approach, a different way to look at link building.

Andrew: And if we do this right, do you have an example of one of your clients that has done this? What were you able to do for them?

Zeke: Yes. Just for example one of our clients that started working on their SEO a few months ago and they had 30,000 visitors a month and now they have 180,000. So they multiplied their traffic by 6 in 5 months.

Andrew: Doing the kinds of things that you’re going to be showing us.

Zeke: Yes. I mean, that’s all we’ve been doing. Just creating really good content and getting the right kinds of links which I’ll show you how to do in the course.

Andrew: OK. So back here to the notes, you’re going to show us why link building is important. You’re going to talk to us about a different way to look at link building.

Zeke: And then I’m going to go over a three step process for doing content outreach, creating great content and reaching out to influencers. So the first step is to create the asset that is going to get the links and I’ll show you some really good examples of great assets that got tons of links. And I’ll also show you how you can spy on your competitors to see what’s working for them. So that’s the first step.

The second step is how to find the influencers in your industry. Whether it’s bloggers, journalists or people with large lists, how to find these people.

And then the third step is how to reach out to these people the right way. Because these people are really busy, they have to get hundreds of emails every day. So I’ll show you some real examples, some actual templates we’ve used to get their attention and to get them to either tweet our stuff or link to it or put it on their website, basically spread the word about the content you can create.

And finally I’ll go over for really, really effective link building tactics that we’ve used for this client I was telling you about and all our other clients as well.

Andrew: All right. And I’m actually flipping through some of the slides here that are coming up. You actually do have original templates and you’re going to be giving them to the audience as you said but I’m looking at the templates. These are the actual templates you guys send out and there’s actual phone numbers there. Is it OK if I show it to the audience like this?

Zeke: Yes, that’s fine.

Andrew: All right. So the first step is to talk a little bit about the significance of what’s coming up. Why is link building so important?

Zeke: Yes. So can you move on to the next slide?

Andrew: Let’s do it.

Zeke: OK. So when it comes to SEO there are two different areas that you need to work on. You have on-page SEO and on-page is everything within your website. It could be your content, your tax, page titles, metadescriptions, meta-keywords, everything that is in your website. And then you have the off-page factor which is how many times your content gets re-tweeted or shared on Facebook or other social media sites. How many other websites are linking to your site? Can you put the slide on the screen for a second, please?

Andrew: Yeah. Let’s take a look at it again.

Zeke: So, as we can see, I highlighted four different factors and this comes straight from SEOmoz, and all SEO experts agree that SEOmoz is the number one SEO site in the world. And SEOmoz, every two years, survey the top 200 SEO experts in the world and they ask them: what are the top ranking factors? What are the things you need to do to rank at the top of Google? And all these experts agree that the off-page factors, links and social signals, like re-tweets and Facebook shares, account for roughly 55% of the ranking algorithm. Meaning that, if you don’t have off-page factors in place, you’re not going to rank for anything because what happens is anyone can go to their website and put keywords in their content, page title, (?). But at the end of the day, it’s a zero-sum gain because anybody can do that. What really moves the needle is to do all the off-page SEO, all the link building that I’ll be showing you today in this course.

Andrew: OK. All right. And you say you want us to look at a different way of link building? And that’s because…can I show this next email?

Zeke: Yeah.

Andrew: What is this?

Zeke: So, in the past two months, over 2.5 million people got this notice from Google and it basically says that your links are not natural. They don’t look natural, meaning that you tried to manipulate Google somehow. And the way a lot of people have been doing SEO for the last couple of years is they find a loophole and they exploit it, then Google figures out what these people are doing. So you rank really well for a couple months and then you get penalized. And then you try to trick Google some other way and they penalize you. And that’s not the right way to play the game because, let’s face it, Google has the best engineers in the world. They’ll figure out what you’re doing and they’re going to penalize you or move you down in the rankings. So the only way to create sustainable growth is to do what Google wants, which is to create great content and get a lot of high quality links.

So, examples of bad links would be, for example, you can go to a blog and just post a spam comment there, or you can go to a forum and post that there or go to an article site and submit an article there. The thing about these links, I will call these links you can (?). So anyone can go to these websites and (?) these links. Now the approach I’d like to suggest is earning links. Earning links is completely different. You earn links because you have the best content in your industry. I’ll show you some examples of how you can create the best content possible so you can attract a lot of links and you don’t have to spam the entire web to get links pointing to your site. Not only is this more effective, but it’s also a really good way to future improve your SEO because this is going to work forever. Google wants other people to talk about things they really like, but they don’t like it when people go to a bunch of different sites and drop links that look like spam.

Andrew: Makes sense. By the way, anything that we’re showing here up on the screen, if you’re watching us right now, you’re going to have a copy of this and you can scroll through it in high definition on your computer screen. If you can’t see it in the video box that you happen to be using to watch us now, you’re going to have the original. All right. So what’s the first step?

Zeke: OK. Let’s move onto the next slide.

Andrew: Yep.

Zeke: One more.

Andrew: OK. Let’s look at some examples of people who are doing this right.

Zeke: Yeah. OK. So the first example here is infographics and infographics are really, really hot now. They work really well. And the infographic is basically a way to represent data for visually. So you can use charts, you can use a lot of different types. If you Google, example, “infographics” and then you click on images, you’re going to see a lot of examples of infographics. Or if you go to a website like visual.ly, V-I-S-U-A-L dot L- Y, you’re going to see a lot of examples of the info graphics. And these are really, really, hot right now because everybody is blogging, but very few people are creating info graphics and info graphics are much easier to consume than blog posts.

Andrew: Where do you recommend that we get are info graphics created?

Zeke: Well, I mean, pretty much any graphics designer should be able to do one for you.

Andrew: Okay. Is there someone that you use?

Zeke: Yeah, we have our own designers. But, yeah… there are websites. If you don’t know any designers there are websites like Elance or Odesk. And just do a search for infographics and you will see people that specialize in that.

Andrew: Okay.

Zeke: Okay, another really great linkable asset is an ebook. And if you do an ebook; you know, just invest a little money in really good design and that goes both for the cover and for the inner pages. Because I see so many books out there, but you have to really furnish it yourself. And you are going to find a recurring theme in this presentation, which is your content has to be phenomenal. It can’t be just good; because nobody’s going to link to good content. And I’ll be ashamed of reaching out to the top employer in my industry with just a basic blog post. It has to be something really, really, amazing.

Andrew: All right, so ebooks… Again then, how do we create these ebooks?

Zeke: Well, if you’re a good writer, you can write them yourself. Otherwise; again, you can use Elance or Odesk to find a ghost writer. And once you have them written, just send them to a designer to have them designed, the inner pages, but especially the cover.

Andrew: Okay. All right, are you going to be talking about, later on, what we do with the ebooks once we have them to generate links?

Zeke: Yes.

Andrew: Okay, all right, I’ll be a little bit patient here as you go on with the next tactic then.

Zeke: So, basically, what I’m doing now is going over the piece of content you have to create to attract the links. Okay, so far we talked about infographics; we talked about ebooks. You can also do contests or give aways. The only thing I would say about this is, for example, last week a company was giving away a free mouse pad. And that’s like two bucks. It has no value. In this case, this guy is giving away an Ipad; so that’s really what makes a contest attractive.

Andrew: All right, here’s another one that I’m familiar with. And by the way, you’ve got such a bad screen shot of me. What’s going on with my eyes, here?

Zeke: I don’t know. We can replace that with one where you look better.

Andrew: Maybe, in fact, you can replace it with a photo of somebody else?

Zeke: Sure.

Andrew: It’s so awkward to see myself in video like this or in a photo like that. Alright, let’s go over… I’ve got to accept it. So, interviews, of course.

Zeke: Yeah, interviews. Yeah, definitely. You know this first hand.

Andrew: I’m going to put the camera on you. I feel better it being on you instead of on this.

Zeke: Okay, let’s move on.

Andrew: Never mind.

Zeke: So, interviews of course. And, they’re really easy to create. I tell people how to create them all the time. In fact, I know if you go to interviewyourheroes.com, I created a free book answering all the questions that people ask me about how I do my interviews. And there’s an example of a create one; that one just keeps on sending me traffic. The one with Jermain Griggs. Cool. All right, here’s another one, industry research.

Zeke: Yeah, so for example, at the beginning of the presentation I showed the screenshot of SEOmoz and how every two years they publish the search engine ranking factors.

Andrew: Yep.

Zeke: And that’s a really good example of a piece of content that gets a lot of links, a lot of shares. So being the go to person in your industry where you survey a lot of companies and you basically publish the status of your industry, at any given point; that’s extremely useful and something that will get you a lot of links.

Andrew: Okay, viral videos?

Zeke: Yeah, so… …Viral videos and… The thing about videos is pretty much anybody is doing videos these days. Right, so you really have to furnish it yourself. You have to find your own style. For example, Ryan Fishky[sp] from SEOmoz. He does White Board Fridays. I know this guy that does really cool videos with magnets; basically he uses his hands and he has different pages of magazines. It really has to come from what you want your style is, I can’t really tell you that. But I think its worth to maybe spend a day brainstorming some ideas. Some ways you can be unique. Because just copying everyone else’s idea just won’t work.

Andrew: OK. Tools, here’s a long calculator.

Zeke: Yeah. Tools, I mean this is one of my favorite things to create because its own so cheap and they’re so helpful. In this case we have a mortgage calculator, but you can create pretty much any kind of tool you want. And most tools have from a programmer’s perspective, their very simple. I mean their just basic math operations. There really useful and I’ve seen tools get a lot of links. I highly recommend thinking about tools as one of the pieces of content you can create. I love templates whether its like documents or some spreadsheet like calculus stuff, your industry or whatever kind of document you can give your audience where you’ll be simplifying their work. I mean that works extremely well. And a good thing about this is that you only have to create it once and then you will keep getting your links down the road. And getting some quizzes. These are really, really viral. I’ve seen them all over the place and people really like them. There’s something about this social factors where we want to compete with everybody and see how we measure of. How an online test tests are skills or our decisions, right. These work extremely well.

Andrew: All right. Now that you told us the different content that we can create. How do we spy on our competitor’s content?

Zeke: Yeah. I guess to wrap up the previous part. The thing we can say is that you have to get really creative with your content. If you fail at that step, everything else will not work for you. You have to make sure that the content you create is great. That’s where a lot of people start thinking well that’s going to take a lot of time, that’s going to cost a lot of money. Well what if I just write a blog post? Well if you want to get a lot of links it will cost you a lot of money or it will take a lot of time or combination of both, right. But it’s absolutely worth it. I mean think about being the number one website on Google for your industry. That can do a lot of good things for you, for your business. I think it’s worth spending maybe an afternoon or morning strategizing your content and creating something great. Let’s go back to the presentation and I want to show you some really cool ways you can spy on your competitors to see what they’re doing, what’s working for them. The only thing I would say about this is you don’t want to just copy what they’re doing. You want to learn from them and we want to learn what’s working for them, but you don’t want to do exactly what they’re doing.

Andrew: OK.

Zeke: This is an awesome tool. It’s called the Facebook recommendation tool. And it’s going to be on the list of resources. Or you can just Google Facebook recommendation tool and you’ll find it. In the box at the very top where is say domain you can put your own web site or you can put any of your competitors web site. And this will show you the most liked pieces of content on somebody’s web site. This is really cool because it will show you how many likes.

Andrew: Oh that’s great.

Zeke: Yeah so if you want to see what’s working for your competitors this is a really great way to do it.

Andrew: Oh that’s great. OK.

Zeke: Another tool I love is called open site explorer. And in open site explorer you can put any of your competitors at the very top in the box where it says website. And then there’s a tab called top pages. I ran these on my own web site and this will show you how many links every page of my website is getting. You can assume that if one of my pieces of content is getting a lot of links, then that’s something that’s working really well for me.

Andrew: I see. And that gives me a really good understanding of what I might want to create.

Zeke: Exactly.

Andrew: All right. That’s open site explorer?

Zeke: Yeah. Open site explorer .org.

Andrew: OK.

Zeke: And if you look at the second result here, that’s a blog post at a row. So number, like, the first one on the list is normally going to be the homepage. But the second here is a blog post that I wrote called “10 Ways to Be a Great Networker” and that one got us, I think it was, like, 200 links or so. So it’s, you know, it’s really good to see what’s working for your compares. Where they’re getting their links and what pages in their website are getting the most links.

Andrew: OK. Here’s Topsy.

Zeke: Yeah. So Topsy is an aggregator of a lot of news sites and you can search for any keywords you want. So for example, if you sell wine online, you can do a search for wine. And you want to show you the top stories in the wine industry.

Andrew: Top stories where? On Twitter?

Zeke: On Twitter, on blogs, on the web, forums, news, it basically scrapes the entire web and it shows you the hottest topics in the given industry.

Andrew: OK. And is this so I can see what’s doing well online around wine and maybe create similar content for my site?

Zeke: Right, right. Exactly.

Andrew: OK. All right. That’s Topsy, then. Here’s Google.

Zeke: Yeah. So there are some really cool advanced operators we can use in Google. In this case, I’m using in title and in text. So basically, in this case I’m doing in title column wine, in title column blog. So what this is doing is, this is going to show me websites that both the keywords wine and blog in the page title. And in the text of the page, the actual content, it will search for popular posts. And of course you have to replace wine with whatever keyword describes your industry, but in this case, look at what I found. These two boxes with the most popular posts on two different wine blogs. So I can just go there and see what’s working for them, I mean, what are their most popular blogs.

Andrew: I see. Right. So this is just going to be on the margin of a post about wine.

Zeke: Yeah.

Andrew: And you can see based on that what’s doing well on their website. That’s clever, I hadn’t seen that. I like that. All right. Do you want to go on to the next section?

Zeke: Yeah.

Andrew: All right. Great. Let’s do that, then.

Zeke: And something very important when you create content is that you want to make it easy to share. So when people come to your page, they can share it with their friends with just a couple of clicks. So let’s move on to the next slide. OK. So the first thing you want is the social sharing buttons, like the ones they have at the top. The tool I use for this is called ShareThis. Sharethis.com. And it’s really cool. You basically select, they have different templates, like, different styles for these buttons. You choose the one you like and they give you the code. You put that in your website and it’s done. And then people can share your content on Twitter, Facebook, LinkedIn, Google+, in email, any social networks you want. And this makes a huge difference. Then the other element that we always put on the page is the embed code in case people want to put, like, for example, if I do an infographic and then put it on my website, I want to allow people to put that same infographic on their websites. And when they take this code and put it to their websites, that’s going to be linking to my site automatically. They just take the code, put it in their website, that’s a link I’m getting right away. So this is great for getting a lot of links.

Andrew: OK. Make it shareable, make it easy to embed.

Zeke: Yeah.

Andrew: All right. What’s next?

Zeke: Go on?

Andrew: Let’s go on into it.

Zeke: OK. So the next step, actually, let’s go back one.

Andrew: OK.

Zeke: So people can see the . . . OK.

Andrew: I see, right, the progression is, next we want to find the influencers and so you want us to start with influencers on Twitter.

Zeke: Right. So, you know, let’s say you created a great piece of content and now you have to promote it, right? And by the way, I said step one and step two, but normally we will start working on step one and step two at the same time, because you want to create the list of influencers and work with them to develop the content. I mean, you want to ask them for feedback, but just for the sake of this course, I split it up in three different steps.

Andrew: That makes sense.

A: OK. So let me show you how you can influencers in Twitter. The tool I use is called Followeromk.com, that’s follower O-M-K.com. And in this case I did a combination of the keyword “wine” cause that’s what we are using for this example and then blog, blogger, expert, specialist, I can barely read from here, but writer, editor, contributor, column. So if you look at the bottom it says minimal followers 500.I want to find people who have at least 500 followers and have the keywords “wine” any of these other keywords in their bio in twitter. So for example in this case I found, how many like, 2500 influencers on twitter and follower won’t actually sort all these influencers by how many followers they have or how influential they are. So this is really cool, i mean within a couple seconds i found 2500 influencers on twitter.

Andrew: I see them right here. And the first one on the top of the list has 700,011 followers, the next on 400,000 followers, 130,000 followers. All right. So that is how you define them on Twitter?

Zeke: That’s how you find them on twitter.

Andrew: And LinkedIn is next?

Zeke: Yea. So on LinkedIn you can use the advanced search over here. So when you use the advanced search you want to search by title and in the previous [lie] we talked about all the different combinations. So in this case I’m doing a search for wine blogger. But you can change that to wine writer or columnist, or editor or contributor. And from the drop down box where it says, it will say, current or past or only current because you want to find people who are already working at that job.

Andrew: OK.

Zeke: So if i find twenty-five results, and of this is this guy here who is a wine blogger.

Andrew: OK. And that’s right here through the advance button.

Zeke: Yes.

Andrew: All right. So, lets take a look then at the next place. Influencers on Google.

Zeke: Yeah.

Andrew: And this is jut basic search right?

Zeke: Yeah, you can do..

Andrew: A wine blog

Zeke: …wine blog and I highly suggest searching for the top and best. And then there are some keywords here like blog, blogger, expert, guru, specialist. So you can find a lot of different combinations but I would say that the keyword in them blog will yield the most results.

Andrew: All right. And what you’re doing is your collecting their names? I guess your creating a spreadsheet with their names and email addresses if you have it or twitter handles if you don’t have email addresses or just contact information right?

Zeke: What I use, I use CRM a combination, a customer relationship management software.

Andrew: Mm-hmm.

Zeke: And I use this to keep my list organized because when you put together a list of influencers normally it’s going to be somewhere between 100 and 500 people so there is no way you can remember all of them or what you talked about with each of them. So it’s really important that you keep everything organized under a CRM. I’m going to talk later about which tool I use and which one I recommend.

Andrew: All right, your anticipating all my questions. I started out by saying I was going to ask the questions the audience is going to be wondering about. I think you got the answers coming up, so I’ll step back a little back further, all right. Ready to go to the next session?

Zeke: Yeah.

Andrew: Let’s do it. Here is the next one.

Zeke: So once you’ve found the influencers and once you have input them into your CRM it’s time to start reaching out to them. And we’ve done a lot of testing, we’ve used I’d say over 100 different templates and different variations of different templates and we came up with these ones I’m about to show you that work extremely well. And when I say template, I want to make sure that the people in the audience understand that we only use templates kind of like the foundation of the email but we always personalize them. If you want your outreach [inaudible] to fail all you have to do is send the same email to a million people. So we do use templates, but there is a section, I’ll show you now, but you have to personalize so people know you spent time on their website.

So the subject is “Love your Article” and then I start the first paragraph. I love the article you wrote today about picking the right colors to decorate your bedroom. I’m in the process of decorating mine, so your timing couldn’t be any better. And that’s the only paragraph in the entire email that we personalize every time. So in this case, that’s where I wrote, “I’m actually decorating my house,” but you can change this to whatever you want. Just make sure they… you get it across right away that you’ve been to their website, you know who they are, and, here, the second paragraph says, “Since you’re an interior design expert, I’d like to ask you for your feedback on something.”

So here, we are acknowledging that they’re the experts, you know, which is really good for their ego, right? And we get their attention right away. And we’re not asking for “Hey, promote me,” or anything. “I just want your feedback, because you’re the expert, and I really care about your opinion.” And then we can actually see the first name, last name, and the email address that we use to send this email from is the same one… it’s from the same domain we want the link pointing to. OK? So don’t use any gmail or hotmail accounts, use your… the same domain for sending these emails.

Andrew: When you work with the client, do you use an email address on their domain to email these on their behalf?

Zeke: About eighty percent of our clients create an account for us that we can use for link building. Twenty percent of them don’t want this, or… maybe it’s not that they don’t want it. Sometimes it’s hard to get clients to actually do their part. We do our part and we keep reminding them that we need access to this or that, but it takes forever, so…

Andrew: But ideally, even if you have someone who’s outsourced doing this, you want them to have an email address at your domain?

Zeke: Yes. You never want to lie about who you are, or… We never pretend to be part of the company. We just send an email. If someone asks if we work for a third party agency, yeah, of course, I have no problem sharing that.

Andrew: OK. So that’s the first template–it’s actually right here–and, of course, if people can’t see this on their screen, or if they happen to be listening and not watching, they’ll have a copy of this with the course notes.

Zeke: Yeah.

Andrew: All right, you want to see the next one?

Zeke: Yeah.

Andrew: Let’s show them the next one.

Zeke: This second template is when we receive an answer to the first template. This is normally how we reply. So, “Thank you so much for your feedback. I’m really glad you liked it. I put a lot of work into it, and getting validation from you means a lot to me. Thank you. Is there anything I can do for you? Please say the word.” So this is not just a gimmicky piece of copy. We actually try to collaborate with these influencers and try to help them in any way that we can. If they want us to tweet something, or they want our feedback on anything, or if they want us to sign up for a service they have, we do it. We really build relationships, and I can’t stress this enough. You’re not doing this just for links. You just… being really well-connected in your industry is very, very valuable. So you’re going to get links as a side effect of this thing you’re doing, but that’s not the only reason why you’re doing it. And that’s… yeah, go ahead.

Andrew: I was going to ask, what’s the success rate of an email like the one that you showed a moment ago, like this one? If you send this out to a stranger, to Mary who you’ve never met before, how likely is she to give you feedback on your info graphing?

Zeke: We normally get somewhere between ten and fifteen percent.

Andrew: Ten or fifteen percent. OK. And then you send out this following email. And in this one, you’re giving her–in the original one–you’re giving her an advanced look at an infographic that you’re creating, that’s coming up. There it is. And then you tell her, “Hey, it’s public, I’ll start promoting today; feel free to blog about it.”

Zeke: Yeah. And the last sentence says, “I’ll definitely stay in touch; have a great day!” And again, this is something we actually do. We stay in touch. We comment on their blog posts, we re-tweet their stuff. These people can do a lot for you, but if you go into these different relationships thinking, “What can I get for me?” it’s not going to work out. It has to go both ways. They’ll give you feedback, they’ll help you promote your stuff, but ask what you can do for them.

Andrew: OK. And you do this for hundreds of people per client.

Zeke: Yes. It’s a lot of work.

Andrew: Impressive. It is a lot of work! I’m looking forward to seeing what CRM you use to keep track of it all.

Zeke: Yeah, because we couldn’t do it without that. There’s no way we could remember every conversation we have with every person.

Andrew: All right. On to the next one.

Zeke: Yeah.

Andrew: All right, let’s talk about outreach marketing tips.

Zeke: OK. Let’s move on to the next light. The CRL that we use is called dustream. Dustream is somewhat pricey. I think it’s like $95.00 a month or something around that. It specifically designed for link building. We absolutely love it.

Andrew: Let’s go to the web site its dustream, let’s see it.

Zeke: You’ll see two products, the one in the left is the one that we use.

Andrew: The link building one right here. OK. All right, and then the other one that you suggest oh wait. Actually, that I show this properly before? All these different buttons. I meant to show it this way so people can actually see the screen. All right, here you’re saying it’s the one on the left that they should click on and when they do this is what it’ll look like.

Zeke: Yeah.

Andrew: All right. And now I will bring up, I’ll find it. There it is.

Zeke: Yeah. We use dustream because we manage a lot of different accounts and it just makes a lot of sense for us. But if you want just one website and the $90.00 a month is going to be too much for you, there are other cheaper options like I really love capsulecrm.com.

Andrew: What do you like about that one?

Zeke: It’s just really the design is really beautiful, it works fast and it’s easy to use. You don’t have to watch like ten webinars to figure out how it works. It’s very intuitive. Yup, let’s do that one.

Andrew: Let’s do that one, too. Oh, I see what you mean. All right. The next tips are and I’ll bring up right now. Never stop nurturing the relationships that you build and you said this a lot.

Zeke: Yeah.

Andrew: How the nurture them?

Zeke: OK. There are a couple of things you can do. You can subscribe to anything they have. Newsletters, blogs, comment every time, I don’t know a single blogger that doesn’t like comments. Retweet their stuff. Most bloggers is all about their ego and if you can help them promote them, they’ll be thankful for that. The thing here is like getting the first response, getting one influence or two like retweet something you wrote. Or post it to their blog, or email their list. I would say that’s 90% of the (?). Once they’ve done it once, the chances of them doing it again are really really high. I would say about 50%. It’s really important that once they’ve done something for you, you keep nurturing these relationships. You keep helping each other.

Andrew: OK. Personalize their request and you talked about how you don’t want those emails to be copied and pasted from a template.

Zeke: Right. Get to the point fast. Most of these influencers are really busy and they don’t have time to review five paragraphs. Just make it very brief and get to the point. Include your contact information including your phone number. I mean that gives you a lot of credibility. You’re not just another person emailing them making yourself available to them. Show excitement in your emails and write the same way you talk. That has to do with your own style. It’s really important to really get your personality through your emails. You can’t just be just using boring words. I mean you really have to be yourself and have some fun with it. Because again, these people get a lot of emails. The more you unique your email looks, the higher your chances of getting any sort of response.

Andrew: This last one I’ve seen people use in creative ways. Women get better response rates? What do you do about that?

Zeke: Well, I mean there’s not much you can do about that. We have our outreach specialist happens to be a woman, really young and very attractive. I mean if you’re a guy, you’re a guy. There’s not much you can do about that.

Andrew: I’ve seen people use email address that they create accounts in their email system for fake women and then they have guys man it if they don’t have women on board. What do you think of that?

Zeke: If you can sleep well at night.

Andrew: All right. On to the next then. The next action here is to talk about the four very effective link building tactic. And one of them i’m especially excited about talking you about that 4-O-4-1. But why don’t we start off with the list of resources.

Zeke: Yeah. There (?). Just to make it clear and not to confuse anybody. So far I’ve been talking about the outreach marketing. How to create great content and how to reach out for influencers. Now I would say that that issue account for maybe 75% to 80% of your building. The other 20 to 25 should be spread among these four tactics that I’m about to show it to you. The first one.

Andrew: OK. That’s just about coming up with the content and then asking these people to tweet it, asking them to blog about it, getting their feedback and asking them to blog about it.

Zeke: Yeah. You know what, its a really simple process. It’s all about the details. There’s a huge difference between having a good piece of content and having a great piece of content. There’s a huge difference between spending one million emailing someone and/or in 10 minutes getting to know this person online checking their social media and sending their personalized approach. It’s not difficult, it’s just very time consuming. And you really have to be passionate about this is an creating relationships and your networking. And it’s not very different from the kind of networking you do offline.

Andrew: What’s the success rate of something like that? Of going through a process of creating an ebook, and then reaching out to 500 or so influencers that you’ve put together in a CRM, and asking them for feedback on the ebook. Maybe adjusting the ebook based on their feedback and then saying hey, its public can you tweet it, can you blog it etc.

Zeke: Yeah. With any kind of viral marketing campaign the failure rate is actually very high. Like sometimes we do campaigns that only get 100 links and sometimes we get 50,000 from one campaign. And I’ve been doing this for a long time and even I have all really hard time guessing what’s going to work and what’s not going to work. Sometimes you need a little bit of luck. Hiring the right kind of people tweeting at the right times. And having other people like seeing that. What I can tell you is that if you do it three or four times, you’re going to hear maybe one home run. Two will be pretty decent and one will be completely ignored. It’s in the matter of like you have to keep doing this.

Andrew: OK. And can we just hire someone to do this for us? What kind of person can we bring in who would manage all of this for us?

Zeke: I would say that you actually need a lot of different people. Like for example if you’re going to do an info graphic, you need someone who’s really good at doing their research in coming up with the right idea for the infographic.

Andrew: What about the outreach part?

Zeke: The outreach, that’s someone who’s really sociable and someone who really likes networking I’ll say.

Andrew: OK. All right. You know what else? What about the annual salary or the level of experience that we need to bring someone to do this? And the reason I ask is what I’m noticing is a lot of people that watch these courses actually end up handing them over to someone in their company and saying I need you to do this for me.

Zeke: Yeah.

Andrew: What level of person would they want to hand this course to? What kind of experience would they need?

Zeke: I would say that there are two ways to go about this. You can either hire an agency that can take care of the entire process. Or you can do it yourself. But if you do it yourself, there’s not one person I can do the whole thing. For example if I were to create a tool I could do the research, come up with the idea then I would have to hire a designer to design the tool and the programmer to write the code for the tool.

Andrew: OK. And those two things the programmer and the designer you can get off the side like elancer, guru.com. Pretty inexpensively for a tool like what you’re describing. But assembling a list of influencers, contacting them, nurturing that relationship, that seems like the bulk of this work, right?

Zeke: Yeah. That’s the most time consuming part.

Andrew: What level of person do we need? What kind of experience should they have when we’re bringing them to do this?

Zeke: I don’t think you need a lot of experience. You need to be very personable and really enjoy talking to people all day cause that’s what you do. You pick up the phone, you tweet. I mean someone who is already like on Twitter, on Facebook all day like really sociable because really you can be like a genius at marketing, but if you don’t like people that’s not like something someone can train you to be better, right.

Andrew: And then just work the system that you’ve got. Keep building that list in the CRN, keep following up with them. keep asking for their advice on a piece of content, and then ask them to promote it once you come out with it.

Zeke: Yeah, yeah. You need someone who has very good social skills and is very organized as well cause is not easy to manage like hundreds of relationships.

Andrew: OK. All right. On to the next.

Zeke: Yeah.

Andrew: Let’s do it. So a list of resources. Here’s the first one that you’ve got on the list. What is this place?

Zeke: OK. So the idea here is to find pages where in this example we’re doing best wine web sites. There are hundreds of pages of there that have laced up their best wine web sites. These are some Google advance operators that I can talk about this for like maybe 15 minutes. But the short version is just you can use any of these or all of these and just replace where it says key word, replace that with the actual key word. Weather it is, you know, wine, lawyer or whatever user you are in. And all of these will get you a lot of pages that have your list of resources in your industry.

Andrew: So these are just Google searches I might do in URL top, and then maybe startup resources.

Zeke: You actually want to do it?

Andrew: Yeah, let’s do it. All right so it’s going to take me a second here. I’m going to go into editing to bring up Chrome up this way and then let’s show it full screen. There it is Chrome full screen. And now for key word. What’s a good one to use? Design. No, u x, user experience. All right so if I were building a user experience product, here is …

Zeke: [??]

Andrew: … my top 10 u x web sites and blogs. That’s right, this is great. (?) I don’t know what this is, oh I see this is just a newswire that’s not so helpful.

Zeke: I want to show the audience what one of the sites look like.

Andrew: OK. Let’s look at the top one. It looks like if that’s the best it.

Zeke: So here you have a list of web sites. What we’re trying to do here is to figure out if any of these links is broken. And if any of these links a broken what we’re going to do what is email the webmaster and let him know hey you have a broken website by the way I have these other free blogs feel free to add if you like it.

Andrew: Oh got you. That’s how I can get a lead he easily by helping them fix a mistake. So I would just click, click, click, click, click, click, click.

Zeke: Well, there’s an easier way to do it.

Andrew: Oh there is. I don’t even have to do what I just did right here which is open up every one of these in a different tab. OK?

Zeke: Yeah. If you can go back to the PowerPoint, I’ll show you where you can.

Andrew: Yeah, let’s do it.

Zeke: OK. In the list of resources I include link checker. Link checker is an extension for Google Chrome. That what it does is you can actually see a list of basically running at every page and it will highlight all the valid links in green. And it will show you the broken links in red.

Andrew: I see here. I think a can zoom in for people so that they can see just a little bit better.

Zeke: Yeah. And this tool can check hundreds of links within a couple of seconds. You see a read one, you can tell them right away hey this link is broken.

Andrew: Oh, got you. And by the way I have a better site that can be a better replacement.

Zeke: Nice. Yeah, yeah. If you go back to well actually move foward to the next light, I’ll show you the template we use.

Andrew: OK.

Zeke: Subject broken links on your site’s. It will just always get people’s attention. I just want to let you know that you have some broken links in your site. You might want to fix these as more users become very frustrated when they click on links that don’t work. By the way I have a blog myself, feel free to add it to the list of resources if you like it. I never ever ask for a link. I never say send a link to me. Because people hate that. But hear what I’m saying, hey feel free to add it to the list if you feel like it. I’m not putting any pressure or anything. I’m just saying hey I have this and if you like it you can put it in your list.

Andrew: Makes a lot of sense. All right. And again, we’ll give people a copy of this.

Zeke: Yep.

Andrew: All right. And once I have the link checker plug-in installed and active on Chrome, it automatically will start telling me what’s working and what’s not by highlighting it?

Zeke: No, you have to actually click… It’s going to be on the top right corner and you just have to click on it, and every time you click on it, you will scan all the links on the page.

Andrew: I gotcha, OK. All right. Next is guest blogging.

Zeke: Yeah. So, guest blogging… That’s where you approach bloggers and you offer them content for their blog. Normally, in exchange for you giving them content, they let you put a bi-line… Kind of like your bio with a link back to your website. So, let me show you… Let’s move on to the next slide.

Andrew: This is the process?

Zeke: Yep. So, the first step is, I’ll show you how you can find these popular blogs that accept guest blogs. And then, how to preach an idea, because you have to actually come up with an idea… ‘Hey, I have this idea for an article. Do you like it or not?’ Then we need to promote the post. I’ll show you how to do this as well. Check your Google analytics to see if you’re getting any traffic from the blog or not, because if you do, then you should make it a regular thing. For example, if I guest post for two or three blogs and one of them sends me 100 visitors a day, I want to keep blogging for their blog, right?

Andrew: Yeah.

Zeke: And so, let’s move on to the next slide and I’ll show you what I’m… So all these are examples of queries you can use on Google to search for guest bloggers. So take one, for example, and let’s put it on Google to see what it looks like.

Andrew: OK. So I do this to copy it. And I’m going to switch to Chrome. Let’s show the screen bigger like that. This is from before. And, you know what, let’s stick with wines. Suppose me have a wine business. So I changed the search to wine guest blogger.

Zeke: Yeah.

Andrew: All right. So… Actually, wait. For some reason it’s not showing clearly on your screen. Let’s see if I can refresh it. There we go, that did it. So can you see that?

Zeke: Yeah. So click on the first one, for example.

Andrew: OK. Guest blogger, ‘Beer versus Wine’.

Zeke: Yeah. So that’s a guest post someone wrote. So you can guess that if they got guests who posted before, they’re likely to accept guests in the future. So any of those queries that I gave you are really good to get blogs that takes…

Andrew: I see.

Zeke: …guest contributors.

Andrew: So Wicked Local accepts guests blogging, and it looks like they even have a tag right here called ‘Guest Blogger’ and Andrew Kuhn is one of their guest bloggers. All right, that’s makes sense. Want to go to the next one?

Zeke: Yep.

Andrew: All right. Let’s do it. So that’s how to find a site; this is how to pitch the site.

Zeke: Yeah. So I start with, again, a personalized paragraph that shows them that I know who they are and what they do. And then I say, ‘I notice you have some guest posts on your blog and I have an idea for a guest post I’d love to run by you… 10 Ways to Improve your Golf Swing. Do you like it? I’m a golfing instructor myself and you can see some of my articles here.’ So again, I mean we’re just pitching an idea. And it is really important to look at the kind of blog people have and, for example, if they have a lot of ‘how to’ articles, we can pitch that kind of idea. If they have a lot of images or a lot of videos, then just pay attention to what the blog is doing and pitch an idea that you feel is going to be relevant to them.

Andrew: OK. All right. Then we promote it.

Zeke: Yeah. The next thing you want to do is, once it goes live, just promote the heck out of it on Facebook, Twitter, LinkedIn, email lists… Anywhere where you’d promote your own content, make sure you promote the guest post that you wrote.

Andrew: By the way, I see that you did that. You were phenomenal at promoting your interview on Mixergy when you came on and I interviewed you. After we posted it, I started to get all these alerts for your name and my name being on the Internet together on different posts. You promoted it really well. I’d love to have you on just for that reason alone.

Zeke: Yes. I’ll be happy to maybe do some other course some other time on how to do that.

Andrew: Yes. It’s great actually to, usually as a blogger, as a content creator, you have to just keep promoting on your own your own stuff and if you have somebody come on and not just create an article but also promoted, I can imagine how powerful that could be.

Zeke: Yes.

Andrew: All right. On to the next. And there it is.

Zeke: OK. The reason why you want to check your analytics is that you want to see how many clicks you get from each guest post that you write. So let’s say you write five blog posts for different blogs and four of those send you one or two visits. It’s good, you get a link, it helps. However you might not want to invest 2 or 3 hours to write another blog post for them.

But if you have a cases like these two here where you got like a thousand or 900 clicks in the last 30 days for a guest post that you wrote, what I would do is I would approach the blogger. I would say, “Hey, it looks like people really like these posts. We got a lot of comments. It was really popular. How do you feel about making it a regular thing, maybe once a month or once every couple of weeks. Here are some ideas I have.” That is another good way to get both links and a lot of exposure for your own blog.

Andrew: All right. Ready for the next one. This is the one I was talking about at the top of this session.

Zeke: So if 404 Error is when you go to a website and you land on a page that no longer exists. It’s been removed and normally it says something like This page no longer exists or This page has been removed. There’s some sort of error.

Now this tactic is all about finding these error pages on your competitor’s websites and finding out who’s linking to them and that will create a very similar piece of content and get those people linking to their broken site to linking to us instead.And I’m a big fan of explaining things with examples. So let’s move on to the next slide and I’ll show you what I mean. So in this case one of our clients, their website is all about diets for polio.

Andrew: A polio diet.

Zeke: Basically, it’s for the polio diet. One of their competitors is poliodiet.com. So when you input this into open site Explorer, when you click on the top pages, this will show you the pages that have the most links pointing to them. And there’s a column called HTTP status so look at the second example here. It’s a 404 and it has 1,100 links from 122 different domains. So just so we’re all clear, I mean, this page has a thousand links and it doesn’t exist anymore. So if I were linking to this page, I’d be more than happy to get an email from you saying ‘Hey, you have a broken link here. Why don’t you link to my page instead?’

Andrew: Let’s see. If I were a polio diet site and I was linking to frequently asked questions on thepoliodiet.com , and it didn’t exist, you’d email me and say ‘Hey, Andrew. You’re linking to a page that doesn’t exist. You might want to stop that .’

Zeke: Actually let me show you an example in the next slide.

Andrew: OK.

Zeke: So this is the actual page that I mention in the previous example. And this page has like 1,100 links pointing to it and so let’s move on to the next slide. This website is called archive.org and archive is basically an archive of the entire internet. It’s actually really cool. You can put your own website and you can see what it used to look like a cople of years ago, a couple of months ago. So when I put this link it showed me that, I don’t know what year it was but I think it was back in 2007, this is the content that was on the page back them. And then they removed it. But now I know what 1,100 people link to. Now I have a great opportunity for me to create a similar but even better resource.

Andrew: And then you do this.

Zeke: Yes. So again, broken link to your site. On your website you’re linking to this list of broken frequently asked questions that has to be removed. I hate seeing broken links on my site so I figure I’d let you know about this one. I found this other link that actually worked.

Andrew: Oh, that’s great, that’s great. So now you’re taking a link away from a competitor and you’re adding a link to yourself.

Zeke: Yep.

Andrew: Oh, that’s terrific. How effective is that for you when you catch that?

Zeke: Again, it’s like 10%.

Andrew: Oh, really? So even though someone has a broken link on their website and you’re offering to help, one out of ten people will respond and change the link to yours, OK, that’s helpful to know. I wouldn’t feel so bad if I didn’t 100% on that one. I felt like boy, that’s terrific. I can’t imagine anyone saying no to it.

Zeke: Yeah, and you know what, like some people never reply and they just fix it. Some people will fix it but they’ll tell you oh, thank you for letting me know. I’ll forward this to my designer and it’ll never happen. So, I’ll say that 10% is a decent rate.

Andrew: OK. Next one? Let’s do it. And there it is.

Zeke: OK, so complimentary content is similar to the previous tactic we talked about. But the way it works is let’s go to the next slide. You find content that is very, very popular. You create a piece of content that basically compliments the first one and let me show you an actual example. So, right here I pulled up a CNN and, again, I clicked on the top pages and there’s a story here that got links from 1,800 different websites. It’s called Lenox Light.

Andrew: And that was, by the way, on open site explorer for people who are just listening and not watching, OK.

Zeke: So, this story here, How Diamonds Fuel Africa’s Conflicts, this piece of content got 1,800 links from 1,800 different website, right. So, again, let’s move on to the next slide and I’ll show you how we would approach this. So, you can actually, instead of just put cnn.com you back to open site explorer, you put the link to that specific story and then you filter the links to see only external links, links coming from other websites, no CNN. And here you have the 1,800 domains linking to this story. So what I would do is I would send an email in the next slide. OK, so, hi Paul this morning, I read your article about all the problems that diamonds are creating for African people. I loved it. I also read a CNN article you mentioned and thought it was great. By the way, I found a really interesting [?] where do diamonds come from. So that’s a piece of content we’ll create. You might want to include this in your story. Anyway, thank you so much for the great article. I really loved it.

Andrew: Oh, that’s great.

Zeke: That works extremely well because we can do this with anything. Like, finding 404 errors on competitors pages, sometimes you find them, sometimes you don’t but with this tactic it works every time.

Andrew: And you’ve got over 1,000 people who you could contact about that.

Zeke: Yeah, this specific story got 3,400 links from 1,800 different websites. So you can contact all of them and say look, I saw you link to this. I also create this really cool info graphic, feel free to link to it if you want.

Andrew: I see, OK, there it is, 3,400. So, what about if you don’t have a site that has anything to do with diamonds or Africa but you still see that this is the article that did well on CNN and people link to, do you still connect it?

Zeke: That’s a great question actually. You have to find some website, some word relevant to what you do. If you a news site, say that CNN would be relevant. If you, in your case, because you work with a lot of entrepreneurs, like entrepreneur.com could be a good one for you to find relevant stories. So it has to be something like that. I would think about the 800 pound gorilla in your industry.

Andrew: Gotcha. So it wouldn’t necessarily be CNN, find that big site, do the same type of process on them and then contact all the people who are linking to their article.

Zeke: Right.

Andrew: So, you actually, your last slide is this where you’re thanking us, but I’m the one who should be thanking you. This is your contact information? Oh, look at this. Let me adjust this. I’ve got all of these levers lately. Here, now we can show things a little clearer. That’s your phone number. What’s the best way to reach you? You probably prefer email, right?

Zeke: Yeah. Email is the best way. So, any questions you have about link building or SEO or content marketing, I’m here for you. Yeah. That’s my phone number and my email address but, as you said, email is the best way to get a hold of me.

Andrew: What about the time? How long should we expect this whole process to take here? Let’s go back to this slide here. The process of finding influencers, of reaching out to them? How long would it take us to find 404 pages? I’m trying to figure out where we should start and spend the most time.

Zeke: Normally, we do it the other way around. This could be a full-time job if you wanted to make it a full-time job. So, normally we say, OK, how many hours… When we work with a client, it’s like, how many hours a week do we have? I would say ten hours a month would be a really good start. If you have five, you could make it work out. I would say that with ten you’re going to get amazing results.

Andrew: Ten hours a month?

Zeke: Yeah.

Andrew: That’s all it takes.

Zeke: Yeah.

Andrew: OK. All right.

Zeke: The thing is that the first couple of months you’re not going to see enormous results because here… Let’s think about this. We’re building relationships. It doesn’t happen overnight, OK? I’m sure that all the relationships you built over the last couple of years are really valuable to you now, but you need to build, like, a thousand relationships in a week. So, that’s how you have to think about it. It’s an incremental process. You’re going to do more and more, and it will benefit your business not only because you’ll get more links but because you’re going to be connected with everybody who matters in your space.

Andrew: Yeah. You’re right. Beyond getting the links, the connections to those people can be invaluable.

Zeke: Yeah.

Andrew: All right. As always, guys, if you’re watching this, I’m looking forward to hearing your feedback on this. I get screenshots from people who use what they’ve learned in past courses. We did a course on SEO recently, and soon after someone sent me a screenshot and said, “Andrew, here is where I was before” and then another screenshot and said, “This is where I am right now. This thing freakin’ works.” So, if anyone’s gone through this and is getting any progress, let me know. Let me know if you have any frustrations with this and, of course, you can reach out to Zeke and his company, right there, the Outsourcing Company.

Thanks for doing this course with us.

Zeke: Thank you, Andrew. It was great being here.

Andrew: Thank you. Thank you all for watching. Bye.

Master Class:
How to get customers to reveal what they’d pay for
(Even if they don’t know what it is)
Taught by Jason Evanish of KISSMetrics

Report issues here

Master Class:
Interview Customers


About the course leader

Jason Evanish is the Product Manager at KISSMetrics, which gives businesses actionable metrics on their web sites.

Master Class Toolbox

Course Cheat Sheet

Jason’s blog post “How to Structure (and get the most out of) Customer Development Interviews

Hubspot

Transcript

Download the transcript here

Andrew: This course is about how to get customers to tell you exactly what the perfect thing is to build for them, and the course is going to be led by Jason Evanish, who is the product manager at KISSmetrics, which gives businesses actionable metrics on their websites. Jason is the guy who calls up customers and potential customers to help KISSmetrics know exactly what to build for their customers and what their customers want them to build.

I am Andrew Warner, well, now here it is. I am Andrew Warner, founder of Mixergy, and I’ll help facilitate this session. And actually, let me show you guys that we’re going to be talking about up on the big board. Here’s what’s coming up. We’re going to talk about who you should go after. Who, specifically, do you ask when you’re going to… when you’re looking for ideas for what to build?

We’re also going to talk about what you should be asking them. If you say just, “What should I build?” You’re going to get the wrong answer. There is a lot more nuance in that, and we’re going to go over what you should be asking. We’re going to talk about how to figure out what their top problems are. The things that you really need to address, and we’re going to show you how to look for patterns, and why you should be looking for patterns. Then, finally, after you understand everything, we’re going to show you and talk to you about what you should release. What do you do with all this pain that you’re uncovering? All right. Jason, thanks for being here, and thanks for going over all of this.

Jason: Yeah. Thanks for having me. I’m excited to share this stuff.

Andrew: So I want to show the audience what is possible, both the good thing and the bad, and let’s start off with the problem that you faced at a previous company that you worked for, at… let me see if I could bring up that page. Not that one.

Jason: I was going to say, unless you’ve got an archived screen shot, I’m not sure we’re actually still on the internet.

Andrew: Well, what do you mean?

Jason: So OneForty to acquire.

Andrew: Oh, yeah. This one.

Jason: There you go. That’s it.

Andrew: There it is.

Jason: I remember that site.

Andrew: So what was OneForty?

Jason: So, OneForty was the App store for Twitter. I remember when I joined. This is back in the beginning in 2010. Laura Fitton started it a few months before that, and everyone was in a frenzy around Twitter, and like how awesome it was going to be, and it’s the new wave of stuff, the new wave of technology, and everyone was building Apps on the API, because it was so easy, and everyone was excited and thought that it was a no- brainer that there was an App Store. They couldn’t believe Twitter.com hadn’t it themselves, so this seemed like a great idea.

Andrew: And so, they said, “We’re going to create and App Store, and, of course, it’s going to be brilliant. There is an App Store for the iPhone, there is an App Store for Android, and for a while there it did do well, because people wanted to experiment with it. It ultimately had to get shut down, and the business focused on something different before getting acquired.

Why if there was all this frenzy, didn’t they discover something great? Shouldn’t they have gone with their heart, and said, “Hey, we’re passionate about Twitter.” Shouldn’t they have looked around and said, “Hey, every one else is passion about Twitter. We’ll just build this thing.” Why is that not the perfect way to build a business?

Jason: Well, the problem was that while people really liked us, and they did come and visit the site, and check out all our Apps, and like, sometimes people would write reviews, and everyone else would read the reviews. The problem was, you know, how often do you have a problem where you need a Twitter App? It’s not an every day thing. It’s, in fact, something maybe you need once a month.

When you come in and you, and you look at like a couple of Apps, and look at a couple of reviews, and then go away, and try the App, and you’re happy, there isn’t really a whole lot of pain you’re solving for them. Because in the end there’s probably like, 10 Mashable and other like Social Media Examiner Blog Posts comparing those same Apps as well. So we were the best of a bunch of alternatives that solved a very narrow use case, that didn’t really create a pain that would lead to anyone wanting to pay anything. You couldn’t build a business. You could build something cool that was nice to have, but not something that you could build a business around.

Andrew: I see, and that’s what you were telling me before we started, that there wasn’t a pain. No one was walking around going, “I absolutely need this App store, or else, I’m in trouble.” Right? There wasn’t that kind of a deep pain, versus “You now work for this company, and you wouldn’t allow me to reveal that the number of customers”, but we can see here on the screen the kinds of customers that you guys have at KISSmetrics. Many people in the audience, here, are using KISSmetrics for analytics. What did KISSmetrics do to get all this? What were they doing that’s different from the way that your previous company did things, and most companies do things when they’re trying to figure out what to build?

Jason: Well, for one thing, there was a famous bank robber that said the reason he robbed banks was because that’s where the money was and you know, in a lot of ways every company has an analytics budget. Since the first .com bubble people wanted to measure the results of how they’re really doing. From the early days Heaton was doing customer develop to understand where Google Analytics was coming up short, and as you can see by this customer list, some people seemed to agree with that assessment, and one of the things that’s underrated about the Twitter ecosystem is if you think back to 2009, 2010 time range there was very little monetization. No one knew how Twitter was going to make money, and most of the apps were free. So you couldn’t do the Apple App Store model, taking 30%, because 30% of 0 is $0.

Andrew: All right. So you’re going to show us some of the process that they at KISSmetrics taken that you specifically KISSmetrics go through to figure out what all these great companies are suffering from and what they’re eager for you guys to build, and you got that (?) from customers using a process you’re going to teach us and then you guys went to work to build solutions for them and of course when people are desperate they’re much more each to buy, much more eager to help out and you’re going to walk us through the process that you took. Alright, let’s go back to the big board here and talk about the very first thing that we need to do. You say we need to figure out who we need to talk to, who that potential customer is. So how do we know who specifically we need to talk to?

Jason: So what’s great is once you have a developed company like KISSmetrics you have a lot of sources, but even before then there’s a lot of cool things you can do. I mean, basically the bottom line is you want to find people who are in your target market. So in our case at KISSmetrics it’s people who work in analytics at companies big and small. So that small company it’s probably one of the founders who’s really driving analytics at the company and as the company gets larger you’re talking about the marketing department and sometimes product guys are the ones you want to talk to. So, in our case it started out with one future that I think we’re going to use as an example today is the (?) and so what we found from that was that the sales team was telling us there was a hole in our product that customers were just begging for certain capabilities that we just didn’t have. So we were able to get the sales guys to say “Hey, who’s telling you that they want these other things we don’t have?” So they were able to hand us those guys and say “Hey, talk to them and figure out what they really want so we can make them happy”.

Andrew: I see. So you were talking to people within your client’s companies and the salespeople happened to be telling you “Hey, we’ve got this big problem that other people in our company need to address” and that’s when you said “Alright, it’s time for me to go sit and understand their problem so that we can build a solution”.

Jason: Exactly. Yeah. I mean, they were coming up with all these different features that they wanted but in the end we just wanted to get to the root of the problem that they had so that we could come up with something that would be good for them.

Andrew: All right, Jason. If somebody in the audience is saying “Let’s look at the different kinds of companies that could be listening to us and the different stages that everyone who’s listening to us could go through”. Let’s suppose they’re brand new, haven’t launched anything, they have this vision for a product and this vision for a customer. Actually, do they need a vision for a customer to know who to call or can they start without a theory about who their potential customer is?

Jason: Well, I don’t know. You need to know who you want to talk to, so if you have this great idea, maybe something you’re building for yourself, at that point you need to say “Alright, what is it about me that makes me a customer?” and try and find more people like that to talk to.

Andrew: OK. So this idea of who the customer should be is where we start and then we go and find people like that.

Jason: Yep.

Andrew: All right, then as we develop and maybe we get a few customers, who do we talk to at that point? Do we talk to our current customers before building the next thing or do we talk to others within their company or do we talk to our competitors customers, at that second stage once we started building a business and have customers, who do we turn to?

Jason: I think all of the above honestly. The more you can diversify, the better your view on the market and you potential. So, we’ve done everything from talking to existing customers to potential customers to people we lost deals on who went with a competitor because all of those things help you understand “Hey, you decided not to go with us. What were we missing? What was wrong?” You know, you can learn a lot from that.

Andrew: Going back to the big board, in this section we said we were going to talk about who to talk to.

Jason: Yep.

Andrew: And I don’t want to leave the audience with the impression that they need to talk to everyone because that’s overwhelming.

Jason: Right.

Andrew: I want to give them some guidance about who they should talk to and who they shouldn’t, so if we’re talking to our competitors and talking to our customers and talking to other people within our customer’s business, who are we not talking to. Who should we say, “Hey look, we’re going to focus, and we can’t talk to everyone, so we’re going to exclude these other people.

Jason: So, I guess the way I look at it is your goal is you want to talk to about eight to ten people who are really interested in your idea. So, however many people in total that takes, you want to keep going until you get to about that number because that’s usually around the time you can actually start to draw patterns and learn from what they’re saying, to actually take action.

Andrew: OK.

Jason: So, often you’re going to need to try a bunch of different places, like if you’re brand new, I recommend search Twitter for people complaining about your market, or look for a meet-up group that’s a group of those people. Like, if you’re building something for moms, look for mommy bloggers and look for meet-up groups for young moms and stuff like that. Go to where they already are and then try and strike up those conversations and see what you learn.

Andrew: OK. All right. So, for you it was the sales people who were saying, “Hey, this other group within our company is having a problem. We think you guys need to fix this problem.” Did they say what the problem was?

Jason: They told us basically it was that customers were talking about the ability to get deeper into the KISSmetrics product. So, they wanted to be able to ask tougher questions and get really specific on specific analytics play. Our power portal allows you to dig a lot deeper into our analytics. You can answer a specific question around, “Oh, hey, I just ran this campaign. I have an A/B test going on it, and I also sent a bunch of different ads at it.” I want to see if different ads perform well against that A/B test, so I can see like, did I buy ad words and did they do better on Test A. And I bought Facebook ads, and they did better on Test B.

Well, in order to do that you actually have a couple different layers that you have to be able to look at in order to see the answer, and we didn’t have anything in our reporting that let you do that. And so, we wanted to talk to customers to try and figure out, like, what are all the use cases like that and what’s the real problem we can solve?

Andrew: Maybe, I’ve got this wrong here, but you said that you were talking to your sales team or your client’s sales team.

Jason: Oh, that was ours. We were talking to our own sales team.

Andrew: I see.

Jason: And what they were hearing from customers when they were trying to close deals and they were trying to get people to upgrade on our product.

Andrew: Gotcha. OK. And they were saying, “Hey, there’s this group of people who are having a problem on Facebook, and they want to know how well their Facebook ads are performing. They want to know about their Google ads. They want more detailed reports. I see, and that’s when you said, “This is the group of people we need to go and talk to and figure out what their problem is and be really clear about what they’re desperate for before we start building.

Jason: Yeah. I mean, honestly, the sales team is always passing us stuff, and we just started noticing people had all kinds of questions that weren’t necessarily all about ads or all about A/B testing. It was more just there was a lot of different ways that people were asking questions that required a lot of depth and the ability to really slice and dice the data differently than what we can do right now.

Andrew: OK. Can we take a look at the screen shots you prepared for us now?

Jason: Sure.

Andrew: All right. Let’s bring them up here. So, here’s the first one that you’ve got. Where is that, actually? There we go. I’m bringing up a blank canvas. What is this?

Jason: So, this is the person search feature on KISSmetrics, and this is like the Holy Grail for me. I love using this because what I can do is I can search for any activity that someone did in KISSmetrics because obviously we use our tool internally, and I can look and see, “Hey, what users are using features that seem like they line up with what I want to talk to people about” or “Who are the most active people” because if you use KISSmetrics a lot you probably like us, which probably means you’re willing to talk to me if I drop you an email. And so, when you run a search like this, it will return a bunch of names. You pass in identities to KISSmetrics so that you have an email address or a name tied to it, and then you can shoot them a message on your own.

And so, that’s what I do a lot. That’s how I get a lot of the people that I end up talking to is by using a search like this to see, “Hey, who are the people that are doing the things that might be interesting to me to talk to” or “Who is an active user that I haven’t talked to in a while.” Maybe, I’ll shoot them a message and see if they’ll hop on the phone for 15 minutes.

Andrew: I see. So, basically you’re looking at your site and seeing who’s using the area that you’re interested in. They’re probably going to be the right people to talk to about the problem, and they’re also going to be the right people to talk to about how you plan to solve it.

Jason: Exactly. In this case, the power port, we knew you had to have massive amounts of data to want to be able to do this kind of depth of reporting. So, I look for users who have really, really big data sets and have users of our product, and that seemed to be… That was my theory on who will be the best group to talk to.

Andrew: OK. And then, here’s another thing that you guys utilized.

Jason: Yes. So, that is the feedback box, and that’s like our awesome, not- so- secret secret anymore, because we just blogged about it. But this is the Feedbox that you find on every single page on KISSmetrics, and what’s awesome is, is when you put information in there and you write a sentence to us about how we can make this page better for you, if you have any feedback it doesn’t interrupt you from what you’re doing on the site.

Like, you hit submit, and you can go right back to whatever work you’re on. Meanwhile, because it’s a custom thing we built ourselves, I’ll get an email from feedback@kissmetrics.com which has what your username is, what browser you were on, what computer you’re using, and what page you were on our site when you filled it out. So I have all this great, rich information on the user, plus their feedback. And so I can tie that all together to learn exactly what somebody is looking for with the lowest possible friction for them. And so, in this case I was able to look for people who were complaining, or asking for, ways to get deeper access to their data.

Andrew: All right. If you didn’t have all these customers, I want to go back to someone who doesn’t have all these customers. You start off by saying “Who needs this? Who is probably going to have this problem that I have” and then you go hunt for them. Where would you hunt for them if not in your own customer logs?

Jason: So the beauty of the Social Networking Revolution is that there are tons of options. You just have to think “Where does someone like my customer hang out? Whether it’s personally or professionally.” I mentioned earlier, you can search Twitter for people complaining about the market you’re in, or complaining about your competitor. You can also look for meet- up groups that are for the group of people that you want to talk to.

You can go to Linked -In Groups. They are an awesome source if you’ve got a B2B idea. On the consumer side, then, there’s everything from searching Pinterest for people who make pin boards with things like what you’re working on. Like, use all these social graphs, and you know, there is also old-school. You can look for Yahoo Groups, because believe it or not, they’re still heavily used. Google Groups, and then, of course, there is nothing better than your personal network. So, if you have a friend whose friend is a great fit for what you think works, get an input to them. Those people are much more likely to reply to the email, and so you can take advantage of the fact that your social graph will help you have a higher success rate, because you’re not going have 100% success rate if you reach out to them.

Andrew: Speaking of, one more thing and then we’ve got to move on to what questions we ask them and how we make all this useful. You had this issue a while back when you started doing this where you were worried about the number of people who were responding to you when you reached out and said, “Hey, can I interview you?” What was the percent that you were getting?

Jason: Twenty percent.

Andrew: And then you called up Heaton Shaw, who you now work for now at KISSmetrics. Back then he was your mentor, and what did he say about this 20% that you were getting?

Jason: He told me it was great, which really surprised me. I thought I was doing terrible. I was all upset with myself. I was like, “Can I not write an email?” But it turns out, that whenever it’s cold and it has nothing to do with your company, like you’re just reaching out to someone blindly, you’re going to get about a 10-20% response rate, which means for every one or two people you talk to you’re going to need to message ten, so realize the volume game you’re playing, and if it’s through your company, like you’re emailing a user, I generally find you can get a 30-40% response rate.

Andrew: I see, but you don’t get a 100%. I would have expected if it was customers that you would get a 100%, and you don’t even get… What did you say? 20% would be good if you just reach out to strangers on Linked-In who are having a problem that you think you can solve. Even though you are addressing a problem that they are complaining about, maybe on Twitter, A passion that they’ve got that they’re getting together with for a meet-up group, 20% is still, where you probably will end up, if you’re lucky.

Jason: Yeah. Well, I mean, it’s just, essentially the challenge of, you know, people are busy, or not everyone is checking their Linked-In messages. There’s just a million reasons why they might not respond to you. You just have to think about your own personal environment. You don’t respond to every email you get, either.

Andrew: No. Yeah. A lot of people want me to give them feedback on their sites, and I’d love to do it for everyone, but you’re right. As much as I think I do, I don’t. I can’t say “yes” to everyone, and my job is to try to say “yes” to everyone. All right. Back to the big board. So, now we know who we’re going talk to, how we’re going reach out to them, how likely they are to say “yes”. The next big idea is, get your list of questions, so and these are the questions you are going to use to validate if there is a business. So, you have them present-written, Jason? You don’t just make them up on the fly?

Jason: Yeah. That is one of the quickest ways to waste you time getting outside building, as Steve Blank [SP] would say. I think you absolutely have to have a script. You don’t have to follow it to T, but you need to know the key points and the key questions you want to hit on, because you waste the opportunity to learn from a customer when you don’t ask them the right questions.

Andrew: All right, can I show your questions here? I’ve got them on my screen.

Jason: Absolutely.

Andrew: Yeah, we can show them to audience. So let’s bring it up here. Let me clear this out here. Here. I was eager to show you that I got the screenshot of your last company that I embedded it into my program here. So every time I bring up a brand new screenshot we have that.

Jason: You know what? It’s like seeing an old friend. I haven’t seen that site in a while.

Andrew: It was a really well-designed site. It was functional and it was beautiful. I can never say that you guys had to change because I couldn’t find anything on the site or it didn’t make sense. It was a really well- done site. Alright, so this though is your script.

Jason: Yes.

Andrew: Let me see if I can raid a few things off of your script here and we can give this to the audience afterwards right?

Jason: Yes.

Andrew: Great. So here’s some of your questions. You have people questions like “Who uses the people feature? What do they use it for?” You have questions about the problem: “What do you hate about the people feature? What’s working? Why? Are you hitting the wall on the KISSmetrics’ capabilities?” They have questions under solutions: “(?) patterns matching, pitch solutions”. Oh I see. This is a note to yourself about what to ask and you want to ask for any (?), so break this down for us. Tell me what we’re looking at here because as I read this I get a sense of where you’re going but I don’t fully understand.

Jason: So, yeah. I know what you mean. We’ve got to put some meat on the bones.

Andrew: Thanks.

Jason: So, basically my philosophy with the way I approach customer development is to follow these steps of people, problems and solutions. So, you want to learn about the person first, and there’s a lot of reasons for that. It’s kind of the dirty little secret that I think most people don’t know about customer development because you want to learn as much as you can about this person so that when we go back and say “Andrew loved this product and this idea and Jason loved this product and idea but they both have the same job titles at the same sized company, what’s the difference?” you’re going to be really glad you asked these tougher questions to try to find out what separated the groups of people that didn’t care about your idea and the ones that really loved it. So this comes from spending time in the people section learning as many things as you can.

So in the case of KISSmetrics, I’m asking things about “What’s their job title? What industry are they in? What plan are they on?” because that gives us an idea of how big a site they are. “How long have they been a customer?” That also tells us if they were more of an early-adopter or a late-adopter and by learning all these things then about the person, asking them questions, you also warm them up which is a really cool little kind of psychological trick where Andrew you were talking to me this morning before we even started this interview and the whole reason was to get us used to talking to each other a little bit, and I find that you can get a lot juicier questions to your later questions if you start off asking them some softball ones where they just talk about “Tell me about a day in your life. What’s your job responsibilities?” Learning all these little things about their job that seem perfectly harmless not only tells you key things you’re going to figure out that’s the difference that’s like “Oh, Andrew’s more of a content marketer and Jason’s more of a search engine marketing kind of guy”. You learn the differences between people as you get conversational with them and then when you ask the really deep questions about the day-to- day stuff and their budget they’re much less guarded.

Andrew: I see. How do you organize the answers to all these questions? I could understand if you just had a straight up question like “What’s your job title?”, boom, you write it down and you have a clear answer, but once you start getting into things like “What’s your day-to-day like?” how do you organize it all?

Jason: So for me, and I found out that maybe this is a rarity, I’m actually able to take notes while I talk to someone, so I can just sit there and Skype with someone, not that different than what we’re doing right now Andrew, and I can type away at my computer at the same time and take notes on what they’re saying. For those that can’t do that, I know plenty of people who tape record everything that they do in an interview and so by tape recording they can go back over it later and you can use dictation services or all kinds of things so you have those detailed notes and you can review them later.

Andrew: OK. All right. So let’s go back then and see what the next set of questions was. The first one was about people “You want to get to know the person. What’s your job? What’s your typical day like”. Then you say problems.

Jason: Yeah. So the example I kind of gave your here is actually my most recent questions and so they were focused on learning about a new feature we’re working on, but when you’re starting out early on what you really want to do is ask people about what their biggest problems are in their day- to-day in the space you’re working in. So, you know “What are your biggest problems as a marketer today? What are the things that hold you up?”

The whole goal is you want people to talk about problems without you prompting them. So you don’t want to say, hey Andrew, do you have a problem with creating content? You don’t ask that specific question. Instead, your goal is to say, hey, Andrew, what are your biggest problems you have as a marketer? And they’re going to then hopefully talk about what their top two or three problems are. And your goal is that, you know, you’re onto something whenever the problem you think they had is mentioned in that top three. If it’s not, you can still prompt them and ask them, but they’re less likely to have a burning desire for your product if you’re not one of their top problems that they’d love to solve.

Andrew: I see. And then if they don’t have that burning problem, what do you do? I know you continue, but does that mean then that you need to find a different person or a different potential problem?

Jason: Well, once you go through and you’re asking them questions around what their problems are, and they don’t mention yours, what you can do is ask them then finally, say OK, I heard these. What about this? Is this actually a problem for you? And you bring up what your problems that you think about, that you solve, and you can listen and see if it fits for them. And so that’ll help, but in the end, not everyone you talk to is going to be a customer, and like I mentioned earlier, you need to talk to eight to ten people who are customers. And so you can expect that of those eight to 10 you talk to that work out, you’re going to probably have anywhere from two to ten more people who didn’t work out. It all depends on both how lucky you get and how targeted you were. If you already really knew your market, it’s very possible that you could go ten for ten, because you just knew exactly who to talk to. If you’re still learning your market to figure it out, that’s why learning about the person in the beginning’s so important, because you’re going to want to do an autopsy afterward and figure out why was this interview a dud, and the one before was awesome. And you’re going to want to compare the two.

Andrew: By the way, let me see if I can show this. You say, people?

Jason: Yeah. I might’ve just written over it.

Andrew: Say people, problems, and solutions, but this people here in your questions is not the same as this people here. It’s just that this feature, this happens to be one of your features, right?

Jason: Correct. Yes. Sorry. I forgot that, that might be confusing. We have a feature for people, which actually you saw earlier, I use to find customers. That’s totally different. So I was asking them for feedback on the feature, and you notice those are all open-ended questions, which give you room to have the user not be led by you. Because you don’t want to lead the witness, so to speak.

Andrew: I see. All right. But bottom line, what I’m trying to do is figure out who they have, what are their problems around this topic that I’m trying to address, and I’m looking to see will they tell me that the problem that I think they have is really the problem they have? And if they don’t tell me, then it might mean that they’re either the wrong person or I’ve just misidentified the problem.

Jason: Correct. So that’s the next thing, though. By being open ended on the problem questions, you may actually find a better business to go after when you get to the end, because everyone kept naming this same problem. That wasn’t where you started, but man, if everybody says it’s their top problem, you might want to do something about it.

Andrew: What’s the risk of pushing people to tell you what you want them to tell you, you know? That you have this idea, if we have this idea of, say, Mixergy for our course, and we call up potential customers, and we say, so what are your problems, and they tell us, and we think, you know what, they didn’t say that they had this one problem that we have in mind. They must just not be aware of their problem. We should prod them. Or we should say, well. Is that much of a risk when you’re having these conversations where you try to basically get people to say what you want them to say?

Jason: Yeah. I mean, you definitely don’t want to try and force people to say it, because the thing is that after you talk to your customer, especially in your early days, eventually you’re going to start building something. And then once you build it, you’re going to probably try and sell it. And if the very first thing your doing is talking to people and trying to get them to say something is interesting to them or that they want that they really don’t, it’s only going to be all the more miserable and hard to then sell them or anyone else your product later on. So you have to realize that getting 15 minutes of someone’s time to talk to them is ten times easier than getting them to buy something you make. So if you’re struggling in that 15 minutes to get them to say they have that problem, it’s going to be even harder to sell it later. So you’re basically setting yourself up for trouble.

Andrew: All right. And so we talked about the first two sections, which is people and problems. The last category of questions that you have is around solutions. What kind of questions do you ask there?

Jason: Ideally, they’re going to have said that one of their top three problems is a problem that you think you can solve for them. And so what you then do is you can introduce your solution that you’ve created. That may be mock-ups of a potential new feature or what your product would look like. It can also be that you have a demo that you can show them. Or it can just be loosely talking to them about it. One of my favorite questions is if you could wave a magic wand, what would the solution to your problem be? And when you do that, people start imagining what’s the perfect solution for them. It gets them out of this horrible mechanism that customers always have a problem with. I do it, and people ask me, is that…

They start trying to create the feature in their head that your product should have, and you don’t want them to do that. But when you ask them to wave a magic wand, they think about the perfect solution. They don’t think about what they think is possible, and you can learn a lot from that. And so, the whole point of the solution section is now you know what their problems are, now you know who this person is. Let’s talk about if the solution you have fits or what the solution they need might look like. So, you keep hearing that first problem over and over again from everyone.

Well, ask them would something like this solve your problem, and you can give them an example or try to describe it to them and see if it fits, and that will help you figure out what to develop for them.

Andrew: So, sticking to this one issue that you are addressing, who are the people, what are their problems, and what are the solutions that you heard as you’re having these conversations? What are the people you talked to? What are the problems they told you? What are the solutions that they wanted through the magic wand?

Jason: Yeah. I’m sorry. What’s the question?

Andrew: So, I’m saying, can you fill this in with some real life information, like who are the people you talked to about this one issue that you’re addressing, that you started off the program telling us about? What are the problems you heard about through those conversations, and what are the solutions that people wished for?

Jason: So, like I said in the beginning, the sales team came to us with this group of people that wanted to do more with our product than what we currently could do.

Andrew: Who are they?

Jason: So, that was the group we were talking to. What we found the pattern was is that you had these guys, I call them data jockeys. They’re people who love to live in Excel spreadsheets. And so, we found those were the ones with the biggest problems because they wanted to just go crazy with their data. They just wanted to get a deep [??] in it and just filter through. They’re the people who love looking for the needle in the haystack, for the perfect answer to their analytics questions. And so, those are the people we found. The problem they had was that our reporting was great for all the high level stuff, for generating reports they could share with the rest of their team in getting more people in the company data driven.

What we weren’t able to do for them was allow them to dive deep and answer specific questions. And so, we found that their biggest burning problem was, “You have all of my data. I can’t get at all of it to answer these tough questions.” And so, what I ended up doing then was talking to them and trying to understand, “Well, OK, so you have these problems. What kind of problems are you trying to solve, like what are the questions? So, I mentioned that example earlier where you run an A/B test on a landing page, and you send two different kinds of ads towards those landing pages. Well, based on our current product, we were only able to let you look at the results of the A/B test or the results of the ad campaign, and they wanted to see both at the same time which may show that one ad campaign did better on a set of landing pages than an ad campaign coming from Facebook might have.

Andrew: I see.

Jason: And so, we started collecting these use cases, and that allowed us to start to see how this product might need to shape out in order to solve their problems. And also, by learning these guys were comfortable in Excel spreadsheet, we learned that, well, the output doesn’t need to be a pretty visualization like a lot of the gorgeous stuff that’s been designed here at KISSmetrics in our general reporting. We knew we didn’t need a visualization necessarily because these guys were going to be comfortable working in an Excel environment where you just have a slew of rows and columns.

Andrew: Ah, I see. Couldn’t you then in this case say to these people, “What should we build to give you the data that you’re looking for?” Why couldn’t you say that? It seems like these people would be the perfect ones to ask that kind of question.

Jason: There are times where people make MVPs which is like the Lean Startup Methodology kind of phrase for a minimum viable product. It’s something someone hacks together to be an initial solution. Sometimes, people have done that, and we can take a look at what they’ve done to try to do a basic solution. We have a data export feature at KISSmetrics, and so some people were using that to build their own custom query system to build this themselves outside of our product. In general, you want to be careful asking customers exactly what feature they want just because they don’t have the vision and the understanding and the capabilities of your product, so they might suggest things that actually don’t fully solve their problem. They just think that that’s the best that you could probably do for them.

Andrew: I see. OK. All right. Wow. These guys are actually exporting and doing all kinds of crazy analysis on the data for you so you got a sense of what they were working for, what would solve their problems.

Jason: Yeah. And when you’re starting out, you may actually find that there are people who, they don’t have a product like KISSmetrics that they’re pulling data from to do this. They may just be doing it on their own. I know like, for instance, there were a lot of things I did at OneForty when I was in charge of metrics and stuff that I was doing manually to keep track of things that now there’s really cool products that do them instead. So if you find a potential customer you’re talking to is doing something manually, always ask to see what it looks like because whatever they’re doing manually, they probably are wasting hours of their day on and will be very, very happy to pay you to make it go away and just do it quickly and have a solution in front of them.

Andrew: All right. Let’s go back to the big board here. There it is. It [??] for a second. Next step is set up your meeting with prospects. So you email the bunch of prospects that you got intros from the sales team for. What happened there?

Jason: So the sales team was easy. Since these people are already talking to us about these problems, they basically said ‘Our Product Manager would like to talk to you to see if this is something that we can build’. And that’s like pretty much the coolest thing people can hear from the sales guys is that, you know, man, the product people want to hear from you on what you want. Like that generally gets people really excited

Andrew: I see. They think you’re like them being heard. They feel a connection to KISSmetrics, this company that’s been building this product for them.

Jason: Yes. It’s ownership. It’s a point of pride. Man, I could influence the product? That sounds awesome. I know in other companies that I’ve gotten emails, I love getting to getting to talk to their product people or whoever is working on it to give them feedback because you feel like wow, I can influence what this is going to be like? Man, those late nights when I’ screaming at the computer, they can actually hear me. The thing is though, that wasn’t the only way that I was reaching out to people and so there was only a certain number of people sales can introduce me to, which was going to have rave results. So I also did some cold emailing and so I know Andrew, I think you have a screen shot of kind of an example of an email I sent out to people.

Andrew: Yes. This is one of the emails, the actual email that you sent out to someone.

Jason: Yes. So this is for that other people report that we wanted to use to get feedback on. You can change very little of this and repurpose it for your own good. So for me, our subject line was ‘Feedback on the KISSmetrics people report’. I find generally if I put a question there, if you have an existing product mention your product because then they realize that it’s somebody reaching out in regards to what you’re doing. You’re just going to try and make it not sound like a survey because most people hate doing surveys but they’re happy to talk to you.

And so what I usually do is, you can see I open up by introducing who I am and so by merely saying I’m the Product Manager, they know they’re talking to somebody they can influence. And they’re going to be able to have an impact on the conversation and what’s going to happen at the company because of who I am.

And so I pointed out I noticed they’re a heavy user. Like I said before, we’re looking for people that have big accounts and we’re heavy users of our product. So telling them that shows them that you took the time to do a little research on them and now you’re interested to talk to them. And so I said ‘Hey. We’re looking to improve that feature so I’d love your help in learning what you love and hate about it so we can make it even better for you’.

So I’m trying to make it sound like we’re going to do them a favor if they do me a small favor. I know, one of my other mentors back in Boston, a guy named John Pendergrass, he thought me that ask for help. People actually in general are very giving and very helpful. You just have to kind of tap into that psyche of help your fellow man or woman. And so he always encouraged me to put the word help in my emails because that generally makes people realize that you’re not trying to sell them anything. You’re just trying to learn from them and so I always try to ask people ‘Help me learn about you’ and that generally gets a better response from people.

Andrew: I see.

Jason: And so that’s the first paragraph. The second paragraph is just, assume they are going to talk to you. Don’t say “Oh, if you have time let’s talk”. No. Say “Let me know what time works for you and I’m happy to talk to you then”. This is I’m not being obnoxious here but I am being forceful saying of course you’re going to talk to me. And I use this great service called Tongle which will show my calendar in real time so if I sent out a batch of like 25 of these and people start booking times, I don’t have this awkward thing where I’m trying to say “Well. I’m available from 2 to 5 on this day and 3 to 6 this day. But someone just replied and wanted that 3 o’clock time.” It saves all that scheduling issues and so this keeps it a clean short email, which makes people think that probably the conversation can be clean and short as well.

Andrew: All right. Let’s bring us back up here and adjust your camera. Let’s make sure that we got. OK. All right. Anything else that we need to know about how to solicit people for meetings or is that basically it?

Jason: I think that the best thing is again focus on being about help, not sales so never make it sound like you’re making a sales pitch, or sound anything like a sales pitch. Try to make it sound genuine. The more it sounds like you’re sending it to one individual person, the better your results will be. If you make it sound like a form note, people will recognize it as a form note, get annoyed, and be less likely to respond.

Andrew: How much of your day, by the way, or your week, is spent making calls like this?

Jason: Sending out these emails, you mean?

Andrew: I mean following up and actually meeting people.

Jason: I’d say before [??] got me some help sending out these messages, it was about 10% of my time sending messages to people trying to set up more calls. I would say the calls themselves is probably 30-40% of my time.

Andrew: OK. And the rest? The other 60% of your week? What is that?

Jason: It’s doing things like reviewing what happened in those interviews, going over it with other teammates, and all kinds of other product responsibilities that I have at KISSmetrics, which are things like talking about what we’re actually building right now to make sure that everything I learned a couple weeks ago is actually getting conveyed to our design team, or making sure that the negotiations with engineering go well. It’s always a trade-off of this thing I really, really want, and this thing that will be nice to have, and does engineering have time for the ‘nice to have’, and making sure we actually build what is most important.

Andrew: What do you say to an entrepreneur who’s got a smaller team, maybe a lot of them are outsourced, who says, ‘I don’t have as much time to make these phone calls. Of course KISSmetrics can do it, because they’ve got Jason. They can hire someone full time to do it.’ Can entrepreneurs do this, do it well, and not have it take up 30-40% of their week?

Jason: Early on you certainly can. One of the things is that I spend this much time on it because we have such a big product now. We’ve got five or six different reports. That’s a lot of things to talk about, and to talk to people about. When you’re starting out and you just have one feature, honestly, the biggest thing that’s going to be your bottleneck is how fast engineering can build whatever you want. While you’re waiting for engineering to finish building version 1.0, you might as well go talk to customers. In the early history of KISSmetrics, actually, while they were busy building version one of KISSmetrics, they created Kiss Insights, because they had time on their hands, and so they went and talked to customers, found another column, and created Kiss Insights.

Andrew: I see.

Jason: I would say you can’t afford not to make time, because when you only have probably one engineer, maybe it’s your Tech co-founder, you better make sure that one thing you spend all this time frantically building is what people want. The only way that’s going to happen is if you make time to talk to people.

Andrew: Back to the big board. Next thing you say is, “During a customer development interview, start with people.” Is this what you mentioned earlier as I was going through your questions?

Jason: Yeah. What I like to do is, I like to do a lot of research on people beforehand. What’s great is things like Reportive make your work ridiculously easy. Once you have an email address, Reportive will just pop up details.

Andrew: Reportive is that plug-in for Gmail that tells you who you’re emailing with. Once you type in an email address it starts giving you all their social network info.

Jason: Right. Honestly, the social graph is fantastic for finding out the background of people. I live specifically on LinkedIn a ton, because if you go to LinkedIn, you find out what is their current role at their company, and what are there past roles. That gives you a lot of background of who they are. You can also then see if they have a blog or a Twitter account. You can see what they Tweet about. When I talked about [??] Jockeys being important for the power report, there’s a hash tag on Twitter called hash tag Measure, and that’s where some of the most hardcore analytics people hang out on Twitter. They Tweet using that hash tag. People who tweet on the Measure has tag were more likely to turn out to be people who wanted our power report.

You can do this homework before you even talk to the person to learn all these basics, which means when you get on the interview and you have that precious time of maybe 15 or 20 minutes, or if you’re lucky, 30 minutes, to talk to someone, you’re not doing 101 questions with them. You’re not just saying, ‘Oh, what’s your name? What’s your role in your company?’ If you can finance these questions in the five minutes before your interview, you can spend that five minutes in the actual interview probing deeper around things like, ‘What is the actual role like? What do you do day to day? I saw you Tweet about Measure. Are you really hardcore in this stuff? Do you like surfing my sequel queries?’ You can ask better questions because you got answers yourself to the higher level stuff.

Andrew: We weren’t sure who’s LinkedIn to pull, or maybe you asked us to get this, so we got mine.

Jason: Yeah.

Andrew: Actually, I’m glad that we did this instead of one of your customers, because something stands out for me. The Argentina on there, which is where I lived up until recently. If you saw something personal about the person who you’re talking to, would you bring that up in conversation? Would you spend a little bit of time asking them about how Argentina is or if they happen to like baseball, if they saw the game last night? How much personal stuff would you talk about?

Jason: Honestly, I don’t do a whole lot. I do, if people are international, I definitely bring that up a little bit, because it is always interesting to get the international perspective on things.

Andrew: Mm-hmm.

Jason: I often make jokes about what time is it over there? I was talking to someone from Israel yesterday and they’re like nine or ten hours ahead of us, so it always gets kind of messy in my head when I have an 8:00 a.m. call and it’s 6:00 p.m. where they are.

Andrew: Right.

Jason: So, I end up making a little bit of small talk on that sort of stuff, but in general I guess I don’t as much. But I think that’s also because I’m working on a B2B product. If I was doing consumer, I definitely would be much more interested in talking about that sort of stuff.

Andrew: I see.

Jason: You’re definitely right though. That’s the kind of gems you want to look for when you look at someone’s profile, is what’s that little thing that makes them a little different that might be welded to the conversation or it might not be.

But you want to note it because – oh, it turns out international users are more interested in this, or South American users are more interested, or whatever. You never know what the pattern might be, so knowing things like that can actually be really valuable, and it is worth asking a little bit about it to make sure, “Oh, Andrew, you’re not in Argentina anymore? Okay, that’s actually good to know.”

Andrew: I see. Later on we’re going to talk about how to find patterns. But I’m wondering if, as you’re having these phone calls, do you start looking for patterns or does that interfere with your data collection because you’re going to start to force patterns where they don’t belong?

Jason: I will a little bit. Like, if I have a couple of interviews in a day and by the third interview I’m hearing the same things, I’ll definitely bring them up and try to follow the same flow I did earlier. But in general, unless somebody really clicks where I’m like, “Man, I’ve heard that somewhere before,” I try not to because I just find that…

I’m already taking notes while we’re talking and I’m trying to follow script, but then also kind of ask a few side questions that come to mind based on those initial sets of questions. There’s just not room to think about another thing, so I generally avoid trying to do too much of that just because it gets me off my train of thought.

But then, as soon as I finish the interview, one of the things I like to do is kind of look for those patterns. That way, next time I know to look for them, but I’ve done all the heavy thinking on the side.

Andrew: I see. All right, let’s go back to the big board. So, basically we’re breaking down the three things that you look for in your conversation. We just talked about people. The next big set of questions that you have is problems, and then we’re going to talk about uncovering their top three problems. That’s what you’re trying to do in your phone call?

Jason: OK.

Andrew: Is that right?

Jason: Yes.

Andrew: OK. So, how do you do that?

Jason: Yeah. So, basically once you’ve got them warmed up and you feel like you’ve learned as much as you can about this person you’re talking to and what their day-to-day is like, now it’s time to find out their problems. So, whatever market you’re in, basically your goal is to talk about their top problems. So, I just straight up asked them, “What are your top three problems that you’re facing with analytics for you and your company?” Whatever your market is, you can just insert that after “what are you’re top three problems”. Actually, I’m amazed at how well it works because people immediately, they pause and they think for a second, and they go, “Hmm. One, this. Definitely got to be this. Two, it’s this. Three, it’s that.” It’s amazing how quickly people can prioritize in their head.

The beauty of that is, by not really prompting them or leading them along the way to your problems you want them to say, it really ends up being very natural, where it’s like, “Well, what are the things that are my biggest pain in the butts at work everyday? Well, what are the biggest things that stink at home when I’m trying to get the grocery list together?” Whatever it is, you get them in that environment and they start to think about it, and things just naturally boil up. As those things boil up, they tell you that. You can learn a lot from them because it is really their most pressing problems.

Because in the end, what you’re learning here is what you’re going to sell later, and selling can be anything from, “Well, that’s when I go to Google and I search for this solution then,” or, “I search for an answer to this problem.” You want them to say these problems because those problems are what they’re going to eventually seek out solutions for and you want to be that solution.

Andrew: OK, so today if you’re going to be researching an idea for creating a site that offered a directory of Twitter apps, a third part of your call would include a question like, “What are your top three problems in finding Twitter apps”? Or would it be more general than that? “What are your top three problems with Twitter?”

Jason: Yeah. Sometimes I go even higher. I say, “What are your top three problems in social media. Because at OneForty, I ended up talking to a lot of social media managers and marketers at different companies. They had many responsibilities outside of just Twitter. It was interesting to learn. If you ask just what your biggest problems are in Twitter, you’ll find out what those are, but if only 10% of their time is spent on Twitter, that’s important to know. The more I learned how to do this at OneForty, the more I would zoom out, because I wanted to know, ‘Are you spending all your time on Facebook or Twitter? Are you spending more time on Foursquare now?’ Now I would have been asking them about Pinterest too, because you want to know about how much mindshare your product has in a person’s day.

Andrew: I see. So, if I started out by asking something as specific as, ‘What are your top three problems with Twitter apps?’, or even a little more general, like, ‘What are your top three problems with Twitter?’, I would completely miss out on someone who would say, ‘Hey, you know what? I’m over Twitter. I have a problem with Pinterest. I don’t know how to…’, and then they start telling me all of the things they don’t know how to do and leading me to a potential solution with Pinterest that’s much bigger than Twitter.

Jason: Yeah. You end up wanting to have a balance of that, because people can totally go off on diatribes on things that are completely unrelated to what you were actually looking for. You want to rope them in and keep them on your subject. Basically, you’re going to need to do some trial and error on if you want to go with the 30,000 foot view, the 1,000 foot view, or the 10 foot view, to get people to talk about your space. If you were talking to someone in operations, you probably want to specifically say, “What are your top problems in procurement?” if you want them to talk about procurement problems. At the same time, you should probably do a little bit of your homework after you ask that and say, “How much of your time do you spend on procurement,” or, “How much time do you spend on Twitter as a social media manager?” That way you’re hedging your bet against the fact that this may not be a big burning problem. It’s just their biggest problem in your specific market. You want to hedge your bets both ways. You have to probe around that sort of stuff to make sure that those problems are big problems for them, and not just problems in that narrow space that you ask them about.

Andrew: By the way, as we’re talking, I’m remembering how I first heard about you, and how we connected. It’s Laura, the founder of OneForty, who in her interview said, “You know what? It was time for us to move to a different product from OneForty. It’s Jason who helped us figure out what to do.” You went out and made phone calls to potential customers. You understood them. You got inside their head. You came up with a collection of potential great businesses, and you narrowed it down to one business that you guys eventually launched, and that’s what got bought. Is that the way it happened, basically? Do I understand it right from my interview?

Jason: It’s the romantic fairy tale version, I guess.

Andrew: Really? Give me the reality.

Jason: There was more to it. That was a nine month journey where a lot of different things happened along the way, but yeah, in a lot of ways it was. Basically, it was September 2010, and we kind of realized, “Man, we have a lot of users.” OneForty had over 100,000 people sign up from Twitter to use our site, and log-in and write reviews. We still couldn’t find a business for a lot of reasons we talked about earlier. We had to have the intellectual honesty that traffic kept going up, but that was a vanity metric. It wasn’t actually telling us how the business was doing.

What was telling us how the business was doing was, we were only making a couple hundred bucks a month off of affiliate fees, and so we knew we had to try something different. We ended up looking at a bunch of different market options and saying, “All right, well, how are we going to make a decision here? We need to get some data.” We used this interview process to go talk to people. We looked at having a more B to D focus, which is where OneForty ended up heading to build the social app that would help you manage all your other social apps. We looked at, “Could we be an app store for other APIs?” We looked at internationalization. “Could we just be really big in Japan? Would that solve all of our problems?”

Andrew: When you had these theories, it was this set of questioning and this process that helped you figure out whether there was a real problem there that you guys could address, or if it was just an idea that was exciting for you internally?

Jason: Yeah. Basically we used this line of questioning. Laura used her awesome network to get us into a lot of really cool companies to talk to, and then we did some of our own outreach. Laura would sit in on some of the calls. Otherwise, there was a lot of debriefing that I would sit down and try to explain to her what happened. I take copious amounts of notes. I summarize my notes, and then I share my key take-aways with the whole team. There were all these layers of information we tried to share, so everyone knew what was going on.

Andrew: I think the part where you’re saying it’s the ‘romantic version’ of the story is that maybe there was an implication in the way that I expressed it that as soon as you discovered this great idea, ‘bam.’ There was a world of businesses who beat a path to your door, and said, “Can we buy you out?” It wasn’t exactly like that. You found a business that had a problem. You had a buyout afterwards, but it wasn’t necessarily because that solution was crazy in demand by acquirers. Am I guessing right?

Jason: Yeah. I mean, honestly, the search for the new business kind of went on the entire fall, and that was just a painful process because we were waiting to get this information and make a decision. Once we made a decision, it was kind of a long arduous journey to get to the point where they actually were building that other product that would be interesting to HubSpot.

Andrew: OK. HubSpot, who acquired you?

Jason: Yeah.

Andrew: I don’t mean to imply that this solution ends up leading to a billion dollar buyout overnight. I know that there were other issues going on at OneForty at the time. Laura talked about it in her interview.

Jason: Okay.

Andrew: I’ll leave it to her to express it. Yeah, she was extremely open about what it was. But she also said that you were fantastic at coming up with this whole process. At having these phones calls, at figuring out where the real business was, and as a result Heaton Shah snapped you up as soon as he had the opportunity for KISSmetrics. Because I know that they’re really heavily into this process.

Jason: Yeah. Well, that was the thing. It was like you said earlier, Heaton was my mentor so I guess he kind of got a first-person view of it all. But the bottom line was, we’re trying to make an intelligent decision with what to do with the business, and you have to go out and get the information. The last thing you want, the thing that rips start-ups apart is whenever opinions roll. Because how do you decide if my opinion or your opinion matters most? You can’t. At best, you get the HIPPO syndrome, the highest paid person in the organization makes the decision, and that just leads to resentment and a lot of awkward conversations.

Andrew: In smaller companies, it ends up being, “Where am I most passionate?” Then I start to believe that the world was really there.

Jason: Yes.

Andrew: Or, “I know I found myself doing this.”

Jason: Exactly.

Andrew: I say, “Well, you know what? The world might want this.” Then I start and I go, “Huh. I can really do this.” Then I think, “Hey, you know what? I have these skills. Finally, I’ve got a platform to use them.” I start building a building and then I put it out there, and I realize nobody gives a rat’s ass.

Jason: Yes. Yes. That’s the thing is the only way to really tell is with data, so that’s the analytics on your site to learn what’s going on. Then, it’s also talking to customers and finding out, who’s passionate. Who’s jumping out of the phone being like, “I want this. When can I get this?”

All the conversations that you do and everything you research, the goal is really just to find those people that are ready to jump through the screen and say, “When can I get my hands on this?” That’s the level of excitement you’re really looking for. One of the things I always tell people when I’ve kind of given presentations and stuff on this kind of subject is like, it’s like if someone says, “Oh, that’s kind of interesting,” that’s the really polite way of saying, “I don’t care.”

That’s the really polite way of being like, “Well, I don’t want to be mean, but I want to get off this phone call. So, I’m just going to say that sounds interesting and leave it at that.” So, if you learn two things from my interview today, I hope one of them is that if you hear “That’s interesting,” when you talk to someone, you know that that means they don’t care. That isn’t good signal.

Andrew: Okay. So, in this section before we move on to the next section, what we’re looking for are the big problems. You specifically will ask people, “What are your top three problems with…” and you’ll go and you’ll probe even further. But your goal is to do a lot of writing on their problem so that you walk away with a real understanding of where their pain is, where their frustration is.

Jason: Yep.

Andrew: Okay. All right. Anything else before we go on to the big board?

Jason: No. The whole thing through this process, you want to have really big ears, so to speak. You want to be listening a lot more than you’re talking.

Andrew: All right, then I’ve got to do more listening also. Let’s go on to the next big idea.

Jason: Sure.

Andrew: Once we’ve done that, the next step is to introduce your product or solution. So, let’s bring you back up here on the screen here. How did you do it? How do we do it?

Jason: At this point, basically what you have is you’ve hopefully heard them say that one of the things you think… You should have a bunch of problems that you think your product solves, and you want to see if the people you talk to mention those problems. So, ideally we’re going to assume that you have now had someone say that they have your problem.

Ideally, they will have said it unprompted, but it’s not the end of the world if you had to bring it up. Either way, you’re still going to present the solution because, hey, they’re on the phone. You never know. But the whole goal is you want to try and line up the problems they said they have with your solution.

So, you’re going to say, “Hey, okay. Cool. So, you said you have this problem.” In the case of KISSmetrics, they wanted this super report to wow them and slice and dice their data more. So you say, “Okay, so you mention one of your top problems is the ability to dig deeper into your data.”

So, then I would tell them about this solution, which we had this mock-up of the power report that I was able to show them and say, “Hey, if you were able to do this, do you think this would actually help solve your problem?”

Andrew: This is what you’d bring up that, “Do I have this right? This is what you would bring up. Do I have this right?” This is what you would bring up and you would say, “If you could do this, would this solve your problem?”

Jason: Right, so I showed them and, you know, I [??] this actually looks like something that you’d understand what it does. So, this report, like, you can see at the top, you know, you can select the date range, and then you have these columns and segments which would be the rows. And we said, OK, we’re going to let you chose any metric [??] that you can find on [??] and make that columns in the spread sheet you’re going to build. And you’re going to able to actually segment that, you’re going to be able to drill down into dotmetrics so that you can only show a certain group so, where it says population, it is going to allow you to drill in based on any events and properties in [??] which are just things that happen on your site and characteristics.

So, it might be property, it might be that someone got a ten percent off discount which they signed up; an event may be that they clicked a certain button. And so, we were like, okay, you’re going to be able to create a whole bunch of columns based on these metrics, and you are going to be able to filter them based on specific characteristics that you know we’re tracking on the site. Then you are going to be able to segment that group, based on other things on our site.

So, you are going to be able to drill in and we told them you can do up to three segments, Steve, on different questions you have. So, like the example I used earlier was, they may do, one segment would be the AB test they ran and then the next segment would be, which ad campaign they came from. So, you can compare both the AB test and the ad campaign against all those metrics you chose in your column. I know that is a mouthful, but the added jockeys, the guys that get really excited about this stuff would look at this and go, oh, that’s awesome, I want to do that. And other people would look at me and their eyes will kind of glaze over and they would be like, what is this? And that was really kind of the instant moment when I knew the difference between someone who would be really good for this product and someone who is not really ready for it.

That’s the key about when you show the solution, is you’re engaging interest. So, what’s great is, if you have like videos [??] going, you know, I can look at Andrew and say, hey, does he look engaged and interested. Well, he is leaning forward, so he must be curious, he’s paying attention. You know, you look for any signs and indicators of strong interest. If you’re just on the phone, look at the rate at which their talking. If they start talking faster, it means they are excited. If, you know, they have a higher energy in their voice, again, their interested. If they are sitting there like, oh, that’s, that’s kind of, that’s cool, okay, like, they don’t care, like, just think about it the same way you would be, you know, paying attention to see if someone is interested in the general conversation you are having.

That’s what you’re looking for, like, basic signals of interest. Because the whole goal of the solution thing is to see who is the most amped up for your product. What I found was, the guys who look at our power port, mock up there, and say, oh my god, when can I do that? Those are you’re great people. You want to find more of those. So we double down on people like that and, you know, went back and looked at people and said who are these people that are like that. And that’s when you kind of figure out, who’s your target market early on for this product. Who is going to help you build it because they are going to mostly [??] their hands on it even when it’s a little messy and not perfect.

Andrew: I see, okay, that does take you back to that first part of the, first part of the three parts of questioning where you start to say, all right, I see some people getting excited. Let’s go back and figure out what they all have in common and those are the guys we are going to talk to. What I’m wondering, Jason, is, this is a pretty nice design. How well designed does it have to be to show it to them? Can it just be a sketch on a piece of paper? Can it be an idea that you express to them? Does it have to look this beautiful, this pretty?

Jason: No, no. We’re lucky, we actually have three designers at [??]. So we can get away with some really pretty stuff. And this is actually a little further along in the process actually, this screenshot that I have here. If you consider the, honestly, I had literally taken a little [??] notebook, open it up when I’m next to someone and draw on a solution. And that’s been how I’m showing people my, like, first idea for what the solution would be and that’s actually worked really well. You can do all kinds of things. I have a friend who literally just used kenotopia [SP] which is a set of templates that you can use in keynote [??] to mock up your solution. And he basically just threw clip art into a mock up of an iPhone and used that, and he sold Universal Studios on it.

Andrew: I see, he basically said to Universal Studios, if we built this, does this solve the problem that you just told me about and they say, yes, absolutely. And that’s when you know what you need to build.

Jason: Exactly. It’s amazing, seriously. Like even [??], like I said, he got paid cash for universal records based on an i-phone app that he had not built, that he had only mocked up in keynote?? Now, granted, he is pretty slick with it, so he was able to do some things like transitions, to show, it looked just like the iPhone, but it’s not that hard, you can do it. So don’t be afraid to show something really basic and just see if it works. Because you are going to learn a lot from them on what they do and don’t like and whether it actually addresses the problem and why or why not. You just want something to spark the conversation around what the solution will be and the idea is that you have a little something for them to go on and grasp so that they don’t have to totally try to come up with it in their head on their own.

Andrew: I see. OK. So I’m imagining in the first set of conversations that you’re having with people where you’re trying to uncover their problems, you’re not walking in there with ready made solutions, are you at that point?

Jason: No, not usually.

Andrew: At that point you’re going to sketch out with them on the call or with them in person on a napkin.

Jason: Yeah. Or what actually can happen too is sometimes they have the solution. So I mentioned earlier when sometimes people will use like Excel spreadsheet and stuff to build their own solutions, sometimes early on if people have that you can make the solution part of the conversation about what they did there and say “OK. Tell me why did you do it this way and what are the things that you just can’t do on Excel that if it could be done right you would include in it?” You can make the conversation then about their own MVP versus yours.

Andrew: Do you ever come back to them afterwards with the solution and say “Hey, you know. We all spent some time internally and is this what you’re asking for?” and show them that?

Jason Yes, absolutely. You should totally do that, especially for the ones you think are the most interested people because one of the best ways to gage how much you really learned in your conversation is that you send this stuff to someone afterwards and see if they follow up. They were excited in the call, [??] and sent them stuff and never replied to my email? That shows they didn’t really care. But if otherwise they get off the call ‘Wow, this person’s already emailed me saying Jason it was so great to talk to you. I can’t wait to use this. Please let me know when it’s out there’, you know you got something.

Andrew: I see. All right. Anything else before we move on to the next big idea?

Jason: No. I mean, this is the cool part that I know every entrepreneur gets excited about. I think the hardest part is you have to wait until the end to get to this. It’s so important that you don’t pollute the earlier questions and answers with your solution until the end. It’s really, really intentional that this is step 3. It’s important that you start out and you learn these other things first because otherwise, once you showed them the solution, that’s all they’re going to be able to think about, which means that they won’t think of their top problems properly anymore if you introduce the solution before that. And they won’t be as open to talk about their problems. They are going to rush it.

Andrew: One more thing, Jason. You said you’ll have phone calls, Skype calls, in person meetings. How do you prefer to do it and is it the same for every stage of your understanding? So maybe the first conversations are done on the phone and the last ones are in person. How does it change and what do you prefer?

Jason: I guess it’s two sides. Ideally I would do every one in person but travel time to Israel would be probably a little too long to [??] to let me do a [??] interview there with someone. In order to get a wide variety of people to talk to, you’re going to end up depending a lot more on Skype than anything else. I prefer Skype with video to most because I can see facial expressions and stuff, which I love reading and then I can also do screen shares to show them things. But I’ll settle for phone calls and when I can do in person, I love to do in person. Because there’s so much more rapport you can build when they’re face to face, side to side with someone. And generally you can get more time from them. If you come to their office, I found out you can get 45 minutes out of you and really learn a lot that way.

Andrew: All right. Let’s go back to the big board. Next big idea is you got to analyze the data and look for patterns. Tell us about that.

Jason: You take all these notes. Maybe you do recordings and have someone transcribe. Whatever you do, hopefully you got a really detailed record of what you just have on this conversation. Some people actually bring a person along just to be note taker. Whatever works, just realize how important it is to do not depend on just your memory. I know I personally have the memory of a goldfish so I’m pretty bad on remembering things but no one is perfect and specially if you go and talk to 10 or 20 people, you’re not going to keep straight who said what and like those valuable nuggets. So make sure you have notes because that’s where the pattern matching comes in. And so what I end up doing is every couple of interviews, I go over all the interviews and I look for key patterns and I say “What do I keep seeing and hearing in these interviews?”.

And so what I do is try and summarize each interview with the 5 or 10 things that stood out most in the interview. And from that, I’m looking for repeatable patters that I can use to start to think about what a solution is going to be or what are the common patterns that come up. Everybody who’s jumping out of their chair wanting this, is this kind of person. It really is just a matter of reviewing what you have and highlighting what matters.

So what I’ll do is I’ll look at my notes and the first thing I’ll do is as soon as I hang up the phone, I’ll clean them up. I’ll make the bullet points really nice and neat and I’ll bold things that were really interesting. Then I’ll come back later and I’ll summarize the takeaways saying ‘OK. What were the things that really stood out? What were the patterns I started to notice that resonated a lot?’ and I’ll summarize those at the top of each interview. Need it a lot. And I’ll summarize those at the top of each interview. Then what I’m going to do is, after I’ve done a bunch of these, I’ll go back over all of them and say, like, “OK. What were the things that stood out across all the interviews?” Like, “What did I keep putting in all my summaries that stood out?” And I’ll piece all those together and that’s when you start to really notice the pattern. OK. So we’re talking about data jockeys, at big companies, really have this problem. And, they’re generally on KISSmetrics every single day.

Once I find those patterns, I know what I’m looking for, and can also then say, “Hey! So when it was those specific guides, their most important feedback was the ability to go three segments deep, not two. And the ability to drill in and more easily set the population [??]” Whatever it is, you’re looking for the things you hear commonly with the people that this resonates with most. Your goal is to be hyper-focused on the people that are most excited about your product. \

Andrew: So it’s who’s most excited? What do they have in common? And what gets them super excited? What’s the problem that they’re most pained by? What’s the solution that gets them most excited?

Jason: Exactly.

Andrew: At this point do you say to yourself, “Are there enough data jockeys out in the world who are also going to be online for me to make it worth my while to pursue it?” Or do you leave that for afterwards, in a different conversation to say, “Is this a big enough market to pursue?”

Jason: That’s definitely, you know, you have to be intellectually honest with yourself. And that is exactly one of the things you need to do then, is you need ask yourself if the group you found, either, is that group big enough on their own? Or, is there a way to expand from just that group? You know, you always have your early adopters for any product.

Andrew: Mm-hmm. (affirmative)

Jason: And you end up then expanding to a broader market. So you need to ask yourself, “Are these people too small and narrow a group? And can I expand this to be interesting to other people? Or are they big enough on their own, and this is great?” So what we found with ours is data jockeys are a big enough part of our existing user base that it’s worthwhile for us to build this feature. But, in the long term, we need to make this feature easy enough to understand that those people I talked about, where their eyes glazed over, and they were lost. We need to find a way to educate them to potentially be able to use this a little bit, as well.

Andrew: I see.

Jason: And that forced us to be honest with ourselves, that the way we designed it, we don’t want to go too far towards a super duper power tool, that only a handful of people are going to be able to use.

Andrew: All right. Let me see if there’s anything else in this section that I want to ask you about. No, I think that’s basically it. You just end up cleaning up your notes afterwards, looking for patterns. And then, what you’re trying to do is come up with a document that says: Who’s having the biggest problem? What exactly is this problem that they’re most frustrated by? What’s the solution that they’re most excited about?

Jason: Yes. And this is the point when I really engage the rest of the team. I want the developers and designers to understand what’s going on and what the feedback is? And the biggest thing they always want is, they want to know the big problems. Who they’re building it for. And what are the use cases. So it’s really helpful for them to understand, how are people going to use this? Because they need that in mind when they build the solutions. They don’t accidentally build it in a way that you can’t do some of the things that people really want to.

Andrew: OK? And all of this applies, of course, to even someone who has no business, no idea yet, or maybe not a solid idea yet. Can they still find the people who they want to go after? We want to build solutions for. And they probe them, looking for their pain. They want to understand why they have that pain. What are the top three problems they have in the area that the entrepreneur’s looking to address? And then they want to show them some potential solutions and say, “Is this? Should I build a business based on this? Is this the kind of thing that you need to solve this big, painful problem?”

And then once you have that, you may not go back to your team of three designers, and I don’t know how many developers you have at KISSmetrics, but you may go back to the friend, or consultant who you’ve hired as a designer and the team of developers who you might have hired overseas, or maybe your co-founder who’s going to develop this out. But basically all of this process, and we have 1 more step, that’s the way it would be done by a fresh entrepreneur with a brand new business idea.

Jason: Yes. The whole goal is to figure out what you want to build for people, before you actually invest the time in building it. This is going to help you make it so that time you invest, like, if you’re outsourcing or something, you’re probably investing your own money in trying to get this built. Might as well make it worth your while. And this is the best way to learn how, you know, what you actually should build.

Andrew: OK. I can even see that it would have helped me at Mixergy to have done something like this before I launched it. To say, “I want to address entrepreneurs with this kind of product. With interviews, even. If I were going to start with interviews.” Well who are the entrepreneurs I want to help out? Great. Let’s go talk to them first. Let’s see what their biggest problems are. You know? And then say to them, “If I were to do an interview with someone who had this problem, would that help you?” Maybe, they’ll tell me, I don’t want just people who had this problem, but solved it. I want to see other people who are still going through this problem so that I can see my mistakes through their experiences. I don’t know what it is or maybe I don’t want interviews at all. Give me a course that solves it. Cut out the interviews, give me the solutions first. I don’t know what it would have been but I could see how that would help.

Jason: Yes.

Andrew: In fact, frankly having gone through this, that’s exactly how I would have ended up, now that I’ve talked to people. Interviews are terrific but what people really want are sessions like this where there’s a specific problem and a specific solution that’s explained in steps that people can follow along with them. Frankly if I would have had conversations with my customers or my ultimate customers before I started as opposed to later on, this is where I would have ended up. It took me a few years to get here.

Jason: Right. And so that should be a lesson in to everybody that you have to, the sooner you do it the better. Because you’re going to be even more on target. Like I’m assuming that you guys have had a lot of success in kind of making this ship so many classes that people are dying to learn from.

Andrew: Yes. And you want to know something? Heaton Shaw and I had dinner with a bunch of friends once, and he basically said this is what I should have done in the beginning. Like before I even did this, he said this is what I want. He described what is essentially this course and he said maybe at some point I can get to it. I wasn’t sure how to do it. And then it wasn’t until I said it’s time to really charge that I was forced to ask customers what they wanted. Up until the time where I needed to charge, I could do whatever it felt like. Once it was time to charge, things weren’t working out until I talked to customers.

Jason: Right. And see that was exactly what happened with us at OneForty where when we were this free open app store, everything was great. We’d get [??] coverage all the time. Everybody was like I love finding apps and exploring OneForty. But then when it was time for us to make money, it was like the harsh truths and realities hit us. Oh man, we have to find a business model and that means we have to find real paying people. People don’t pay for essentially free stuff that they can just grab and use. Suddenly our competition of Mashable articles and Google searching is really hard. You can’t charge $1 for something that you can get for free on the internet like next door.

Andrew: And for me, I couldn’t charge anything for an interview that’s just a conversation or even the biographical interviews, people aren’t excited about paying for. Some people of course will because we do a good job with them but really what they will pay for is if we know what their problems are and we create a solution for them in the form of a course and that’s where all the hard work we put in finally pays of. Before we could do all this hard work, to do a biographical interview and they say “Great. This is really interesting ” but they wouldn’t pay. All right. Back to the big board.

So now we understand their pain. We show them the solution. We look for patterns and we see who’s excited about it. Going back to the big board. The last step is to actually create something. And you say, do a limited release to gather more data from customers. And so I ask you, what is this limited release and what do we have to do it instead of just building out the product?

Jason: Basically the idea is to, there’s a bunch of different areas we can talk about so let’s kind of march through it. So when you’re a new company, a lot of companies do like their whole unlimited data, or they call it a first edition or limited release, whatever you want to call it. The goal is you want to let only a handful of people that are most passionate about it use your product because those are the people you can learn the most from. And by making it exclusive you actually play on the psychological queues that people have to feel essentially special that they get in and it also allows you to justify passing it along to a handful of people.

Andrew: Wait. So I don’t want as many people as possible to come in and use it where I could have a diverse group of people giving me feedback, where I can see ultimately how many people would be excited about it by seeing how many new people join? You’re saying limited just to the people who are excited?

Jason: Yes. I mean, you can do it the other way as well but I think you end up in the same place because when people come in and they’re not super excited, they’re not going to be retaining anyways. And what I found is actually really great is if you do a limited release, you can always put up a landing page to collect more email addresses for the people that are really excited. I’ve noticed that like the automation space right now, there’s a whole bunch of companies like Customer [??] and Intercomm and stuff like that and they’re all doing limited releases right now. And it’s great because you can go and sign up on their site and get on the list and then they can filter for the people that fit best within their market.

So by doing a limited release, you can focus on people that you want to learn from most and you can use the carriers like ‘Hey. I’m hooking you up, man. I’m letting you in early. In exchange for that, you got to hop on the phone with me once.’ And that means you can now dictate and say “Hey, you got to talk to me”. And if I just make it open to everyone, now suddenly it’s not exclusive. I’m not doing you a favor by letting you in. Anyone can use it. And so, now when I say, Andrew, I think you’re a power user, I really want to talk to you. Now there’s less incentive for you to want to talk to me. And so what I love about it being like “Hey, dude. We got this brand new thing and I’m only hooking you up. All I ask is 15 minutes to talk to you.”

You’re going to be like “Dude. I want it. Can I get it?” And then that’s going to come from the fact that you’re making it exclusive. That’s why you did a limited release. So even with our new stuff at KISSmetrics, we did some limited release stuff because it allows us to look for those target customers and we can learn a crazy amount from them because our response rate on the limited release is 100% versus the 40 and the 20% we talked about. So you can definitely learn more from those people and because again it’s limited, it prioritizes checking it out more, and you can validate that thing of Hey, I talked to this guy and he was super-duper excited. Now I give him the limited release access. Does he actually use it and we’ve found the vast majority of people that were begging for it and total sales they wanted it, guess what? They were all over it whenever we got it and then we learned a ton from them because we said “OK. You told sales you really wanted it. We then talked to you and learned about why you wanted it. We built the solution and you’re diving in and using it and you’re paying KISSmetrics money specifically because we did.”

That’s a heck of a lot of validation and learning that you get only because you kind of marched through this process deliberately.

Andrew: I see. And am I also understanding that if in addition to letting in those people who you knew were really excited about this solution, really had this pain problem that you’re solving for them. If in addition to them you also allow people in who say didn’t even buy ads, let alone need data on ad buying. Didn’t really get excited when you talked to them about this solution that if you also let them in, they might send you in a whole other direction by maybe completely ignoring it and giving you the impression that there’s less demand for it than there really is. Or maybe saying no, I need this adjustment and that adjustment which really doesn’t apply to your target market.

Jason: Yes. Basically you can create a ghost town by doing that because the whole idea of early adaptors or like Steve [??] calls them, early evangelists, is that you have these people that are so passionate about the idea they’re willing to look at it and it’s in a beat up, not quite fully formed form. I think a lot of times start ups don’t necessarily have a full time designer on board when they get started, even though that’s a hot trend in the [??] right now. And so, it may not be beautiful the first time out and you generally broad user in your market is probably not going to be happy using some ugly NVP that you built but an early adaptor, early evangelist, is going to be dying to use any solution.

And so they’re going to come and use it and they’re going to help you make it better while I think the general customers are either going to get bored with it and give up on you and it’s really hard to get people to try something once they’ve used it once and they didn’t have a good experience. So I think that’s what you’re trying to protect yourself against a little bit. It’s get the people that are really passionate in there and are happy to use it beat up while the rest of them build up pent-up demand and think they can’t wait to get in but they’re not really ready yet.

And then once you’ve done like an iteration on it, you can now roll it out to those other people who are going to be more likely to be ready to use it because you’ve rounded off the corners a little bit. The sharp edges aren’t there anymore.

Andrew: So what is this? And I’ll show another screenshot in a moment.

Jason: Sure. So this is part of the KISSmetrics back end. I’m able to look up any user and I can see what they have access to. So what you can see here is on the Features tab we have all the different things people can use. And so we have integrations with MailChimp and with Curly, which those should be checked off and someone actually turned on those, actually sending us data from there.

Andrew: Sorry. So what do you do with this to check on the effectiveness of what you built?

Jason: So basically you can see the blue checkbox there, it’s for the power report. And so this is where I would go and turn it on manually for people. And I would tell people it was manual and that kind of again would get them excited about man, it must be exclusive if they had to build a whole system just to privately turn it on for me.

This obviously wasn’t very hard for us to do but this allowed me to very easily go in and give it, like, anyone who emailed me. I would have all kinds of conversations because of the feedback box that we showed earlier. Every once in a while, someone would come along and say “Wow. That’s a great person to talk to for the power report.”. I would go in, check the box off and shoot them an email and say “Hey. I just gave you exclusive access to a new feature we haven’t fully rolled out yet. I’d love your feedback. I think it will solve a lot of your problems.” And very often that would work very well to have it just go and get their feedback on it and they’d be very excited and go ‘Wow. This is really cool and like you gave me this thing that most people don’t have access to. I feel special’.

Andrew: I can see even for a younger company that doesn’t have even a site up really or one that has a site up but doesn’t have the ability to flip a switch or check off a box and give individual users access to special features, they can just set a private page up on their site and say, look I just set this up, I’m only telling you. Don’t tell anyone else. Go and play with it and see if this is it.

Jason: Yes. Yeah, we actually did that on OneForty with the end social tool that they built. I remember our VP of product would actually show people a private webpage we had that was a mock-up of it. So you can totally do that. That’s a great way to do it.

Andrew: All right, then what is this?

Jason: This is how we actually iterated on the last version, so we to make it I have made it very similar, but one of the things . . .

Andrew: Similar to what you showed us before, this is the sample that you said, hey, if we built this, would you like it? And they gave some feedback, and based on that, you actually built the final product which is this, which you’re right, to me looks like the exact same page, but it’s not.

Jason: Yeah. So the key difference is actually that population set. So you notice in the first version there was this yellow bar that had some small text on it with the little gear icon.

Andrew: Yeah, let me bring that up. Yeah, I see a small bar with a little gear. It’s kind of hard for people to see.

Jason: So that small bar is supposed to allow you to filter things, and turns out people found that completely confusing and difficult to use. So we completely rebuilt it in a different format to make it much bigger and obvious how to do things. If you go to the new version, what you notice is that now it has a giant bar that says add a new condition, and . . .

Andrew: So here, instead of, let me go to the [??], this is where you said there was a gear, and you’re saying now in the new system, instead of that, what you’ve got is, let’s bring up the new one, I can barely tell them apart here, but to the actual users it would be hugely different. Where is it now?

Jason: Yeah, so it says people who. That whole box, it does the exact same functionality but we try to make it a lot clearer, so you have this nice long bar that says “add a condition”, and it says “people who” to try to help you understand what you’re actually doing so you’re looking . . .

Andrew: Oh, OK. Here, this is “people who” and then you’ve got all these conditions.

Jason: Exactly. And so we’ve created a whole different interface on how you set those conditions that’s a lot more like reading a book, so you say people did visited sites at least one time. Before it didn’t really say what you had set up, so it was really hard for you to follow. So we learned that that was a really important part of allowing you to do all the depth of reporting. That was the whole point we were doing this.

Andrew: And you learn that by showing this to them, the first version which you have imagined is what they wanted, and they said, I’m not sure I understand how to use it?

Jason: Yep. And we actually built this first version, did a limited release to people and found out what they were struggling with and what they liked and didn’t like about it.

Andrew: OK. All right, anything else before we move on from this point?

Jason: Uh, no. Like you said, I think the important thing to realize is that even though you’re an early company you can still do this. You can make padded URL that you only show to certain people. You can do limited releases so you build up a huge beta list of pent up demands and only let a few in. One of the things I love, if you remember the craze of launch rock and stuff, it was like, “Want to get in earlier, tweet about us, like us on Facebook.” You get them to do all these social things that actually help your app go viral before anyone knows what it is. Famously Dropbox did that with their video and got 50,000 sign-ups just from a video. So you can totally do these things to get people excited about it before you actually build anything and you can slowly let them in and learn and improve their product as you let people in that are on your massive list you built up of interest.

Andrew: By the way, is it kind of weird that I keep you up on this screen by yourself here. Do you feel like: “Well, am I talking to anyone? Or does it feel normal?”

Jason: No. It’s fine.

Andrew: I asked a friend of mine recently on, I forget where it was that he was interviewed and he said, they just sometimes keep you up on the screen and it doesn’t feel like there’s a real human being listening.

Jason: Yeah, I mean it feels more normal because I can see the old school radio mic like with Conan O’Brien have on his set. So it definitely feels more like an interview. It feels sort of professorial with all those books behind you.

Andrew: [??] just kind of staring out by yourself, kind of respond. I do by the way sometimes see the people’s, it didn’t happen in this conversation, but sometimes people struggle to come up with how to explain an idea when I keep them on the screen just like that, and after I bring myself up, and I don’t say anything, they catch themselves and they get a little more confident.

Jason: That’s interesting. I think it helps. Yeah, I really think as humans no matter how much technology we add, there’s still so much value in the face-to-face, and this is as close as we get to face-to-face, but just to have a face on the screen to look at add so much more depth to the conversation, the thought process than when all you here is a voice.

Andrew: I know. It’s a dare to have video on here. Some people might have noticed some of the struggle we have with Skype, because Skype is never perfect. When you’re trying to rebroadcast Skype, it’s even tougher. But before we started doing courses here or soon after, I should say, I started looking at other people’s courses, and there were a lot of just disembodied voices with PowerPoint and it never hooked me in. You want to take a look at the person. You want to sometimes judge the background. If there’s a stack of books, does that mean he’s reading them? Is he wearing the same jacket over and over? I want to look over your shoulder and wonder where you are.

Jason: Sure.

Andrew: As human beings, you want to get a sense of the person plus at points you understand the concept and you might be tempted to look away if there’s something to look at on the screen maybe, a person moving, it keeps you engaged.

Jason: Yeah. I was going to say that I think that a two-way conversation helps, too, because you definitely caught some things that I would have omitted and been mad at myself later. I know I’ve seen some of the other courses where it’s kind of one person going and they just try to chug a long, and I think the energy that you feed off of each other definitely helps.

Andrew: Yeah. I was on with someone from Start Up America yesterday in private, just showing them how to set this stuff up because all they had was people doing PowerPoint, and it would be disembodied voices talking over PowerPoint. I said, “Look at how easy this could be. If you put in a little effort, it could really add a lot.”

All right. As a last word, what I usually like to do is suggest to people that they find one thing that we talked about and do it. In this case, is there one thing that someone says, “You know, I’m not ready to commit to this whole process. I just want to see what would happen.” Is there one thing that you suggest they do just to get started?

Jason: Talk to one customer, just one.

Andrew: One existing customer and go through these questions that you suggest.

Jason: Yeah. Or one potential customer. If you don’t have customers yet, just one potential. Just have one of these conversations and see how much you learn from this process, and I’d be willing to bet you’re willing to find time for a couple more. I know we talk about the time suck thing or time sync thing, so I understand if you’re afraid of the quantity of interviews I do. You can worry about that later when you hire a product guy like Heaton hired me, but in the meantime, at least, talk to a couple of people. Get that first interview going and see if you learn something that you feel like was valuable and then I’m willing to bet that you’re going to be willing to make time for a couple more.

Andrew: All right. And how long do you spend on a call?

Jason: They are as short as 20 minutes. Some go as long as 45 minutes. I find if you keep it on the shorter end and do your homework in advance, like researching the user a little bit, you can keep it pretty short. So, you can do it in like 20 to 30 minutes, on average.

Andrew: OK. All right. Your site, of course, is as we’ve been talking about… You are at KISSmetrics, and people can sign up and try out some of the features that we’ve been talking about. If they want to follow you, a good place to go is Twitter where you’ve actually got your last name?

Jason: Yes, I did.

Andrew: All right. Evanish, and there it is up on the screen. And you’re also at About Me, AboutMe/Evanish if people want to reach out and say hi to you. All right. Well, thank you so much for doing this. This has been incredibly helpful, and you’ve told us the whole process and you’ve also made it simple to start. Just talk to one person, you’re saying, and ask the questions that we’ll give people as part of this course package.

Jason: Yeah. Yeah. Well, thank you for having me and like you mentioned, About Me, I have all the different sites you can find me on Contact Info. I’m always happy to help people with this sort of stuff. That’s definitely something that Heaton has instilled in me because of being able to learn from him. If you watch this and you have questions, just tweet at me or you can track me down at other places on the Web.

Andrew: Thank you so much for doing this. Thank you all for watching.

Master Class:
How to find your biz idea
(Even if you haven’t found your passion yet)
Taught by Erica Douglass of Whoosh Traffic

Report issues here

Master Class:
Find Your Biz Idea


About the course leader

It’s led by Erica Douglass, founder of Whoosh Traffic, which helps you rank for specific keywords in Google search results.

Master Class Toolbox

Course Cheat Sheet

Simpli Hosting

Photo of Cobalt’s servers

Rack Shack

Erica’s blog

Transcript

Download the transcript here

—- 1 of 16 —-

[music]

Andrew: This course is about how to find and choose your business. The course is led by… Let’s bring her up her here on the screen, Erica Douglass. She is the founder… Hey Erica.

Erica: [laughs] Hello.

Andrew: …of this company. She’s the founder of Whoosh Traffic, which helps you rank for specific keywords in Google search results. She is also a blogger who blogs at Erica.biz, and as you’ll see later on, she had a hit company which she sold a few years ago. We’ll talk about that as the program unfolds.

I’m Andrew Warner, founder of Mixergy.com, where proven founders teach, and I’m going to help facilitate. And what I’ll be facilitating is a course that includes all of these points that are coming up, and I want to call your attention to a few of them here because I think it’s important that you spend special attention on these.

So one of the points is that we’re going to talk about how to find a certain kind of passion. Everyone tells you passion is what you need to look for when you’re looking for a business. Listen to what Erica says. It’s a certain kind that you want, and I think once you understand that, you’ll see why it makes all the difference.

We’re also going to talk to you about how to figure out people’s problems. The ones that will really make it worth your while to solve, and I’m putting x’s in these points because I don’t want you to skip ahead, I want you go pay attention to all of it and make sure that you pay special attention to this when we get to it, so I’m not revealing it just yet.

And then the last point that I want to call your attention to is, the kind of customers that you want and what you need to do before you even start building. It is critical… I talked to Erica about this before we even got started and, boy, you should have seen how fired up she was about it, so I’m going to call your attention to it and make sure that you pay attention to it when we get to that section.

All right. So those are the big points. What we want to see is what is possible and so, Erica, we’re going to start off with this point right here, with what’s possible, and I think we should start off with that story that you told me just before we hit record, about how you applied for a job and you didn’t get it. What happened there?

Erica: All right. So let’s set the scene a little a bit, first.

Andrew: OK.

Erica: This was 2001. It may not be easy to remember it today, but back in 2001, Silicon Valley was an absolutely disaster. Companies were going bankrupt. Nobody was hiring. People were graduating with computer science degrees and they couldn’t find jobs. There was a large portion of the mainstream media that was convinced that the Internet was a fad, that it had run its course, that the Internet was a waste of time…

Andrew: Right.

Erica: …and here was an Internet developer, and I wasn’t able to find any work basically. [laughs] So I was working in a job I hated and I really used most of my time in that job to send out… Faxing resumes to other companies and of course I faxed everybody in the Valley. I was working in San Francisco at the time, so I faxed all the names that you would know today. I hit up Google and everybody else and said, “Please give me a job. I’m a great developer and I can write PHP code,” which at the time, PHP was an amazing language and I also knew Perl, Jobscript, HTML– all that great stuff.

Andrew: Mm-hmm.

Erica: So I went for a job as a web developer. Eventually, I was on Slashdoc and I was pretty well-known there as a user named, Slash Chic, a long time ago. And I found a guy who lived in St. Jose and he introduced me to his hiring manager at their company and they were hiring PHP programmers, and I thought, “Great. I can ace this. This is awesome.” So I went in for an interview and the hiring manager told me, very bluntly, “Well, look, we would have never hired you based on your resume, but I’m interviewing you because this guy, your friend, vouched for you and he works here and so we’ll give you a shot.”

So they stuck me in the conference room… And picture this conference room with a whiteboard on one end and a conference table filled with old, white guys, [laughs] and here I am, and I’m like 20 years old and this young girl, and they said, “All right, Erica. Go ahead and write out some PHP code on the whiteboard.” And they gave me specific instructions. So they gave me a type of shopping cart that they wanted me to write out on a whiteboard and start coding. And so, I grabbed a pen and I went for it and put up the MySQL database on the board. I showed the database structure. I said, “Well, you probably want your customers in this table and your prices over here, and to do this, you’d set up a left join…” and then I started writing the code and I was able to code it flawlessly.

Little did I know, that they had interviewed something like 17 people for the position, including some pretty well qualified PHP coders and nobody had been able to write out the code…

—- 2 of 16 —-

Interviewee: …nobody had been able to write out the code without using a reference. Fortunately for me, I had been working on a business on the side and I had coded basically the exactly same thing the night before, so I was fortunate in that I was able to do almost the entire thing from memory.

I was able to write out an entire script in the exact way that they wanted. I looked back after – I’m standing there on the light board frantically scribbling code, and I turn around and I look at the audience, and these guys are all sitting there like… They had no idea. They totally thought they were going to bamboozle me with this. I was so excited.

They asked me what I wanted to do and I said, “I really want to start my own business. But you know what? I want a job because I want to hone my skills in PHP programming.” So, I went home very excited, thought I was going to get the job. Low and behold the hiring manager called me a few days later and said, “I’m sorry, you didn’t get the job.” I said, “Oh, man”.

Andrew: You didn’t get the job after doing the code up on a blackboard, which I can’t imagine on a light board how tough that would be, you still don’t end up getting the job?

Interviewee: Right, exactly. It was so frustrating. You have to understand, this job paid something like $72,000 a year, which to me might as well have been $1 million a year. It was way more than I had been making before. It seemed like it would solve all of my problems to have that much money, $72,000 a year. Oh, my gosh, I could finally afford to live in my own apartment.

It was just devastating to go through it and then be told I didn’t get the job. So, I went back to the hiring manager, and I said, “Well, why didn’t I get the job?” He said, “Well, we knew that you were going to go off and start your own business later, and so we weren’t going to give you the job because we just knew you were going to run off after some time and start your own business.” I’m sitting there like, “No, I really need the money.”

So, anyway, that’s what happened. I have to say, getting a job is a really difficult thing. I’m impressed by anybody who can send in a resume and get a job because I’ve certainly never been able to do that, just submitting resumes and getting an interview and a phone call. So, I started my own business. What other choice did I have?

Andrew: I kind of hinted at where that business went. Can you tell the audience what you sold the business for? I’ve got it here on my screen, but I don’t want to reveal it if you don’t feel comfortable.

Interviewee: Well, I started it back then in 2001, and I sold it in 2007 for $1.1 million.

Andrew: In cash or shares in a company?

Interviewee: This was not shares. This was an asset purchase agreement, and it was paid over a number of years. So, that’s how it worked. The guy who bought it, I’m proud to say, managed to pay off every last penny. I’m very, very pleased with that.

Andrew: All right, congratulations. We’ll show that webpage from Archive.org, which keeps a record of every page we ever made, it feels like. We’ll show it and we’ll talk about it as the program continues. So, why don’t we go back to the board? People are excited that you went from there to here and that you were able to sell it.

But I know my audience, and my audience, as great as they feel about what you’re able to do, they think, “Well, great for her. What about me?” Which is a valid point. I think that’s the way you need to be if you’re coming into these programs. Keep saying, “What about me? How much can I get out of these programs for myself?”

That’s the way you, as an audience member, needs to be, or else we’re not going to be able to deliver the value for you. You have to come in here looking for it and I’m going to fight for it, for you to get it. All right. Let’s go back to the big board. The first big point is, you want us to look for passionate disgust. Passionate disgust, what are you and/or other people frustrated about? That’s what you want us to look for as the basis of our business.

Why not, by the way, just passion? Why not say, “Hey, what do you feel like doing? What is it that you always loved to do? What is it that you would do even if nobody paid you?” Why don’t you start us off with that? Why are you saying, “Look for passionate disgust”?

Interviewee: I freaking hate that statement…

Andrew: You do?

Interviewee: …look for your passion or find your passion.

Andrew: Why?

Interviewee: It’s because most people’s passions aren’t really relevant to actually what people will pay for. You really have to find that intersection of what you’re passionate about and what people will actually pay for. I’ve written about this on my blog a lot, and every time I write about it, I find somebody who says, “Oh! I got that ah-hah moment! I get it! Watching reality TV is not going to make me a millionaire.”

Hey, I am the biggest reality TV fan in the world. I am a junkie. I have all of them taped, and I am embarrassed to admit, but I even watch the really stupid ones. But it does not pay the bills. It’s just something I do for fun. So, I always coach people to look at where their passion intersects with what people are actually buying online.

If you like gardening, for instance, there may be a market for people who might buy a book on gardening. But there probably isn’t necessarily a market for just setting stuff out in your garden and growing flowers and taking pictures.

—- 3 of 16 —-

Interviewee

…setting stuff out in your garden and growing flowers and taking pictures of them, which is what some people like to do and that’s OK. It’s trying to find out what people are actually paying for online.

Andrew Warner

Let’s talk about your experience. What were you working on before when you discovered this busines that you sold? It was a company called BestShareware.com.

What was Best Shareware and then how did that lead you to finding the passion and that resulted in this business that you sold for $1.1 million that you said earlier?

Interviewee

So in 1997 I registered the domain TheBestShareware.com. I don’t have that site anymore so I don’t know what’s on there these days. Probably just a [??] page or something. And I started this site basically allowing people to download software online.

So shareware is basically software that you can try out for 30 days and then buy. And I liked writing product reviews of various shareware that I used and I was very passionate about spreading the word about the best text editor or whatever it was that I had found for that day out there. And so I started writing product reviews and putting products online.

And it was kind of cool. In 1997 I was 16 years old so when I was able to get a free copy of a $30 text editor for writing a review of it and posting it on my site, that was really freaking cool. And I was pretty stoaked about it.

Andrew Warner

You get free software just for reviewing it? I understand the benefit to the guy who makes the software. He gets you linking to it and talking about it.

What about you, beyond getting software, were you making any money off of this? Was there an affiliate component to this? Anything like that?

Interviewee

There were some parts that allowed you to make commission but I didn’t have a whole lot of traffic so I get $5 or $10 here and there but it wasn’t really that much.

I did have ads on the site and actually oddly enought one of the ads that worked really well was for a dating site. It was called One and Only Internet Personals.

Andrew Warner

I remember that. They had this big affiliate program. Everyone was running One and Only and making money off of that.

Interviewee

I was too. They did send me a check every month and it varied between $15 and $40 a month but for me it was free lunch money. I was going to say beer money but then I realized I wasn’t 21 at that point.

Andrew Warner

All right. So you had a site and you were loving what you did. That wasn’t leading to the big money.

A disgust that you had lead to it. What was the disgust? What were you disgusted by?

So far everything sounds for a teenager to run a business like this.

What were you disgusted by? What happened?

Interviewer

All right. So I wanted to make this company big. I really admire the guy who ran or is still running actually Anantech [??]. I probably butchered his name and for that I apologize but back in the day he basically was my agent running this huge hardware focus website and I really wanted to do something like that.

And I was determined to make the best shareware, a site with that much traffic and that many product reviews but for software because I saw the niche that was available and I really wanted to do that. So I set it up and I put it on my hosting company and they promptly shut me down. And they said ‘I’m sorry. You can’t host software downloads’ and I thought ‘Oh, no’.

Remember, I’m making like $15 to $40 a month. So I was paying like $15 or $20 for hosting and so that site shut me down so I went to another one and this time I got smart about it. I emailed them and said can you do this? and they said No. So ended up putting my awesome 486 desktop in a collocation faciliity with a company that I will not name because of the story that’s about to be told about them. I don’t think they’re still in business. If they are, hopefully they sorted their stuff out by now.

But I put it in a collocation facility and they were really cheap. I searched around for hours for the cheapes collocation and they charged me something like under $100 the first month. I don’t remember what it was but I could afford it so it was definitely under $100 a month.

And so I put my awesome 486 in there and I installed Redhot, was it Redhot? Something, some Linux. I think it was RedHot.

Andrew Warner

I think it was RedHot at the time.

Interviewee

Anyway, I set up a [??] server on it and got everything working. And promptly they ran off with my server and I can’t believe this story. This is one of those things that you can’t make out because it’s too ridiculous to even make up. Nobody would believe you.

The guy who was running the collocation company, I became sort of friends with him. After I called several times and he helped me out with some Linux commands and whatnot when everything was crashing. And he was running the company and he and his wife got into a spat and she became his ex-wife and she grabbed his keys to the data center. Like I said, you can not make this stuff up. She grabbed his key to the data center, went in there and took down all or most of the servers, whatever would fit in the back of her truck and put them in the back of her truck in the middle of the night and drove off with them.

And my site was down. And I was done at that point.

—- 4 of 16 —-

Female Speaker: And my site was down and I was done at that point. And that was somewhere around 2000, so.

Andrew Warner: Okay. So you get hosted by someone else who runs your computer, and they shut you down because you’re allowing your users, your readers, to download software. They say, no way, we’re not allowing that.

Female Speaker: Right.

Andrew Warner: So you say, alright fine I’m going to put my own system. I’ll co-locate it, I’ll put it in, I’ll install it, I’ll run it, I’ll do the whole thing. You do that and, boom, somebody disappears with it. That would frustrate me. Both of those things of course are, no way. Most people at that point would say, the world is against me. Or they would say, I can’t start a business because I don’t know, there’s too much crime in this country, I’ve got bad luck. You didn’t say that. You said I see an opportunity in this frustration. And what was the opportunity that you discovered? I’m waiting here to show your home page here, I’ve got it all loaded up. What was this, what did you see, what was the discussion and what was the opportunity?

Female Speaker: So by that point I graduated high school. I immediately moved to Silicone Valley and I got a job at a company called Cobalt Networks, which made little blue web servers. And they were awesome little rack and cube servers. I think we have a picture of those at some point. So we’ll get to those later. So I was working there and we sold those rack servers, so I was really excited and I decided I might be able to. Well, that might come a little bit later. But eventually I was like, oh wait, I can put one of these online and run my own website on it. So that’s where I was at that point. And I put one online at a, actually I think I started hosting it off my DSL. I had Speakeasy so they allowed us to run webservers on it, and so I just hosted it off my DSL at home. And the downloads were very slow for other people.

Andrew: So basically what you did was, in fact here let me show the screen. I got it up on my computer, I’ve got to show it. Alright, this is what I found before we started on the way back machine at archive.org which keeps a copy of just about every website apparently. And this is what your website looked like back in 2003, this is the service that you were selling. You were going to host people’s websites. You said I’m disgusted that all these hosts will either take your data and be undependable, or they’ll shut you down if you want to serve up software. What’s the big deal? And this is what you came up with.

Female speaker: Exactly.

Andrew: Okay. And your point here is, this is the way to start a business. To look for that frustration. If you’re being frustrated like this chances are other people are being frustrated like this. And all those people who are frustrated are easy customers because they are hungry to buy a better solution.

Female speaker: Exactly.

Andrew: Okay. So no passion but passionate disgust.

Female speaker: What do you hate in this world and you think you could do it better? That’s where you want to start the business. As long as it’s, of course that hate still has to intersect with something that people are actually paying for.

Andrew: Oh wait, hold on. We’re going to get to all those things, let’s not. So that’s the first thing. You say, look in the world. See where people are disgusted, see what’s frustrating you and what’s frustrating somebody else. Forget about your passion, we’ll get back to passion in a moment. But that’s the main idea here, right?

Female speaker: Yeah.

Andrew: Alright, let’s go back to the big board here. Next thing you say is, you want to ask around and see if it’s a complaint or problem that you can solve. Or ask yourself actually I should say, if it’s a complaint that you should solve? Tell me about this.

Female speaker: Ahhh, so this is where I started working at Cobalt Networks. And I love this story, this is another one you can’t make up. So they used to throw servers away when they had a problem. And it wasn’t, it didn’t seem to be worth their time as a venture backed company going for a billion dollar exit, which they got, to fix servers that had something wrong with them. So they didn’t have any sort of test process. If a customer sent back a server it basically sat in a pile and eventually either if it wasn’t obvious what the problem was, they just threw it away. I went in and picked up all the servers that they had thrown away. And I dumpster dove and then I got the parts either online, mail order or since I was in the Bay area there were a local of local, they called them greyware computer shops, that would sell RAM that kinda worked or hard drives that were abused or whatever. And I would throw stuff in the server and I would sell it on Ebay. And I would sell it as is. So I would basically say, here’s a Cobalt server, and I’d describe it as is and I would use their test lab, Cobalt had a test lab in the office, to put the server with the latest version of the Cobalt software. So a lot of them had software upgrades from what they had originaly come with, and then I would throw it on Ebay. And I was making more money doing that then I was at the actual job that I had at Cobalt. So I was making, at a minimum I was making 12, 15 hundred dollars a month. And at maximum I sold one of them I think for like 2,250. So that was a pretty good haul. And this was great for me. And so the CEO came by my cubicle one day and said, we tracked down a rogue Ebay account that seems to be selling our servers, and it looks like it tracks back to this office. And we tracked it back to you. And I said, oh no am I in trouble. And he said, well we’re not going to fire you but we need you to stop doing that immediately. So I was like, I said, oh okay.

So the hardware started piling up in my cubicle. I had a corner cubicle and they stared stacking up in the corners.

Andrew: Can I show this actually before you continue, the photos that I’ve got here?

Female Speaker: Yeah.

—- 5 of 16 —-

Erica: Yeah, those are another server that we made at Cobalt. Those were the cubes. Those were really popular like e-mail servers and what not for small businesses and medium sized businesses.

Andrew: So let me ask you this, Erica. I see how this is a great example of you hustling. I thought by the way when you and I met, this is a girl who’s going to come in and do a geek conversation about how to code up with PHP and it’s going to go over everyone’s heads and I’m going to have to find a way to make it understandable and relatable. That’s not where you’re going at all. Everything I’ve gotten from you since we’ve started is, I’m a hustler, man. I’m going to find a way to make this work. I’m going to find a frickin’ opportunity where everyone else sees nothing. And I get how this shows that you found an opportunity. You found stuff that people were throwing away and you turned it into gold. You actually sold it and you turned it into one of the first big success stories. But how does this tie into the idea of asking if it’s a complaint or a problem that you can solve?

Erica: So when the CEO shut me down they stacked up and I didn’t have the money to really buy any more hard drives or anything to fix the servers. And so one of my friends said, hey you’re using one of these servers to host your website, can you host my website? And I said, well yeah I can probably do that. And then so I started with one server that had all my stuff it and then a couple of more friends, people I’d worked with or whatnot, they said hey can you host my website? I said, hey alright, I can do this. So at that point that was in July, 2001. I used some money I had gotten from my birthday, my 20th birthday, to. I actually invested the money I got for my birthday and put a couple of servers, actually just one to start with, in a co-location center in San Francisco. And I said, alright, I’m going to set up a website and sell hosting. And I really, really only expected it to pay my internet access bill, my cable bill at home whatever, for the next several years. This was another like thing where the Match.com people were sending me 30 dollar checks every month and this was going to be one of those things. It was going to be great. I was going to invoice people and make like 50 dolllars and this was going to be amazing. So that’s what I did.

Andrew: But the first way that you, you hosted your own website first by basically putting a computer at home, connecting it to whatever home internet connection they were offering you. The same home internet connection that people in your neighborhood might have been using to download porn, or maybe to just browse the web looking for a restaurant for the night. Whatever it was. Or to steal movies. You said, I’m not into any of that stuff. I’m going to use this connection that everyone else is just using for entertainment, I’m going to use it to run my business off of. And you connected a computer to it and you ran it.

And then you said, hey, people want me to host their sites? I’m going to host it at home, on my home computer. And then you took it from there out. So can I say this? Maybe instead of saying, ask if it’s a complain that you can solve, the way to say it is, can you solve it with a ghetto solution? Is that a better way to say it?

Erica: How little money can you spend to make money?

Andrew: How much of a ghetto solution can you get to this problem? Quit being proud. Quit trying to find the perfect most beautiful solution that you can then show off to your friends about. If it frickin works, run with it. If you have no other choice look for, make up a choice, make up an option, the way that you connected a computer to your system.

Erica: Absolutely.

Andrew: Alright, I love that. By the way, we did the same thing. Bradford and Reed, my brother and I, couldn’t even afford to have servers anywhere. We took old 486 computers, whatever the hell we could afford, and we stacked them. I’ll even tell you, I’ll go even one further here on this. We couldn’t even afford those computers. I called up Staples at the time and I said, what’s your return policy on computers? And the woman goes, 90 days? I go, what if I use a computer every day for 89 days and then I return the computer on the 90th day, can I get a refund. She goes, Sir, of course, that’s our policy. I go, I’m going to use it every day, 24. She goes, that’s our policy. I said, give me six. She sent over six computers, my brother used those to handle our website and to send out e- mail. We were in the online greeting card business I think at the time, and boom, we were in business. And people, my friends would always tell me, you need funding. You need to have this solution and that solution. Andrew, wait til I get this, you get nothing. There’s always some ghetto launch that you can do. Cut your pride and launch it.

Erica: Well I only went into the co-location facility because one of my friends, I was hosting her website for 10 dollars a month, and she said, it’s too slow. My family is trying to download their photos and it’s too slow. And I’m like, I’m going to lose a…..

—- 6 of 16 —-

Female speaker:…upload their photos and it’s too slow. So I was like, I’m going to lose a customer, alright I have to make this work.

Andrew Warner: Alright. And that’s actually a good idea when you need to move on. Not when you imagine that you need to add or improve. It’s when people are complaining or really begging for it.

Female speaker: Yes.

Andrew Warner: It’s the same thing that gets you started in the first place.

Female speaker: Exactly.

Andrew: Alright. I’m going to go onto the next big idea. The next one is, you want to decide if it’s, let me see here. We did number one, we did number two, yes. Decide if it’s the right kind of problem. Decide if it’s a problem you actually want to solve, you say. So what do you mean by that? So you’re saying, don’t just look for the money. Don’t just look and see if people are frustated and they need a solution. Just because they’re frustrated doesn’t mean you want to get in that business and live with it forever.

Female speaker: Well originally I wanted to start a content management system. I was envisioning something like what WordPress is. Except WordPress didn’t exist back then because it was like 2001. And I recruited a friend. And that’s why the hosting company was called SImpli, with an i. Because that was, the idea was to combine hosting with a content management system. Hey, not a bad idea. A lot of companies have made a lot of money doing that. And that is something I was going to code in PHP and we were going to launch it to customers. In fact we did launch it and we got some customers who were paying us, and that was cool. Most of those customers were people that I had already been doing contracting work with. But I realized that the money for us was more in the hosting. I was spending 80 percent of my time developing the content management system and working with software customers. And 20 percent on my time on hosting. Except the hosting was making me more money then the content management system side of things. So I realized I had to shut the whole thing down and move on and just do the hosting side of it.

So I left my clients in good hands. I sent them to Amy Hoi, who I believe is pretty well known these days as well, and she and I knew each other a long time ago. And I sent them to her to do web development work back in the day, and I went with the hosting side of things. So that’s how I got into hosting. I want to emphasize here that a lot of people think that they need to have their big idea from day one. And for me it was more just like, shoot, I’ve got to make this work. I’m not making any money, nobody’s hiring me, I’m not going to go back and live with my parents. I was determined, I’m from Indiana and I was living in Silicone Valley, and I said I’m not going back to Indiana. I’ve got to do something to make this work. I hustled. I dumpster dove for hardware and sold it. I took PHP contracts that I found on Craigslist from people asking for web developers. I did everything in my power to make sure that this was going to work. But I didn’t go in with this going, okay, this is a hosting company and I’m going to make this worth seven figures, and I’m going to go raise money. I didn’t even know, like I’ve never done Angel investor things or anything like that. So it wasn’t something like I’m going to make this worth a million dollars. It was something where I have to make this work or I have to go back to Indiana and my butt’s going to be on my Mom’s couch. And no, I’m not doing that.

So and that’s how I made it work. And if you really want it, you’ll make it work. And it may be that you come up with a great idea and within months of launching it and gettng your first paying customers you realize that this is not what you wanted to do at all. And that’s totally okay. Because in that process of getting customers who are paying you, you’re going to come up wtih even better ideas. And the same thing with Moose Traffic. We started doing SEO for our customers. We realized they needed software. I hired people, we built software, now we’re doing software. But it’s been an evolution and we wouldn’t have had that evolution had we not gotten started in the first place. So the wisest thing you can do is to get started and get paying customers and get people to pay you for anything. If it’s consulting, fine. That’s okay. Billing out hours for dollars at the beginning will help you understand what problems those people have that you can scale. But I think it’s really important to emphasize that you’re probably not going to have the right idea from day one. You’re probably going to iterate at least several times. But as long as people are paying you and as long as you’re able to pay the bills with it, even if it’s consulting, that’s fine. I’ve honestly learned more from doing consulting with people. And I still do consulting all of the time. I’ve learned more and I’ve gained more from consulting with customers then just about anything else.

Andrew: You know what? This hustle of finding a solution is just so much fun, I wish that, I knew growing up that it was fun. I wish that I had some kind of support when I expressed interest in being an entrepreneur. Instead you were supposed to fingerpaint in school or go to arts and crafts classes. That was elevated learning. That was really where it was at. If I said I want to be an entrepreneur it’s, who are you trying to rip off? What are you really trying to get away with here? Maybe I do sometimes push the edge, but the Staples example. Day 90 I returned the computer. Every single…..

—- 7 of 16 —-

Andrew: Day 90, I returned the computers, every single one of them. I got my money back. Basically, my credit card company got the money back. I went and I bought another set of computers, and we were right back in business until we could afford to keep things going. I was willing to do whatever it took. I was willing to be as creative as possible. If Staples at the time was going to allow me to do this and encourage me to do this, good on them.

Interviewee: That’s right. That’s what I’ve done too. Hustling, selling servers on eBay. I dumpster dove for monitors, and then we got rid of some monitors. I was in the IT department at Cobalt. We got rid of a bunch of monitors. I called around. I found a monitor place in Sunnyvale that would repair them for $50 to $75 depending on the size of the monitor. I got them all repaired and then I sold them on Craigslist and made some money that way.

My boss was furious. He said, “Why are you doing that?” I said, “Because it wasn’t worth your time to find that company, dig it up and repair those monitors.” But it was worth my time, and I got a nice monitor out of it too.

Andrew: All right. On to the big board here, back and now we’re going to talk about, figure out if it’s a problem that people will actually – here’s the word that I’ve X’d out – that they’ll actually pay to solve. That’s the critical word here that you wanted to make sure that people paid attention to. Tell me about Rack Shack, another site that I think I’ve got here from Archive.org. I love Archive.org. It lets me look back at everyone’s life. Tell me about that point…

Interviewee: Sure.

Andrew: …and Rack Shack.

Interviewee: Well, back when I first interviewed at Cobalt Networks, I knew that they were in the hosting business and I knew some of the major hosting companies. I happened to know – there was one called SimpleNet that had bought a bunch of servers from them. But, as it turned out, as I started working there, Rack Shack, which became EV1 Servers, which I think then got merged with The Planet many years later… Robert Marsh was the guy who owned that company. Amazing entrepreneur by the way.

Andrew: Let me bring up the site.

Interviewee: Yes.

Andrew: This is what we get. Some of the images are broken here, but for the most part people can get a sense of what this is. “Web hosting made simple.”

Interviewee: Yeah. I think you have to remember that this was a company that was already… Robert Marsh went into this full guns blazing in terms of just making this company as big as possible. People look at these websites and they think, how could somebody with a website like that make a lot of money? But this is a company that was doing multi-millions in business and they were one of our largest customers at Cobalt and they bought a lot of Cobalt servers.

In fact, I think that screenshot might have a Cobalt server sale or icon on there somewhere. That was from many years ago, of course.

Andrew: Mm-hmm.

Interviewee: But that was what inspired me to start a hosting company. Well, that and the fact that I got shut down by the CEO and couldn’t sell things on eBay anymore. But I really just…

Andrew: So you’re saying that, you saw these guys were buying a bunch of servers from you, and you said, “If they could afford these servers, then I don’t have to dumpster dive. It means that there’s revenue here.”

Interviewee: Yes.

Andrew: You looked at their prices and you looked at what size business they were doing, and you said, “Hey, you know what? People are willing to pay for this. They may not be willing to pay for…” Well, I could pick just about any consumer website. “But they will pay for this.” I can see the prices right up here. I was looking for them, $99 a month with a $250 setup… People were paying a $250 setup fee for hosting?

Interviewee: Yeah. Well, yeah. You had to pay for the hardware.

Andrew: Oh, wow. Just $10 a month. All right, so you said, “People are willing to pay for this,” and this is what you need to look for if you’re looking for a business. See if people are paying for the solution, if they’re willing to, and then you’ve got a real business.

Interviewee: Exactly, and everybody was emphasizing simple. You can see their tagline was “Web hosting made simple.” One of the bigger companies – one other Cobalt customer was SimpleNet.

Andrew: Right (?). Yeah.

Interviewee: I started my company and I called it Simply.

Andrew: I see. You’re saying that if everyone is emphasizing simple, it means that people are worried about being too difficult, and simple is the word that you need to go for. So, you called it Simply. Right up here, I see it in Archive.org.

Interviewee: I said, look at my tagline. “We make web hosting easy”, I think was our tagline. I didn’t reinvent the wheel with web hosting. I didn’t do a bunch of crazy stuff that nobody had ever done. I basically made a company that looked like a lot of other companies. I felt like I could do pretty well on the price since most of our servers were free, or whatever hardware I could dumpster dive for. That’s how I got started, basically.

Andrew: So why don’t you just go for a site that people are willing to enjoy, and it maybe could get a lot of people as opposed to making one of your chief criteria? I’m looking here at my notes. By the way, I wonder when people watch this, if I look over here does it look like I’m not paying attention anymore? Or do they understand on this part of my screen are my notes? Here I’ve got my notes and over here I’ve got the web. I don’t know.

Interviewee: I think that they think… See, if you haven’t said anything, you could get away with saying you were looking at me.

Andrew: Because I feel like I’m talking, and then suddenly I go like that. It must be really strange.

—- 8 of 16 —-

… that must be really strange. So, why make getting paid one of the big criteria that you’re advocating, any entrepreneur who’s watching this. Why look for something that people are paying for as opposed to something that they’re willing to share with their friends, something that they’re going to be excited about and stick with for years? Why paid?

Erica: Great question. I love that question because Silicon Valley has for years been wrapped up in this ridiculous consumer Internet thing. I call it ridiculous. I know there’s companies making a lot of money in that niche, and I don’t hate on them. That’s cool. Making money is awesome, but the fact is that even the consumer Internet companies, let’s take Facebook as an example. They make money when businesses use their services to either advertise or to do things, like games. They take a cut of the gaming revenue from companies like Zynga, or they take a cut of the advertising deals that companies like Ford or GM or even really small businesses will use to advertise for customers.

You have to understand that the eyeballs are only part of the story. Right now, my blog gets 1.2 million visitors per year, but if I don’t have any products to sell, I’m not going to make very much money. I can tell you that the Google revenue from that blog and all of those visitors, all the ads’ revenue basically covers my hosting fees.

Andrew: How much is that? Come on, we’re now deep into this program.

Erica: [laughs]

Andrew: Anyone who’s watching is, I think, like a trusted friend. Let’s look at your site. Tell us how much are you bringing from this site and Google ad revenue, Erica.biz?

Erica: I don’t know if the Google ad revenue thing allows you to tell how much money you’re making.

Andrew: Give us a ballpark so that you’ll be technically OK.

Erica: I pay for a dedicated server and AWeber and I have about 15,000 subscribers on my AWeber. So, you can look at their pricing plus you can estimate dedicated server pricing based on the [??] piece.

Andrew: How much is the dedicated hosting?

Erica: Not very much.

Andrew: I think I might need it for Mixergy.

Erica: [laughs] OK. I’m hosting a WP engine, and they’re hosting me for free right now. I used to pay for the search engine.

Andrew: Oh OK. Right. Right. So, WP engine hosting you for free, and AWeber probably about $150 a year. We’re talking about less than $2,000 a year even though you hit over a million uniques.

Erica: It’s a little bit more than that, but it’s not much more than that.

Andrew: OK.

Erica: It’s enough to buy that and maybe, a Kindle Fire every month or so.

Andrew: Hey, we’re talking about absolute peanuts.

Erica: Yeah. Absolutely.

Andrew: So, you’re saying, look for a business that people can pay, and especially I would say, if you’re a bootstrapper, if you’re someone who doesn’t have outside money, you need to get cash coming in the door from customers.

Erica: Exactly. And you have to really focus. I think consumer Internet companies get a lot of hype. They get a lot of press, but they don’t get a lot of money. I have a friend who went after one of these companies and started one and was actually very successful, but even he said, this is like a giant poker game and you basically put all your chips in on the table. If you win, then you get a whole big stack of chips, and if you lose, then OK you, at least, put somebody else’s chips in because they’re the ones investing in you. Hopefully, you haven’t pushed too many of your own chips in.

That’s how somebody sold $100 million company to a giant corporation whose name you would recognize describes things. And so, that to me is like, I don’t want to play poker with my startup. If I want to play poker, I’m going to go to Las Vegas and hit up the poker rooms. I want to build a business that people are actually going to pay for, and realistically even the Facebooks of the world have to have something that people will pay for. Even Facebook is finding out advertising isn’t a horribly viable revenue over the long-term.

Andrew: All right. You know what? I’m going to say it. I feel like you and I have known each other for so long, I’m encroaching on your course here, and it’s telling people my story, but I think it’s relevant here, too. We had a consumer-based business. We had 20+ million email addresses on our mailing list. We were doing about half a million email greeting cards a day on this site, but I never considered us a consumer site. I always thought my real customers, the people who I care about, the people I’m obsessed with, were the people who were paying the bills. And these were the people who said, “We will pay whenever someone sends out a greeting card because our ad will be attached.” In fact, it was a LeadGen based model. That’s what it was.

I said I was getting into this business because someone is willing to pay me, and the person who’s willing to pay me according to my market research, and I did something similar to what you’re about to say later on. People were willing to pay me according to my market research, $1.50 every time a greeting card is sent out. Beautiful.

Erica: Yes.

Andrew: Can I run an affiliate program where they pay $0.25 every time a greeting card is sent out? Yes. Make a buck and a quarter every time a greeting card is sent out? Life is good.

Erica: Right.

Andrew: Life is good. Of course, there are some things like they won’t pay for repeats and so on, so I don’t think you can extrapolate from the number of greeting cards we sent a day to how much revenue we were making, but that gives you a good indication of where the business model is.

Erica: Exactly.

Andrew: And, of course, if anyone wants to see my finances were for that, I let Neil Patel…

—- 9 of 16 —-

Q: This is (?) for that. I let Neil Pattel show it a long, long time ago and he still has it up on his blog. So I’m totally Google-able, and my finances were audited by Ernst & Young, so I’m not B.S.-ing when I talk here. Do you know why I’m suddenly hesitating? I hate when people start talking about something like that because it always sounds like they’re trying to either show off or they’re trying to sell some kind of scam. So I’m like “Ernst & Young validated. This is real people”.

A: I get hate mail constantly on my site too. I literally had, there was a blog of people, a little group of people who set up a blog trying to disprove the fact that I sold my company for $1.1 million, and I’m like “Why are you setting up this whole blog and going to all these great lengths? Just call the guy who bought the company and he’ll verify it”. At some point I thought “Well, maybe I could put all the documents online” and I certainly could. I still have everything, you know? I can put the check up for $100,000. It was the first check that I paid, and I realized, “Even if I do that they’re going to say that I faked it”. They have the guy’s phone number. I mean, my website redirects to his website. It’s no secret who I sold it to, when I sold it. All the people who were customers back then-

Q: Your website redirects to his site now?

A: Yeah.

Q: Let me see, so if I wanted to I can go to, we’ve got to move on to the next idea here, so I’m not going to spend too much time on this. If I go to-

A: S-I-M-E-L-I-E.biz, yeah, it will redirect to S-V-W-H.net.

Q: Simelie.biz it will redirect to, S, got it. OK. I got the P in the wrong place here.

A: Anyway, we have a bunch of servers there now for (?) traffic. I’m very happy with Silicon Valley, with Bruce the owner. I’m in full support of SVHW and their mission and what they’re giving.

Q: OK. Well you’re using an office that’s run by one of the co-founders of WP Engine so you kind of have to use them, right, if you’re in their office today. So I do see their phone number here and anyone who’s curious can go call them up by going to the website. Alright, let’s you and I, I’ve got to pull this back. I’m having too much fun here with this and I wonder how the audience reacts to it. Are they so trained to just stick with the facts Andrew or they prefer that I finally loosen up a little bit and start talking? We’ll find out. Alright, next big idea is this. You say “Don’t get hung up on being unique”. Why not?

A: I hate this, and you know, Andrew, you and I are kind of in the same business and I’m sure you get the same emails that I do because I write about how to start a business and how to grow your business and because I get emails every day from people saying “Well I don’t have any ideas”. Well I didn’t have any ideas either. When I started my hosting company I got so many ridiculous, my family thought it was stupid. Everybody thought it was dumb. They’re like “Well Erica, billion dollar web hosting companies are going out of business every day” because you have to remember this was 2001 and the internet was just a fad and everything was going to heck in a hand basket and “Erica all these big businesses couldn’t make it. What makes you think you could make it?” It’s ridiculous. You get so much push back, especially when you’re in the valley. The valley is such an echo chamber and you end up with this situation where you always feel inadequate. I’m hoping that somebody else in the valley feels the same way that I do. This is why I left Silicon Valley because I felt that no matter what I did it was completely inadequate because I was totally not making a billion dollar business. I was making a seven figure business and not a ten figure business and so I felt like the best ideas are something where you see the pain point in the industry and you know that you can solve it. With our differentiators it was only two things with my hosting company, it’s easy. So, number one, we’re in Silicon Valley. Great. Nobody’s in Silicon Valley. Nobody knows anybody who hosts in Silicon Valley. OK, we’ll do that. I’ll go to all the networking events and I’ll be like “Hi. I’m Erica and I run this hosting company and you may have heard of us and if you’re a start-up then you should host with us”.

Q: I see, and your competition was hosting out of, I don’t remember where at the time, Texas or New York probably.

A: Texas. Yeah, so we have rack space that was in San Antonio. We had EV1 servers was in Houston I believe, and so everybody was in Texas, and Texas is a great place to start a hosting company. I fully endorse companies that start here. (?) is in the same office we are. They’re awesome and I know why they do it, but the advantage we had was being in the valley. I was face to face with everybody. They had to stare me in the face at all the networking events if they didn’t host with us. I’d be like “Why are you hosting in Texas? You should come to the valley. You should host here in San Jose”. I have the proud distinction of being able to show Matt Mullenweg, the founder of WordPress his first server. Literally he had hosted all this stuff in Texas, he hosted some stuff with us. I met him at a party in San Francisco. He hosted some stuff with us and eventually he made it down to San Jose and I said “You actually want

—- 10 of 16 —-

Erica: And eventually, he made it down to San Jose and I said, “Do you actually want to see the hardware where some of your WordPress stuff is hosted?” And he said, “Yeah, yeah.” So I brought him up to the data center and I was able to point at the server and it had a little label on it that said ‘WordPress’ and he was, for the first time, able to see the hardware that was running part of WordPress.com and WordPress.org, at the time, as well. And that was really cool for him. That was the kind of stuff that sold us.

We also had an office in downtown San Jose. People could come in, hang out with us, we’d make them a coffee and it was great. And the customer service… The fact that people knew who was I was, was a huge differentiator. That was enough of a differentiator to make a seven-figure business.

Andrew: How? All right. But how did you keep your costs competitive with all those other guys?

Erica: [laughs] Hardcore negotiating skills. [laughs] I was brutal. You do not want to be sitting across the table from me in a conference room. I sent one… So we contracted with Market Post Hour at 95 South Market Street… or 55 South Market Street, excuse me. 95 was our office. 55 South Market in downtown San Josie, we contracted with them for space and power, and then they were a carrier-neutral facility, so that means that they had bunch of different bandwidth writers and then… So what what we did was basically, we… I sat down with them and they gave me the 8 1/2 by 14 leads, which was like ridiculously long, like 30 pages long, and they said, “All right, here’s all the costs per square foot for space. Here’s all the costs for power.” And I sent that thing back like 23 times. And every time I was, like, no, no, no, no, [laughs] and I just would not give up. I kept quoting them from other data centers. I quoted them space from data centers that weren’t even in Silicon Valley and I drove them crazy.

Andrew: [laughs]

Erica: I was probably their least profitable customer. In fact, one of our customers actually looked at our sheet that we had gotten from them and said, “There’s absolutely no way they would be profitable with these numbers.” In fact, by the end, the last sheet that they had me sign was a non-disclosure agreement stating that I wouldn’t tell what the prices were [laughs] that we were getting for space there.

Andrew: So why did they give you that kind of a deal? What’s their motivation for giving you such a deal that they’re going to lose money on?

Erica: Number one: I’m a personality to be reckoned with and I don’t say that from an ego perspective, I just say that from a recognition perspective of the fact that you really don’t want me on the wrong side of you because I’m very vocal about everything; and number 2: I knew everybody.

And so, that was really the big bargaining chip that I had. I said, “Look, if we sign a startup and they can’t come to us because they need four racks of space and we don’t have four racks of available space…” That would be like 50 servers or 40 servers or something like that… And they need all of this space and power, I’ll send them over to you. And they were like, “Oh…” And plus, I was also ranking in Google for all the lucrative keywords like San Jose, core location, and all these different types of local keywords. They knew I had tons of customers coming in the door. And they knew we were growing and [laugh]… I mean, it was just a combination of all sorts of things. I don’t think you could do that today.

We signed that deal in, I want to say, 2005. I’d have to go look at my email to remember exactly when we signed it, but we signed that deal back in the day where half their data center was empty and they were like, “Please, just let us lease you some space and we know you can fill it up because you’re growing so fast.” So, that was a large part of it too. [laughs]

Andrew: So, again, now I’m looking at the notes that I have on this part of my computer screen, and what you said to April Dagman [SP] who pre- interviewed you and prepped you for this session is, you said, not only, don’t get hung on competition, you actually want the person who’s listening to us to figure out where the competition is going, is going wrong, and then make it better. So don’t be intimidated if there’s competition. Just go and figure out what they’re not doing right, what you can do better, what angle you can have on it and still march into that space. And for you, that angle was customer service and location. You were going to be the person that your customers could talk to and you were going to be in their living room, practically, if you were in Silicon Valley and so are they.

Erica: Yes. Exactly. So most hosting companies… See, it helped that I had experience as a paying customer in the same niche. It was just… What I highly recommend, if you want to be in a certain niche, you should pay for all the stuff that’s out there now because then you’re going to really get to see what’s going wrong. They can have a perfect website and a perfect thing… Actually, I have an example in here and I’m not sure I mentioned this, but more recently with my current company, I was looking at PPC ads for competitors on Google… You know, you type in something and you click on all the ads, and I found one that I really wanted them to follow up with me on… And this is not the same one that you have the email for by the way, but those guys did follow up… But I found one and I thought, “Wow, this actually look really impressive. I want to find out more.” So I filled out their contact form, typed all my name and I typed in my real phone number, my real name, my real email address–which is a little bit unusual for me–and said, “Please follow up with me because I’m really interested…

—- 11 of 16 —-

Erica: …and said, “Please, followup with me because I’m really interested in the software that you’ve built.” I never heard from him. What a waste.

Andrew: What’s the company? I won’t edit this out. So, tell me, but understand that when you tell me I’m not going to edit it out.

Erica: I don’t remember the name of the company.

Andrew: Ugh. Okay.

Erica: To be honest, it was a PPC ad and I was clicking on like 50 of them. I just remember that that was one. I know that they were doing stuff that helped you followup with customers. That’s the niche that I was looking at, and that’s all I can tell you. I honestly don’t remember.

Andrew: Okay, so what you’re saying is, the big point here is, if there’s competition out there, don’t be intimidated. There’s competition everywhere. You march right in there and you do what we’re about to show that you do, that Erica does, to figure out where their weaknesses are. To figure out where they’re going wrong, and that’s where you attack.

That’s where you go for it. You show’d us a little bit about how you do it. Can I go on to the next big idea, because I think you really expand on it there?

Erica: Go for it.

Andrew: You’re saying yes, let’s do it? Oh, wait, wait, wait. Actually, you know what? Hang on a second. Let’s come back to this. This is another thing that I found. In fact, you gave this to me. Since we’re talking about how your competitive advantage was customer service, I’m now in the About page in Archive.org for your site, in here right at the top.

Erica: I wrote all that.

Andrew: “People make or break a company. That’s why Simply focuses on people. Our employees, our customers, and most of all personal service guarantee.”

Erica: Yeah.

Andrew: “We want to make you, our customer, happy.” So, yeah, even way back then, if we go back to, what is this 2004? June 2004 is when this was taken. That was one of the big points. By the way, this is not you, is it?

Erica: No. Oh, my God. That’s funny. I was just going to mention that because literally every person who looked at that page would email me and go, “Hey, Erica, is that picture you? Is that you on the about page?” I can’t believe …[ss]…

Andrew: 2004, people weren’t comfortable putting their real photos online, right?

Erica: Yeah, that was a stock photo. It was just one of those things where I was like… Remember, in 2004, I was 23, 24 years old. So, there was no way that I was going to get – I felt like at least – that I was going to get any real business from putting my own 23 year old self on the website. So, that’s why I didn’t do it.

Andrew: All right. One other thing that I want to show. Right now on your personal blog, your main business is this place, whooshtraffic.com. I know a lot of people who watch us, they like to know that the people who are teaching are software entrepreneurs. They’re not just bloggers. They’re not just whatever. They want to know that they’re in software, because software means that they’re smart. So here, this is the software. Now you guys know that she’s smart.

Erica: I’m going to tell that to potential investors.

Andrew: But you also run this blog where you talk about how to find inspiration and business success, how to build and inspire business success. So, obviously there’s a lot of competition, and one of the ways that you differentiate yourself from others is, you rank in Google.

Erica: Yep.

Andrew: For lots of things, including make money online, which I don’t know how you got. You’re right at the top right here.

Erica: Magic.

Andrew: You already anticipated what some people in the audience would say, which is what? We’ve got the response to it, but what were you saying when you showed this to me privately? You said people are going to say what?

Erica: Said, make sure you put that in an incognito window because right now it’s showing you as logged into Google and they might think, “Oh, well Erica is just a friend of yours and that’s why she shows up number one.” No. If you are in the United States right now, as of today when this is being taped, and you type in make money online in Google, you will see that I am the number one result for make money online, no quotes.

If you type it in in Canada, as I found out by talking to people, it apparently doesn’t show me. But if you are in the U.S. and use Google.com, it does show me as the number one for make money online. By that alone, I get tens of thousands of people coming to my blog every month.

Of course, that may change. I’ve been on the front page for make money online for forever, and things come and go. I may not be number one when you look at it, but I’ve been number one for a little while now.

Andrew: Look at how many ads Google shows. I usually run the browser with ad block, but when I’m in incognito it doesn’t come on.

Erica: Right.

Andrew: Look how many ads. I miss this when I browse like this.

Erica: If you see that many ads, look at how many emails you can imagine that I get from people wanting to advertise on my site.

Andrew: Oh, right, right. Because they can’t advertise in these spots right here because it’s expensive, and they can’t advertise here, so they say, “Hey, you know what? We’ll advertise in the first result.”

Erica: One guy offered to pay me a whole $5 for a link on that page. He said, “I’m going to PayPal you $5.” I was like, “$5 once?” I’m not going to do it. I don’t put paid links on my site. That’s one of the reasons why it’s ranking is because I’m not selling it to anybody. That’s a post with no affiliate links and no sales. It’s just designed to get people on my email list so I can send them more blog posts basically.

Andrew: All right, let’s go on to the big board here. The next big idea is, do your competitive due diligence. We’ve got a screenshot here.

—- 12 of 16 —-

Andrew: And we’ve got a screenshot here… You let me show this, and we’ll show it in a moment, but you said as long as we cover everything that could give away who this person is… But talk to me a little bit about how you do your competitive due diligence and then I’ll show this email.

Erica: So I’m a search engine optimization… well, I will say ‘wizard’ because, right now, I’m rank number one for making money online, so I don’t think anybody could argue with that at this point. I got my first paid SEO job in 1997, so I go back a long way in SEO. And SEO was, in addition to the networking events, a large part of how I ran my last business. And it is continuing to be a large part of how I grow Whoosh Traffic as well. So for search engine optimization, I want to see all the competitors–especially people who are paying over on the top or the right- hand side of Google results for ads–and looking at what they’re selling. And what I’m looking for is, as a buyer of this particular software… Like, if you type in ‘SEO Software’ into Google, for which we not ranked currently–I’m working on that one. [laughs] I just started that one, so…

Andrew: All right. Let me do this. So what you’re saying is…

Erica: Go ahead.

Andrew: Before you enter a market… In this case you wanted to enter software for search engine optimization…

Erica: Yes, type in SEO software.

Andrew: You type into Google something like… Sorry?

Erica: Or SEO tools… SEO tools, SEO software. The two [??].

Andrew: SEO tools, and you say, “Who are all these people who are buying these ads?”

Erica: Who’s [??] advertise, right.

Andrew: These are the guys who are going to be my competitors, right?

Erica: Uh-huh.

Andrew: OK.

Erica: Exactly. And you’ll see that [??].

Andrew: And you say, “I want to know how they treat their customers. I want to know what they do. I want to know where the hole of opportunity is. Are they’re people who don’t return emails? Because that would be a good thing for me to feature if everyone else doesn’t return emails. Is there something else that they don’t do well? That’s what I’m going to jump on.” And so you call every one of these guys, or email them.

Erica: Yes. OK. So the top three out there are SEOmoz, Conductor and Raven Tools. SEOmoz, I’m a paying customer of and have been for years. Conductor, we’ve done a demo with them, and Raven Tools, I’ve signed up for a trial there. So I’ve gone through all three of these pieces of software extensively. Not only that, but I’ve documented the crap out of everything that they do, everything that they’re doing right, everything that they’re doing wrong. So if a potential customer comes in and says, “How are you different from SEOmoz?” or, in the case of what we’re looking right now, a potential investor comes in and says, “How are you different from SEOmoz?” I can extremely, clearly articulate exactly what is right and wrong with all of these companies. And I sat on a Raven Tools webinar a couple of weeks ago… I’m not going to bash any of these guys. All of these companies are doing great stuff and all of them have really solid high- points to their product. SEOmoz has built a fantastic community. Conductor is a beautifully designed piece of software, and Raven Tools has an extensive list of features…

Andrew: So give me, based on all this research that you’ve done on these guys, what’s one thing that you’ve discovered that they just don’t do right that’s an opportunity for you to jump on?

Erica: Yeah, I love this. OK, so here’s the thing that all of them fall down on, and I’ve seen this over and over again with software companies, and you’re not going to be surprised with this because I’m sure you’ve talked to lot of software company CEO’s. Because the software folks all focus on features, and Raven Tools, in particular, has a billion features–all kinds of cool stuff that you can do with Raven Tools–but you need a one-hour webinar every week just to understand how to use their software. I love it. It’s got all kinds of great stuff, but there’s no… You can’t understand how to use it unless you’re already an SEO professional. These guys are all creating software… Conductor targets agencies. SEOmoz targets, I would say, what I would call ‘pro-users’– people who understand SEO–and Raven Tools, again, targets agencies and pro- users, so they’re in both of those markets. And so the agencies and pro- users is a very lucrative market. Conductor just announced they’re doing $10 million a year in revenue now, and they’ve only been in business a couple of years. Very lucrative, but it’s not useful for people who don’t understand SEO already. Of the three, SEOmoz does the best at helping people understand the basics of SEO…

Andrew: [laughs]

Erica: …but they don’t integrate it with their tools. They have great blog posts, great videos, and then their tools are in another section of the site. So, Whoosh Traffic, our goal is to integrate the information that people need to help them rank with the tools, so that you’re not just thrown in and going, “OK, here’s all your great tools.” Right now, I still feel like our website is a little feature-heavy, a little tools-focused. I did put my own picture on their [laughs] at the bottom.

Andrew: Is this you right here?

Erica: Yeah, that’s me and my co-founder, Parnell. And I still feel like we’re a little tools-heavy, and what our goal is in the next year is to, instead of focusing on how many tools we can build, is to instead equally focus on helping people understand search engine optimization. The most common questions we get are things like, “Well, how do I rank for this keyword?” Or, “What keyword should I go after?” I want to be able to have people click on those types of questions in the backend, like, “What keyword should I go after?” OK, here’s my website…

—- 13 of 16 —-

Erica: What keyword should I go after? Okay, here’s my website and here’s a couple of my competitors. Tell me what you [??] and why?

Andrew: Right. Let…

Erica: [laughs]

Andrew: Well, let’s show people how you do this. You talked a little bit about it. You say, “I do a search. I see who the competitors are. Who’s buying the ads.” Those guys obviously are generating revenue or have cash to spend. That’s why they’re at the top of those ad results. You sign up for their programs. You see what their whole sales process is like.

Erica: Yes.

Andrew: You write everything that you notice, down. If the guy’s a jerk, maybe, you probably write that… I see you’re shaking… You’re nodding. Obviously if he doesn’t respond, that also sticks in your mind.

Here’s one of the things that you do. This is an email that you sent over… Let me zoom out, here, so people can see this. I will try to read this to people. This is from a competitor of yours. You shot him an email from your personal account and his response is, “Hey Erica, you had recently been on our site and requested that we contact you regarding blah, blah, blank enterprise software… enterprise level SEO platform. My name is…” You asked me to wipe out his name. I did. “…and your request was forwarded to me,” and then, now, basically what he’s saying is, he wants to set up a ten minute conversation, and you see how he’s getting you to sign up for that ten minute conversation and you understand that their sales process is, web, just ten minute conversation. Do whatever it is that he’s going to do there to close it, and now this is your competitive research.

Erica: Exactly. And I want to know what are they doing right and what are they doing wrong. That ten minute conversation, I talked to him on the phone. We set up a webinar. We demo’d their product–great product by the way–I love their product. The minimum spend on their product is $60,000 to $70,000 a year. So they’re not targeting the same market that we are. That’s great competitive data that I now know, that they’re… And he said, “Well, we can go a little bit lower than that.” OK, so now I know that they’re a little bit flexible in that [??], but their still not going to be in the $99 to $500 a month market that Raven Tools is in. So they’re in a different market. They’re targeting agencies, so now I know who their target market is. I know what their most… We sat down and we did an hour webinar with him. We recorded the webinar. I sent the webinar to… My whole staff was there. I sent the webinar out to my whole staff afterwards, the recording. I said, “This is what they’re doing right; this is what they’re doing wrong…

Andrew: [laughs]

Erica: This is where we can go with our software to do kind of similar to what they’re doing, but a different target market.” And now I have so much data. I have the guy’s name. I have the company information. I asked them questions. Here’s a great set of question to ask: “What are the most popular features of your product? What do you find that people are paying for it?” You know the sales people, they love to dance with these kind of questions. They’re like, “Oh, yes, the most popular thing that we have is X, Y and Z.” And then you’re, like, “Great, I’m writing this down.” [laughs]

Andrew: [laughs] Um…

Erica: So that’s basically where we went with it. And we…

Andrew: I’ve got to ask you a follow-up question to something you said earlier that I didn’t think was the right time to follow-up, so I saved it for now. You hinted that you have another email address that you use and another phone number that you use with these people, you do. Is it also another name? Did you make up a whole other name? Sharon, Steven…

Erica: Sometimes I do. It depends. Sometimes I’ll use my co-founder’s name. Most of the time I just use my co-founder’s name because he’s not very well known on the Internet. He’s a software developer so he likes to hide in his cave, you know, I’m sorry. [laughs] I totally just threw him under the bus there. You know, he’s an amazing software developer, but he’s very privacy oriented and so he doesn’t even have a Twitter account or anything like that.

Andrew: Yeah, this dude right here.

Erica: So [??]. [laughs] He’s an amazing guy. He’s, like, my best friend too. So, sometimes I’ll use his name. We have an array of fake personas that we use, but I usually use my real name because I want people to know who I am and why I’m doing this. I’ve never, ever had a company where I use my real name–and a very Googleable name, my name–and they’ve said, “No, we don’t want to do a demo because you’re a potential competitor.” No, they love to show off their stuff, and if they realize that they… If they think they can possibly get a sale out of you or refer you to somebody, believe me, sales people love to talk about their own stuff and they love to demo and they love to show off stuff. So I’ve never had anybody say no, even when I used my own name, but sometimes I’ll use Carnell’s [SP] just because I feel like it would be a direct competition sort of thing.

Andrew: All right. No, no. I want to go to the last point, but I’ve got to ask you two things. First, I see here, this pops up… This is obviously SnapEngage, which is what you use to get feedback from people. It says…

Erica: I love SnapEngage.

Andrew: “Hi, I’m Erica.” What happens if I respond? Who’s going to respond as Erica right now?

Erica: Uh, not me because I’m here with you, and I apparently left it on, so I’m using somebody else’s computer right now.

Andrew: Right.

Erica: I apparently left it on, on my own computer. Sorry. There’s probably people on there because if I leave it on, I get at least a couple an hour, so there’s [laughs] probably a couple of people going [??]

Andrew: Somebody who’s responding on your behalf, yeah. Thank you, by the way, for switching… For gaining to switch to a MAC. I know you’re a PC person.

Erica: I know. [laughs]

Andrew: The other thing I was going to ask you is, what is this pose that he is doing here?

Erica: [laughs]

Andrew: All right. That, maybe we’ll save for people who want to get to know him personally and ask him.

Erica: We had a recommendation from somebody who watched our Investor Presentation PowerPoint, and we had that photo and somebody…

—- 14 of 16 —-

…Powerpoint and we had that photo and somebody said if you really want investors you should probably switch that photo and so we did for the investor Powerpoint.

Andrew:

All right. Let’s go back to the big board for the very last point here which is, let’s bring up here, OK, here we go. Make sure you have customers, let me read it from your notes, actually, instead of mine where I have the X’s. Make sure you have customers in the target market who are willing to pay for your stuff. Do it now. Do it before you start building the product. You want us to make sure that there are customers who are willing to pay for what we build before we build it?

A:

Yes.

Andrew:

OK.

A:

And go ahead and show the thing that I did to see how people were going to pay for our product. This was, OK, so let me explain this a little bit. I sent out, OK, let’s start from the beginning here. OK, so I run Erica.biz. In June, 2010 I promoted another person’s product called Profit Instruments. It was an information product designed to teach you how to make money online. Now, I know from very personal experience that 99% of the products in that market are total B.S., complete scams. They are designed by people who have never made any money online. They don’t actually teach you any valuable advice. Their whole thing is well, set up a website and put Word Press on it and then, well, and then you make money.

I thought most of the products were ridiculous but Profit Instruments actually had some decent stuff in there. I had bought a lot of those products and I actually bought Profit Instruments for $200. I found that it had some information in there that I had not seen before. I decided to promote it to my audience. I thought that would be cool, if I could make my $200. It had a 50% affiliate commission. I sent out the email to my list. It was a little over 4,000 people on my email list from my blog back then. I sent out the email and I thought OK, this is going to be cool. Like 10 minutes later somebody bought it and I got a little email back that said ding, you made money. I was like yes! I’ve made like $99 or whatever it was. Then another one rolled in. I was like oh, my gosh. This is really cool. By that time it was pretty much time for me to go to bed so I was like all right, I made back my $200. This is awesome.

The next morning I woke up and there were like 20 more emails in my inbox from people who had bought the product. I’m like whoa, OK, so now I’ve made like $1,000 or $1,500 or whatever it was. Eventually after three or four days when the product, the launch finally shut down. You know how they do that, they open it up for a week and then they shut down. I started promoting in the middle of the launch so I even missed the beginning of it. Three or four days later it turned out I had made $21,800 in commissions. Whoa! I was massively blown away by the fact that I had made that much money in like four days.

I earmarked that money to start my company’s traffic. But I wanted to find out first of all what kind of thing people would pay for. I sent out a survey to all of the people who had bought Profit Instruments. I know that these people have money because they paid at least $200 for this piece of software or, sorry, not a piece of software, for this information product. I sent out an email just to them and I put in there a survey. I sent you my survey results so that you can pop that up there. I did this in Google Docs.

Andrew:

Let me zoom in a little bit on this and we can give people a clearer shot with the program notes.

A:

The first question is would you be interested in monthly coaching to help you build your online business? You can see everybody, so there’s 67 responses. That’s a pretty great response rate considering I think only about 80 or 90 people bought the product, something like that. It’s a pretty awesome response rate. I said would you be interested in monthly coaching to help you build your online business? I gave specifics. I said you know, one on one access to me in private forum, mastermind groups, and everybody was like no.

Andrew:

You got shut down.

A:

No.

Andrew:

I bet you that that’s the part that you wanted the most. Online, I mean ongoing and they said no.

A:

Yeah, they said no. OK, so now we know that no, they’re not interested in that. Go ahead and show the next question. Now this one got interesting. I said one of the things in Profit Instruments was a way to build links to your site that helped it rank in search engines which back then was pretty effective. That method no longer really works that well.

By the way, there’s really no link building methods that will penalize you in Google. I guess there are a couple of people who are going to be really pedantic and beg to differ because of the new Penguin update. But for the most part you’re not going to take too much risk from building high quality links back to your site. I just wanted to sneak that one in there because people ask that all the time.

Anyway, I said would you be interested in a link building service because he showed examples of how to build links from other sites to your site and I realized that I could hire people and train them to do this. I said you know, I’ll hire and train staff to build backlinks. You’ll get a report every month. And I said plus a way to track how well you’re doing in the Google search results. I put in a number in there for investment, $47 and $97 per site, month per site. Now we charge a lot more.

—- 15 of 16 —-

…month per site. Now, we charge a lot more now. This one was the interesting one. It said yes, 37 people said yes. I was like whoa, 37 people said yes to $97 a month. Holy crap. If they all signed up that would be like $3,000 or $4,000 a month and maybe $1,000 a month for me to hire and train somebody to do this. Then I could make money. OK, awesome. That’s how Moose Traffic got started. That question right now.

You’ll notice my third question, in case I got both of these wrong, would you be interested in any other business building service from me? A lot of answers in that one, you can read some of the answers. It says not at this stage, maybe after I earn some money. I knew I had it right with the second question.

The important part of that survey was two things that everybody gets wrong. Number one, I surveyed people who have already paid. That’s key because now you know these people have at least some amount of money and they’re going to be willing to take out the credit card because they’ve already taken out the credit card. I surveyed people who are already paying customers.

Andrew:

Right, right. That’s a good point actually. That’s something that I hadn’t caught even though I’ve got it up on my screen here. Right, you want to see who’s got the money and survey them. And look at the response rate, by the way, 67 out of 90.

A:

Yeah.

Andrew:

Sorry, but I’m interrupting. You were going to say something else.

A:

No, that’s OK. The second point that I wanted to make was so you survey paying customers and then you ask them what they will pay for. I don’t know why everybody gets this wrong. They send out surveys, I see this all the time with people, they send out surveys and they’re like well, would you be interested in a book about X, Y, and Z. Well, sure I’d be interested if you give it to me for free.

Andrew:

I see.

A:

I put in there very specifically the kind of target dollar amount I was estimating. I had based that dollar amount, I had done my research and I saw some other people who were doing link building services. Of course I Googled and I clicked on all the ads, all that stuff. All of the companies that weren’t giant APCs that wanted to charge $10,000 a month, there were some companies that were doing link building in the, you know, from anywhere from like $20 to $30 a month to like $500 to $1,000 a month. Those people, OK, I think I could probably do something in that niche. I put it on the lower end just because I thought it was going to be a pretty easy thing to do.

Back then, this was like the golden days of Google. Back then you could just build whatever links you wanted to your site. Nothing ever really penalized you. It was great. I mean it was amazing. That stuff doesn’t really work as well anymore but those were the golden days. I launched Moose Traffic in beta later that same year. This was 2010, later that same year at $79 a month and I got tons of people to sign up. That’s how Moose Traffic got started. That’s the survey that started my current business. This stuff really works.

Then we decided, link building got difficult, it still works. What we’re doing still works but it’s a difficult market I have to say. You have to do a lot more now than you were doing back then and you have to tailor it a little bit better, write more articles. We spend a lot more money doing it now. I’ve focused on moving the company towards software.

As you can tell right there was my business plan. In that question it will also give you a way to track how you’re doing in Google. That is the basis of how we started Moose Traffic was our rank tracking software, which is the data that Google Analytics doesn’t give you, which is where you’re actually ranked in Google for key terms. That’s how I knew I was ranking number one for make money online. It told me. Our own software told me. It was cool.

Andrew:

OK, let me go, let me just say this as a final thought. Let me bring up the board here. Final thought, there, final point. Usually, by the way Erica, at this point I ask the guests to say what’s the one thing that the audience could do if they wanted to get started. I’m going to suggest something right now. I’m going to answer the question myself here. Find somebody’s fricking pain, find it right now.

I’ve got to tell you that the only reason that we did this session right now is because April Diteman, one of our riders who’s now producing some of the courses here, went back in to look at the feedback that we were getting from our audience and one thing that they said that frustrates them about Mixergy is that we never cover how to launch a business. In my head I always assume why would you be on my site if you don’t have a business. This whole thing is about business people teaching business people. I assumed everyone, I didn’t realize how many people who were out there who were complaining that we didn’t even talk about the basics of how to launch it, about this stuff. I thought we could give you how to go and incorporate and all that but none of it matters if you haven’t really done the basics which is find the pain. Create that, what we call the ghetto launch…

—- 16 of 16 —-

…create that, what we call the ghetto launch, that hustler launch, and then figure out what your competitors are missing and all that stuff that we covered here is way more important than how to LLC and how to get the perfect logo. You can go to 99Designs. You can go find an artist on Craigslist and get a great design.

Erica: And you know, 99Designs caters to the audience either. Our WhooshTraffic logo was done at 99Designs.

Andrew: 99Designs logo?

Erica: 99Designs, awesome. Use them.

Andrew: There you go. Wherever you guys want to go get your design, the point is it’s important, it’s fun. It’s not the most important one. We just talked about here it is THE most important thing of starting a business, and the proof is that you’re walking to the end The proof is that I finally did this, that I didn’t recognize, that there are people out there in the audience who are having this pain. “I’m listening to all of these interviews on Mixergy of really successful entrepreneurs. Show me how to get started to find that one product. Listening to all of these people talk about getting traffic. Well, show me how to launch a business.

You know what, when we were talking one on one with people, I ignored it. When we finally emailed our audience and said, “What is the big frustration?” They told us, and I couldn’t ignore it anymore. I wish actually when people told me one on one, I paid attention, but at the very least I had data coming back in that April put in a spreadsheet for me and said, “Look, right there. That’s what people are telling you the problem is” and that’s how the scores came.

So, bottom line, if you’re going to take anything away from this, go talk to someone, your current customers, if you’ve got them, and you happen to listen to this program all the way through or talk to your friends and see where their pain is. Talk to people who you would like to be your customers. We have whole courses on how to do that specific way, but I think what you’ve got in here is a great start that should get you out there to go talk to someone, find their pain and start building that business. Isn’t it fun, Erica?

Erica: I love it. The reason that I knew that was going to be your popular question and why I sent April a Facebook message and said, this is… I gave her a couple of options because she asked me for like, two or three different ones. I said the big one is how to choose a business because that’s what my audience emails me about constantly. It’s how do I go from idea to business, or how do I find the right idea. Those are probably the most popular questions you get when people come to your site. They want business advice. Now, I knew this one was going to be popular for you because it’s popular for my audience.

Andrew: I didn’t realize that. I didn’t realize how much of an issue that is.

Erica: Yep.

Andrew: Well, there it is then. It’s here. I hope you guys go and do this. First of all, it feels great to be running a business. You can see I keep getting excited about this topic, but second, it feels good to know that there’s someone out there who’s got a problem that you’re going to fix.

Erica: Right.

Andrew: The enthusiasm that you have for fixing their problem, it’s unmatched. It’s the response that you get from them when you do. It’s unmatched. Go out there. Implement everything that you’ve heard in this problem. Come back to me and let me know what your progress is, and come back to Erica who you can find at WhooshTraffic.com. Of course, we’ll link to it. Frankly, you can see it right here, so you don’t even need to wait for me to link to it. It’s right where, WhooshTraffic.com and, of course, Erica.biz is the blog that we talked about earlier.

Erica, thanks for doing this program. Everyone else who’s watching, thank you all for being a part of it. Bye.

Erica: Yes. Thank you.

Master Class:
How to turn your content into a product
(So you can say goodbye to ads)
Taught by Susan Su of AppSumo

Report issues here

Master Class:
YOUR FIRST PRODUCT


About the course leader

Susan Su leads product strategy at AppSumo, the store for entrepreneurs.

Master Class Toolbox

Course Cheat Sheet

Facebook Marketing Bible

5 Natural Ways to Reduce Swelling After Jaw Surgery

Google Trends

Transcript

Download the transcript here

Andrew: This course is about how to turn your content into a product. The course is held by Susan Su, who leads product strategy at AppSumo, the store for entrepreneurs. Here are the topics that we are going to be covering in this program, some of the super powers that you will be getting.

You’re going to see how to find hotspots. Hotspots are those areas that people are so excited about that before you even make them an offer, they’re almost already ready to buy it from you. Susan is going to give you a couple of examples from her own experience. We’re also going to talk about how to look online to see what people are talking about, what they want to buy, how you should be creating your products, and what needs you should be addressing with your new products.

We want to help you ensure success before you even launch. We’ll talk about… here’s another topic that I want to turn your attention to, how to make a contingency plan. Most people will make a contingency plan for failures. Susan’s going to talk about how to prepare for success and how that’s different from the kind of preparation that most people take.

All right, so we have got a lot to cover here but the first thing that I want to talk about is what’s possible and Susan, as someone who’s done this for App Sumo, and multiple other companies as well, as you will see through out this program… you’ve see what’s possible on the down side, and what’s possible on the upside. Maybe, we can start by talking about a cautionary tale. In fact, the big problem before we talk about a specific mistake that App Sumo made, and what we learned from it… Let’s talk about the big problem that people have when they don’t create products out of their content.

Susan: Sure thing. Well, thanks, first of all. Thank you for the nice introduction, Andrew, it feels great to be here.

Andrew: Thanks for being here.

Susan: I think content… people don’t realize because it is so easy to create content on the web that’s low quality, but creating really high quality content is an extremely source intensive endeavor, and it’s something quite frankly… if you’re doing good work, you should be rewarded for it.

My belief is that you should be rewarded for it directly, and not tangentially. When I say tangentially, I’m referring to ads and these other kinds of monetization techniques that a lot of content creators have resorted to because there is no other way for them to make a living.

I think that’s, the driving passion behind all of this. Me and the work that I have done over the past few years… I’m working with Ramit Sethi, App Sumo, inside Network, inside Facebook, and we’ve always believed, and when I say we, I’m referring to everybody that I have worked with and myself, that great content should have a monetary value assigned directly to it and should not just be held to the whims of advertisers.

Andrew: Why not? I mean, when most people start a content-based business, they’re like, “OK, the next thing that I need to do is, now that I’ve got a little bit of an audience, to bring in some revenue. OK, the way to bring in revenue is advertising,” …and they start to add ads to their sites. Why isn’t that the approach that you’re going to be advocating and teaching here?

Susan: Well, this is the reason why. If you can see this, I just picked up this magazine from the App Sumo micro kitchen earlier today. It’s a beautiful publication called “Edible Austin, Celebrating Texas Food Culture, Season by Season.” There are great photographs and the potential for really great content.

For somebody like me, I’m interested in food. I’m kind of a foodie. I’m interested in this gourmet stuff but as I flip through this publication, I realize that this whole thing is basically an advertorial [sp] for various businesses around Austin, Houston, and Dallas. That’s okay, but if I want to read product reviews, if I wanted to read business reviews, I’ll just go to yelp.

I quickly realized that this publication is not useful to me. And that possibly explains why it only comes for a quarter.

Andrew: I see, and what you’re noticing more online, even more dramatically is when people only look for advertising, what they end up doing is flooding their content with advertising. It’s either a lot of clear ads around the site, or it’s content that’s really advertising disguised as content and so on. That’s one of the reasons why you don’t want us to live and breathe adverting. You want us to create our own products that we sell to our customers.

Susan: That’s right. It breeds a very strong dependence on those that are paying you those dollars that are essentially aren’t the consumers of your content. This whole idea is getting the monetization channel going between you and those that consume your content directly. It’s a really nice interplay. You’re closing the loop between the content that you create, and the people that you created it for, and you are exchanging money and value back and forth for that.

Andrew: All right. I will also say this that, a lot of times, may be even most times, advertising just not going to do it for you. There’s not enough revenue for smaller sites in advertising. But, if you create the right product for your audience, you will do it. I mean, proof is I am doing it right here with Mixergy. People are paying to watch this. All right. So, if people do this, there are mistakes that we want to help them avoid it and there are opportunities that we want to help them seize on. On the misstake that you guys at AppSumo is, wait, let me bring up an image of a mistake. I think this is still up on the site. In fact; yeah, there it is. What happened with, what’s Inbox Dojo, and why is this a cautionary tale that we need to tell the audience about.

Susan: Well, Inbox Dojo is our line of email marketing courses and templates and action guides, all about email marketing. And so, we’ve kind of branded it as “Inbox Dojo” kind of goes with a pseudo-Japanese theme of AppSumo and Inbox Dojo, the action course, that you see here at the screenshot, is a bit of a cautionary tale. It’s actually done decently as a product, because we’ve really optimized the marketing side of things. But, I would say it hasn’t exceeded our expectations by any means, and the reason why it’s a cautionary tale I think, it really underscores a very common pitfall for content creators. You focus overly on the content and then you forget that it’s actually content as a product. It’s not content, period. It’s content as a product.

So, those who are creating products, may be it’s a special ball point pen, or a tool for people to design WordPress sites better. People who are used to creating products for the sake of products, they’re really going to be looking at some essentials as product market fix, and does this, basically everything to do with this, have a niche audience that’s going to pay for this product. I’d say that our biggest mistake with the Inbox Dojo product was focusing too much on the content. We had our email marketing advisor, AppSumo email marketing advisor at that time, a woman name Julie, very, very talented. We thought that because Julie is here in town, she knows so much about email marketing, she has all this great expertise, and we need to create content around her expertise.

So, we were obsessed with the idea of the content. We were sort of enamored with the content potential of Julie and of email marketing overall. We didn’t stop for a second to think, “How many people could actually use this expertise in their day to day lives? Which customers does this type of expertise, actually speak to?” We didn’t ask ourselves that question because, we were so focused on this, the concept of all this great content that we could put together with Julie. And so, we forged ahead with creating the action course. We made very fancy videos, and the content’s very interesting, and it’s all great, the quality is there. The quality of the content is there. But, why didn’t people buy? Because, it just wasn’t a fit for the types of customers that we have on our AppSumo distribution list. For some people it was too advanced, for other people, you know, it was only right for a certain scale of their company, that Julie was doing these large scale email marketing campaigns, most of our customers did not have access to such large scale campaigns and so that just wasn’t a fit.

Andrew: I see. So, what you’re warning us again, and what you are going to show us how to avoid as this program continues is the idea that you create content and that the content shouldn’t come from internally. It should come from outside. You should see what needs people have, you should see what they are clammering for, you should see what they’re excited about, and then create content around that, but it can’t just be only because you have an opportunity to create it.

Susan: That’s right.

Andrew: OK…

Susan: So, I’ll…

Andrew: And that’s a component of which you still want to care about it, you still obviously want to know about it, but it can’t just be because you care and you know about it. Other people in the world have to have an interest, a passion for it, a need for it, and you’re going to show us how to identify that before we create our products.

Susan: Yeah.

Andrew: OK.

Susan: So, we’ll get into this a little bit later, but, one of the first tactics is to create content around your own experiences. So, if you don’t have the expertise, (?) sort of step zero and we definitely had that for the email action course but then, we sort of look outward at the marketplace and see, “Are there actual customers that need this? Does this solve somebody’s problem, or is this just us speaking because we have beautiful voices?”

Andrew: I see. All right, and an opportunity, if we get this all right, is this. This is another product that you worked on at a previous company that you’re a part of inside Facebook. What’s the product that you guys created there?

Susan: I’m so proud of this one. The Facebook Marketing Bible is a product, a subscription website that costs $75 a month recurring. It’s really, really powerful there. You can tell that it’s a big part of the business just by that alone. It started out as very simple blog posts in 2006, 7, and 8 that were packaged up into a PDF because there was so much interest around those blog posts.

For a long time it stood alone as a PDF that was just sold on the site, one- off, and there was so much interest in that that we decided to turn it into a subscription website to capture that recurring audience interest and willingness to pay. That is what you see here today. The Facebook Marketing Bible at Facebookmarketingbible.com.

Andrew: I’ve got numbers a little bit here up in my notes. Are you willing to talk about the size of the revenue that you guys did there?

Susan: It’s actually been a little while since I’ve had access to the exact revenue numbers, but I will say that it started at zero because it was free blog posts, and then once those were polished up into a PDF it was enough to sustain at least one full time person working on it. Inside Network was acquired by a publicly traded company in May of 2011, and the Facebook Marketing Bible was one pillar of our revenue strategy that lead to a $14 million acquisition of a company that was essentially just six people with no funding. It was pretty good for a media company.

Andrew: Basically, it was a blogging company with a great subscription model on the side.

Susan: Yeah. You can go to the blogs and you’ll see ads up on the side, but I’ll tell you ad revenue is not the main attraction.

Andrew: We see what’s possible. We see why we want to do this. Let’s talk about how to get started here. The first thing we want to do is go after our own experiences to really be aware of what we know. We see that that’s not the only thing we need to be aware of, and if we only think about that there’s a danger that you guys experienced when you created the Inbox Dojo product. But, it does start with what you know and your own experiences, right?

Susan: Absolutely. I have a little story from my personal life: A few years back, about five years ago, I was scheduled to have reconstructive jaw surgery. I’ve always been a little bit of a research nut, and I had decided, prior to that surgery, just as an experiment, to take only natural methods for jaw surgery recovery. This is something I decided for myself. I was interested in it, and because I’m a research nut I decided to apply all my free time in researching how you naturally recover from jaw surgery without using even so much as a single Tylenol pill.

When it comes down to creating content around your own experiences, I just want to highlight that your own experiences and things like what I did with my jaw surgery research equates to a bunch of time that you spent in doing that research and acquiring those experiences and acquiring that expertise, and that time that you put into it is valuable to other people and can be monetized.

Anyway, back to the jaw surgery story. I had decided to start a blog because I had been doing all this research, and I thought, “Gosh, what’s the point of keeping all of this to myself.” It’s kind of convenient for my parents to check in on me, but, really, I never wrote this with my parents in mind because my mom and dad didn’t really care about vitamins and surgery, but I thought other people might care about this.

There were a bunch of different signs that let me know people would care about this; I had done some Google research, read a lot of the other blogs that people have about surgery recovery, and I saw that there was a bit of a gap. The other side of it was that I was doing all of this research and I didn’t want it to go to waste in my own notes. That’s how I started the site. It ended up being fairly popular. I realized I could use some of my knowledge to help other people.

Andrew: This site that I’ve got up on the screen, that’s your site. This is what you did with everything that you learned about jaw surgery and how to deal with the pain.

Susan: Yeah. I would edit things every once in a while, but I did not take a perfectionist approach to it. I was quite a bit younger than I am now. I didn’t have a ton of content experience. I hadn’t worked with Ramit yet at this point or Inside Network or App Sumo or anything. I just put it all up there, almost exactly as I took notes on it, put up some pictures. And people really took to that because it was notes that they didn’t have to take. It’s kind of like a cheat sheet.

Andrew: Yeah. All right. So that’s how you got started. You just identified something that a lot of people wouldn’t even consider a skill, wouldn’t consider knowledge that others would want. But you said, “Hey, I put in all this research. I know something about this that other people can know without having to spend all this time that I spent researching”.

You started off with the blog, and then . . . Can I skip a couple of these points right now, just to talk about this one for a moment because I think it ties in with what you just talked about?

Susan: Sure, yeah.

Andrew: One of the tactics is to look for hotspots. And you did that with your site, and noticed . . . Here, let me bring this up here. We’re looking at 68 comments. And they’re passionate comments. These aren’t just people saying, “me, too” or “first”. They’re really interacting with this. 68 comments over what, and then what did this show you?

Susan: In my journey, learning about jaw surgery, I quickly discovered . . . Well my own personal biggest fear was getting all puffy faced. That’s the first concern you have when you’re thinking about getting your wisdom teeth removed or you’re going to have jaw surgery, which is much more serious than getting your wisdom teeth removed.

And you have to go out in the world, and we’re all a little bit vain. And I personally was very vain and concerned that my face was going to be swollen. Being that I had [??]to take only a natural approach to [??], I decided, “Well, I’m going to figure out what are the top ways . . . ”

I researched online, I talked to my surgeon, whom I already had access to. I wanted to know the top ways that I could reduce or eliminate swelling as fast as possible, using only natural methods, after the surgery. I wanted to get back to work.

So I research all these methods, and I decided to just go ahead and put it up as a very, very simple blog post. It was literally five numbered steps, with some bullet points under each one. Not perfected at all, just threw it up there. I started to really see the traffic pick up on this post. And that shows that there were people searching for it, there were people coming to the post. So there’s broader interest out there.

But then, in looking at the comments, gosh, 68 comments is a lot for a niche topic such as ‘Five Natural Methods for Reducing Swelling After Jaw Surgery’. That was the title of the post. 68 comments, and they’re all paragraph long comments, people asking a lot of follow up questions, thanking me for the material.

That alerted me to the fact that not only was there wide spread interest, because of the traffic, but there was deep user engagement with that content. People actually were reading through the entire post, and then after they read through the entire post, they had follow up questions. So there was more that I had not answered. They liked it . . .

Andrew: What kind of follow up questions could there be? You told them what to expect and how to deal with it. What else are they wondering?

Susan: Well, like, “What about this little [??]?”, but turned out not to be an [??], because other people would ask the same thing. Or, one of the things I would talk about was products they could use. “Could I use this brand of the product instead of another brand of the product?” Or, “You recommend going on 20 minutes walks each day. What if I don’t have 20 minutes? How much time . . . ?” All these really tactical questions. People were really taking to my advice, but they wanted to know exactly how they could implement it. So just going deeper on those five points that I already presented.

Andrew: I see.

Susan: I was really happy to field all of these questions, but it created somewhat of a problem for me. Because I had never had this kind of attention online before, so I was really flattered. I set about answering every one of those questions by hand, by email, one by one.

And I realized that I was spending a lot of time every single day, answering questions, repeatedly for strangers on the Internet, that ended up being the same questions over and over again. And that was the second sign to me that there could be something more done with this blog post rather than just leave it up there and have people put questions and comments, and then I would answer them personally via private email. That just seemed very inefficient after awhile.

Andrew: You know what? That happened to me, too, with interviewing. I think somewhere after I did a hundred interviews on Mixer-G, people came to me and said, “What mic do you use? What camera do you use? What software do you use to edit?” And I just got frustrated answering all these things.

And I think I even did a blog post about it, I did a post on a question and answer site on it. I did, everywhere. I told them as much as I could. And then they’d still come back with more questions and that’s what made me think ‘I’m going to start writing down all these questions.’ I think I was like I never know, at the time maybe I was emailing them to myself with a label and I’ll put something together around this so I don’t have to keep answering over and over.

But once you tap into a topic, I guess the people see you as the expert in it and maybe that you’re known for. Maybe people will start coming to you with all their questions.

Susan: That’s right and not to diverge too much but I really love your story about that product recommendations for Mixergy. It’s funny because there’s something about putting a wrapper around it and calling it your questions answered. That really changes people’s behaviors in interacting with that content.

So I too, I had, actually you ask me what kind of follow up questions people ask. Well, out of the following questions we’re pretty much answered right there in that first post but people just wanted some other format for the material that I was presenting. Or, much more commonly, they would ask for these follow up questions and then the follow up questions would be answered elsewhere in my site but they just didn’t look for it. Or you didn’t even have to look so it was right there on the side bar.

But they just they wanted to ask. They wanted to have it kind of tied to that five methods blog post. And so I thought ‘Gosh, if people really want to hear it five different ways, then I can put it together as a PDF’, which I did. I used that initial blog post. It’s really simple. It ended up being longer than I thought. Put it into Microsoft Word and it was a lot more pages than I thought it would be so I didn’t had a lot to add and then I looked at the most commonly asked questions. I even just copied and pasted some of those emails right in there. Added some additional images so that it would look nice and engaging and I saved to PDF or export it or whatever the tool function is and I had my first Ebook for that site.

Andrew: I’m going to come back in a moment to a question about guilt because once people see some of the methods that we’re going to talk about, they’re going to think ‘Ooh, is that really enough of a product?’ I want to get them over their insecurities but let’s show one other one here for this topic on how to find hot spots.

This is another site that you work for. Previous one was your site. This is site on, whose blog post is this? This is Ramit Sethi, right?

Susan: Yeah. So way back in, I think this was 2009, is that right? Is that what the date says on there?

Andrew: Yeah. October 30th, 2008.

Susan: Oh, my gosh. Oh, the time. How the time passes. So back in 2008, Ramit, I guess he got, he’s never been a big proponent of frugality or saving a couple of dollars here and there and that sort of has been his MO. It’s why [??] when you can always make more. But back in 2008 he decided to do a 30 day experiment called the Save 1,000 dollars in 30 days Challenge and for some reason, well, it’s not a mystery. People are always interested in this and they’re interested in tactics for saving money but this series really, really took off, not only in terms of traffic which again is sort of a sign of the broader interest level in this topic, but also in the engagement. This post that you have a screenshot in here, Andrew, has over 300, is that three?

Andrew: No, in this case, for this, this is a wrap up of the post and it has 243 comments.

Susan: Oh, my God. That’s a lot.

Andrew: And this is just him pinpointing to the post that are part of the series on the 30 day challenge. So people were really engaged. It’s not just 243 comments, which is a whole lot but it’s also as you experienced on your product, really intense. Look at number two here. It’s “Good idea, Ramit. I also hate tons of frugality.” and he just goes on for more than most people would write on a blog post, commenter number two, K-A-C-P-E-R. So it’s that kind of engagement that you want us to look for.

Susan: If you can get 243 people to write a response to your content and, not only write the response but have a thoughtfully benign response that’s formatted with line breaks and additional questions, then you might just be able to get some subset of those 243 people to pay you a few bucks for a deepened version of that very content.

Andrew: And this is what he ended up doing with it. Let’s see if I can I bring up his site. This is his product. I think it was his first major product that’s called the Scrooge Strategy and he said this product came about as a result of the excitement that he was seeing from what we just showed.

Susan: Yes. This was one of the first products that I worked with Ramit on and so it’s the beginning of our very, very wonderful relationship working together and it really came out of all this interest from the 30 Day Challenge. He just very smartly saw that there was an immense amount of interest, and that there is something that could be done there. I mean, 243 comments on just the wrap-up post alone. So, he decided to package up all that he had written and all that he had learned from the 30-day challenge, into a product that he called “The Screwed Strategy”, which was savings tips delivered, I think once a day.

I can’t remember the frequency now. I’m sure it’s changed since then, but it’s a subscription service where you get very useful and proven savings tips emailed to you. A lot of people have written in to him saying, “Oh, I’ve saved $872 using these techniques,” so it’s definitely helping people.

But the main take-away here is that it wasn’t invented from scratch. It was based off of content that he’d put out there for free, saw that there was a lot of uptake on it, and he didn’t have to reinvent that content. He basically just deepened it, just like I did with my “How to Reduce Swelling After Jaw Surgery Post”. Then, even more people found enough value that they were willing to pay him $10 a month, $20 a month, $30 a month for that subscription.

Andrew: All right. So, we see how to look for hotspots, let’s go back to what I skipped over before, which is, “next big tactic is look for the screaming need.” You give an example of a mutual friend of ours, Charles Hudson. What did Charles Hudson do? Let me bring up this screenshot. How did he find a screaming need?

Susan: Well, my last company was called Inside Network. It came from those blogs about Facebook and social gaming. Charles was our research partner at Inside Network. He and Justin Smith, the Founder of Inside Network, worked together on a research series called “Inside Virtual Goods”.

Where this came from was, back in 2009, virtual goods, while already quite an established industry in other markets like Asian, China, Japan especially, it was just growing here in the United States. So, people didn’t really know very much about it, and yet it was already a $5 billion market in China.

That’s a lot of money, and so I think a lot of investors here in the U.S., where there are more investment dollars, saw, “Oh, gosh. Well, there’s this $5 million market in China,” and now it’s starting to grow in the United States. Charles and Justin saw that there was essentially a screaming need in the investment and gaming community for knowledge and expertise around the virtual goods industry.

While they didn’t necessarily have all the expertise they needed, they had enough. Then, most importantly, they had all the connections to those who did have direct experience with it so that they could conduct interviews and deepen the research, and create a research series, which ended up being “Inside Virtual Goods”.

So, they were just the first guys to really do it, and because of that, this post that you have in the screenshot here, “Watch ‘Inside Virtual Goods’ on CNBC,” because they were really the first to market with that type of knowledge, they got a huge amount of press attention. Then also, actual sales attention too. People were clambering after this information, and it ended up being a huge part of the Inside Network business, that, again, went for the $14 million acquisition in 2011.

So, this post is highlighting us kind of tooting our own horn a little bit. We were surprised to get the call from CNBC saying, “So, we hear you’ve…” It was right the next day, “We hear you’ve released this report about virtual goods. We want to know why people are paying for virtual goods and how it’s going to become a multi-million, multi-billion dollar industry.”

Now, of course, since then Zynga has gone IPO, Facebook. All of that has been very much connected to virtual goods. So, Justin and Charles, they really did have the right premonition about where it was going.

Andrew: When the company sold, you said $14 million, their big sources of revenue were these two products that you just showed us, “Inside Virtual Goods” and “The Facebook Bible”, right?

Susan: Those were part of it. I would say we divided everything up broadly into research and advertising, and events. We had a conference line as well. Well, the margins were great on advertising in some ways because we just had our editorial team to sustain.

But in terms of the growth factor, I can tell you that after three years of doing that business, the biggest areas for growth were the subscription research reports and sites. Not advertising and not the conference business. The conference business.is fun. It’s great to go out there and meet people, and be on stage. Advertising, it’s nice to have on sites, and if advertisers are coming knocking on your door, then don’t turn them away. It’s not going to be the thing that doubles or triples, or quadruples, quarter over quarter the way some of these other parts of the business have the potential to do.

Andrew: What you’ve got here in the notes that you and Jeremy, our producer, put…actually no, this is April Dykman [SP] who put this together with you. I’m looking here at the notes with her, and it’s interview a couple of dozen CEOs. That’s what they did. They also did user surveys on Facebook. They wrote a research report on what’s going on in this phase. And they launched October 2009. They got on CNBC soon after, and they’ve released ten editions so far. This is basically what that product is.

Susan: Yes.

Andrew: All right. And they found that screaming need. They built it. Anything else before we go onto the next big idea?

Susan: I would say that this also is a great example of how it does need to be a successful content product. It does need to be based on experience. Both Charles and Justin had direct experience in the virtual goods industries, and in gaming. They wouldn’t have been able to conduct that research successfully, or have those connections, or do that analysis without having worked in the field, in the trenches, literally, so that they could create the right kind of content.

A lot of it was sort of based on the stuff they had seen working in their own start-ups, and then used these expert interviews to fill in the gaps. It’s very difficult to create a successful content product if you have never really done the work yourself.

Andrew: OK. All right. Next big idea? There it is. You say use Google Analytics and Google Trends to find those big opportunities, and here is an example of what you are noticing. This is Facebook marketing as it appears in Google Trends, which means that people are just searching for it more in 2008 than 2007, and just rising 2009, 2010, 2011, and so on. What did you use this specific search for? And how are you using Google Trends to help you identify topics to write about and to create content about that you’re selling?

Susan: This connects to the Facebook Marketing Bible. In that one it was quite important to be early to market, and Facebook marketing, I think, it was just an intuitive sense that Justin Smith had that it was going to become this big topic, and you should create some material on it before all the “me toos” were creating material on it as well.

This Google Trends search highlights that he was very right about that. How I would use Google Trends now, today, is really looking at the kind of wording that people are searching for on a regular basis. Again, your product has to be very much rooted in experience, direct experience that you have. Otherwise, you’re not going to be able to create the right kind of content. Justin did have that.

If he had called it something else besides Facebook Marketing, say Facebook Fan Counts or Great Facebook Pages, would it have taken off as much as Facebook Marketing, the Facebook Marketing Bible? I’m not sure. People are going to be looking for content products that are called what they expect them to be called. In this Google Trends example, you can see that those exact words, Facebook Marketing, in that exact order, that’s the term that people are most interested in, and not the term that’s really growing in interest from 2007 till today.

Andrew: I see. OK. All right. We’re hunting for potential ideas here, but we’re also using this to understand how to name our products based on those ideas.

Susan: Sure. It’s naming and then it’s also just validating your positioning.

Andrew: I see.

Susan: The same products, the same kind of content can fare better or worse, depending on how it’s positioned to the target audience.

Andrew, I just wanted to just speak briefly about Google Analytics too. Just when it came back to my own post about [?], I had mentioned that, the high traffic to that one post really signaled to me that more could be done there. Google Analytics, there’s so much data on it now as part of that product.

Back in 2008, there wasn’t so much, but really all I needed was the number of page views the certain post was getting, and then very importantly, how much time people were spending on the site, and how much time people were spending with that post. I had noticed there is some content that people just being on for many minutes at a time, just reading through. Maybe they were leaving it open in the tab, or maybe they were just really into it. That’s when they were typing out their long comment reply to my post. Those are all basically signals of interest and engagement, and should be flags for exactly where your productizing efforts on your content.

Andrew: So, Google analytics, of course internally, Google trends externally. I just did this search on Google Trends, to see how Facebook advertising, as a phrase, compares to Facebook marketing. We can see that Facebook marketing is one and a quarter times more searched for than Facebook advertising, so clearly that’s what you want to name your product, Facebook marketing as opposed to Facebook advertising bible. Am I using this the way that you’re suggesting?

Susan: Absolutely, that’s a great little comparison there. It’s very clever that you did that, Andrew, because Facebook advertising and Facebook marketing are essentially the same topic. If you call it Facebook marketing, you’re going to capture more of that general interest that’s out there if you position it as Facebook advertising.

Andrew: And in my mind, I’d think that Facebook advertising is the way people are searching for it, because that’s the way Facebook is promoting it, and also, it’s just the way that you expect to promote products, by advertising, but marketing is much more popular. Anything else before we go on to the next big tactic?

Susan: Let’s move on.

Andrew: Let’s go to the big board. The next big one is “Release a simple version.” You guys do courses. Actually Noah Anatsumo [SP] told me that Anatsumo courses are more popular than products. You might have different data than I do, and maybe mine’s out of date, but that’s what I heard, so that’s what you are hearing. How does that square with what you’re hearing? What did you see on the inside?

Susan: People do loads of products. It doesn’t really surprise me, but some of the tools are really great, so it’s a delightful surprise that the products those really great tools that we’re having on the site.

Andrew: By products, you mean the ones that you create internally, courses like the copywriting course, the business blueprint course. Those are outselling products like Clickee the analytics (?) for example.

Susan: Yes. I think there’s a little bit more of a broader appeal. I think, just in general, that there are more people that need to learn how to structure their businesses and how to use the tools before they can get into equipping their toolkit with every little tool that they need.

Andrew: You asked me to talk a little bit about this, and I will. This is the first product that Noah Anatsumo created, and I helped him do it. You can see. The first thing people notice is that I look pretty serious with my vest on, my collared shirt, and my background perfect, and my professional mic, and Noah’s just sitting there with a hat. The course was based on his experience finding interns. Other people were asking him how he gets interns to help run his company. (?) was in a coffee shop.

I was staying at my office, recording this with him, and when he released it, I have to tell you, Anaiba, I apologized to him in a bathroom at the conference about that. I was upset with him. I said, “Noah, how can you release a product that looks like this? This is not really a full course. It’s you in a hat, at the coffee shop. The reason I was wrong was that this was the first product that he created. He was testing to see if people were interested in it. Clearly they were. It ended up doing well. I’m so serious. I took another screen of this to see if I could find myself less serious, but I’m very serious when I do these things.

It gave him an indication that people were interested in it. People ended up surprising me by complementing the information in there, and frankly, I can come back and use the information from that course when I hire anyone. I don’t think we’ve hired an intern, but when we hire part-time people to help with Mixergy, I go through that internship program and I basically do what he said, for finding interns. I do it to find all the people we hire here.

So, it clearly works. The audience loved it. It was a first shot, and he was right to just test out something simple. By testing out something simple, he got feedback, and he got to improve, improve, and improve. Today, he has you in the company to help create products. He’s really gotten serious about this.

Susan: Well, I think one of Noah’s greatest strengths, and one of my favorite things about him as a person is that he’s really hell-bent on delivering value, even from the very beginning and thing is when you are at the beginning of something you might not have a ton of resources to deliver the highest value on every single aspect of your product. I mean, so, in the case with the Mixergy interview, he decided to invest all of his resources in delivering value in terms of the content. But, may be not finding this…

Andrew: Mass production value.

Susan: Sure, exactly, or taking a shower to fix his hair that day, or finding like, a fancy outfit to wear. He wasn’t going to spend his time on that stuff. Instead, he decided to spend his time on making a really, really, really, good interview for you that you could use, that anybody could use and actually change their intern acquisition strategy. And so, now, actually it’s funny, because now, if you did it, if you were to do a Mixergy interview with Noah this week, you might find that he looks a little bit nicer. But, that’s just because it is very iterative, right, so he has figured out some of that beginning stuff, the actual material and the content and now that that’s to a degree he’s satisfied with, that’s a very, very high degree of quality. Then, he can sort of go on to adding more production value to things.

Andrew: And so, I’ve got to tell you, too, another thing that happened there. I don’t think he had an affiliate program at that time, but he wanted to pay me every time this product was sold on his site. And so, the way that he did it was, he was still collecting payment via PayPal and PayPal, when you create a button to sell it, it’s very easy to create a button to sell, but it’s also very easy to add an item number to each of your products that you are selling…

Susan: Right.

Andrew: And they basically just walk you through doing it. So, what he did was, he had his Gmail account which collected all those emails from PayPal for all the sales. He created a filter that if, any time this product name came up in his inbox, he would just forward it to me, and then I would see how many of those emails came in and I’d know how much revenue he was generating from this one product, and I could multiply by my percentage and know how much I was collecting every time the product sold. What I mean by that is, he just started out so simply, he just said, “Let’s just build what we can, we’ll improve it later, we’re not going to sweat it”, and it worked out beautifully for him. For a long time afterwards, for months and months, even after he got really strong with quality and production values of his programs, I was still getting those emails because people were still buying.

Susan: Yup.

Andrew: So, I apologize to him, I do say now, this is the way, absolutely the way to launch something for the first time. What do you say though, Susan, to someone who sees this and says, “I feel guilty, just creating this or I feel like I have this high standard, I feel guilty creating”, where was that? The product that you created about jaw surgery, which was just a PDF created in a word processing program. When they feel guilty and they don’t want to do, what do you say to them?

Susan: Well, I had a little experience couple months ago, where I was at my yoga studio. I was in the bathroom, I kind of looked around me and I noticed that there was toilet paper, there were paper towels, and there was a box of Kleenex and suddenly, I had been thinking about this very question, I was working in a content business at the time, and I was feeling a little bit of that guilt because I thought, “Well, what are we doing? Is this good enough?

You know, they could find this information, if they really tried, they could find all this information, out there on the web, and maybe interview some people to supplement it”, and so I wasn’t really feeling confident in the material that we were packaging. But then, I sort of looked around and saw the toilet paper, the Kleenex and the paper towels, and I thought, “These are all paper, these are all paper pulped products, packaged differently, and priced differently and yet here they are, housed in the same bathroom and I am going to use all three of them and find utility and pleasure really in having access to all three of them. I will go to Safeway or wherever it is and buy not only toilet paper but also paper towels, not only toilet paper and paper towels, but also Kleenex, and I am happy to pay stratified prices for all three of those.”

And so, that little bathroom experience really showed me that packaging is part of the product itself. So, it’s not just your content, and I am not talking about packaging in terms of a fancy design or a fancy InDesign template instead of a word doc. But really the fact that your delivery method for your content and for your knowledge is just as meaningful to the consumers of that content as the content itself.

Andrew: But at first what we’re saying is, release a simple version and in that simple version, the design is not going to look nice. It’s basically going to be their equivalent, I should say, of a PDF that’s printed out of a word doc, or, of course, that’s created in a coffee shop, with a ski hat on. And know they need to do or they know, at least, that it’s worked for me, it’s worked for you, it’s worked for Noah at AppSumo. But they need to get past the feeling of guilt of releasing that simple first version. What do you say to them about how to get past it so that they can just release it or if they’re on the fence, how do we push them towards this approach?

Susan: Well, I think the part of the process comes from people fearing that the customer won’t get value out of something unless it’s perfect, and I don’t think that’s true because we know from the Noah case that people can get value from somebody in a ski hat, talking about their intern strategy, if the strategy is really needy and proven, and it’s delivered in a way that that audience person can hear it and process it. So, the key is really just that it has to be formatted such that the consumer of the information is actually able to take action with it. So, with my blog post about jaw surgery, clearly the blog post was engaging, got all that traffic and got all those comments, but it wasn’t enough in that format on the blog for people to really take the correct action that they needed to take to solve their problem.

And so, when I pulled it off the blog and put it into a word document, saved it as a PDF, it wasn’t so much that I added all those fancy designs to it. I certainly didn’t do that, I did it in half a morning on a Saturday. It was more just that I thought about what’s the way that I can get people closer to taking action, and if downloading the PDF and paying $15 for it, or, are things that people will do that will get them closer to taking action on something because it makes it feel more real to them, then, that is just as good as spending two Saturdays perfecting the logo. So, I think it’s about focusing your efforts on not just creating a minimum viable product, and that’s just fine, too, it is about doing that, but it’s about figuring out what’s just the right trick to making it useful and actionable for that consumer.

Andrew: OK, and right, and useful and actionable doesn’t necessarily mean the best design, it doesn’t mean the best software that’s used to create it. Often, it’s just the right ideas that you’ve presented for people, and frankly, if you would have sat with Noah, and asked him how to hire an intern, whether it would have been a coffee shop or a high end restaurant in the middle of New York City, information would have been just as good, and that’s what you are going for, when you are buying a product and later on…

Susan: Yes, so…

Andrew: …you can improve the design, I think.

Susan: Absolutely, yeah, and I think that what Noah has always been really good at is providing tactics that people can sort of take off the shelf and use right away. So, what it comes down to again it’s just about things being actionable. I mean, when it comes to contents that’s on the web that people will pay for. If you want to read for pleasure, then you’re going to go and read the New York Times Magazine or some piece like that. But, if you want to, if you’re paying $20 or $50, for some “How to?” material, then you really want to be able to walk away with a “How to”, you really want to be able to take some action from that. And so, Noah knew correctly to invest his time and making something actionable, whether it is providing the right tactics, or whether it is putting into a PDF so that people actually use it, rather than making it beautiful.

Andrew: Right. Back to the big board for the final big tactic, and the last one is make a contingency plan and I thought when I first saw this that you were going to tell us how to be prepared in case this doesn’t work out, how to recover and start over, but I guess starting over is just going back in doing these tactics, if it doesn’t work. What you want us to talk about is, what you want the audience to know about is, what happens if it does work? What does happen? Why should we even make a contingency plan for that? If it works great, I put all the money in the bank and I think about how to create another one, and repeat the process again, also. Why do I need a contingency plan for success?

Susan: Well, success happens. So, a couple of cases where people didn’t make it, I think the contingency plan for success, what it really comes down to is velocity. So, if you’re seeing some initial traction on a product…

Andrew: You’re saying that if you’re doing well and you’re starting to get velocity, what do you do? How do you capture it?

Susan: Well, don’t slow down.

Andrew: Don’t slow down is right. So then, what do you do? So, you’re saying, you have a hit product, don’t just take it for granted, don’t move on to the next product, what do we do with it?

Susan: I think a lot of times success can cause people to rest on their laurels a little bit.or, at least, if you don’t have a plan, you have to spend that time after the success has happened, to figure out the plan. What you really should be doing is spend that time into making the plan happen, not figuring out the plan. The plan should be figured out ahead of time.

So, that’s why I call this “Make a Contingency Plan for Success.” You already know what you’re going to do. You already have your emergency step- by-step, if the impossible should happen and a lot of people should want to buy your product. So, instead of having to spend that next phase figuring it out, you already can immediately put your time and resources and energy into making it come to life.

Andrew: I see, so you launch a product as we discussed earlier. The thing does well. You want to capitalize on it. Give me an example of who did that well. Should we talk about “Facebook Marketing Bible” and what you guys did there?

Susan: Yeah. We didn’t do it very well. I’ll tell you, that’s a great example of what can happen when you don’t make a contingency plan for success. So, we launched the PDF version of “The Facebook Marketing Bible”. It was back in 2000, early 2000. That was in 2008 still. It sort of slowly took off, and then in 2009 it really started taking off, the rising title of (?). Facebook was getting bigger. Facebook marketing was becoming more of a substantial industry, and so that PDF started becoming really popular.

Now, we actually ended up selling it as a one off PDF with pretty much the same revenue numbers every single month for a full year before turning it into a recurring revenue subscription site. So, just imagine if we had made a contingency plan for success.

The plan would have looked like this, “If this PDF takes off, then we will create a WordPress site. If the WordPress site does well, then we will create a subscription around it. If the subscription does well, then we will do these kinds of price optimizations. If the price optimizations do well, then we will invest in the kind of partnerships and do courses.”

So, that could have been the road map. Instead of creating a road map, we were so focused on just getting that initial success that we forgot to think about, “What happens if it takes off? What is our contingency plan for success?” Then, as a result, we ended up sort of leaving all this money on the table for way longer, way longer than we should have.

Andrew: So, let me see if I understand. So, if you create a PDF and the PDF does well, what’s the next step? You’re looking for partners? You’re looking for creating a membership site with recurring revenue? What’s the process? What should we do if that first PDF does well?

Susan: So, it’s just about sort of deepening your monetization. The first step is creating that PDF, and if people are buying it at a certain price point, one thing you can experiment with is just adding some zeros onto the price point.

Andrew: Ah, I see. So, first experiment with changing the price and see if you could generate more revenue with the same product? Maybe you under priced it at first?

Susan: Absolutely, because changing the price on a product, that doesn’t require you to build anything. It just requires you to maybe change some parameters in PayPal or whatever you’re using for checkout. It takes you less than a minute, or maybe less than five minutes, you could change the price on your website and in your email or wherever else you’re advertising it. So, that just takes a few minutes to do and you can get a big lift from that. That would be step 1.5.

Andrew: Okay.

Susan: If you change the price and it’s still doing well, then I would start thinking about, how can you turn this one time revenue into repeat, recurring revenue. So, there’s a couple of ways you can do that. One is to monetize a membership site. I would say that’s a little bit more of a costly investment because you actually have to build the membership site and you have to make sure all the hookups to your checkout system work.

But it’s not impossible. I can assure you that a lot of people out there who are far less talented than the Mixergy audience on today have done this very thing and are making money off of subscription sites.

Andrew: It’s so easy, you don’t even have to code it yourself. You just get WordPress, WishList Members, the plug-in.

Susan: Yeah.

Andrew: You start off by tracking people through PayPal the way that you did it apparently, the way that Noah did. Then, when you’re ready to move on beyond PayPal, you can insert a shopping cart to it using either one shopping cart or Premium Web Cart. You tie those into… In fact, at that point, once you’ve started to collect revenue from PayPal you’re fine. We have a whole course on this side.

Susan: Yeah.

Andrew: I want to repeat the question. But it’s fairly straightforward to set up a recurring revenue model.

Susan: It’s not rocket science. The hardest is part is actually just doing it sort of in tight sequence with past success. So, if you have a PDF that’s doing really well, then what you want to do is there is going to be some sales momentum around that PDF. You want to be able to put that sales momentum straight into a membership site instead of letting it languish sort of flat for many months. So that’s why I say it’s so important to make a contingency plan for success, because you want to make sure that your escalation path is very tight. That you’re not letting something sit there at a certain level for seven months or ten months without growth. That every time you see growth, that you’re kind of moving it up higher on the ladder, so that you’ve always got the next thing that you’re pushing your product towards.

Andrew: I see. And you eventually, you said how many years afterward did you guys launch this? Was it two years after you first launched the PDF?

Susan: Looks like almost three years, yeah.

Andrew: That’s a lot of people, lost revenue.

Susan: I think so, yeah. Because it’s a lot easier to maintain the site too. So it’s not just the revenue in terms of sales, but it’s also the operational costs that you incur from creating a PDF every month over doing it on a site.

Andrew: Any final words on contingency plans before we move on to the final section, here?

Susan: I would say that it’s a common symptom for all boot-strapped companies and start-ups especially. You’ll see that people are so used to managing risk that they forget to think about, ‘What do I do for the wildest success, what do I do if my wildest dreams come true?’ It’s very, very common for companies to use PayPal too long, for one really specific example. PayPal is not necessarily the best system for checkout, and a lot of times, depending on your sales volume, you can end up paying really high fees. There’s going to be a natural time where if your company’s doing well, you should probably move away from that and go on to the next tool that’s going to be better for your business. The contingency, a small arm of the contingency plan for success in that case, would be to know what that is before it’s past due. I think it’s just a very common thing for a lot of companies, and I encourage people to be thinking about that up front instead of…Have at least 20% of your planning time devoted to thinking about, ‘What happens if this really takes off,’ instead of just all of it devoted to, ‘What happens if this tanks and I can’t pay my staff next month?’

Andrew: That is a way, a lot of times, we entrepreneurs think. Final word is this, guys. What I’ve heard from people who’ve used these course and gotten the most out of them, is that they pick one idea and they try it first, and they build on it and build on it, and usually at the end of these programs I tell you to pick one and do it. I’m going to suggest this, don’t do it. Pick one and just think about how you’re going to do it. Think about how you can use it in your life. Think about how you can use it in your business, and my bet is that if you just start thinking about how it will work in your life, that you’re actually going to start to take action and it’s just going to happen for you.

Maybe it’s going to Google Trends and doing a few searches based on the topics that you’re aware of. Maybe it’s looking at your own analytics or at your own comments and figuring out what are people especially excited about. Maybe it’s finally releasing that simple version, and saying, ‘You know what? If Noah and Andrew can be in a ski hat and just record a conversation with some screenshots and call it a course, then I can come up with something simple.’ I don’t know what it is for you, but think about how you can do it, what you can do with what you just learned. If you think about that, then I believe, and I think that you’re going to see in your own life, that you’re going to be more likely to take action on it.

Susan: So Andrew, I just want to say one last thing, which is that, a lot of people think, “Well, I’m just little old me, I don’t have anything special to say, I just go to my cube job all day long.” They feel very disempowered when it comes to creating products from content, because maybe they don’t have any content at all. But I’ll tell you, everybody has content. Either it’s on a fancy website, or maybe it’s in emails that they send to their friends that they help out with HTML stuff every so often. Or maybe it’s all in here still, but everybody has content. We all have skills that we’ve taken time to learn and perfect, and we all have special things that we do that other people don’t do.

I would say, if you’re at a loss for where to get started, look at the places where you’ve spent the most time in the past three months, special skills that you’ve invested time to acquire, and think about who else that can apply to. How many other people out there are looking to get really good at Excel? I know it sounds boring, but there’s a whole huge market for Excel skills. Could you create a product around that? How would it be different? Who would it be geared towards? Could it be Excel for high school girls? Maybe.

Andrew: Ah, I see what you mean. All right, Susan, from AppSumo, thank you for doing this course with me. Everyone else, thank you for watching and being a part of this. I’m looking forward to your results, and send them over to me after you get them. Bye.

Master Class:
How to get motivated college students to market for you
(Even if you don’t know any college students)
Taught by Leah Bell of UQ Marketing

Report issues here

Master Class:
College Marketing


About the course leader

Leah Bell is the Director of Business Development and the co-founder of UQ Marketing, which helps brands reach college consumers through peer-to-peer marketing and grass roots campaigns.

Master Class Toolbox

Course Cheat Sheet

White Paper: Peer-to-Peer Marketing on Campus

Transcript

Download the transcript here

Andrew: This course is about college marketing. The course is led by Leah Bell, Director of Business Development and the co-founder of UQ Marketing which helps brands reach college consumers through peer-to-peer marketing and grass roots campaigns. I’ll help you, I’ll just be the moderator here. My name is Andrew Warner. I’m the founder of Mixergy.com where proven founders like Leah teach.

Before we get into it I want to go over, to the big board, I want to go over some of the super powers that you guys will get at the end of this program. In fact, I won’t cover everything but I do want to point your attention to a few of them. The first is we’re going to talk about what motivates millennials. I want you to pay special attention to that and I think you’ll see that some of what motivates them and what motivates college students is motivating you right now. I want you to pay attention to that one. We also want to take a look especially at how to recruit influentials. Even if you have no interest in going after the college market I think this will be especially helpful for you. You’ll see the no tools way of doing that so pay especial attention to that section.

We’re going to talk about how to recruit an army of influentials of insider, excuse me, an army of insider informers. There, I’m putting an exclamation point next to that so everyone sees that and makes sure to notice that. Check out the report that one student put together, Leah’s going to show it to you as we go through this course. Then, the final thing I want you to pay special attention to is the documentation of the process. Here, I’ll put an exclamation point next to that. It’s something that you might have noticed a lot of entrepreneurs who I’ve interviewed here and done courses with on Mixergy have done and you’re going to, I think, want to hear that section.

All right, but the very first thing that I know is on your mind, let’s go to the big board, is what’s possible. Leah, you had a situation with a company called Scrounge where they had a problem that I think a lot of our audience will be able to identify with. What was the problem and then I want to hear what you did for them because that’s what our audience is going to want to do for themselves. What was the problem that they had?

Leah: Yeah, so Scrounge, they essentially are on online deal site. They wanted to be, essentially, the Groupon for college. They had already gotten the seed one round, they were going back to investors to, they needed more money. But they were having a really hard time hitting some of their user goals as far as numbers go. The marketing they were doing didn’t work for them. They thought it was going to catch on by itself and it wasn’t.

That’s where we came in and we helped them implement promotions at some of their top two campuses in the New York region. We were actually able to help them gain new users through hiring a team of influential students on campus. Giving them marketing materials that spoke directly to students at their campus, we were highlighting the most popular venues.

Andrew: Here, this is, by the way, this is the marketing strategy that you put together for them. You offered to show it to our audience. This is what you did for them and this is the kind of thing that our audience will be able to do at the end of this session. And as a result of all this what happened to them?

Leah: We actually were able to get about 4,600 users in two weeks for them. Their goal was 4,000 so we over-achieved that. Those users were engaged. They were exactly in their target market that they wanted. They were able to then go back and have success in their next conversations with their investors.

Andrew: OK, and why is this college market, first of all that’s impressive to be able to get that many users in such a short period of time. And not just strangers online who click a link but real people who are in colleges, who are taking action. That’s impressive and that’s what I want for my audience. Why is this audience so unique? Why college as opposed to, say, entrepreneurs or random people on the internet? What’s so special about this audience?

Leah: College students are really open. They are learning their brand preferences for the first time. Think about it, up until now mom and dad have done the majority of their purchasing for them. Some of these habits that they form in college are going to stay with them for the rest of their life. Their customer lifetime value is significantly higher than, you know, someone in their 40’s or 50’s which is why you start to see a lot of advertisements more marketed towards a millennial demographic. Car companies, you know, they want those young consumers and get them early. I think that’s why this is such a lucrative market for a lot of advertisers.

Andrew: And here’s another thing that I notice in just talking to you and getting to know UQ and the work that you’ve done. College students will do this kind of thing for the brands that they’re into. We’ll talk about this later, what’s going on here. This is the kind of passion, this is the kind of activity, this is the kind of energy that they’re willing to put into a brand and business that they care for. From what I know about entrepreneurs and the general audience who’s watching our programs here on Mixergy, this is the kind of passion that they have. To be able to find people who share that passion, who share the willingness to go out of their way to promote it, I think, has got to be refreshing and inspiring.

Let’s talk about how we can get this down for our audience, the kind of things that your were able to get for yours. We go back to the big board, and here’s the first tactic that we’re going to take on. We’re going to figure out if our product is even a good fit for college. You’re not going to pretend that this is good for everyone, but you want us to see if it’s a good fit. Tell me about a customer, maybe your potential customer, for whom it wasn’t a good fit, so maybe we’ll understand that, if you could.

Leah: Sure. So we were approached by an app company who was building a safety app. They were hopefully going to have this essentially personal alarm, if you will. If you felt unsafe, it would contact local authorities and give them your location. It was pretty expensive. I think that just to get started it was a fifty dollar commitment. They wanted to focus on college students because campus safety is a hot topic right now. A lot of college campuses are very concerned about this. What I told them was, essentially, from my experience, students aren’t going to pay very much for an app like this. They might, if it’s something that they can show off, but I don’t think that’s your true target market. I think parents might be who you want to go after. I encourage anyone who has a product that they’re thinking about marketing to college students to do something very simple. Go to campus, and just ask students. They will give you their honest opinion, and you can save yourself a lot of hassle. It’s really that simple. Just talk to people and get their honest feedback, and then you’ll know. If they’re really excited, they will show you, and if they’re not, maybe you should consider a different market to focus on.

Andrew: The market research can be that basic, to just go in there and say, “Here’s my iPad, this is my business, is this something you guys are into?” or “Here’s my physical product. Are you into it?” they give us yes or no. If they’re saying no, don’t try to persuade them, just accept this isn’t right for you.

Leah: Exactly. If you have to persuade them, there are students are going to have to persuade them. It’s hard for a lot of entrepreneurs to swallow, because they think their product is going to be perceived a certain way, but you just have to be very honest with yourself in that process.

Andrew: Of course, if this is the right fit, I still know that by going through session here, that people are going to get some ideas that they can use in other markets. Hopefully, this is the right fit for it, because based on what you’ve been telling me, this is really a hot area to go after. All right, anything else about this before we go on to the next big idea?

Leah: I don’t think so.

Andrew: All right. So, decide whether or not it’s the right fit for this company. I am safe it was not the right fit, and then we go on to the big board again, where the next big tactic is to learn what motivates millennials. The secret sauce, you say is, well, you tell me. What is the secret sauce?

Leah: So if you are hiring college students to be your brand reps, we call them brand-builders. You might think, “Well, I need to pay these people a lot of money.” What we’ve found is they could care less. Money’s always great, and I want to pay the students, because they work so hard for us, but what really gets them excited and gets them to achieve results is showing them genuine appreciation and recognition for their own work. If they do a great job, make it known that you appreciate that. Something as simple as recognizing them on your website or sending an email to all the reps saying “Johnny did the best this week.” It can go so far for you. It takes five seconds and it makes them feel good. They’ll work harder for you, and it honestly motivates everyone else too, because if you’re hiring the right students, they will be competitive. They’ll want to be the best, and they’ll want to get that recognition the next week.

Andrew: So, basic recognition, which really goes against what we think as entrepreneurs. We either believe that, out of a sense of inferiority because we’re getting started, we don’t have enough money to win over the people that we need, or, we believe it out of a sense of superiority because we’re doing well in business. Either way, we think people want money. You’re saying no, it’s recognition. Let’s take a look at examples of how that was done. What’s this?

Leah: So, one of our clients is seamless. They’re an online food and delivery company where you can actually place an order to local restaurants and have them delivered to you. Our students had a lot of really great content to share what they were doing on campus. Instead of having that stop, they actually posted that on YouTube on a Seamless on campus channel and made it available to their entire YouTube community. Students were really proud of this. They actually posted these videos on their own personal Facebook walls because they thought it was just so cool that this company had put their video up on their corporate page.

Andrew: Wait, so students are that excited? Just because the company is putting the video that the students made on their corporate page students start to pass it around and say hey, look, I’m on the Seamless website.

Leah: Yeah, it’s like bragging rights. Especially if you’re a brand that they’re proud of, they want to be affiliated with that and they’ll share it like crazy every way they can. It’s a really simple and easy and free thing that you can do and get great results and traffic.

Andrew: How do you get students to, well, let’s see. Do we even have? Yeah, here’s one. This is, is this a student interviewing other students at George Washington University?

Leah: Exactly. He was interviewing them, where their favorite places to eat on campus were. He was walking up to random people. I believe he actually even interviewed a squirrel. He had a lot of fun with it and once he posted it on his Facebook wall he was actually able to tag the people that he knew so it also showed up on their Facebook page. It really does, you know, has a level of virality to it. I hate using the word viral but in a smaller community it can become that way.

Andrew: How do you get these students to interview each other about your product and to interview each other about, beyond your small product, what you’re about? How do you get a guy like this to walk around with a mic and talk to other people?

Leah: He was somebody that we hired. He was our Seamless rep at GW. He loved Seamless, even [??] job he submitted a video and every week we gave him very concrete goals. We broke down the campus into a lot of digestible segments because our students, they tap out their, you know, network of maybe 200 people within the first two weeks. How do you get them outside of that comfort zone? Honestly, it’s almost stereotyping the campus. Go after the jocks. Go after the Greeks. It just makes it a lot more achievable for them and if they’re able to put it in a category they’ll start to have that outreach go even further.

This video in particular was we actually were going to, we held a little mini-contest among our reps and the best video, they won a party for them and their friends sponsored by Seamless. We just sent a bunch of pizzas and that was their motivation as well, on top of the recognition and [??].

Andrew: Let me see if I understand this. This guy, the guy in the video who’s doing the interviews, is he getting paid? He’s a rep so he is getting paid, right?

Leah: He gets paid, yes. He was actually paid $100 a month.

Andrew: $100 a month you pay him to be your local rep. He, and there are other reps at other colleges, he does things like this to win prizes like pizza for his friends.

Leah: Exactly.

Andrew: OK, so he’s walking around doing these interviews. A bunch of people, a bunch of reps who are also getting $100 a month at other colleges are doing similar interviews. The one that wins ends up getting a pizza party for his friends and, as you said earlier, more importantly he gets to build his reputation. Now he’s the guy who helped Seamless establish itself at this university and who showed all of the other students. He is the top rep.

Leah: Exactly. And they’re also, you know, they view this as an experience. This is something they can put on their resume. At the end of every campaign we get hundreds of thank you letters from our students saying I learned so much. They are not just a rep for that one semester that we hire them. They’re honestly a rep for, I believe for life. You know, they’ll always have this…

Andrew: You see what he just did, by the way? This guy’s good. I don’t know if anyone saw it. He’s just, first of all I think he’s using a spoon as a microphone but he just snatched some food from this kid’s plate and the kid noticed it. He’s having fun with it. He’s really being creative. I can see what he’s trying to do. He’s really being competitive with this and, as you said, in the end it goes on his resume. The key though is you get these reps, give them a few bucks. You give them some assignments. You give them a list of people to target. The jocks, the Greeks, etc. And then you give them, what else? What else do you do once you, what else do you give them? What else do you arm them with, excuse me?

Leah: We do give them a manual. If they are representing your brand you want to make sure that they’re doing that the right way. I think what makes us different and where we see a lot of other brand ambassador programs fail is we have a very high, high level of communication. One of our secret tools that we use is Group Me because college students, most of them don’t like email but they will text you. If you can set up Group Me accounts and text people all at once and get the conversation flowing that way as well. I think just having that open communication with students is so important as well.

Andrew: All right, and this is the manual, basically, that you put together, the cover of it. You’re not going to give away all your secrets here. This is one that we’re not going to be able to go through, or will we? Would you be willing to give this to our audience, a copy of your manual?

Leah: I would not, I’m sorry.

Andrew: That’s what I thought. Fair enough. The idea is, you’re giving them a manual and letting them know what to do to really rock this position.

Leah: Exactly.

Andrew: All right. On to the big board here, the next big tactic is “Recruit influential students to leverage connections.” You’re saying skip Craigslist. Tell me where I can find these influentials.

Leah: If you’re an entrepreneur, you know the importance of networking. The same goes this way. Just start talking to people and understand what organizations on campus are the most influential, and focus there. The way that we find students is, once we have that pool of applicants from those influential organizations. We actually do a Skype interview.

Andrew: I’m sorry. You get them to be applicants to what? They’re applying to be the reps?

Leah: Yes, exactly.

Andrew: OK. So you go out to all those clubs that everyone’s told you are the hot clubs. They’re the ones that have influence on campus, and you say, “We’re looking to recruit reps from this brand on your school. Apply.” They’ll apply, and now you’re trying to figure out who’s really got influence. Who has the power to communicate our brand well? And then you’re doing Skype interviews with them? What was the next thing?

Leah: Yeah, you use Skype interviews to narrow it down to maybe a top five per campus. We take it even a step further and have them show us, “Prove to us you love this brand.” We do that through them submitting videos, for the most part. We love videos, and so do our clients. Once we have those videos, we put them on our client’s Facebook page to draw traffic to that page.

Andrew: Are these those videos, by the way? This is videos that they’ve created?

Leah: these are some of our favorite ones, yes. Even that one the second page down is pretty hilarious. He did a rap. So they’re actually sharing it with all their friends, and you’ll see who is influential, because some students will get 20 or 30 likes. Others will get 500+ likes in five days. That’s when you can kind of just look, see the numbers for yourself, and look at the whole picture based on your knowledge of that student. Having this video (?), measuring the likes and activity that they are able to generate, will really show who is the top student at that school.

Andrew: This is unreal, by the way. That’s the brand, right there. There’s Hoist. That’s your company, the one that’s looking to hire a rep. He’s worked it into his video. He’s put in all this time and production into this video, just so he can be a rep. That means he earns a few hundred bucks a semester, and a lot of experience, and a lot of time with the brand and credibility. That’s what he’s working for. He did this much work.

Leah: Yeah.

Andrew: That’s impressive. I asked you before we started, I said, “What tools, Leah, do you have to measure how many likes they get and who has the most likes,” and you surprised me by saying, “Andrew, you don’t have to have tools.” So how do you figure out who’s got the most likes and who is the most influential on campus. What do you do?

Leah: We essentially embed all the videos on our client’s Facebook page. If they don’t want it on their home wall, you can create a separate tab, but you just count. You look and it will tell you. This person has 520 likes. This person has 20 likes. You can the in the comments who’s getting this conversation going, and you can select them that way. It’s really that simple.

Andrew: All right, this guy is a lot of fun. That’s what you’re doing. You want to find reps that you want to hire. You don’t just want to go on Craigslist and say “We’re hiring college students.” You don’t even want to go to the local newspaper, you’re going to the influential clubs and groups and say, “Hi. We’re looking to hire. Please pass this around.” They apply, they create videos like this, and then you get them to like them. By the way, even the application process is now promoting Hoist, I see on this.

Leah: Exactly. If Facebook likes and engagement are important to you, then this is a great way to do it.

Andrew: Did he just spray paint a wall? Your clients must love this stuff.

Leah: Yeah, it’s great. One of my favorite parts of our programs is the actual recruitment. These videos are so amazing, I’m constantly impressed.

Andrew: Unreal. All right, back to the big board. The next big idea is “Go to the crowd.” I always ask, in my interviews and when I meet other entrepreneurs, how can I get customers to come to my site? How can I get visitors to come to my site? You’re saying Andrew, that’s the wrong approach to take. The right one is to say go to the crowd. Meaning what?

Leah: So many times people want to throw their own events off campus. They want to have a tailgate. Well, it’s really hard to get a lot of people excited about something that they don’t even know about. But something that they’re already doing is going to these large events that they look forward to every year. We do some event planning but instead of doing that we recommend tapping into the large events on campus.

Your student knows what those are. At the beginning of the semester when you’re talking to them ask them what are the three events you can’t miss this semester? They’ll probably say something like a sports rivalry game. They’ll say something like a dance marathon or philanthropy. And maybe they’ll say some sort of drinking event. That’s usually what we come across. But, you know, I guess plan your event schedule around those things because they already have thousands of people showing up.

Andrew: Do you partner with the events that already exist or do you create a side event alongside the event that already exists?

Leah: We partner with events that already exist. A lot of times our students have friends who are on the student planning boards, if you’ve recruited the right person. You can avoid some of the sponsorship costs. This is an example from UCLA, the dance marathon. They have over 2,000 students dancing for 48 hours straight to raise money for AIDS awareness and research. We went there and our students knew people on the planning boards so we didn’t have to pay the $2,000 sponsorship fee. We just got to show up. Then we also, you know, hosted an eating contest onstage. We were not only there, present and promoting at the event, we were actually involved in the event’s activities.

Andrew: And you didn’t have to pay to be a sponsor just because your rep was friends with the person who was organizing this dance marathon. All you had to do was bring some pizza or some food for them to do an eating contest and be a part of it, not a leech.

Leah: Exactly. I felt kind of guilty, honestly, because we’re next to tables with, you know, Coca-Cola and some of the local businesses and I know they all paid. But it just, it is having that strong network through the students. That’s how you gain access to these events.

Andrew: Then I guess you put this up on your Facebook page and they’re all trying to see if they were in there and they’re tagging each other and talking about this.

Leah: Exactly. Yeah, they…

Andrew: This one didn’t seem to get a lot of views. 53 views.

Leah: This one, it’s interesting. This one didn’t get as many views and I think this was because it was one of our managers took the video. If I did have to do it again I think I would have had one of our students taking the video instead of one of our managers because I think they would have shared it more.

Andrew: I see. By managers you mean you guys have managers?

Leah: Yes, this was an event that I had one of our managers go to in LA.

Andrew: OK, sounds like a fun job for your manager.

Leah: Yeah.

Andrew: All right. Next big tactic is, let’s go to the big board. Form an army of insider informers. These are the people who are going to get you information about the school. I’ve got a report that one of your informers put together for you that we’ll show in a moment. But first tell me a little bit about this. What do we do with this?

Leah: If you are constantly, you know, recruiting from the same organization befriend the presidents and possibly speak to them. Not only are they going to help you find your brand ambassadors semester after semester but they’ll tell you what’s going on and what’s going to come up on campus. You can even create an email list and email all the campuses that you’re on and ask, you know, in the next two months what events are coming up that we can help you with? You know, do you need sponsorship? Even if it’s just us donating free food how can we get involved?

I think that is a really great place to start. Plus it just helps you understand the school better. If you do have them fill out some kind of questionnaire where you can stock that away so every year you go back and you know exactly what’s going on at that school and you understand the campus. Then you can tailor your campaign to that school. You know it’s a big Greek school, you’re going to focus on Greeks. You know they’re all about athletics, you want to have more of a sports focus. I mean, it doesn’t have to be rocket science but just creating some kind of personalization for each campus is really important because students can tell when you understand what their campus is about. They appreciate that and will pay attention more.

Andrew: This is one of the reports. I thought you hired a company to do this. A student, your student rep put this together, right?

Leah: Yes. We sent them the template and they filled it in for us.

Andrew: And the template includes what? What are you looking for? You want to know the population, so they could look that up. You want to know if it’s public or private, they could get that. Greek, meaning sorority/fraternity, they could look that up too. The mascot, the Longhorns. I see, so now you’re really starting to collect information. What are these quotes?

Leah: We want to understand what students, what they have to say about their school. Just in a short one sentence how would you describe your school? It’s a great way to just get some insight into, you know, what it’s like to go to school there.

Andrew: We’ve got here the University of Texas at Austin welcomes bright minds to follow their passions and learn from their peers and professors. That seems like they copied and pasted it from somewhere. The relationships I’ve created at UT have heavily influenced my direction in life and have served in bettering who I am as a person. All right, so they give quotes and then they also list the top five spring events, the top five fall events. I can see how that would be huge. University report continues with traditions, the trends there, campus culture, you want to know about what kind of music they listen to, what kind of technology, student stereotypes. The hipster, the Greeks, I see. Let’s see, and then it just goes on. Can we give this to the audience?

Leah: Yes, of course. They can have this.

Andrew: Oh, this is terrific. This is the kind of thing when you get a rep you want them to put together for you so you have an understanding of the school that you couldn’t get as an outsider.

Leah: Exactly. Even just doing research online you can get a lot of the stuff that’s on that front page but understanding the trends, you know. At UT there is a very big hipster culture and just that influences a lot of things. It influences fashion, the music, like you said. It’s just great information to have that takes it a step further.

Andrew: Yeah, you know what, in some worlds to say that you’re a hipster is bad and at UT, I guess, saying you’re a hipster is OK. Technology, there’s an app craze going on at UT. There’s kind of an app craze going on here in my office too. That is always shifting to the next big app. Some apps have maintained their popularity, like Instagram, Angry Birds people are still playing, Words with Friends. But others have just gained tremendous growth in usage like Draw Something and Scrabble with Friends. I guess that’s Scrabble or Scramble with Friends. I can’t tell. All right, so this gives you some really useful information. This is fantastic to be able to put together. All right…

Leah: Some of our best ideas come from our students, to be honest. A lot of our client ideas come from students too. Even though I still feel like I’m close to their age a lot of things have changed since I’ve been in school. It just is very important to listen to them because they know what they’re talking about. They’re the expert at being in college.

Andrew: You know what, I tried to get an interview with, I won’t reveal their name because they said no, but with a company that’s really good at getting into local tech communities. And start promoting their technology and getting it embedded into other systems. One of the things that they do is they sponsor local events. I’ve seen this work really well for companies. They’ll sponsor the local bar camp[SP] or the local, whatever, meet-up. But they don’t even start to do things like this where they have a local rep.

They just assume if we spend some sponsorship money across the country, buy pizza and beer, everyone’s going to love us. Which does get you a lot of affection, even in the grown up tech world. But I can see that they could learn from this and they could have maybe a local tech rep in each community that they’re sponsoring and really be engaged. And it doesn’t have to cost a lot of money. They can give them much more than money, like an introduction to each other, an introduction to other people in the community, raise profile and so on. All right, so next big idea. Let’s go to the board. Engage students with off the wall experiences. Such as? What are some of the experiences? How do we come up with them?

Leah: When you’re going on campus you can’t just hand out flyers. They’re going to get tossed in the trash. You need to create an experience. One of our clients that we work with is Nestle and specifically with their recruitment team. Their challenge was they were planning these events and no one was showing up and they didn’t understand why. Well, their events were essentially in a classroom just come meet and mingle with a nestle recruiter. It wasn’t enough of a draw.

Andrew: OK.

Leah: We planned a happy hour event for them to attract students and passed out Raisinets the day before so people knew when the event was.

Andrew: Passed out what the day before? Sorry.

Leah: Raisinets. Free food.

Andrew: OK.

Leah: It tied into their brand and it had all of the event information stuck to it.

Andrew: Oh, so you didn’t just hand out a flyer. You handed out a flyer with food. They went for the food and they got to read the flyer. That’s how you got them to pay attention.

Leah: Exactly. I mean it’s free chocolate. And students were handing it out so it wasn’t some corporate person telling them to go somewhere. We held the event at one of the most popular bars on campus and we had free pizza there. But we also had a photo booth. That’s what made the event so much fun and Nestle loved it. Because we actually held a contest where students wrote why they love Nestle on a chalkboard in our photo booth. And then, they stuck them to a wall and we chose the top 5 and they got Nestle gift baskets. It’s something as simple as that. Get people interacting with the brand. People were having fun there, so they ended up staying longer. They got more applications that year than they ever have.

Andrew: Applications for what?

Leah: For the Nestle career program. They’re trying to attract engineers and business students to come work for Nestle.

Andrew: I see. So they’re not trying to get people to buy Nestle, they’re just trying to get them to come work for Nestle, and instead of buying ads in a school paper, Craigslist, Monster and so on, they said, “No, we’re going to engage them,” they hired your company, they hired UQ marketing, and this is what you guys did for them. You got students to really engage with the brand, and then apply.

Leah: Exactly. There was a line around the corner. It was amazing. They were thrilled, and they had a lot of fun at the event, too. It flew by. I wish it could have been longer. It went off very well and I think adding a couple simple, fun things and promoting that beforehand can make such a difference.

Andrew: I guess you put this up on YouTube and Facebook, too for people to tag themselves and see each other.

Leah: Yes.

Andrew: I couldn’t log into your Facebook, but we are on Flickr, where it’s easy to share and see. Off the wall experiences… How can companies come up with these off the wall ideas? Where do we come up with these ideas?

Leah: I say put it on your students, because they will come up with ideas you’ve never thought of before that are specific to their campus. For instance, we had a beverage client that saved people from their hangover in the morning. One of our students decided that he wanted to be a [Hoist] superhero for Halloween. I expected him to wear a little bit more clothing than he had on, but he had a blast with it. He is this 6’8″ guy who essentially wore his boxer-briefs around campus and saved people with Hoist.

Andrew: This is him.

Leah: Yes, that is Pete. He is hilarious. So he is a very visible person on campus. He is very social and kind of a “frat-star” if you will, so he got a lot of attention and posted pictures of himself all over at on Halloween, and people had a lot of fun with him and the Hoist superhero. Another example was at Boston University, one of our students decided that she wanted to create her own billboard. You aren’t allowed to have billboards on campus, but she knew everyone that lived in a certain hall, so she actually stuck letters that spelled ‘Seamless,’ which is one of our clients in the dorm room, and it spilled out into the main quad. There are thousands of students that walk through that quad every day, and they could see ‘Seamless’ written on the windows, probably thought, “What is that?” Hopefully they Googled it and found that it was a service that could really help them, get food delivered straight to them. That was a lot of fun as well, and something we had never though of before.

Andrew: These are ideas that you couldn’t come up with, like you said, but also you might not be allowed to come up with. You might not be allowed to tell a guy in college to go get into his underwear and start parading around the school like a superhero for you brand. You’d get in trouble. But if you say, “What ideas do you have?” and let them go with it, you come up with clever ideas like that.

Leah: Especially if you have a brand that’s fun and you’re not as strict. A lot of brands have strict guidelines, where maybe some of these things won’t fly. But if you are a smaller company that can have fun with their brand- don’t be so stuffy, because college kids won’t relate to that. Have fun with it.

Andrew: Back to the big board. I can see Nestle not being comfortable doing something like that with their brand, especially not for hiring. Back to the big board. You say, “Share online to amplify what you’ve done. Share online to amplify the offline experiences. Tag people, because they will look for themselves.” How do you do that? We didn’t cover this yet, right?

Leah: No, it is just something that seems so simple, but unless you make it a priority, a lot of your efforts can just happen that one time and not live on. When you have brand ambassadors you’re working with, give them a goal every week, and an easy way for them to share that content with you. We use Dropbox. I love Dropbox. Essentially, tell them, “We just need 10 pictures from you every week. 10 is a very easy number, whether that’s pictures or video, and have them drop it into Dropbox. They can download the app on their phone, it’s free for them. That’s something very simple you can do. You can post those pictures on your Facebook page and have them tag their friends. As long as you’re making it a priority and you’re communicating that constantly those efforts on campus won’t just happen that one time. You can make them live on and amplify that online.

Andrew: You just ask them to take pictures of what they see in school that relates to the brand, or just anything in general? Just snap pictures around the school?

Leah: If they are going to an on-campus event make sure that their top priority at that event is not only to promote that brand but to capture what they’re doing. You know, whether they’re at a tailgate and you’re passing out koozies, get people holding the koozy with your brand. Because people go look for that picture of themselves and then it will become of their Facebook, you know, photo slide.

Andrew: Got it. All right, I think I’ve got a video of that. Let me see if I can click over and go to it right now. Or is this something we’ve seen before? Yeah, this is the interview. This is one thing that he decided to do. He decided to go around and start interviewing people.

Leah: Yes, exactly.

Andrew: OK. Others…

Leah: Just make sure that whatever you’re doing is able to live online as well. Because it will just have such a further reach that way.

Andrew: OK. We’ll come back to this in a moment. This we talked about. What else, what other way do you get them to document? Is it just the basic YouTube, Facebook, and ask people to, YouTube, Facebook, and now you told me about Drop Box. Anything else more complicated than that or just that basic?

Leah: If you are, instead of just driving brand awareness and you really want to track your activation and your new users we use, a lot of times, like coupon codes and gift cards. So we can actually reward reps based on their results and not just what they say they’re doing. That’s a great way on, a site we use is Get Ambassador. They actually help you create unique codes if you don’t have that already set up in the back end in your system.

Another thing is we have weekly reports they fill out. Because not only do we want to know how many people have you converted but how many people have you talked to this week? What did you do? This is also a great time to get feedback on your brand. Some of the brands that we’ve worked with have actually completely changed their product because of the feedback that our students have given them. Because they realized they weren’t meeting the exact need that they needed to be.

Just ask for as much information as possible and make it really easy for those students to share. Google Docs is a great way to set up an easy form and collect that information. I mean there’s lots of tools out there you can Google for free. Just make it easy for students to share and clear what kind of information that you hope to gather from them.

Andrew: You’re just setting up a form on Google Docs where once a week they go in and they fill out the form. They say this is what I did. Here’s the reaction that I got, etc. Maybe people say Seamless is too difficult to explain to people. I say Seamless and they say what’s Seamless and so on. You understand as a brand that you’re not communicating what your brand is about. If you’re hearing people say that they’re, I don’t know, they don’t like the color of the product or whatever, you just want the reps to keep sending that back to you.

Leah: Yeah, and the reps will be happy to tell you what you need to change because it will make their job easier. Another thing we do is at the beginning of the semester we take a baseline survey on campus. We get each student to get 100, 200 responses. Then you take that same exact survey at the end of the semester. You know what attributes you need to work on, what worked, what didn’t. Hopefully you’re seeing a big bump in brand awareness as well as intent to buy. That’s our most important thing that we measure, is intent to buy. Because if you get awareness to go up but intent to buy goes down you’re wasting your time. Just make sure that you’re also measuring intent to buy.

Andrew: All right, intent to buy is really important. All right, final big idea. Document the exact process. Document what works. This is one of the big ideas that I thought was important enough to highlight in the beginning. What kind of documentation and why is it important?

Leah: You should document every stage of the process because if you don’t you’ll be starting from ground zero every single time. A lot of that we’ve gone over. The university reports, you know who’s the influential organization on campus and you document that person’s contact information. You make sure that they’re giving you their successor’s contact information so you can keep that process going.

Then the manual is a great way to do that as well. The manual is not a static document. It’s something that’s dynamic and constantly changing. Get feedback from your students of what was easy to understand in the manual, what wasn’t. The manual outlines what your brand is, how they should communicate it. It is also how do they share what they’re doing on campus so that can direct them to the Dropbox or the forum. It also has a calendar that shows exactly what events are going to be going on at what times, and when they should start planning for those things. They always have you to call on, but hopefully the manual will answer a lot of those questions that can become sort of tedious and repetitive.

Also, at the end of the program, have your students fill out, or have an anonymous feedback form. They will tell you what you need to change about your program. Your program will just get better and better every year if it is something you want to invest your time in. Kind of, I think there was an ongoing theme, just make sure that you are writing everything down, and having something that you can scale. If you want to start off at ten campuses, well maybe you have such great success you decide to do 100 campuses the next semester. That will be so much easier to do if you have documented your processes along the way. It’s something you might be able to hand off to someone else, which will be great too.

Andrew: You mean to somebody else within your company? Once you understand how each college works, you don’t have to figure it out. You now can hire someone who can manage it and continue what you’ve built?

Leah: Exactly.

Andrew: Okay.

Leah: That person could be a student themselves. I believe in interns. I love interns. Our interns do great work.

Andrew: I bet. I mean, especially your company. You had an example of how effective all this is with Hoist. How did people on college campuses at first perceive Hoist, and then how did they perceive it at the end?

Leah: So Hoist, they really had low brand awareness when we first showed up. They were viewed strictly as a hangover cure, and people were very skeptical if it actually worked. So, our survey at the beginning of the semester was kind of daunting. We had a lot to go up against as far as preconceived notions.

After our campaign, we had two brand ambassadors on each campus. We measured at the end, what was brand awareness like, and it actually increased 410%. Then also, we measured intent to buy on a five-point scale, and I believe it was 0.9.

Andrew: Mm.

Leah: (?) points. It made a big jump in addition to that brand awareness, which was very great to see for us. What was most exciting to me was our customer. They told us that their order is within a five-mile radius of the campuses we were on. Their order in P.O.’s had doubled month-over-month. That’s when I felt like, okay, it was just very rewarding to know that we helped them increase their sales, and helped them understand their product more. They’re actually doing a complete repackage of their product based on the learnings that they had from our program. Honestly, it was one of our first customers, one of our first campaigns. We had a lot to learn throughout that, but even starting it proves your first time around you can still have great success. Then, just improve from there.

Andrew: Wow. This is really powerful stuff that I hadn’t heard before. I’ve been so glad that I was introduced to you by Dan of Optimizely. The ideas here, I don’t see covered many places, but I know the power because I’ve seen what you’ve done for your brands. The company, the website is uqmarketing.com, for anyone who wants to follow up. You have also, Leah, this white paper that you showed me that gave us an understanding of what’s possible and how to do it. It’s not on your site yet, but there’s a way for us to give it to the audience too? I know I can’t give them this manual.

Leah: Yeah. I would love to give them our white paper. We’re releasing it next month. We haven’t released it yet, so I would be happy to share that. It goes over why peer-to-peer marketing works with millennials when other forms of advertising might not be as effective.

Andrew: Okay. We’ll include a link to this in the program notes.

Leah: Great.

Andrew: Wow. All right, thank you so much. A lot of big ideas here. We hopefully have set you guys on your way with a new tactic and a new idea that you hadn’t discovered before for how to reach potential customers and how to get great ideas.

One of the things, Leah, that I walked away from this program with is – the energy and the creativity of these college students. It’s not the kind of thing that we can come up with on our own if we’re just sitting around in a board – no one has a board room anymore – sitting around in a coffee shop trying to nod around ideas. It’s so much more innovative than that. Thank you for helping us harness this power, or learn how to harness it.

Leah: Thank you for having me.

Andrew: Thank you all for being a part of this. Thank you for watching.

Master Class:
How to do customer service right
(And turn support into conversions)
Taught by Sarah Hatter of CoSupport

Report issues here

Master Class:
CUSTOMER SERVICE


About the course leader

Sarah Hatter is the founder of CoSupport, which offers
support training, help documentation and outsource support for web and
mobile apps.

Master Class Toolbox

Course Cheat Sheet

UserVoice

Turbo Scan

Zen Desk

Desk.com

Transcript

Download the transcript here

Andrew: This course is about how to do customer service right. The course is led by Sarah Hatter. She is the founder of CoSupport, which offers support training, help documentation and outsource support for web and mobile apps. I’m Andrew Warner, founder of Mixergy, where proven founders like Sarah teach and I want to go over just quickly what will be in this session. As you can see – you can see all of these topics – but there are two that I especially want to call your attention to. We’re going to spend a lot of time here on this section on how to answer questions that your customers have before they even ask them, so that you can make them happy before they even have a chance to be frustrated.

And in this other section here that I want to make sure that I want to make sure that you stick around and pay special attention to is how to keep track of all the right things. Of bugs, of feature requests, we’re going to show you how to tag things, how to make sure that you’re not getting in feedback and fixing things or responding to things real time, but that you’re using that feedback to make your business better and to understand what’s going on with your customers. All right, so those are just two items that I want to call your attention to out of a really big program that we’ve got for you. And the first thing that I want us to go over is what’s possible. So, Sarah, first of all welcome and thanks for doing this session with me.

Sarah: Thanks for having me. This is exciting.

Andrew: And you talked about . . . I want people to understand why this is so important. And you had an issue where you were facing the same problem over and over again. And, well, tell people, before you got it all right, what was your life like?

Sarah: Well [laughs] before I got it right, I mean, I did everything wrong. Everything that I teach people not to do I did hundreds and hundreds of times. And, you know, that’s because support was a very different animal maybe five, six years ago. With the last five years even we’ve seen this advent of suddenly the internet has become a place where everyone can comment about everything. They can comment anonymously, they can Yelp review, they can iTunes review and it wasn’t really like that, I think, when I started doing email based support for web apps. What I learned is, we’re now in an age where support is marketing, support is part of your conversion, support’s part of your brain recognition, your brand name, everything that happens online. Twitter is a historical record, you know. If someone goes and bashes you on Twitter, when I type in Andrew Support in Google, I’m going to see [laughs] that and respond to that.

Andrew: And people are going to see in the sessions, speaking of Twitter, how Taco Bell, for example, does it right. But before we even get into that, six years ago you were trying to figure out the best practices for customer service methods and you were inundated with feature requests and what happened? Tell people about that experience.

Sarah: This is my a-ha moment with support, because I was working for a company that really just didn’t focus on feature requests. They were really focused on development and design and so we didn’t pay a lot of attention to it. And I used to send out sock answers a lot to people without thinking too much about it, especially if they were asking for a feature. And this one day [laughs] I sent out this standard sock answer that I had sent 100 times to someone, to this person. And he wrote me back immediately and he said ‘Really? Because you sent me that exact same response about something else last week.’ And I was so embarrassed, but it kind of hit in the face. Oh, wow, I’m being defensive and reactionary to these people instead of treating like passionate, loyal customers paying me money.

Andrew: And then, right. We forget, it is people. And they don’t forget they’re interacting with the same company over and over again and having bad customer service. But we forget that we’re interacting with the same people over and over and sometimes giving them bad customer support. You then had a new way of looking at the world and as a result of it, what happened at a company where you were starting to get a lot of refund requests? What was their policy and what did you do?

Sarah: The refund story’s funny. So I was working for this same company, no refund requests or no refunds ever. And that was just . . .

Andrew: And as usually, by the way, at this point I would show visuals. But we’re intentionally not mentioning the companies that have bad customer support. Yes, you’re doing there and they had no refund policy.

Sarah: They had no refund policy and there were, I was seeing issues where it was, I didn’t like your product, give me my money back. Or I forgot to cancel, give me my money back. Or I can’t afford this, give me my money back. And there was this range there that didn’t really work with a blanket policy. I started giving refunds and I didn’t tell anybody. I had this little button I could press, and I started getting refunds. I was so pleased with the response from people, I realized that when we did something we weren’t going to do, or when we responded humanly, when we responded kindly to people and surprised them with our responsiveness, people really liked it. They really started responding differently to the company itself.

Maybe a year after I did this, I said, “Hey I think we should start giving refunds to people. We should take down this policy of no refunds and we shouldn’t be so definitive about that.” Because we’ve been doing it and I knew it was proven, it was working. But, the big issue here wasn’t about money and it wasn’t about money transferring, it was about the way people felt about the company. That changed dramatically. I think that it’s a little story, but it made me think that small things you can do for people, even the small tone and attitude that you have, really changes the way people talk about you, write about you, review you, and tell their friends about you. I would rather lose $5 than have someone say terrible things about me online.

Andrew: And as a result you told me, before we started this, people who asked for their refunds felt more positive about their company so they were more likely to buy another product, they were more likely to say positive things about the company and send over another person who ends up buying. When you get it right, it works really well.

Sarah: It’s really important that we talk about that, because no one wants to give their money to a total dick, and no one wants to have to continually have to, like on a subscription basis, keep paying a total dick. If they do have to use your service because it’s the only one, or because it’s the faster whatever, and they don’t like you, they will tell people “I have to use this product, but I hate them, I hate them.” They will do that even if they’re still giving you money, right? If their work forces them to do it, they will tell people, “I hate this product that my work makes me use.” We think about that, it’s not just a matter of people vote with their wallets. Sometimes they don’t have the option of voting. They’ll still talk about it. That stuff is important. No one wants to give their money to and be loyal to a company they don’t like.

Andrew: Another upside, we’ll get to it later on in the program, is you’re going to show us that when you get it right, you can get information from customer service that will feed into products that people will then want to buy because they’re telling you what they want to buy, and you’re organizing it right. You blew my mind when you showed me how to do that. In fact, I can’t wait for that section. Why don’t we get started with the tactics?

Sarah: OK.

Andrew: All right, let’s do it. So, after the big board, the first big tactic is… it goes back to who you’re hiring. Hire extroverts with the right experience. What’s the right experience?

Sarah: I don’t think the right experience has to be someone who has worked in a call center, or someone who’s done email support, or someone who’s done, whatever, the exact same job in the exact same circumstance. I look for personality first, because I can train anyone to do this job. I just trained you how to do this job like five minutes ago and blew your mind. Literally, I think it does not matter who you hire, as long as you’re hiring the right personality.

Andrew: What’s the right personality?

Sarah: I want to say it’s an extroverted personality, but I feel like that’s discriminatory. I think you can be an introvert and do the job. I think that extroverts are… they’re more public people per sense, so they tend to have jobs in retail, in hospitality, working in restaurants. I am big on focusing on people who’ve done any of those types of jobs before. Anything that customer is facing in public at a desk behind a counter, baristas, they’re great. Bartenders are the best. Bartenders listen, they’re empathetic, they’re used to chaos, all that kind of stuff. So they’re my number one choice.

Anyone who’s worked in a great retail environment, like an Apple Store, or whatever, they are already trained in how to handle people face to face, fix people’s problems, listen, give them results and solutions. They fascinate me constantly, people who work in retail, I don’t know how they do it. This is a kind of personality that we’re hiring, that we’re looking to hire to do email based support. When you’re not face to face with the customer it’s the exact same problems. It’s people yelling at you, strangers day in and day out. I think I’m used to saying that you should hire extroverts because they’re better with the volume of people. From what I’ve seen introverts tend to tire with people. When I was doing email support daily for a company, I was answering 220 new emails a day from strangers, interacting with 220 strangers a day. You can’t tire of people.

Andrew: I want to show user voice and how they hire people properly but before we get into that, let’s talk a bad situation, right? You worked at a company and a friend of yours from high school took your job after you left. What happened?

Sarah: That’s actually a good story.

Andrew: Oh, that is a good story. OK.

Sarah: Yeah. She was someone who had never done the job before. And there was even speculation of if she was the right fit for the job because she had never done any sort of email based support for a web company. She worked in real estate. She actually worked in managing, a management company for a big apartment. They owned big apartment communities all over the country. She was used to people coming up to her desk and saying you know, my garbage didn’t get picked up or my water heater’s broken or I need a new lock on my door. You know? Day after day after day it was new people with different problems.

She had to prioritize how to handle those problems. She had to be empathetic and apologetic to people when they were talking about something that had nothing to do with her at all, you know? That’s one thing that most people hate doing is apologizing for problems that aren’t theirs and really good support people apologize all day long. I thought that she would be great at the role and she is wonderful at it. She loves it. It’s like puzzle piece perfect fit for her.

Andrew: Even though she comes from a real estate background where she had to help people with water heater problems and all those and now she’s in a web app company where she has to help people with software. Because she’s the right personality she can do it.

Sarah: Exactly.

Andrew: OK. All right. Here’s a company that you also say is doing a good job. This is User Voice. This is their actual job posting on their website that we found. What do you like about this that you think…

Sarah: If you scroll up a little you’ll see there’s like a general posting about what it’s like to work for User Voice. I love this because they give you really concrete stuff but then they have fun about it. They say, you know, we work hard but we have fun. There’s a picture of them karate kicking another guy. Like, you know, they say you can work from home. But with the customer support position specifically they talk about your personality traits. Like you need to be fast and able to do this kind of thing. You need to be empathetic. That’s the number one requirement that they have for this job. Be empathetic. They’re looking for a type of person. Beyond that, when they actually have the call for submissions they say show us specifically what you would say to this person who asks this question.

Andrew: I see.

Sarah: Like at the very bottom it says give us an example of what you would say. They’re not just saying we want fun people to come karate kick us all day long at our office. They’re looking for smart people with high energy who can, and again energy gets back to being able to handle people after people after people all day long. They’re looking for someone who can really do the job. Who can answer a question and be educational and efficient as well.

Andrew: Yeah, here’s the section that you mentioned earlier. They say please sign up for a free trial, we won’t ever bill you, and provide your cover letter and resume, and provide with your cover letter and resume an original response to this question from one of our customers. “How do I add an admin to my User Voice account?” They want to see then how empathetic the person is, how they respond.

Sarah: Exactly. If I were (inaudible) this job I would write, you know, this great thing but then I would include a screen shot with an arrow pointing to the tabs that the user needs to hit.

Andrew: Oh, I see. That’s how you understand that the person’s empathetic because they’re thinking the user doesn’t want a bunch of text. They want an image. I’m putting myself in their place. Got it, OK.

Sarah: And whether English is their first language. Whether they have good eyesight. Because remember, computer writing is really tiny for some people. When we have a help section that’s just a wall of text you have to think, like, that’s hard to read. You know, when I’m looking at your app and your app is visual and your app has tabs, anyway, we’re getting into this whole other thing we’re going to talk about later. But you know you want to find someone who understands it from the customer perspective. What it looks like, what it feels like, and how to do something easily.

Andrew: OK. By the way, this jacket may not be the best jacket for me to wear in these sessions. I wonder if people can hear every time these buttons…

Sarah: Are they clicking?

Andrew: Can you hear it?

Sarah: No, is it corduroy?

Andrew: No, it’s not. I don’t know what this material is but it’s the buttons that are causing problems. All right. It looks good. It’s…

Sarah: It looks dapper.

Andrew: It looks dapper, right. It looks like I know something. I’m looking like a CEO of a company today.

Sarah: The books stacked up behind you made me know that you knew something.

Andrew: This book stack, yeah. I’ve read all the books because it’s all from people who I’ve interviewed on Mixergy. Which is a good thing because when people walk by my office here and they see the books the first thing they do is they compliment me on the books and the second thing is the quiz me. Did you really read those books? Because that’s my favorite one.

Sarah: Yeah. Well they’re…

Andrew: Sorry, what were you going to say? I just interrupted you. You’re a people person and I’m a talking person apparently.

Sarah: We were just talking about people. I think you understand and I think people watching this understand that there’s, you can hire someone to do the job or you can hire the best person for the job, who’s going to do it well and who’s going to do it for a long time. I think, also, when we get down to hiring part of the turnover rate and the mediocrity that we see in customer support online is due to just having the wrong people in the seat.

Andrew: OK. Onto the big board. There’s so much that we want to cover later on that I want to make sure that we keep it moving. This is really important. You say, “Do not wait to bring someone in and to handle this problem, don’t wait until the point when you’re resentful to handle it.”

Sarah: No. This happens to us a lot because we do help with support. People hire us to do support a lot. They usually come to us way too late. They come to us when they are just really sick of doing support. We find out it’s A because they’re not the right person to do it and B because they’re doing it wrong. You don’t want to wait until you hate your customers because that happens more often than you’d think. People come to us and they have been doing support for their product for two or three years and they have so many other things to do besides support that they just really resent it. That’s not the attitude that you want to have going into support with people. You want to go into doing support really interested to hear what people are saying and really eager to fix their problems, and helpful and with the right attitude and not, “Oh God dammit, you know I have to answer these thirty people.”

Andrew: [???] maybe get rid of the visuals for this so can you, at least, give me an ad story?

Sarah: Yes, I will. I’ll tell you this story. This is a hilarious story to me because it happened so long ago and it shows me that things never change. I met this guy randomly and he was starting a product. He had it online for a year or so. He was this only person working there. This is way before I had a company doing this. He wrote me an e-mail and said, “I don’t know what to do. I’m getting all of these support e-mails. I don’t even know how to handle it. I’m answering e-mails in the middle of the night, during dinner. I’m getting an e-mail and I answer it. I wake up in the middle of the night to answer e-mails.” I’m thinking, “Oh my god, this guys getting this avalanche of customers. What is his issue?” I said, “Well how many e-mails are you getting from a customer per day?” He told me it was probably twenty. And I was like are you kidding…

Andrew: Twenty? I get 20 an hour, at least.

Sarah: Right, so that…

Andrew: I mean in my personal.

Sarah: The volume wasn’t the issue. The issue was he hated doing it.

Andrew: I see.

Sarah: He hated people asking him questions because he spent all day long fixing problems, changing code, doing design, and business development. He was at a point where twenty e-mails to him was over his head. Typically that’s when people come to us. We get the exact same thing from them. It’s not my place to judge how many e-mails they want to answer in a day, but it is my place to judge why they waited this long. We can fix this problem for you really easily. There’s things that go into building a great support department that don’t have to include hiring someone at 60,000 a year to do your support. You can do stuff on your own, if you’re just doing it right.

Someone who’s doing business development full-time or coding full-time who’s having to do support because no one else can do it, there’s a way to manage that without making your customers pay for it. And typically what happens in that case is customers don’t get a reply or they get a shitty reply. Neither of those are acceptable when you’re trying to build a business and get people to pay you money for things.

Andrew: What do I do if I’m a developer who’s building a business and focused on building the right product; I can’t get my head out of code to go answer e-mails from people who are complaining or confused. What do I do at that point? Twenty e-mails a day is not enough to hire someone.

Sarah: No it’s not enough to hire someone. Absolutely not. It is enough for you to sit down and spend a good thirty minutes a day answering people’s questions. As long as these aren’t twenty to thirty people reporting twenty to thirty new bugs a day…If that’s your problem, that’s it’s bugs reports, then you need to shut down for six months and…

Andrew: Fix it.

Sarah: -fix it. Right? But if they’re people asking for future requests or people wanting to change an admin and you don’t have that on your site how to do that; that stuff is easy to fix. The first thing that I would suggest doing it getting the right tools, setting up you tools, but also, moving into our nice little subject here, you want to be educational with the tools you have. Can we go into the turbo scan thing? I love the turbo scan story.

Andrew: Turbo scan is…Yes do you want to keep it as this, yes let’s keep it this show right now.

Sarah: Kind of like with two topics, but they’re the same topic.

Andrew: This is turbo scan. I use this at least five times a week to take…

Sarah: Oh yes, turbo scan’s the best, right? They’re…

Andrew: What is turbo scan?

Sarah: Turbo scan is an iPhone app. You take a picture of a piece of paper. It turns it into a PDF, a high resolution PDF. I don’t know how it does it.

Andrew: It looks just like a scan and if it’s a little bit askew, it fixes it. It’s beautiful.

Sarah: They are awesome, it’s like $4.99, it might be less now. It’s one of the top iPhone apps of all time. That’s their support site

Andrew: This is actually their home site.

Sarah: That’s their home page that’s linked to from iTunes. So, if I go to iTunes and say turboscan support, I get this page. turboscanapp.com

Andrew: So what’s the problem, now they give you an email address, if you have a problem, you just send them an email. They solve it and life is good. No?

Sarah: No, [laughs].

Andrew: No? What happens?

Sarah: They lie on this page, because it says that they respond to every support request within a few hours. They don’t. I’ve written them 17 times since December and they’ve never written me back. Listen, if I was one of the top paid iPhone apps and people were writing me from this page all day long, I wouldn’t want to write them back either. I would be so annoyed at looking at my inbox all day long, but, here’s the deal Turboscan? You’re one of the top iPhone apps of all time, why don’t you have a help section? Why don’t you have a searchable help section? Why don’t you go through and catalog all the things that people ask you all day long and write them down?

Andrew: All right, that now feeds into our next topic. If you only get a handful of emails a day, you can’t hire someone. If you’re getting a ton, before you get to that place, hire someone. Make sure you’re not getting resentful of these people who are paying you money because you’re never going to be able to build a business, making those people happy if you’re resentful of them. If you’re getting a lot of costumer support emails like this, you’re saying find a way to answer it before it even comes in?

Sarah: And how you do that is by using these tools correctly.

Andrew: All right, let’s go on now to the big board. We got to go onto this next big idea, because this is what I promo’d and this is what I’m eager for as well. It says, “Get that answers on your site, before people ask for them.” You say, “Put them in all formats, video, audio and screenshots.” I don’t know how to do this, even though my friend Gabriel of duckduckgo said that once he did it, he loved it. Everything in his business became easier. Because he gets a lot of emails, I guess. He doesn’t charge users, so he doesn’t have enough money coming in to service each user. But, he did something like what you did right here. This is, let me bring this up.

Sarah: Readability. And I want to preface this by saying…

Andrew: Wait, you did this?

Sarah: I did this.

Andrew: What is, for people who are maybe listening to the audio version of this or don’t understand because I’m not zooming in properly on this. What is this page that you built for them and then we’ll talk about how others can build this, too.

Sarah: Right. If you looked at the turboscan site, you saw that the difference was that they had an email address on the page.

Andrew: And nothing else?

Sarah: Well, six months ago when we started with them, they came to us because they were being buried in support and the first thing I did was say here’s why, “You have no resources on your website”. All they had was, Get in touch. They had one page that had about 10 frequently asked questions in a line. So, instead we used the help desk. They were using desk.com. We used the help desk, a tab that very few people even go to in desk, it’s the content management. We created this out of the box help section that’s searchable and that has the contact form.

Andrew: So, it looks like they built it but basically they’re using desk.com. Software that a lot of use to answer and organize email. What you’re saying is that they did something that most of us don’t do, we don’t do it at Mixergy either. Create this community support where questions are already answered, where if they type something in the answer will pop up. Like, how do I sign, there we go.

Sarah: So, yeah. They pop up, say, whatever. This is the thing, I know that it looks complicated. It looks designed and it looks like somebody was hired to do this. I did this, we just changed the fonts and added the logo.

Andrew: But, you know what, the design doesn’t worry me because I do know that I can sign up for Zendesk or desk.com and get this stuff with lots of different programs, Uservoice. The part that concerns me is, how do we get all this data in here without hiring you?

Sarah: Well, you should hire me.

Andrew: We can hire you at some point, but I want to start without you, frankly. I want my audience to say, at least, I’m going to start before I give up and go and hire somebody. So, how do we do it? It’s a lot of work to put this together?

Sarah: It’s a lot of work. The great thing about Desk and Uservoice especially, Uservoice maybe even more than Desk is they make this very easy to do. First things first is we’re going to go through our emails. Anytime we get a question from a customer, we’re going to think in our mind, “Wow, is this a question another customer is going to have?” When I’m training support agents, I tell them, “If you’re asked the same thing 5 times in a week; and remember that these are support agents that are typically doing 80 to 100 emails a day, so 5 times in a week means once a day, at least. Then you need to write a help article for it. All you need to do is copy the question that the person asked, post it in as an article and fill in what you sent to them as an answer. This isn’t very hard. What makes it hard is we neglect these really simple steps. If you just stop for a minute, create the help section article about it, post it on your page. Then you’re going to see that stuff start decreasing.

So, that’s how I tell people, even thinking ahead of time, I mean, I know it’s really difficult to think about what people are going to ask you but have someone whose not working for you, whose not familiar with the app sit down and use it start to finish and have them say well, this is what I did and then I looked for this and I couldn’t find the log in and then I couldn’t get logged in and I couldn’t remember the password thing because you have it hidden and I have to click log in again to get to the password so I couldn’t reset my password. I mean this is all stuff that when you build and app you’re to close to think about someone’s going to have a question about that.

Andrew: So have a stranger go through and try it out and any questions that he has I want him to write them down.

Sarah: You shouldn’t be pulling people in vans on the corner, you know, to look at your app but …

Andrew: The next time somebody looks through my door at my books I’m going to say hey, want one? I’ve got a job for you.

Sarah: Right. Have people that don’t work for you that you know sit through, you know, this is the thing that’s so silly. I tell people this all the time and it blows their minds. Like I have so many people launching apps, launching apps all the time and they always ask this, do you know someone who will do market research? Do you know someone who can do user research for us so we can watch people use our apps? And I’m like fuck it, have a party and invite people over and set up two laptops and watch how people use your app. How hard is this?

Andrew: And so, for this your saying do the same thing, have a party, have somebody go through, pull them aside and say look, go through this and tell me what’s up.

Sarah: Right. If you don’t have the email volume have someone sit down with you and predict what people are going to ask.

Andrew: Right, and if we do have the email volume?

Sarah: Email volume; just start noticing what you’re answering all day long. That’s all you have to do.

Andrew: So anytime I get a question…

Sarah: If people emailing you are.. People emailing you are your power users. Most times for, I think the conversion right now is like one person for every 3,000 people who use your site will write you a support email and almost 80% of people who use your app will never write you a support email. So if someone takes the time to write you a support email and ask how to do something, they’re not some annoying jerk that’s there to destroy your life. They’re there because they actually want to use your app quite a bit. They’re asking you a real legitimate question. So listen to them. Don’t think of it as every single person who’s ever downloaded your app is going to write you a question you have to answer. Think of it as these are already curated for me. If this guy’s asking it then I’m guessing 3,000 other people may to.

Andrew: OK. All right, what about this? I know that I should go through all my old emails and find the common questions, that’s a lot of work. I guess if I’m starting to see questions come up over and over again, that makes sense because I can notice the things that I’m doing often, start out with that you’re saying. If I’m seeing that I’m answering the same thing over and over, copy and paste it into the system like this.

Sarah: Right.

Andrew: What if I’m not noticing it. What if I’m so deep into it and all the questions seem different to me? Everyone’s frustrations seems a little bit different.

Sarah: For that we still need to use the tools correctly. We need to learn how to reuse the tools that we’re already using presently if you’re in a help desk. But from there we need to move into this other realm of topics and that’s actually doing tagging, labeling and organizing of everything that people are sending you requests on.

Andrew: All right, we’re going to get to that in then end and that will help us then figure out, that will help us organize the email that’s coming in so that we can figure out how to answer questions before people even ask them.

Sarah: Exactly.

Andrew: All right. When you say create a document like this you want, if it’s how do I sign up to start using readability, for example, you would like us to include and image showing people how to do it.

Sarah: Right, that one I don’t think has an image.

Andrew: It looks like it’s not that complicated but if it was, you would want that. In fact, it does have this image here. Click this button.

Sarah: Right, yeah.

Andrew: Screen shots and everything.

Sarah: Screenshots and everything. We have to remember that people may don’t always speak English or if they don’t speak English they may be using Google translate for something which isn’t’ always going to be the best option. So, you really want to use a screenshot with an arrow. If you go back to the readability search part and you search for contributions or something like that, you’ll see actually or change avatar, you’ll see where we put in an actual screenshot that’s, you know, we’ve highlighted how do I change my photo, how do I change my profile photo.

Andrew: OK, this one, when I signed up my pictures appears to have an avatar.

Sarah: Right, click that one. No image. These are terrible examples.

Andrew: How do I change my profile info? No that’s…

Sarah: Try that one.

Andrew: Oh wait, this one, yeah.

Sarah: Right, we’ve actually put in here, like, here’s a big red arrow that shows you were to click on this page. Almost, I mean, if I would say 90 to 95% of your help sections need an image. If they don’t have an image, it’s going to be more difficult for people to really quickly scan them and get the answer and move on.

Andrew: And what you’re doing is you’re using this. Basically, you’re using Skitch [SP]?

Sarah: Yeah.

Andrew: And screenshot.

Sarah: Oh my gosh, Skitch is the best. Boom, done.

Andrew: Free program and then you’re just do that, well actually let’s do it like this and that’s how you’re marking it and then you can add a note.

Sarah: Right. Type here. It’s great. You can choose fonts, you can change the color, you can change all that stuff. That’s a simple, easy, free little app that you can do but if you want to get fancy put in in Photoshop, have someone mock them up, whatever. So, the reason, you know, I’m really big into visuals, but this also gets back to another point about support needs to be educational for people. Like, I don’t want to write you a support email anymore then you want to read it and have to respond to me. I’d rather just get the answer. So, seeing the big search box at the top and being able to type some stuff and get an answer for me, even if I don’t get the right one right away, I’m still interacting with that and learning from that and doing that, being self-service instead of just send me an email at Turboscan.com. We want to encourage people to be educated but be self-service and it’s not, I don’t think, pushing them off into the ether and making them answer questions themselves. I think it’s much, much better for most people to not have to interact with support at all.

Andrew: OK, I’m going to ask you in a moment which software you recommend and why. Just not even which software you recommend but give us an understanding of how their all different from each other so we can just decide for ourselves but before I move off of this, what issue is someone who decides that they want to create this self-service question and answer site, what issues are they likely to have as they do it? I want to anticipate our audiences problems as they do this.

Sarah: Well the biggest problem is content. Where are they going to get the content and whose going to put it in there? When it comes to getting content, this again can be a weekend job that you commit to or it can be something that as you go along in the development of your app when a question comes up you add to it.

Now keep in mind, all these help sections that are hosted on help desks are living, huge, historical, documents. They are organic. You can change them. They can be edited. They can be deleted. They can have a picture changed. We’re no longer locked into that world where our whole help section is in html and we have to get our designer to stop whatever he’s doing to change, you know, the text in something, which is what it was five years ago when I was desperately trying to change help sections on things. So, this is, I mean, if you use a Zen Desk or Desk or User Voice, it’s as simple as opening the item and clicking edit, making your changes and saving it. And it’s real time. It’s right there. So, the biggest issue that I think people are going to face is where do we get the content from, how do we load it in and then keeping on tasks that your updating the stuff regularly.

Andrew: So what do you do to keep updating it regularly?

Sarah: Well, you listen to your customers is the number one thing that I tell people all the time which people just don’t like to do these days. And I think it gets back to that weird, you know, defensiveness we have about doing customer support. We need to listen to what people are asking. And again, if people are asking the same thing over and over, God dammit, put it in your help section. They’ll stop asking it if you put in their help section.

Andrew: Is this the kind of thing where we can put every single answer in to the help section unless it has personal information in it?

Sarah: Sometimes yeah. I recommend people do that when their starting from scratch and they don’t have a help section. It’s a great way to kick start getting the stuff out there.

Andrew: So every question that you get for the first week, just pop it in there, why not, so you have something in there.

Sarah: Why not right? And then you can curate those later on yourself. You can take stuff out if it’s not real [?] no one’s asking it again. The other thing that you should do if you’re using a help desk, something like this, is watch the ratings on these because if you go back to the readability section, pull up the profile, you’ll see at the bottom, I found this article helpful.

Andrew: I’m going to say, since it you, I’m going to say I found this article, I didn’t not, I just want to see what happens, can I do that?

Sarah: Yup.

Andrew: It’s not going to screw you up with your client?

Sarah: No. It’s not going to screw you up on the client and if fact I’m going to show you another really cool thing.

Andrew: Oh, that’s it. It just says thank you. I thought it was going to ask me why.

Sarah: Well no. What happens on the conversive on the other side is that I can go in there and then look at the ratings and see that you downloaded that. And so, desk doesn’t give you an option to give feedback and to say stupid answer images don’t work, dumb thing spelled wrong but I can through them and say, gosh seven people didn’t like this answer. I wonder what’s not clear about it. Is the image out of date, are the instructions not clear enough. Do something else for me really quick. Go click on a contact s on the side…

Andrew: So now, if the self-serve answer is not enough, people can go back and ask another, or they can click contact us, and let’s say I’m a developer.

Sarah: Well, let’s just say I’m reader.

Andrew: I’m a reader. OK. I’m a reader, and I’ll zoom out so that we can see the . . . OK. This is what you wanted to show us too.

Sarah: This is what I wanted to show you, because this is really important and this is also imbedded in all of these help desk things. I want you to just fill in this information and say in the message: Sarah’s showing me how to use Desk.

Andrew: OK.

Sarah: Because what we’ll hopefully see, even though we haven’t had a lot of luck with Desk examples.

Andrew: Oh, what are you going to say?

Sarah: Oh, I was just going to say send email, [??] on here, and what should happen, is you should get a prompt that says, send me . . . are you going to press the send email button?

Andrew: No, because maybe if you want to generate a prompt, maybe I should select something from here or do something . . . SS . . .

Sarah: Well, we’ll go back to that in a second. But first of all, send email. Oh shit. We’re going to have to cut this whole part out of it out.

Andrew: No, we keep it all in. OK. What I think you want to do is something like: How do I change my avatar? You want to show that if someone sends an email that you have the answer to in the system, no it doesn’t happen.

Sarah: It’s not doing that, because Desk is not set up. Go back and maybe if click on the website’s developer. Anyway, what you should see is desk prompting you to say we found these other responses in the help section that might answer your questions. Did it answer your question right? So try it from here. Do the same thing again.

Andrew: Oh I see. I didn’t realize you were seeing my screen. I thought I was slick.

Sarah: Oh, I see it. I see all your typos. And again the quirky nature of this just has to do with the . . .

Andrew: Ah, OK. There we go.

Sarah: There we go. We haven’t entered email yet. Did you mean one of these things, right? And look at that, right in the middle: How do I change my profile picture? Well there’s the answer and now I don’t have to send my email. So, the thing was is what we saw on the first form, the first form was actually our great negative answer, is that that’s the option that you can have. Someone send you an email. How do I change my avatar, or you can answer the question for them and they never send you an email.

Andrew: OK. And I think the reason that this happened is because from my understanding of Desk’s system is, you can’t have, I don’t want to say this because I’m not sure. I was going to say that . . .

Sarah: The answer has nothing to do with Desk. The answer actually has to do with the first one isn’t a Desk contact.

Andrew: That’s what I was going to say that that one where you had drop down, this is not Desk.

Sarah: Uh-uh.

Andrew: I don’t think Desk allows you to do this, but so what you did was you created your own form here that asks people to categorize the email before they sent it so that you knew what it was about.

Sarah: Right. And in our next little subject we’re going to talk about why that’s important. I don’t know if you want to talk about that now, but we can.

Andrew: Um, you know what, let’s do one other thing. Let’s break down which one people should use. So, what’s the benefit of desk.com, and actually we should include Gmail in there, but desk.com, what are the pluses, what are the minuses?

Sarah: OK. So, the minus is they’re own by Sales Force.

Andrew: Why is that a minus?

Sarah: It’s Sales Force.

Andrew: OK.

Sarah: The minuses, they had some ups and downs with their support, their actual support themselves. They just hired Graham Murphy who is now leading their support team and he is the best decision they’ve ever made, so going forward they’re going to have an amazing support team, so they’re kind of fixing that issue. They’re free for one user, which is awesome. All of this stuff is out of the box. You don’t have to do any customizations unless you want to, and it pretty much works like a Gmail inbox does. It’s a little bit more robust because it does offer analytics, which we’ll talk about later, and it does have the content management, but mostly it’s just a really pretty looking Gmail inbox. It’s a redundant usage, so you have to have an email address that you plug in to Desk. It used to be called [??], sorry. So it’s expensive when you start adding lots and lots of users.

Andrew: And you can also pay per hour that the person’s on, so if you have a few people who are answering your emails but not every one of them is full time, you can pay for the hours that they happen to be on.

Sarah: Right.

Andrew: Of all of them, there’s a reason why you use them for readability. What’s that? What’s the big reason that made you say, readability, we’re going to go with Desk.com?

Sarah: The reason we went with desk.com was because it was the easiest out of the box, and we were desperately under water. And so, at that point we needed a help section up online tomorrow. I wrote the majority of that help section in less than a week. We got it up online in five days. So for ease of use, and especially because they have a great trial period. It’s free for one user, it was like, boom boom boom, we’re done, we’re set up. So . . .

Andrew: So let’s take a look at, sorry just cut you off, but let’s take a look a zendesk.com.

Sarah: Zen Desk is the old bear of the help desk solutions. They’ve been around for a really long time. They’re really good people. And it can do the same stuff that desk does when you talk about the knowledge base and the integration with twitter and the integration with Facebook. All of that stuff. They all do that the same way.

Andrew: So then what is it about Zen Desk that makes me want to use them.

Sarah: Zen Desk has better analytics. They have better reporting. Their pricing is a little bit more competitive. And it’s really great if you’re working with developers. It seems to have a more developy edge, from what I’ve seen. So if you’re working with people who are more developer-minded, they tend to like the UI a little bit more. I personally don’t like the green at all. But the other thing, too, that I really like about Zen Desk and think that they don’t get enough recognition for is their customer service team themselves. Incredibly responsive, really helpful. They actually have engineers who work on their support team full time. So they fix issues real quickly. They are always adding great custom features for people, and they’re just really . . .

Andrew: They also have good mobile apps. I don’t think that desk.com does, so if you’re answering a lot of emails on the go, that’s helpful for you. And they have strong integration.

Sarah: Right. Their integration is great. And they also do chat which is wonderful too. I think their integrated chat is much better than desk’s is, so they can plug in to so much stuff. The great thing about the plug-ins that they do is that it also can put it in your analytics. So if you’re checking to see where people are writing these support requests from, whether it’s Twitter, Facebook, or whatever, it’s all part of that.

Andrew: OK. User Voice is another one that you mention.

Sarah: User Voice. User Voice is just my new favorite. . . The great thing about User Voice is the forum that they have integrated. They do this out of the box forum experience. So if you want to have community support in a public space, if you actually go the weather.com, the weather channel and scroll down and go to their support, you can see what it looks like. That’s done by User Voice. And people can ask questions. They can vote on features. You can convert a public forum post into private email. And again, all of it is included in your analytics, so when you go in to see how many emails or customer cases, or knowledge-based articles, agents are working with, that’s all included. So their forum acts as a, they have on top of that the great knowledge-based that you see in Desk as well. We didn’t get a chance to see that in Zen Desk, but I just really like User Voice, and it’s so customizable. If you have an authentication setting where you want people logging to their account on your site to write you an email, you can set that all up in User Voice. They use their own authentication to write you an email.

Andrew: What do you mean by that?

Sarah: I mean that if I go to, you know, if you have a website and I’m a member of it and I pay you money, like Andrew.com. And I have to, in order to write you a support email, being logged into my Andrew.com account, I can log into that through User Voice and send you the email.

Andrew: Ah I see. OK. So they know my account and it’s connected to them. OK. And they’re really good, as you said, for forums where people want to answer each other’s questions. I always like this thing about them that if you do click the feedback and you start typing in your message to them, first of all as you can see on the left as soon as you start sending the message that you can get feedback yourself. But also, as soon as you type it in, something like Advanced, CSS, I think they start to give you those answers there you see right there on the left.

Sarah: It’s much slicker than the way that Desk did it from what we saw. But other great thing about User Voice is they really push customers education, and they want you to have self-service customers. They want you to have customers who find answers on the site.

Andrew: And answer it themselves so that: this is answer and if I didn’t like this answer, I can answer it right down here.

Sarah: Exactly.

Andrew: OK.

Sarah: Yeah, and there’s voting integrated to it. If you want to have feature requests voted up or down, the great thing is all of this is out of the box on User Voice. You don’t have to create this stuff or set it all up. That’s how they created the product, you know?

Andrew: Right. What about one last tool: Gmail. Plusses and Minuses of using customer support through Gmail. What do you think?

Sarah: Gmail is the love of my life. I love Gmail. I used to teach courses on how to completely ninja your Gmail because I did support in Gmail for years. Like three or four years, just a Gmail account, a shared Gmail account.

Andrew: So, why shouldn’t we use. . . And by shared you just mean two different people have the same password to this Gmail account and they answer it.

Sarah: Yeah. Like five different people have the same password.

Andrew: So, what’s the downside of that?

Sarah: Well, the downside of it is there’s no analytics. If I wanted to know how many emails we sent per day, I would go to the sent email folder and I would count them by hand. I’m terrible at math, I can’t even calculate a tip, so that was dumb. There wasn’t really a great way to, you know, when a developer needed to see an email, I’d have to star it and you’d have to go to the starred folder and find the one. There weren’t kernel links for emails, so we couldn’t share them and then chat or campfire. Gmail is wonderful if you’re getting less than 50 emails a day. 30 to 50 emails a day is when you need to start thinking about, “We need to move this into something else.”

Andrew: I see. OK.

Sarah: But the great thing about Gmail is you can share it. Hiten Shah, my friend at KISSmetrics, they still use a Gmail inbox. I’m just completely wowed that they do. They have six or seven people going in there all day long. What they do is what I always recommend. Each person gets a label with their name. When I want you to read an email, I mark it as unread. I tag it Andrew, and I archive it and it goes into your folder. When you log in, you look at your unread items in the Andrew folder and you answer those. When you want to pass it back to me, you take your name off it and give it to me unread.

So, there’s ways to sort of be hack-ish about it. If you’re doing support by yourself, and you’re getting less than 50 emails a day, please, you just use something like Gmail.

Andrew: OK.

Sarah: Don’t OK things, right?

Andrew: But what we don’t get with Gmail that we would. . .

Sarah: Is a help (?).

Andrew: Sorry?

Sarah: You don’t get a help section either.

Andrew: You don’t get the help section, which you’re saying is so important that you might want to set up an account with one of these sites, just to get that.

Sarah: Exactly. I’ve had a lot of customers who’ve done that before. They don’t even use the capabilities of the help desk feature. All of these focus on the email part, but they all include these other fantastic features that you can use in addition to it. You can use support and mail app for all I care. It doesn’t matter what you’re using but you need to have a great tool that represents you online that’s a searchable help section that you can edit easily.

Andrew: You know what? I’ve actually called up these companies, asking them –not all of them, but some of the companies, you’ve mentioned — asking them how to create a forum and what the benefits are, and how to do it right? They just seem bothered to answer that. It’s a tough thing for them to answer and I feel bad for them as they try to explain how to use it. I wish that I just would have heard you when I was signing up for Desk.

Sarah: I know. It bothers me, too. I’m not even kidding you. It bothers me that all of these help desk solutions push themselves in to be the next best Gmail inbox. For God sakes, you can just do an out of the box forum experience for your customers. Why aren’t you showing people that?

(?) at least shows that this is a huge component of what we do, right? Most people that use Desk don’t know half of the features. It has really great features, from recording to labeling and tags.

Sarah: We’re going to cover those in a moment. Everything that we do with Desk.com will actually use my account. That’s why we’re using Desk.com, but you could do it with any account, any tool, including Gmail, if you just want to go free and simple and cheap.

All right. Anything else on this before we go on to the next topic?

Sarah: I don’t think so. I think we covered it all.

Andrew: All right. This one was a meaty one. We’re going to go into one that’s a little bit lighter and a little more fun. Then we’ll go back into a meaty one. You say be fast, friendly, and reply to every post.

Sarah: Yes.

Andrew: By the way, do you mean every post, every email that we get needs a reply?

Sarah: Yeah, I think it. . . I don’t remember if I said post, but I think that it means every customer communication.

Andrew: If they’re talking to you, you need to talk back.

Sarah: Right. So, I asked this question of Comcast carrier’s Frank, the guy that started that, I said, “What if the person is just being a dick, or they’re trolling? What do I do?” He said that the rules that they use is two attempts to answer them with helpful voice and great attitude and everything. Then, after that, they ignore it.

I know that’s going to be the question, that people are always going to say, “Well, what do I do if the person is just trolling, you know, they’re baiting me or they’re not listening to me?” Then, set your limits on what you’re going to do. Never react publicly on Facebook, on Twitter, or anything else negatively. Don’t ever mirror negativity in public, right, because that always comes back to you.

Andrew: OK.

Sarah: So, yes.

Andrew: So the company that you wanted to show us that’s doing this in a fun way, and doing it right, you say, is Taco Bell. Here’s Taco Bell on Twitter.

Sarah: Oh my God! So, look at this. This is a screenshot I took a couple weeks ago because I couldn’t believe that they were talking like this to customers. Right? “I think the Doritos Taco sucks.” He says, “That makes you and nobody else.” That’s hilarious. It’s hilarious that a huge, billion dollar corporation is responding that way.

Andrew: That they would even respond to someone who says, “I think the Dorito Taco sucks.” I would think, “All right. Great. Congratulations.” What am I going to say to that? And they had something to say, “That’s just you”.

Sarah: It’s brilliant. I’ve had friends who, a few weeks ago, and this new person took over the Twitter taco feed that I don’t really know too much about, he was replying to them very casually and whatever. I had a friend who wrote that he was going to go try the new Dorito tacos, and he couldn’t wait for the weekend. And they wrote back to him, “why wait?” Like funny. Like something I would say to him, why wait? What are you talking about?

Andrew: Right. Here’s another one, “hey, Taco Bell, do you guys sell hotdogs?” And Taco Bell says, “let me check, no”.

Sarah: No.

Andrew: They’re responding to it. This is just something that you pointed out to me that if we just went it, even now in our session, you see they just respond to everybody.

Sarah: It’s funny and they’re funny. Some of the stuff is, yeah and some of the stuff is here’s a coupon for a taco, right? But some of the stuff is just, frat boys talking about Tacobell, and they write back to the frat boys talking about Taco Bell. And its fun and none of it is thanks tell your friends, thanks, like us on Facebook.

Andrew: Good one. This guy [yetyear] wrote, “or at Taco Bell soounds heavenly right now. I want one of everything, a has [?] stomach”. And Taco Bell responded, “if you do that, please send us a photo”.

Sarah: Yeah. And of course, they’re so good at it.

Andrew: And here we go, here’s another one. And I promise I wont keep reading these.

Sarah: See you can’t, because they’re all like this.

Andrew: This guys randomly says, “I could eat at Taco Bell anytime of the day” and I guess he’s just saying this to his friends. Taco Bell responds, “as you should”.

Sarah: As you should.

Andrew: As you should. And so this is what you want us to do, don’t ignore people, don’t let them pass, don’t let these opportunities go.

Sarah: Right. If you go to any Twitter feed for any airline, except Southwest probably, United, Delta, Continental, Alaskan, whatever, all it is, it’s really kind of embarrassing, but it’s either, thanks for the kind words, or glad you had a fun trip or so sorry DM me your itinerary number so I can take a look. I mean, it’s really sad. There are million dollar corporations out there, like Taco Bell who are doing it completely wrong. And I don’t like going to a companies Twitter feed and seeing a copy and paste reply to every single person. I don’t like that at all. It really enrages me when I see people do it like that.

Andrew: I believe even art is like that. I think there’s a lot that even we can learn from this. I was checking out, my head was actually turned to my side monitor so I could pull up United and see what they do. “Every mile counts, donate your frequent flier miles to wish Illinois Wish Flight, United@Gaygatsbe(sp) thanks for sending and tweeting the info, we’ve sent it to our maintenance team”. Alright, so they are at least responding. But your saying, you could be a lot more fun then that.

Sarah: A lot more friendly and human. And I hate professionalism, I hate Dear Sir.

Andrew: I know. You’ve cursed like five times already.

Sarah: I know.

Andrew: And I told you before we started, we have no editing team, so all off this is going out.

Sarah: Oh, I’m so sorry. I hate that stuff because, there is nothing human about that. You know, there’s nothing about being sorry for an inconvenience at all. That’s just robotic, scripted behavior. So, I like to see when people are really having fun, and being human. Jason Cohen, a friend of mine, he spoke at Microcomp a little while ago, and he had this whole section on, just be honest and people will like you. How silly and first grade is that that we are having to have a conversation now in public about what you should do with your business? Be honest and people will like you. Be fun and be friendly, and answer every single post. That includes Facebook, Twitter, god, I don’t even know what ever the zillion other ones, get satisfaction, and of course, every single email. That’s really hard for a lot of people because I think we have ingrated in mind that were not suppose to respond to feature requests, that if someone’s trolling us and they’re angry, we don’t reply. I don’t fall in line wit that at all. I think everyone that takes the time to mention you or write you, or post on your wall or whatever, deserves the courtesy of a reply.

Andrew: OK, let’s go on to the last big tactic. Keep track of all the right things. You want to know about bugs, complaints, design flaws, every thing that people want improved. Alright, everyone says this. The reason that I wanted to highlight this for our audience, and the reason that I cared about this so much before we even started is, that you have a way of doing this that is organized, that I thought was a little too much at first. But you’re signing on it. So what do you mean by this? How do we do it, and then we’ll show my screen, and you show me what to do.

Sarah: Right. So, if you’re using Gmail, you already heard me talk about how you can use labels to assign things to people. You can use labels in the same way in Gmail to keep track of issues that you’re having. Right? So what I like to do is to tell people you need to label every single thing that comes through. If someone is asking, how do I . . ., you need to label it with how to, or how do I, or whatever language you want to use.

Andrew: Every email that goes out gets some kind of label?

Sarah: Everything. Everything. You might as well not even be using an email address if you’re sending an email without a label on it.

Andrew: Why? What’s the point of emailing everything? I’m not challenging because I disagree, I want to learn. Why?

Sarah: Well you challenge me, I can defend my position.

Andrew: All right. What the hell are you telling me to do? You give me more work.

Sarah: Well, as a support person my role goes way beyond being cheerful, cheerleader, thanks for using our product. It goes way beyond that, because I have a responsibility to the people building this app and selling it for money, right? I have a responsibility to sys admins, I have a responsibility to designers and I have a responsibility to developers who all work to create a product. I may not be a technical person, but I have a responsibility to those technical people.

Andrew: What is that responsibility exactly? Is it just to make sure that people stop complaining?

Sarah: No, no, no. The responsibility is to tell them what people are asking, to tell them what people are complaining about, that’s part of it. To tell them how people are using the product, because so often we build things the way that we want to, we build what we want to use, right? Well, that’s the most selfish, self-centered, like I’m an only child kind of design philosophy I’ve ever heard of. It’s, I’m going to build something I want to use.

Well you’re one person. You’re not 50 people in an office room whose boss is forcing them to use this product, right? You need to start thinking like the masses if you’re going to build a great product that people are going to love to use. I’m going to take this feature out because I never use it in the first place, well millions of other people are using this feature, so what the hell, right?

So I think one of the problems with big support teams or teams that have 5 or 6 people doing support is that there’s not enough communication about emails I’m answering, emails you’re answering, emails that person is answering, what Andrew answered today, so we may all answer the exact same 5 issues all day long, but I only know what I answer, right? I only know what I answered unless we kept a log somewhere what everyone else is doing.

Then if I’m a lead product manager, let’s say I’m looking to see what people are happy with and what people don’t like about a product, then I can’t just take Sarah’s emails, because Sarahs only represent a little bit of it, there are five other people, right? But what if Sarah is the only person doing support and she’s really sick and tired of answering this one question and she comes to me and she’s like, I hate that people are asking why the log-in is hidden behind the tab that they have to pull down.

And they’re like, well we think this is an elegant design decision, what’s the matter? How many people are asking this? Well, it could just be that Sarah is annoyed that people don’t understand how to use it.

Andrew: And so, it stands out to her and seems like it’s a lot of people.

Sarah: So the big points to this are, we really need time to pick numbers and actual analytics and real decisive, non-human sort of interaction with the actual issues.

Andrew: I see.

Sarah: Getting back to this whole idea of what are we responsible for is support people are completely overlooked in the development process. There are some really, really great companies that are now including support people in development, which I think is awesome.

It needs to happen way more. People need to listen to customer support people because they’re on the front lines, but support people need to be communicating back to developers and designers what people are asking for and what they’re complaining about.

Andrew: You mentioned a few of the companies that you worked for, one of the companies that you used to work for is 37Signals. I recently interviewed Jason, the founder of 37Signals, Jason Fried and what he told me was, when it was time for them to rebuild Basecamp from the ground up, to figure out what to build they went back to their tech support, they looked at the emails that were coming in and they understood what people didn’t want in their product and what people did want and what they were frustrated with the previous version of Basecamp and that’s how they did it.

Now you’re showing me that the reason that he was able to do that is because you were tagging it, so you wouldn’t just have a conversation with support people and you’d ask them, what are your issues, he’d have real numbers where he could say, look at how many people are tagging this problem we need to address and look at how many people are tagging this request. We need to consider it at least. All right. So I want to take a look, actually can I show my screen now or do you want to say something else?

Sarah: Sure.

Andrew: All right. This is my desk screen. I created an email, I don’t know how easy it is for people to see, but I’ll narrate it and you can roughly see what’s going on here as I narrate. Can I zoom in? Yeah, I can zoom in a bit. So, here’s basically what we have, this is the subject, of course, I sent a test message to myself. You can see my test message; this is where I would respond down here. You can see in my history every email that I sent in to this company; obviously I’ve sent a lot of emails to Mixergy that’s why there are 94. Basically, the part that we use of this and every other help system that we ever had is this box right here and then we hit update or update and resolve and that’s it.

The only thing that we do differently and I’m going to show you this is ridiculous, we sometimes add a note, like if I don’t know the answer I might add a note and then pass it on to someone else who can handle it and then we sometimes use a little bit of macro, do we have anything secret in here? No. Like how to cancel an account, we send it resolve and send a compliment resolve and then send it but we don’t do that much with macros. So, this is basically the same interface that every one of these programs has. What should we be doing to really use this well?

Sarah: So, this is what we get back to talking about how people are not using the features that are built into these products, right? So, what you should be doing, this is the funny thing, is the very first thing you should do is look at your screen right now and look at what is taking up the most space on your screen. It’s not the reply box and it’s not the note box. It maybe because of how your screen is but I doubt it. It’s actually this huge section on the left that has subject, status, priority, group, agent, description and labels.

Andrew: Yeah, I don’t know why this was here. Why is this here? Oh, and by the way, this you blew my mind about earlier to, I didn’t know this. This is not so much mind blowing but it’s useful. There’s now a direct link here to this case so if I wanted to have a discussion with my team about it, you said you use it around campfire, the program, you now have a link so you can all say look, this is what people are saying.

Sarah: I mean, it’s all developer who’s all in the middle of promoting something. Log into desk and go to spyglass and search Andrew for the email. No, I mean send them, they all have this.

Andrew: You would just say here’s the link, and that’s it. OK.

Sarah: Right, so many people overlook this and desk is a terrible, terrible job of telling people what these are and how to use the stuff. So if you want, I’ll show you exactly how to create a macro or I’ll show you how to use these labels. They’re very easy to do. We can use the one that’s already in there.

Andrew: Let’s use, so for macro, yeah, should we do macro, well you tell me. Why don’t we just start with just a label? Label is just add a label here right? I would just start typing in junk, because that’s what Andrew just wrote about, right, and create new.

Sarah: Yeah, but let’s pretend this is really someone asking you how to cancel my account. I’m going to type in cancel account because that’s what this is.

Andrew: OK.

Sarah: This create new and there it is, it’s done. So now the next time I want to add, I get another email about canceling account, I’m going to open this, I’m going scan it and as I scroll down to write the reply I’m going to type in a label, cancel account. Now I recommend that most people start automating this stuff using keyboard shortcuts. In desk their called macros, in user voice their called canned replies. They all have a different language around it because everyone’s trying to diversify theirselves or whatever but their all the same thing.

Andrew: But what it does is, a macro is a collection of actions and in this case it would be type in a message to the user, add these labels and maybe forward it to someone else. Those are the kinds of things you could do.

Sarah: Typically. A macro is going to give you an option to assign it to a person to set some priority to add a quick reply if their one and to add a label. So, labels are important because at the end of the month, when I’m complaining about so many people canceling and account, I need to be able to go into my analytics and click on the label that says cancel account and see how many people actually asked that. And that’s what going to then start driving my development. Now this it was an idea that. I’m just going to call him out; Jason did not come up with this idea. This idea was actually David Hanson’s idea.

Andrew: Which idea?

Sarah: To start labeling stuff and count them up and the end of the day because we were in a place where we were using Gmail, we had just moved over to starting to use Zen Desk and our support was around 100, 150 a day and we couldn’t get a handle on what was my intuition about what people were asking and what people were really asking. And it was really mind blowing to see that there actually weren’t that many people complaining about this thing and it’s really weird to see what people are really complaining and are really asking about. So it’s very eye opening to be using it the right way but I think it starts at a very base level. You want to know at the end of the month or end of the week how many people are writing me an email that their asking if the product does something or how do I do this, how many people are asking about a billion related question, refund, a credit, cancel my account, change my owner, those are very important because money is involved.

Andrew: Owner, meaning I own the account on this web app, I wanted someone else to have it.

Sarah: Usually it’s a very difficult transition to do that and then feature requests, we really want to keep an eye on how many people are actually running this feature request because if that’s outnumbering everything else, then that tells your development team we’ve got some problems we need to figure out here.

Essentially, I think at the end of the day if you’re doing support right the only questions that you’re getting are about administrative or billing related stuff, and some of those things they can’t ever be avoided right? That’s what we use labels for. That’s what the point of this is, is to have analytics. If you pull up the desk analytics page you can kind of show people what the result is. All of these help desks have these beautiful reporting mechanisms.

Andrew: So here you can see what percentage of our emails responded to are resolved, first contact, we can see how long it takes for us to resolve, 4.7 minutes. Time for first response, wow 27.1 hours, that is shocking actually. All right. We can bring that down.

Sarah: That’s what it is for tech level and typically that happens. That stuff is really hard to figure out.

Andrew: You know what, I know why that is.

Sarah: It’s because people probably respond outside of desk.

Andrew: We respond quickly or handle it quickly. The reason is I just added something to this. Let me see if I can show you. Maybe I shouldn’t do it if I don’t want to screw up my data. Yes, so one thing that I did, well I don’t want to reveal anyone’s stuff, so what I do now is when someone signs up for our newsletter I email them and say, thanks for joining.

By the way, if you hit reply and tell us what concern you’re having, I want to know what concerns you’re having or what challenges you’re having, let us know. Then we use that to create courses like this. Now it’s all sitting there, it’s open and it sits there and it’s open forever because we don’t have to respond to all of them.

Sarah: Right.

Andrew: So I guess I should just auto mark it as handled, or what do I do with that?

Sarah: I would create a macro. I really want to show you how to do these macros online, because they’re so easy to do and they save everything, but you could really just create that label and close them out.

Andrew: And that would automatically happen, if something comes in with this message close it out.

Sarah: Yeah.

Andrew: Let’s just show this one more time and then we’ll go to macro next.

Sarah: Scroll back up a little bit, because this is important. All those numbers at the top in the percentages, unless you have a guarantee rate with your customers, we get back to you in 2 hours or 10 hours or whatever, this stuff does not really matter. We want to focus on what’s coming in and who is responsible for answering it, right?

This is very high level stuff when you have high volume and you want to actually dig down deep, but if we go back down what we can really look at is the number of cases each agent is answering and that’s very important, but then if we go back down, top labels and cases resolved, we’re seeing the breakdown.

Andrew: Top labels and cases resolved.

Sarah: Way down at the bottom.

Andrew: OK. So you can see we don’t really use them. We have cancel account. Oh right, because we have a macro that helps take care of people who want to cancel their account. We have a label for me so that I can be aware of things that have to come to me, but we don’t really use them.

Sarah: Right. So if you use them and people were actually responding back to you like, I want a course on small business finance, then you would actually be able to look at this and say, top labels in cases resolved and see that 100 people wanted to have a course in small business finance, well that’s a no-brainer, you should have one.

Andrew: I see.

Sarah: So the thing is, is that what you want to be able to do is you don’t want an Excel spreadsheet, which we used to do with this, we would have an Excel spreadsheet.

Andrew: And the Excel spreadsheet would be people just sitting and typing in what their issues are?

Sarah: It would be me at the end of the day counting up the number of people who wanted to cancel their account and then you would present it in an Excel spreadsheet. You don’t need to do that anymore, all you need is a visual birds-eye view of what people are asking you about. These products, Uservoice is amazing. Their analytics is crazy. Zendesk has set the gold standard for analytics in my opinion.

They do all the work for you, so anyone in your company, your vice president, your president, your owner, can log in and see what people are asking, but the problem is you have to be doing the labeling yourself. If you’re not doing that, just like if you’re not adding every question that a person asks your help section, if you’re not curating that, if you’re not adding new questions and new screen shots then all you’re going to have is a backlog in support and all you’re going to have is a bunch of support in your email box that you don’t want to answer and you’re never going to get a handle on how to develop your product better for your customers.

Andrew: All right.

Sarah: So, just be patient. It takes some time and dedication and actually so in doing this job, which is why I don’t recommend that Founder’s do support.

Andrew: Ha ha. OK. Let’s see if we can bring up the macro. OK. So what I’ve got on my screen is basically the macros that the system comes with because that’s basically all we’re using. Thanks for feedback and resolve, more info impending. This is just the sample that I think they gave us. So macro, let’s see what the macro can do. I’m going to call this Sarah Hatter [SP] and I’m going to add it.

Sarah: Now, Desk is a little bit technical about their jargon, they don’t have a great way of explaining what this stuff means, but we’re going to apply it.

Andrew: So here, let me zoom in.

Sarah: A little bit.

Andrew: OK. That’s zoomed in too much.

Sarah: [??] macro and remember, this is not a rule. A rule automatically assigns things. We can go over rules in a second, but a rule automatically assigns things. A macro is something you have to do manually. So if you scroll down, you’re going to see we’re going to name this something, we’re going to choose, do we set a description and the description is the larger textbox we saw in the left side bar. But more importantly, we’re going to have set labels . . .

Andrew: Well, let me go through one at the time. Do we use folders at all for anything?

Sarah: I don’t use folders for anything.

Andrew: You don’t. OK. So we can ignore that. Set description. Do we set a description?

Sarah: No. Most people don’t need to set a description for anything.

Andrew: OK. Set labels. You do want us to set a label?

Sarah: We’re going to set a label, and we’re going to create a new label that says “Sarah,” right. So let’s say that macro is seeing how many times Sarah is emailing me throughout the day.

Andrew: Gotcha, OK. Or how many times people mention Sarah. Let’s ask the audience to please email us about Sarah. Now every time we get an email that includes Sarah’s name. In fact let’s do Sarah Hatter. Sarah Hatter. All right, so now we’ve got a label for Sarah Hatter.

Sarah: Right. And so, we’re going to scroll down to . . .

Andrew: Do you use append labels? No?

Sarah: So, the difference here is append labels is what you use when you’ve already added labels onto something, but since we’re starting from scratch, we’re using set labels, and that will actually set the labels.

Andrew: All right. I’m trying to zoom in properly, but every time I do I think I screw the way Desk shows this, but I’ll just keep narrating it. So, append label is if you already have one. Set label is if you don’t. Why didn’t they just say add label and make it work the same way?

Sarah: I’m telling you, they don’t do a good job on this. This is why a lot of these features fail.

Andrew: All right. Then set priority?

Sarah: Set priority if you use priority. This is another really clunky feature in Desk that makes no sense and I’ve never used it in my entire life, so I don’t think it’s worth doing.

Andrew: OK. But the idea there would be if you were getting so many emails to the, say, head developer, then you’d want to alert that something super urgent . . .

Sarah: That’s not even how you would do it. That’s like the worst way to alert a developer on something. But there’s another thing if you use priority, if you’re one of those people who sends emails with exclamation points on it, you can use priority. Whatever.

Andrew: OK. Good. I like that you’re telling me what to ignore. Your whole life is in this. I can’t possibly know it as much as you. So tell me what not to pay attention to. So set status?

Sarah: So set status. This is something you do want to pay attention to because if you want to follow up on Sarah Hatter emails like later on, you’re going to set them to pending. If you want to send a quick reply with this macro, you’re going to set it to resolve. Or just leave it blank, because you can use the update and resolve button. So . . .

Andrew: Let’s call it resolve, because this isn’t an auto-, oh I see. This is where we would manually have to do it. OK. Never mind.

Sarah: [??] do it. It will be very easy. Don’t worry.

Andrew: OK.

Sarah: So anyway, then you would want to assign, don’t worry about groups, you would want to assign the user so it would be current user because that means the person who’s in the email right now . . .

Andrew: So whoever happens to be answering, but if we say, hey, anything to do with this we want to assign automatically. Anything to do with Sarah Hatter we want to assign to Andrew. We would just select Andrew Warner.

Sarah: Right. So then, what you want to do is add a quick reply which you don’t have to do. Again, these are all features, but I use macros primarily for quick replies, and quick replies are anything from a full template that you send back to someone to, sorry to hear you’re having this trouble, or thanks so much for the feedback, or thanks for writing to us about Sarah, since that’s what this email is about, right? So you want to add the quick reply if you’re going to use the quick reply. And I can’t see what you’re typing.

Andrew: I was just saying that yes, her site is cosupport.us, not .com. Apparently, that was too expensive.

Sarah: I own .com now.

Andrew: Oh you do? You own cosupport.com, too?

Sarah: I just haven’t put the website on it.

Andrew: Oh, OK. All right, she’s too lazy to put the website on.

Sarah: And it wasn’t, it was like $5.

Andrew: That’s pretty good. All right.

Sarah: Anyway, so go ahead and we’re going to update this.

Andrew: OK. Nothing else. We don’t want append article, send out by email subject, permission, we don’t want any of this stuff, we just want to enable it.

Sarah: And we’re going to say update.

Andrew: And then update. That’s another thing. Why do I have to enable it?

Sarah: I don’t know. Why do I create something I don’t want to use?

Sarah: Right. Ugh!

Andrew: OK. So now, it’s here, and you want us to test this out, right?

Sarah: Let’s test it out. So, go back to an email that we can show people and I’ll show you.

Andrew: OK, I am hiding my screen here just in case there’s an email from anyone who doesn’t want to be seen.

Sarah: [laughs] And, again, we want to stress that we are not showing [??] because we are just advocates, we are showing [??] because he actually…

Andrew: Because I happen to use it.

Sarah: Because these features are redundant in every help desk we’ve mentioned before. If you don’t have one of these, if you want to use Gmail, just use text expander, it does the same thing.

Andrew: Actually, for some reason I don’t see it, let me see if I got it in right. Let’s just make sure. OK. I’ll show you that…OK. So there, it’s here.

Sarah: OK. Scroll down to the bottom to make sure that it’s all users.

Andrew: So, this is where I would go to answer an email, and it should be find macro, but for some reason, it’s not. So I don’t know. Let me try refreshing.

Sarah: You might actually, refresh doesn’t work very well in Desk, you might want to close the email out and start it over.

Andrew: Oh, OK. I think we got it here. So here it is, and there is my, wait I opened the wrong email, you were right. Hang on. Refresh does not do what it needs to do.

Sarah: I am telling you, I am like the Desk [??].

Andrew: Who knew?

Sarah: I know all the quirks about Desk. I tell people all the time, refresh doesn’t do shit in Desk.

Andrew: So here now, we’ve got it. There it is. The Sarah Hatter.

Sarah: And if you watch deluxe sidebar, when you apply this macro, the steps will change. It didn’t change much because we had kept it open and we didn’t change the agent, but they are in blue now, which indicates that something has changed.

Andrew: OK. So now, status opened blue, this is agent blue, and we have the labels and the messages here.

Sarah: And since you are going to reply to this person, you are going to use update and resolve, which closes and sends. In Gmail, you would use send and archive, which closes and sends. So, the thing is, people get very scared about closing emails. When someone replies to you, it re-opens it, it puts it back into your view. If that is not happening, you are doing it wrong.

Andrew: Should I just be resolving every email, and if they respond back, I can open it, right?

Sarah: No. When they resolve, when they send it back, it opens it again for you. That’s default.

Andrew: So the reason why I hit resolve is that there is a macro for it. Command R.

Sarah: Yes, but it’s not a macro, but yeah.

Andrew: OK. Yes, I keep word [??]. Control R action. Not Command R.

Sarah: And there is update resolve, just close, and just close, and just close. I tell people that all the time, and they get so afraid of it. But, when the person writes you back, it will reopen, it will be there for you. Trust me.

Andrew: OK. So that’s one feature. What you really want to pay attention to is the macros, so you don’t have to do everything manually all the time. You want us to pay attention to labels so that we have clear data about what is going on. And, anything else that we want to be especially paying attention to?

Sarah: Well, the big thing about macros that we touched upon a little bit, but it is very, very important part of the process, and you hate doing support, but you have to do it all day long, is those quick replies are the bread and butter when it comes to the support. It does not have to be a full thing. I have a quick reply that is “help”, and I have a quick reply that is “thanks”. So, “help” is when someone is writing me and they have an issue, and it’s literally like, “hi, (blank), sorry to hear you are having this trouble. Let me get more details from you so I can help out more.” There is a blank section, and it says, “Let me know if you need anything else, and we will go from there,” and my name. So, that saved me 200 characters that I don’t have to type each time. All I have to do is fill in the blank, right? I mean, you have to have an eagle eye on this stuff and make sure you are not sending this out to the same person in like five minutes, right? But if you list these tools the right way, it opens up this whole process of support, and makes it so much easier, it takes less time. Everything is organized rather than, I am up in the middle of the night because I am getting 20 emails. And that’s pretty much what is happening right now.

The reason why people are coming to support is because of stuff. We give them these little tips and tricks and it changes the world for them. Who wants to just sit at an email box and write support all day? I don’t want to write support all day. No one wants to write support all day. But everyone wants to be a part of the development process. And when I am keeping track of bugs, and feature requests, and what people are asking me, and I am having a great help section and watching how people are voting up or voting down answers, and when I am doing analytics on labels and I can take that to my product manager, I am a part of the process, and it makes me very invested in the product you are selling me. It makes me feel better about doing the support for it. So, it’s not just about changing your attitude, it’s about changing the way you work.

Andrew: I didn’t know all of this stuff existed in here.

Sarah: [laughs]

Andrew: All right. Now I can understand, too, how we can have even use desk.com back or user voice which I really love, zen desk I don’t know as well, but I know it’s very popular. Even Gmail. We could have done this so much better, and we could have used these programs when we were just getting started. Of all of this, especially with everything that you just said around these programs that are going to help us do support. There so much that, I always say at the end, there’s so much that sometimes it’s overwhelming. If you were going to suggest that we do one thing, what would it be? One thing to just get started.

Sarah: I think that’s probably what it is.

Andrew: What was it?

Sarah: Writing a better help section? [laughs]

Andrew: OK. Start by writing a better help section.

Sarah: Absolutely. Start by writing a better help section. Especially if you’re sick of people asking you questions. Well give them the answers for god’s sakes. I think I say that a lot to people because they come to me with the same complaints and I’m like, the answer is obvious. You don’t want to answer emails. Put it on the internet. Put it on the webernet so people can search for it and can get the answer and they’ll stop bothering you.

Andrew: Let me ask you this then, if anyone else has a questions for some reason we didn’t get to, what’s a good way for them to follow up.

Sarah: Um, send me an email, sh@cosupport.us.

Andrew: sh@cosupport.us.

Sarah: Yeah. Or info@cosupport.us. Either one. Go to our website. I’m @sh on twitter. We’re cosupport on twitter. We’re responsive. I love how people I’m [??] like this is my passion, so I’m always wanting to really help people and whatever. I’d much rather people contact me personally. Contact me on twitter. I’m not on LinkedIn, that’s for sure.

Andrew: These are your prices, by the way. You charge just for auditing. I usually don’t bring up anyone’s prices. It’s gauche that I just did this. Screw it. You charge $3000 for auditing.

Sarah: This is our old website, FYI. We’re launching new website that’s probably gonna be up by the time this airs.

Andrew: That’s how I actually, um, that’s how I found you. You’re partnered with someone who is so good that they said they talked you up, and that’s how I found you. I don’t know exactly what I’m supposed to say about that and what I’m not. I won’t say anymore. Let me ask you this: what are you prices?

Sarah: You know, it really depends on the scope of work. So if someone needs a quick and dirty turnaround help section, up tomorrow kind of thing, then we need to obviously charge for them expedited rate, like Fed-Ex would, right? But we tend to look at what are your needs. Do you need 20 frequently asked questions or do you need 100. Do you need screen casts. And so it varies. So for help section stuff, it’s going to start around 3000. It’s going to go up to maybe 6 or 7. Auditing we never really got into, but auditing is the process of me telling you what you’re doing wrong. Auditing is a way for us to set up your support process for you and train you on doing this stuff. And so that depends on what the size of your team is and what you’re going to use, so prices are hard these days, because people come to us all the time, and they you do our outsource support. We only get 50 emails a day. And I’m like, oh that’s, gasp, 50 email is simple. That’s three grand a month. No big deal. And they get 250 a day and I’m like that’s three times what I can do for you for that amount. You know?

Andrew: I see. But you don’t just do that, you would set them up with the help center so that your user questions are answered before they ask them, and you help them set up a policy for labeling and all that. And of course if they want all this help stuff answered, that you’ll do for them.

Sarah: . . . that you can just get someone to answer your emails for a lot cheaper. And that’s fine. But we do something that’s a little bit more refined and sort of high level for people who are very serious about support.

Andrew: These guys better hire you right now. These Turbo Scam people.

Sarah: I with Turbo Scam would hire me. I’ve been talking about Turbo Scam for six months. I’ve been [??] like doing conferences, and I bring up Turbo Scam. I can’t get a hold of them.

Andrew: You know what, I was going to say I actually interviewed them on Mixergy, but apparently they’re hard to get a hold of. But I’ll see what I can do. We’ve got big team here, people who can do research. All right, so there it is. A lot of big ideas in here, but you’ve got the suggestions for where you can start. I know I got a few suggestions for where I can start and we’re going to get on it with our team. And I look forward to hearing from all you guys. You can see that this is an issue that we care about here in Mixergy and I want to get better at, so if you want to share your feedback with me, let me know what’s working for you and what hasn’t, either mixergy.com/contact and contact us and hopefully you’ll see it improve the way we respond to emails. Or just send a comment on this section here. Let’s start a conversation on what we can do better. And Sarah Hatter, thank you so much for coming here. You will always be memorialized with that macro now on this site.

Sarah: No!

Andrew: Thank you for being a part of it.

Sarah: Thanks.

Master Class:
How to create a powerful Web TV show
(Even if you’re as awkward on camera as Andrew) 
Taught by Andrew Lock of Help, My Business Sucks

Report issues here

Master Class: Video Show


About the course leader

Andrew Lock is the founder of “Help, My Business Sucks” the number one show for entrepreneurs on iTunes.

Master Class Toolbox

Course Cheat Sheet

GuitarShopTV

Myers-Briggs Test

Strengths Finder book

Blip.tv

Vimeo

Traffic Geyser

Pixel Pipe

Commission Junction

Redirection WordPress plugin

Clickbank

StartYourOwnTVShow

Transcript

Download the transcript here

Andrew: This course is about video creation for non-pros like me and probably like you, if you are in the audience. And the course is led by Andrew Lock. He is one of the world’s foremost authorities on creating and profiting from Web-based TV shows, and he is the founder of Help! My Business Sucks! The number one show for entrepreneurs on iTunes. Let’s bring that up actually here. There he is. We were just talking earlier about how it shows up on iTunes and there it is.And before we start, I want to go over what we’ll be covering in this program. Let’s bring that up. There it is. Andrew, we’re going to show your studio, by the way, in a moment, and people are going to see how much more professional your setup is than mine. But the point of this session is that even if you don’t have a professional studio, even if you just do it in your office like I am, you can still pull it off and do well. And frankly, I’m proof of that. I don’t have the best equipment, but we are doing pretty well here with Mixergy.All right, so back to the big board here. We are going to talk about, we are going to show what Andrew has done in a moment so that you can see how far he has come with video production. I know that a lot of people care about equipment, and I know when I was starting I cared insanely about what mic I needed. I cared about the lighting and so on. Even if I couldn’t get the right stuff, I at least wanted to know what the right stuff was, and we’ll cover that in this session.

We’re also going to talk about how to publish your show so that you can get it up on the Internet. And once you publish it, the first question you’re going to ask yourself is, “How do I get anyone to even watch it?” Well, Andrew will talk about that too, distribution. And finally, after you get it all right, that’s when we’ll get to getting paid. A lot of other topics. All this and so much more coming up.

And first thing we’re going to cover is Andrew, where were you before you figured this all out? You had some of the frustration that people who are watching us are experiencing today, right? Can you talk about that?

Andrew Lock: Oh yes, absolutely. By the way, I was just curious looking at your shot there. Is that a big pile of books?

Andrew: That is a big pile of books. One of the upsides of doing this kind of work that I do is authors and publishing companies send you tons of books. I have boxes below that from all the books that I get.

Andrew Lock: Oh, that’s awesome.

Andrew: It is.

Andrew Lock: I’m a big reader so I spotted the books there. Yes, you asked about the background and what led me to do this. Well, I was always fascinated by video. I loved the power of video, and I guess in the most basic form, being able to persuade people with the visual images. And so even when I was at school, I was just fascinated by it, and I seem to have a leaning towards it. Of course, in those days, the equipment was pretty crude and basic. There have been a lot of advances since then. I was using tapes. I was in Best Buy the other day, and they don’t even sell camcorders or tapes anymore. But that’s a good thing.

So I had this interest in it and that developed over the years, and I really kind of poured my heart and soul into learning about video production, which was kind of a parallel path with business and marketing, which I was also interested in. And I got to a point where I decided to create a show, and this was in the early days of Web TV shows just a few years ago, when there was really nothing out there. And I had a few viewers and I enjoyed doing it. It was fun, and I thought that the content that I had was good.

But just as I started to gain traction, there was a disaster. I mean it felt like an epic disaster at the time, which was that iTunes, which was the main point of discovery for people watching my show, just accidentally, for no reason, deleted my entire history of episodes and I guess, for want of a better word, my account on iTunes. iTunes is just a directory. They don’t store any episodes. But they basically wiped me off iTunes for no reason, no explanation, couldn’t do anything about it, just as I was getting traction and very disappointing, very frustrating.

But I really saw the power of Web TV and so I persisted through it. And as you just showed on the slide before, my show, which is a business show, became the number one show for entrepreneurs on iTunes since late 2008.

Andrew: It’s more than that. That as a result of this, and we’re going to get to how other people can do it. I know that’s, they care about themselves more than they care about me.

Andrew Lock: Yeah the practical of course.

Andrew: They care more about themselves than they care about your story that I want to feature here, but…

Andrew Lock: Yeah.

Andrew: But before they trust us to lead them through this process. They’re going to want to know, how far you’ve gone. You talked a little bit about how far the business has gone. How far the show has gone on iTunes. Other things have happened including this. What is this article that we’re looking at here – let me zoom in on it properly – from Business Week?

Andrew Lock: Yeah. So this was a couple of years ago. After I had the success with my show. What happened was people started approaching me and saying, “How can I do what you’ve done,” because I had the number one show on iTunes in category for business entrepreneurship and marketing. So, a lot of people were saying, “How do I do what I do?” I started to get a lot of exposure in the media because of that as well. This was one example where I have became in a sense, been considered the Web TV guy for media like Business Week. This was an article were they did a feature story about web TV show and I was the main consultant.

Andrew: See, you became their expert. Bloomberg Business week considered you the expert that they wanted to talk to for that piece.

Andrew Lock: Yeah. The reality is Andrew, I hate to say this without, it’s going to sound like I’m blowing my own trumpet, but there’s no other way to say it. I have, I created or advised and coached on the creation of more Web TV shows than anyone else in the world. There isn’t anyone else that’s come close to producing or advising on as many shows as I have over. Well over 100 now, successful shows and they’re profitable.

Andrew: OK. How many people watch your program?

Andrew Lock: Weekly audience, is over 111,000 at last count. Which is, it’s pretty amazing considering that’s more than a lot of cable TV shows.

Andrew: All right, well on to the audience. Now that we have established who you’re the authority here.

Andrew Lock: Yes.

Andrew: Given them a taste of what’s possible if they wanted if for themselves. Let’s go back to the big board. First big tactic is, got to pick your topic. Now how does the person who is watching us Andrew, pick a topic for himself or herself when it’s going to propel them into the stratosphere of iTunes, if not further.

Andrew Lock: Well, as you said, this is the fundamental starting point for every show. Obviously, initially the idea of having a show appeals. That’s why people are watching this discussion. Beyond that, what are you going to present about? What’s the topic going to be? Well, there’s two ways to go. You can look at the market place and say, “what’s hot right now, ” or kind of look internally and say, “what am I passionate about?” The latter as far as I am concerned is the only way to go, because hot topics will come and go. I’ve seen people for example, try to create shows about iPhone Apps, that’s just an example, when they don’t even own an iPhone. Well, obviously they’re not credible for a start on that topic.

Secondly, they’re going to lose interest because they’re not passionate about it. The alternative method of creating a show around a topic that you are truly passionate and excited about knowledgeable about, and want to share this with others, even if you want a page for it. That is the best fundamental starting point. When I work with people and guide them through this process, that’s always the most critical factor. Please, please avoid the tendency to go after a niche where you think the money is at. Instead, look inside and make a note. What are all the topics that I’m passionate about? What books have I got on my bookshelf? What do I daydream about? Those are the things that people should be looking at as possibilities for creating a show.

Andrew: Let’s take a look at one example here, then I’m going to come back after you tell this story, and just add one thing to it that I found helps in addition to passion.

Andrew Lock: O.K. Great.

Andrew: This is about your experiences in what you’ve been able to do, including this one.

Andrew Lock: Yes. Here’s an interesting one. Now, Brian[sp], who is the guy behind the show. I will tell you more about this show in a second, but Brian approached me, and he was a stockbroker on Wall Street with the downturn of the economy. In talking to him initially he had talked about doing a show about financial, investing and that kind of industry.

Andrew: And he was a stockbroker, and so he figured, all right, I’m a stockbroker, I can do it.

Andrew Lock: He’s a stockbroker. He was very successful as a stockbroker and literally worked on Wall Street.

OK. In talking with him, I sensed he had lost his passion for that industry. He just didn’t seem to be that motivated about it. So, I asked him about his hobbies. As soon as I asked him about hobbies, he just came alive in telling me that he was an avid guitar player and a guitar collector. It turned out he had about a dozen guitars of all different types, electric guitars. And so, when I saw how enthusiastic he was about that topic, I sensed that that was the direction to go. Eventually, he agreed.

And so, he created a show called Guitar Shop TV. It’s GuitarShop.TV if you want to have a look at the website, and that’s what we see here on the screen. Basically, what the show is, is Brian now spends his life going to concerts of all the guitar players that he idolizes. He gets to go back stage and interview them. The interviews are featured on the show along with tips for collectors and also guitar players. It is a fascinating show. We put together his first 12 episodes, and then he took it from there. He’s having the time of his life because this…

Andrew: What about revenue, Andrew? Where does he bring in revenue with a website like this?

Andrew Lock: I don’t know what he’s up to now. As with all new businesses, he knew there would be a learning curve, first of all, then ramp it up. The way that he structured this site, actually, and we brainstormed this is they’re actually around a membership community. So, as well as direct revenue from the show which we’ll talk about a little bit later, he encourages people, the viewers of the show, because the show can be viewed for free on the home page of the site. But when people view the show, they are encouraged to become a member of the Guitar Shop TV community, and that’s a paid membership. Inside that membership site, just like Mixergy, he gives access to a lot more content, extra interviews, tips, articles, downloadable audios, guides and so on.

I’m not sure what he’s charging now for the membership, but through research he established there’s clearly a market there for guitar players and guitar collectors. There is no other show out there on this theme. Like I say, not only is he having the time of his life, but he’s actually created a very profitable business.

Andrew: Any idea of doing a membership, I think, is a great one. It’s obviously working for us here at Mixergy.

Andrew Lock: Yeah. Yeah.

Andrew: So, before we go on, the one thing that I’d want to add when you’re finding your passion is it’s very easy when you’re finding your passion to just going off in your own little world and creating a show just for you and not for very many other people on the planet. What I found helps is to just keep touching in with the audience and saying, “What do you care about” or “What problems are you having around my passion?”

So, for example, we recently, around the interviews, have started sending emails out to the audience saying, “Hey, I’m about to do an interview on this topic or an interview with this person. What would you want to know about?” We only send this out to a small portion of the list, but when they give me feedback on what they want to know, it makes my interviews better, and it helps it become better for the audience, too.

Andrew Lock: That’s really good advice. I totally agree with that, and obviously we don’t have opportunity to go into every detail of all the steps, but one other element that we didn’t talk about that is important in that first step of choosing a topic is to do methodical research because you may be interested in a topic that, first of all, there may be a very small audience about or other people that are interested in it.

And secondly, it may not be easy to monetize. So, there are different factors that come into play with it, but by far the number one starting point should be, “Is it something you’re passionate about versus something that you simply see an opportunity to make money in?” That’s really the main point that I wanted to share because too many people get drawn into that trap of “I see that there’s money to be made in this niche even though I know nothing about it, and I’m not even that interested in it.”

Andrew: Right. And then, the market changes and there isn’t any more money in it and they’re stuck with it. We’ll talk in a bit about revenue and give you an understanding of how you can maybe, think of a topic regarding revenue, but first start with passion. First, make sure that it is something that you care about. Man, it can be a lot of work, so you want to make sure that it’s worth the work for you, that you’re interested in it.

Andrew Lock: Yes.

Andrew: All right. Next big idea is choose your unique selling proposition. Don’t be like everyone else by doing research and finding that thing that’s unique about you.

Andrew Lock: Yeah.

Andrew: So, how do we find that?

Andrew Lock: Again, this is a critical step. The interesting thing about Web TV shows is that although they are gaining in popularity and they will continue to do so, with these new TV sets that enable you to access Web TV content and boxes like Roucou and Media Center and we see Netflix, of course. So, the awareness is becoming greater, but we’re still in its infancy as far as Web TV shows because there are very few topics that have multiple different show options.

Now, as times goes on, having a USP is going to be far more important. At the moment, you can pretty much create a good quality content show, and you’re going to get good traction with it if you persist at it. But it is important to have a USP. Interestingly, I was in Hollywood a couple of months back for the Grammys, and while I was in LA there I stayed at the – I forget the name of the hotel – Hollywood Roosevelt Hotel just opposite the Grauman’s Chinese Theater.

I had recalled that the previous time that I was there which was about five years ago they had these star tours, and you may have seen these things advertised where they take you around stars’ homes, celebrity homes in the Hollywood area. You go on a little bus, and they tell you little bits and pieces about the background and where they live and so on. They point out, oh, look, there’s Danny DeVito over there doing his gardening or whatever.

Andrew: [laughs]

Andrew Lock: I thought it was a great idea but interestingly this time when I was in Hollywood I saw the racks of display brochures and pamphlets that advertise these types of tours, and to my astonishment this time there must have been a dozen different tour companies advertising. Now, the interesting thing about it, this is the point about USP is there was a tour company just for old age pensioners. There was a tour company for gay people. There was a tour company that just did walking tours. There was a tour company that only did tours of TV show celebrities. There was a tour company that only did tours about celebrities that passed away in Hollywood.

So, you get the point. That shows you that it absolutely is possible to go into any marketplace and do well in the marketplace if you have a USP. So, many people would have said, look to star tours which is by far… They dominated for years, but then someone obviously realized, well, there’s room for these niched tours. The same applies to Web TV. You have to have that unique selling proposition. Don’t do what everybody else does. Again, this all comes back to methodical, strategic research. The first thing to look at, step one in this part of the step, is to look at iTunes. iTunes is the number one directory for Web TV shows.

Now Apple, because they can, they don’t call them Web TV shows. Everybody else does. Apple calls them Video Podcasts. Everywhere else in the world they’re called Web TV shows, different terminology; it’s the same thing. You can see Adam Carolla there on the right-hand side on your screen shot. He’s …

Andrew: Actually, you know what? I might have just grabbed the audio podcast because Adam only does audio.

Andrew Lock: Yeah. There’s two categories. In fact, at the top right-hand side of the screen you can see you can split it into audio podcasts and video. The video podcasts appear at the time we record this interview, they will appear on a black background, and the audio podcasts will appear on a white background, as you see here. So, you’re right.

Andrew: I may not have gotten… This is the more general screenshot but the point that you’re making is, you’re saying, first look at iTunes for video programs, see what people are doing.

Andrew Lock: Exactly.

Andrew: OK.

Andrew Lock: Look at the marketplace. Is there a show already? Because if there is, the chances are that there isn’t but if there is, you want to look at is it successful, first of all. Is it appearing in the charts, which means it’s successful and secondly, what is their unique selling proposition, because you will identify it, is it that they present in like a round table discussion? Is it the person that presents have a particular background that gives them a specialty in a certain area?

Whatever it is, obviously you don’t want to create a show that is the same because then you’re not going to stand out from the crowd. So, knowledge is power. Researching what’s out there already in the iTunes marketplace, which is the number one directory for discovering these shows is the best first step. And then you can at least know, is there a show, isn’t there a show?

Andrew: OK, all right, so let’s say there is one and you want to make it a little bit different, what do you do to make it different?

Andrew Lock: The next step, really coming back to what you mentioned early about surveying the audience. In this case, obviously, well most likely you don’t have an audience yet but you can go to someone else’s audience and the best way to do that is forums.

Forums are music groups online on every topic. I sometimes, when I’m speaking and training, I ask the audience to try and suggest a topic where they think there wouldn’t be a forum, and all the years that I’ve being doing that, the most obscure topics that you could ever imagine have forums. There literally is a forum for everything.

Andrew: So in this case we’ve looked up a forum for cooking, and of course we’ve come up with a bunch of forums. How does this then lead to a forum for, or, excuse me, a show on cooking.

Andrew Lock: Just to explain to process for those that aren’t familiar with it, the way that we found these forums is literally to type into Google in the search, “forum” and then a keyword for the niche that we’re considering. So if we were considering a show about cooking, just type those words in ‘forum’, ‘cooking’ and then we see the forums come up. Obviously, on the first page of results we’re going to see the most popular forums. We would click through to the forum, have a look at the forum, and simple immerse ourselves in there for a couple of hours to see what people are talking about because those are invaluable clues to tell you what people want.

What you’ll see is people post things like “Does anyone know how to…? Or “Does anyone know of a resource that will…? Look for those types of comments because those are invaluable clues about what type of content that you should be looking up including in a web T.V. show. Otherwise, the alternative is just to pick ideas off the top of your head

The real danger in doing that is, you don’t know for sure that those ideas that you’re thinking of, are more universally being considered by the marketplace. So go where the marketplace is hanging out, your potential viewers and immerse yourself in their conversations and you will very quickly find out what they want.

Andrew: You know what, I keep thinking about MySpace, and MySpace meaning text startups. It’s very easy to say “Andrew’s doing interviews with text startups; I’m going to do the same thing because if it’s working for him, and if I’m passionate about it, then I should copy him.”

What I find actually, now that you’ve mentioned it, if I think about the forums that I’m a part of, there are a few things that just stand out that people keep talking about over and over and I’m ignoring them, like jobs. If you look at Hacker News, the forum for text startups, they keep talking about jobs, the job interview process, getting a job at Facebook versus getting a job at Google, getting a job in a step towards working at a bigger company. If you interview all the founders that are dying to hire, and give them an audience of people who want their first job, or one of their early jobs intact, you’ll kill it.

Andrew Lock: Yeah. It’s a great niche, great example, too. Again, to prove that everything that we’re talking about and explaining here, this is what I did, this is what I teach others, and this is what others have done to create profitable shows and we have an example of, taking that cooking example, this is what we did for a cooking show. What we found is through searching forums on cooking, one thing that came up a lot, was people love collecting recipes. Now there were in this instance, a lot of cooking shows out there, For some reason, cooking is a very, very popular topic. So we didn’t want to do another cooking show.

In this example, this was a woman named Laurie in her 50s. She came to me and wanted to do a show, again we did the brainstorming process. It resulted in this show called Recipe Runway. It’s not a cooking show, but it is about food and it’s designed for people who love collecting and sharing recipes. Also, understanding the background to different types of food. So, this process that we just explained of researching forums and understanding what people want, led us to create a show that we knew before we even started to create it, would be successful. That is having a USP.

Andrew: All right, great point. Let’s go to the very big, big board today, we have a lot of topics we want to cover. Next is plan the details of the program. So in details we mean the name, the frequency of episodes, et cetera. How are you able to do that?

Andrew Lock: At this stage of the process, there’s a lot of decisions that need to be made. Just to mention a few of them. The first one is, you need a name for the show. It sound obvious, but the name is critical. I always encourage people to pick a name or design a name that inherently says to the audience what the show is about. I don’t like names where people actually have to go to the site to even discover what the topic is about. So, in my case, I had a challenge with this. I am a fairly creative person, but, I really struggled with the name. I wanted the show to be about business advice. I wanted it to have, to really convey part of my USP, which is that I give unconventional advice that really goes against business textbooks and the traditional schools and colleges. I’m a market maverick, if you like.

What I did was I brainstormed with a mastermind group that I belong to and it was in that mastermind process that the name was put out there. We came up with other names like Business Makeover and Turn Your Business Around, things like that. None of them kind of had a real reign to them or I didn’t feel like they were attention grabbing. Then someone suggested, “Help, My Business Sucks!” As soon as they said that, I thought, that’s it. It had all of the components that I thought were important to having a good name. You could see I had the logo designed there. I used 99 Designs or Hatchwise.com to design logos for projects and businesses. That’s a nice resource. You can see the name combined with the logo really does convey, as soon as you see that and you hear the name, you don’t even need to watch the show to realize this is going to be unconventional.

So, an attention grabbing name that says what the show is about is a first detail that needs to be considered. Another detail that needs to be considered is how often are you going to present the show or release the show. There are shows out there that are released everyday. There are shows that are released once a week, twice a month or once a month. Those are the most common frequencies. For each of those frequencies have pros and cons. A daily show is obviously a lot more work. You need to consider times when you are ill, when you go away on vacation and so on. It may sound like a good idea to do a daily show, but most people that do tend to regret it. If the frequency is too far between shows, you can lose traction with the audience. You need to balance it with what your availability and what your time constraints are . . .

Andrew: What’s your recommendation for that?

Andrew Lock: My recommendation is to start off with either weekly or bi- monthly. Once a week or twice a month, I feel is a good sweet spot. Even that comes around pretty quick, and you want to be in this for the long term. A Web TV show, by its very definition, as opposed to videos that are posted online, the difference with Web TV shows is that it is the nearest thing to a real TV show but it’s online that you can imagine. One of those parameters is that the episodes are released with a regular frequency. If you watch a show like The Apprentice, for example, and you like The Apprentice, you know that it’s on Sunday evening, you go and watch. You know. You go to the TV. You switch it on at that time. You know that that show is going to be on.

The same thing happens with Web TV. If you release an episode on a certain day and people know that there is a new episode once a week or twice a month or whatever it is, especially in the beginning is it critical to stick to that. For the first three years that I did my show, I never, ever missed an episode. Now that my audience is established, there are times when I travel and so on and I don’t stick to the schedule. But I can do that because it’s well-established. To begin with, it is critical to have that schedule.

Andrew: All right. By the way, I wish that I had gone weekly. I thought, “Hey. It’s so easy. I’m just going to put some video up online.”

Andrew Lock: “It’s so easy.” Yes [laughs].

Andrew: I should be able to do it daily. I should have started with weekly, I think. All right. Back to the big board. Let’s see what else we got here. We got to get through these topics quickly because we have some meaty ones towards the end.

Andrew Lock: Sure.

Andrew: All right. Next big idea is expose your personality.

Andrew Lock: Yes.

Andrew: So, how do we do that?

Andrew Lock: Very good to expose your personality. In fact, it is critical. Everyone has a unique personality. Not a lot of people know this, but my original background when I lived in England, of course, by now, I’m sure everybody has detected my accent, I live in Salt Lake City but I am from England originally.

Andrew: You mean that’s not a Texan accent?

Andrew Lock: Yes, yes, that’s right.

Andrew: All right.

Andrew Lock: I used to manage, I used to be the personal manager of a very famous celebrity. Those who live in England will know him. His name is Paul Daniels. He was a TV presenter, a magician, and a very famous celebrity. In England, he is likened to someone like David Letterman or Johnny Carson, someone like that, because his show was on the BBC for 15 years and syndicated in 43 countries, one of which was not the States. That’s why people don’t know him here.

But when I worked with Paul, I realized, one of the things that I learned from him was that he always talked about being true to who you are because you are unique. You are an individual. And what tends to happen is that people admire certain presenters and they try to be like those presenters. Whether it’s on TV or on the Web, it doesn’t matter. The same principle applies.

What you should do is be yourself. You are the best one of you that there is, and you are unique. You are an individual. You have a very different personality and strengths and background and experiences.

Andrew: But how do you find that? I remember being on camera at first trying to find that personality that I knew was deep inside me that I could barely tap into my day-to-day life. Maybe I was doing a decent job of it. But to figure it out on camera and to know the aspects of it that you should bring out on camera is tough. How do we do that?

Andrew Lock: That’s a good question. One of the processes that I went through that really helped me was to ask friends and family who I trusted to give me very honest feedback what the things were that they felt were my biggest strengths and also what my biggest skills were too. And when I combined that feedback and kind of listed it out and considered it, obviously, certain themes came through there about my manner.

I also found it helpful to look at the StrengthsFinder Test, which is a Gallup survey. It’s a book that you buy, StrengthsFinder 2.0. I also did one of the personality tests that gives you the four letters. I forget what they call it now. It …

Andrew: Not Myers-Briggs, is it?

Andrew Lock: Yes, like Myers-Briggs. There are 32 different personality types, and it is astonishing when you take that test and you read about yourself because it’s, you know, most people will laugh out loud reading the description because it is scarily accurate. So, that’s how to become aware of those qualities that you are. Some other things develop, like for example catchphrases and things like that tend to develop overtime just naturally. And so, the biggest thing is really to try and relax, and just have fun, and be authentic with presenting on camera rather than strategically trying to design some type of persona. And again, that’s something that I learned from Paul is, working with him he made the observation which I believe is also true, the best actors and actresses play characters or roles that are an exaggeration of their true self. If you think about someone like Tom Hanks, he always plays roles that are kind of…

Andrew: The friendly guy.

Andrew Lock: Friendly, solid, plodder, approachable. If you look at someone like Jim Carey, he always this zany, you know, pulling facial contortions and so on. And so, that is good advice to be an exaggeration of your true self. The reason for saying an exaggeration is because when you present on camera if you are, for most people, if you are just exactly as you are in real life it’s actually quite boring. Believe it or not, I am an introvert, I really am an introvert. I am a situational extrovert, which is what I’m doing now because I am enthusiastic about the topic and I love sharing this information.

But, if I was just to have a conversation with you, one on one, privately, we were perhaps sitting at home on the sofa or whatever, on the deck – I’d be much more mellow and low-key. But when you’re on camera, you really do need to have more energy. It’s more engaging to the viewer when you have more energy. So, that’s definitively an aspect of that. Again, it comes back to don’t try and imitate someone else even if you love and admire and want to be like them. Be true to who you are. Don’t try and create a personality that isn’t a reflection of what you are. Just be yourself, have fun with it.

Andrew: All right on to the big board. Next big one is expose your personality. Actually, next one, expose your personality we just talked about it, next one is pick the production equipment.

Andrew Lock: Yeah

Andrew: All right. So, we’re going to talk about production equipment but first you want to say something about the importance of production versus content.

Andrew Lock: Yeah, so I believe there is a balance. My experiences told me that there is a balance. Viewers do want to see good quality video and sound. Sound is much more important than the quality of video. For example think about this video that we were doing here. If the picture quality, because we were doing it on Skype and let’s say I had a very low quality internet speed. If for some reason I was very fuzzy and grainy in the picture but the audio quality was crystal clear, would people listen and enjoy the content?

Andrew: You know what, surprisingly, if the audio is clear but the video is fuzzy, people don’t complain so much. They might, but not so much. The other way around, even though its video, if the video is perfect but the audio has a little hum in the background or little noises there was a moment ago here on my side, people will tell me about it. It’ll bother them, it will drive them bonkers. And frankly, even for me, if the audio is bad, it makes me a little sick when I listen to other people’s programs. I didn’t know that going in. You are absolutely right.

Andrew Lock: It’s a time tested proven thing and whether you believe it or not, it is true. That is how people judge the overall quality of the video. The sound quality is critical. So for that reason, well let’s just talk about the balance first of all. So quality is important, however, it is absolutely not necessary to record a show with expensive equipment or to go to an expensive TV studio because more important than the quality is content. There needs to be a balance. There needs to be sufficiently good quality video and audio, but much more important is the content because ultimately that’s why people are viewing. They’re viewing it because they want to be engaged, they want to be entertained, they want to learn something.

Andrew: You got an example in this guy right here. Tell me about his video equipment. He keeps saying [??]

Andrew Lock: Well, this is a perfect example to illustrate this point because many people are familiar now with Gary Vaynerchuk. He presents a show that is daily called Wine Library TV where he reviews three bottles of wine. He doesn’t drink the whole bottle, but he has a taste of each bottle. He is an expert reviewer of wine, but importantly on this point he records this show with one camera in his office, at his desk with a little chalk board in the background there. There is no elaborate production whatsoever, literally just one video camera for the entire show on the same shot for about 20 minutes.

There’s Gary. I lost your audio. Ironically, we were talking about audio. I lost your audio there for a second, Andrew.

Andrew: Ah, there we go. Sorry. You know what’s going on? Since audio is so important, there’s some noise outside the office so I’ve been trying to correct for it over here as we’re talking so that my mic doesn’t pick up on it. All I’m using to correct it is the built-in mic levels which on a Mac will stay put.

Andrew Lock: So, the other example that I wanted to share is Beach Walks, again, because this is a very successful show. You can see they’ve got 770 episodes at the time this screenshot was taken, and it is a woman who walks down the beach. There’s a camera that walks in front of her, and she talks to the camera. She shares some motivational encouraging words each day, one camera, on the beach, outside. That’s the show. It’s extremely popular. So, it is not about the quality of production.

Andrew: I see.

Andrew Lock: This is something that I find consistently when I talk to people and train them and coach them on this topic. Most people believe that they have to spend a lot of money on equipment. They are obsessed about getting exactly the right equipment. In fact, it holds people back from even starting because they’re paralyzed by “Should I get this mic or this mic or this camera or this camera or there’s going to be this new model coming out in a few months? Should I hold off and wait?” All of those things are far less critical than the quality of the content.

You can start with even the most basic camera and create a good quality show, get a following and then adjust course as you go. So, don’t let the equipment hold you back.

Andrew: By the way, and this is from a person, this is from a man who has the top setup over here. You could be intimidating everyone by saying, “This is the only setup. This is your studio. This is what you need or else you’re really just a poser. You’re not meant to be in this space” but you’re saying the truth. You’re saying, “Look, this is not what you need. This isn’t what you need to start out with. Start out simple.” In fact, for many people like the people whose examples you gave a moment ago, they might have started out simple and then stayed with the simple format, like this guy.

Andrew Lock: Yeah.

Andrew: All right.

Andrew Lock: That’s the truth. So, Gary Vaynerchuk, great example; Beach Walks, another great example.

Andrew: Mixergy, another great example.

Andrew Lock: Yeah. You don’t need to have cutting edge equipment. It just needs to be good enough, and you showed a studio there just to explain that to the viewers. Because my background was in TV production, I knew how to do it professionally, and I just had an ambition to build a TV studio for myself and to rent out. And so, that’s another business that I have. It’s a first class production facility, but I truly believe and know that you do not need to have that level of equipment. I started my show in my garage, in my basement.

Andrew: All right. Let’s take a look at the equipment that if anyone wants to get started, this is the kind of equipment. You don’t need the exact model, the exact make, but this is the kind of equipment that Andrew Lock recommends. Here, it is.

Andrew Lock: These are good examples, most people looking at equipment, the majority of questions that I get are on the lower end of the budget scale. For most people where budget isn’t a problem, they’re not as worried about which camera to get. I’m going to focus my tips on the lower end of the budget scale, so for under $500 having everything you need to get going.

Andrew: That makes sense.

Andrew Lock: This camera is an awesome camera. It will be familiar to many viewers as it’s called the Kodak ZI8, or as we say in England, Zed-I-8. Of course I re-adjusted my pronunciation as soon as I started watching Sesame Street in the States – today’s letter is the letter Z – then I knew how to pronounce it correctly.

[Laughter]

Andrew: The media is how America gets its culture into the rest of the world.

Andrew Lock: That’s right.

The ZI8 is, unfortunately, no longer in production, however, it is still quite readily available. You can go somewhere like Amazon, the last time I checked it was about $120 to $150.

Andrew: What do you like about this camera? Why this camera?

Andrew Lock: Very good question – the number one thing that makes it special compared to most cameras of this type…I don’t know what they call them. Maybe palm-corders, they’re literally ones that you can put into your pocket, that’s the distinction, and obviously the very low price point. The number one distinction with this camera is that it has a microphone jack – it has 1/8 of an inch, which is a standard size microphone jack; the same size as the little headphone connector that you would plug into an iPod or something like that. Most cameras do not have a jack where you can plug in an external microphone.

Coming back to what we said about audio, it is essential to have an external microphone. There is never an instance where you will get good enough quality sound, professional sound quality, from an internal mic. There isn’t a camera on the planet that will give you professional quality sound from a microphone in the camera. For one thing, it’s too far back from the subject. Secondly, it’s going to pick up all the ambient noise around you because it’s a general, wide pick up pattern all over the place rather than very narrow and focused.

And thirdly, the only way to get good quality sound is to have a mic that is literally right next to your body. That’s what’s special about this particular camera. There are some cameras that are similar that have come out since, which I haven’t tested, but there are alternatives like the Sony Bloggy, I think it’s called. When you’re looking at and evaluating a camera, that is the number one thing to evaluate, does it have the microphone port? If it does, then the image quality is going to be very similar according to what make that you choose, that’s much less of a secondary factor.

Andrew: That’s a good point. You’re also saying that even an iPhone camera, like the one in the 4s, even that’s fine.

Andrew Lock: Absolutely, the iPhone 4s camera is really a game changer. I’m going to start sounding like an ad for Apple, but it is the truth. What’s happening is, there’s actually been a revolution in the portable camera industry because of this iPhone. The picture quality, and this applies to video, as well, is superior to a lot of these point and shoot cameras that you would buy for a couple hundred dollars at a local electronics store. You can plug a microphone into that port on the top of the iPhone. The other iPhones have decent cameras as well, but this latest model, at the time that we’re recording this, the camera technology is superb.

Andrew: Let’s take a look, quickly, at a couple of mics, also, that you suggest we take a look at?

Andrew Lock: By the way, there’s another important, just to mention, on cameras. The people are obsessed with high definition. For Web TV we are not at a point yet where the universal population can view high definition video clearly and stuttering. That is a fact. So, the camera that you get does not need to be HD. If it does, great. If it isn’t, no problem. My show and all of the most successful shows that I am aware of in the marketplace across any industry are all standard definition.

Andrew: All right. So let’s go back and talk a little bit about microphones. What mics do people need to get?

Andrew Lock: Again, it is important to have that external mic. So what I recommend is something, one of the well-known manufacturers basically, like a Sony, Audio-Technica. Shaw is a good brand as well. I see here you’ve got the Sony ECM range.

And as you can see by this price on Amazon, you don’t need to spend a lot of money on a mic. You certainly don’t need to spend hundreds of dollars. You can if you have the budget. But this type of microphone will give you good quality. And you will be amazed at how much better the quality is just by having this type of external microphone. So very simple, don’t need to break the bank, and …

Andrew: This is a Sony mic, 35 bucks, ECM-CS10. This is the other one that you suggested, and I noticed, of course, there is something that they both have in common. This is the Audio-Technica, $42 for this mic. Of course, we’ll link it all up.

The thing that I’m noticing is you recommend that we have not the kind of mic that I use here, which, of course, this is the Rode Podcaster and it’s …

Andrew Lock: Yes. They are great. Yes.

Andrew: These are really good mics. It’s good for when you are sitting at a desk. But what you recommend though is the lavalier mics. Why do you suggest that we get those instead of … here, let me bring that up, the lavalier. Why do you suggest these, the lapel mics?

Andrew Lock: Well, the main reason is because when you present a typical Web TV show, you want to be engaged with the audience, and the microphone is something that is not a feature. You basically don’t want it to be noticed.

I don’t know if you know this, but if you watch a show like Letterman or Leno and they have the little mic on the desk there, those aren’t practical mics. They are props.

Andrew: You know what? I didn’t know those until I started recording my own, and then I realized, “Of course that’s not the right mic. Of course that’s not what they are using. It’s just there for show.”

Andrew Lock: It’s just a prop. I noticed that my video is going fuzzy.

Andrew: I see that. I wonder why it has gone fuzzy.

Andrew Lock: Let’s see here. Let me try something.

Andrew: Oh. You just disappeared on me. And oh!

Andrew Lock: You know what? I do like to have good quality.

Andrew: What did you do?

Andrew Lock: I just turned it on and off again.

Andrew: Oh. That was magic.

Andrew Lock: Let’s see if that makes a difference.

Andrew: Yes.

Andrew Lock: So the point about the mic is, in fact, I’m with you in the … let me bring this, see if I can bring it over here a little bit. I don’t know if it will stretch that far. Are you able to widen my shot a little?

Andrew: Yes. A little bit here. Let me see if I could do that. Oh, and here, this is the cool thing I can do. I can actually move your camera.

Andrew Lock: Oh, look at that. So here is my mic. So I do use a similar mic as you when I am doing this type of interview because it’s nice quality. This one is a Samson C01U. But for a Web TV show, like I said, you really want to have a good connection with the audience, and this type of mic isn’t suitable for that scenario. Generally, this type of mic is best for something where it isn’t going to be seen on screen. And as you can tell from the way that Andrew had the shot set up there, he actually hid the microphone, and my shot was cropped so you couldn’t see the mic. So we get in the good quality. But for …

Andrew: And by the way, that thing that you have on the mic, we should say, is a pop filter.

Andrew Lock: Yes.

Andrew: I probably should get one on here. When I say “P,” “pop,” “pop filter,” the audience loses a little bit of the sound. When you say “pop filter” …

Andrew Lock: Pop filter.

Andrew: Yes. It sounds so much clearer.

Andrew Lock: Clearer, yes. Just a little thing. In fact, this is just very simple. You could actually do this type of screen with some stocking stretched over the …

Andrew: It’s pretty inexpensive to get those, I’ve discovered.

Andrew Lock: Yes. You can pick them up at any musical store for about 30 bucks. But it does make a difference on those pop sounds. And even a little bit on the S sounds as well, it just dampens those down a little bit, so a little advanced tip there.

Andrew: OK. And so what you are saying though is unless you are sitting at your desk and are stationary and are willing to have this big equipment in front of you…

Andrew Lock: Yes.

Andrew: … go for the lavalier. Be more human. Walk around or look, at least, like you can walk around and talk to the guests.

Andrew Lock: Exactly. You got it.

Andrew: I see. All right. And then lighting. Lighting has been a big issue actually for me. This is what I’ve learned about lighting. I’ll show you, and then I want to learn from you because I’ve noticed how important lighting is here. I’ll show myself. This is the way I used to be. In fact, worse. I used to have a light overhead. It was awful, and what I’ve discovered, is if I just put light in front of me?

Andrew Lock: Look at that.

Andrew: Big difference. If I put light behind me, and I don’t want to mess with my system too much, but if I put light behind me, it’s awful. If I put light over me, my eyes are dark, and you can’t really see, and there are weird shadows. Put it behind me, and the camera needs to compensate for it, and the whole thing is too dark, and you can’t see any of it. Put light in front of me, it’s a huge help. What else do I need to know beyond that?

Andrew Lock: So, what type of lights are you using that are of interest?

Andrew: Oh, look. Your camera’s doing the same thing. You know what? I’ve got to tell you, the thing that’s actually working is just the standard desk lamp that they give me here with this. I rent from Regus office. I pay them about a thousand bucks. They give me office, internet, phone, reception, kitchen and this lamp, and all I did was took the shade off of the lamp, and I put it in front of the computer and that’s how I get this light on me.

Andrew Lock: It’s cool because you’re obviously not using, you’re using, I would guess, a sixty or a hundred watt lamps that need no more than that. The danger that you have to look out for is that any type of bright light directed right at you is, first of all, it’s not going to be comfortable for you. You know, having that light source directed at you, but secondly, it can actually overexpose you. You can have too much light. So, interestingly…

Andrew: I’ve seen that. So, by overexposed, you mean where the person looks like a ghost, right? That’s where the person’s really white.

Andrew Lock: Yes. Too bright. Yes. It kind of, they look washed out. So, we talked earlier about the importance of audio, and people judging the quality of a video. The second thing that they judge is the light. So, again, people don’t consciously think it’s too dark, but they would subconsciously know it if it was too dark. Just like the example that you showed. The contrast between the two was actually quite dramatic. A simple thing like that, there we go. It just, you know, it looks quite dull. It looks flat, to use a technical expression, but as soon as you turn that little bit of extra light source on, we don’t see your features, the whole kind of face looks indistinct, and what a massive difference a simple desk lamp.

And I’m glad you gave that example, Andrew, because just like video equipment and audio equipment, you do not need to spend a lot of money in order to massively increase the quality of your production. As in this example, you’ve used something that anybody can go and buy for twenty or thirty dollars, and look at the difference it makes, so the tip that I’m going to give for lighting is very similar. The biggest problem with lighting, by far, is not having enough light. Very rarely is there too much light. So, you know, it’s very unusual for that situation. So, the way to increase the overall lighting in the room is simply to use a flood light that you can get from Home Depot or any of those type of hardware stores, and a lot of them will sell them for five, ten dollars. They’re very inexpensive, and these are typically used for construction purposes. Sometimes…

Andrew: Is this a flood light, by the way? Is this what you mean by that?

Andrew Lock: Yeah, perfect. That kind of thing. Sometimes they come in a yellow housing. They take a 250 watt or 500 watt bulb, halogen bulb. They’re very inexpensive, and what you want to do is, once you have this type of light, position it on the floor, and point it up at the ceiling. Now, why would you do that? Well, most ceilings are painted white. Yes, of course, yes. Unusual for them not to be painted white. And what happens is, the light bounces off of the ceiling, and in that process of it bouncing off, it diffuses the light, and it basically spreads that light all around the room very evenly. Now, what would happen if you were to point that light at yourself? Would be, first of all, you’d be blinded, and you’d be seeing stars. But secondly, it would be too much light. It would be too bright, and you’d have, the shot would be, you’d appear like a ghost, as you said. You’ll be just washed out. So, this is a great way to increase the overall light in the room, and it will make a tremendous difference because it’s a nice soft light, and that’s what you want.

Andrew: So, just get this, and put it, and just have that light pointed up at the ceiling? I don’t have to have anything pointed at me to look good?

Andrew Lock: Yeah the thing, yeah exactly. It’s kind of a trick of the trade. Now once you get into lighting and studios and so on. There is two different types of lighting, just to explain why this works just the way it does

Andrew: Yeah. Please.

Andrew Lock: In film production, you have very complex lighting setups, because what they want to do is they want to have a sculpted look to particularly the face and the body. With news styled shows and documentaries, they want everything to be evenly lit because it is not about drama, it’s about, can I see the person properly and it’s not about drawing attention to their features as a person, it’s about the message. So what we are trying to create here is something similar in our own office or home or wherever we record.

So, the way that we can do that is by what I mentioned, pointing a light, a floodlight up at the ceiling and that creates a very natural, soft light which looks great. The other alternative for lighting is to shoot outside. Now outside light is the best type of light that you can possibly get, you don’t want to shoot at midday, but if you shoot in the morning or afternoon, you will get a beautiful looking shot every time because natural daylight is the best possible type of light. If your show lends itself to shooting outside and you have the circumstances to do it, that’s an obviously and very easy way to overcome the challenge of lighting.

Andrew: By the way I am spending so much time on lighting because most people think, and I made the same mistake that it’s the camera that is going to make a big impact, but it’s the lighting that is more important than the camera

Andrew Lock: You know it’s interesting, again just to prove that point, Canon in their professional range of cameras, had cameras that would cost about $10,000 and about four or five years ago they came out with a camera which was $400 and some video students did some side by side tests of these two cameras and not even the experts could tell the two shots apart. $400 vs. $10000, it is not about the camera, spending that much difference on a camera is not going to make a better show. It is going to be… there is going to be slight differences, but you are absolutely right, have giving attention to having enough light so that the camera can pick do its job properly is the critical thing and of course white balance plays into that as well to allow the camera to detect the right type of light cause there is a big difference between daylight and artificial light. Cameras can’t tell the difference, they have to be told by you in the settings whether you are shooting artificially or under daylight or florescent.

Andrew: In fact, lighting is where I think we have to make some more investments here at Mixergy. Is there a place where you recommend that I go and anyone else who wants to, to learn more about lighting? Where can we go to learn how to find the right lighting, to buy the right lighting?

Andrew Lock: There are some great resources online, as I mentioned, well just to finish that thought, if you go to Google and type in “lighting tips for video”, you will see all kinds of free articles and so on that are out there. Because daylight is the best possible light, I actually recommend for people if they have florescent lights in their office which a lot of people record in, I am not sure if you have that scenario, but if you have florescent lights, change the tubes to daylight fluorescents because you will actually get a more naturally looking light.

You will know the daylight fluorescents if you look at the color temperature which is printed on the end of it and it will say something like 5600 or 6000, that’s the range you want to look at, and it imitates the look of daylight, so that’s a very simple tweak that you can do to make it look more natural. The thing you have to be cautious is you don’t want to mix light sources, so if you have fluorescents, keep the fluorescents and change them to daylight tubes. If you don’t have fluorescents, use the strategy of the halogen lamps that I mentioned because those two types of light have very different color temperatures and it can confuse the camera when you mix different light sources.

Andrew: All right. That’s a good point and good tip. And I do have fluorescents up there, and I’m going to check afterwards to see what kind I have.

Andrew Lock: Yes. Cool.

Andrew: All right. Anything else about the equipment before we move on to the next big idea?

Andrew Lock: Those are the main things, just to reiterate that you don’t need to break the bank. Certainly, for under $500, you can have everything you need to get started. If you have more money to spend, great. There are plenty of resources online that will advise you about what cameras to use. There is a great website that reviews every new camcorder that comes out called, I think it’s CamcorderInfo.com. Very popular review site and they do a great job of letting you know kind of bottom line. Or you can look at something like Consumer Reports.

But absolutely, I totally agree with you, what you said earlier, don’t fret about the equipment. Take the tips that we talked about in these last few minutes, and that is good enough. [??] the latest camera that’s coming out in six months. Just get started right now, and you’ll soon discover what you can improve as time goes on. The most important thing is to get going with it and learn the ropes and improve as you go.

Andrew: All right. Next big idea is to publish a show. Get it on your website.

Andrew Lock: Yes.

Andrew: And of course, people want to know what software they should use to publish. They want to know why I use one software, one video publishing platform versus another. So let’s talk about that. What do we need in order to publish?

Andrew Lock: This is now kind of the exciting part. What I recommend is … publishing simply means getting, first of all, the footage online, publishing the footage that show the video and also hosting a website for people to watch the show. So two components there, and they do go together, but there are different aspects of each one.

The first aspect to consider is how do you host the video? How do you publish the video online? The most obvious resource is YouTube. However, I don’t recommend that people use YouTube for Web TV shows, and the reason is simply that YouTube has the worst quality of all the different video distribution sites. YouTube has so much video uploaded to their site they have to compress it, which reduces the quality. It makes it look a little bit more pixilated and so on than other sites.

There are other sites that have sprung up in the last five years that do the same thing as YouTube, but they allow you to have better quality. And two in particular that I recommend are Vimeo, which is Vimeo.com, and Blip.TV. Both of those are hosting services for video. There you go. There is Blip.

Blip is a particularly nice one because Blip actually wants Web TV shows. Blip is structured around attracting Web TV shows. And so for about $90 a year, last time I checked, you can have a pro account with them, which enables them to host all of your videos. They do conversions to make it look nice quality from the original master. They will also create a feed for iTunes. They will also create a feed to send it to YouTube on your account and also some other video distribution services. I’ve been using Blip for the last three years. I really like it. Vimeo is another good one too. But those are the reasons that I recommend those services. Now …

Andrew: Yes. Blip … I’m sorry. I’ve been paying for Blip also for years. The idea that I can post to Blip and then they’ll send it out to YouTube and to iTunes …

Andrew Lock: I love that.

Andrew: iTunes is a bear to deal with.

Andrew Lock: It really is because iTunes feeds are actually quite complex. Outside of Blip, I don’t know of any other tools that make it easy to publish to iTunes.

Andrew: And inexpensive.

Andrew Lock: It is a complex thing.

Andrew: Yes. Yes, that’s a good point. I’m glad you brought this up.

Andrew Lock: So, I love Blip for that reason. They do such a great job of that. They are very easy to work with. I found them good support. And frankly, for $100 a year, it is incredible value. It really is.

Andrew: And you can pay for it on a monthly basis, something like nine bucks a month if you want. I think that’s the plan I’m on.

Andrew Lock: Yes. It’s a very good deal for hosting video and making it easy to create the players and so on, which they do. So that’s the first aspect, is hosting the video. Then of course, you need a website. And the platform that I recommend, which I’m sure everybody would be pleased to hear, and certainly, all of the shows that I create, I use this platform, and every other popular show that I’ve ever come across uses this platform too, so I know it’s proven, is, drum roll …

Andrew: I’ll let you …

Andrew Lock: It is WordPress.

Andrew: Of course. That’s what Mixergy is hosted on too.

Andrew Lock: I’m sure most people watching this are familiar with WordPress. If you are not, the reasons for WordPress are, first of all, it’s free. You can’t beat that. Secondly, it is rock solid and stable. Thirdly, it inherently includes the ability for people to interact with you and other viewers via the comments function, which is we take that for granted now, but to do that technically before WordPress was a real challenge. So WordPress, whether it’s hosted by WordPress or you host it yourself on your own hosting, it doesn’t matter. There are plenty of themes that are great.

And funny enough, a show that I was a consultant on, I went to his site. I told him to use WordPress, and I went to his site and looked to the site, and it was a beautiful-looking site, FitBiz. It’s a show for independent gym owners, FitBiz.TV. And so I went to the site to see what he had done. I helped him a little bit with the show. And I loved the look of his site. It was nice and clean.

And I said, “How did you do this?” I was admiring it. And he used WordPress and he used a theme called eVid, the letter e and vid. And he tweaked it a little bit, customized it a little bit, but I love the look of that site. It’s perfect for a Web TV show. I learn a few things from students as well, as in this case. I’m always learning. It’s a constantly evolving business. So I love FitBiz as an example of a great-looking show site.

But bottom line, use WordPress. Have it installed on your own hosting. And then embed, that’s E-M-B-E-D, the video from a service like Blip or Vimeo on to your own site. And that’s all you need to publish your new show. It’s exciting.

Andrew: Yes. That’s pretty much it. For theme design, you don’t recommend people create their own themes from scratch. You’re saying just go and use one of the themes that already exist, especially when you’re starting.

Andrew Lock: Yes. Frankly, there is no need to create your own theme because most themes these days come with lots of variations of choices to tweak. I like WooThemes. WooThemes.com is great. They have plenty of different themes to choose from, a very good resource, very good quality, good-looking themes, so I definitely recommend them if you are looking for … and they certainly have themes that are specifically designed for video. They won’t necessarily say “Web TV shows,” but they’ll say “For video.” And then you can see …

Andrew: And they look really polished.

Andrew Lock: Yes. They look great, so I’ve had good experience with WooThemes.

Andrew: I’ll also show this. For hosting, you like Bluehost. I’ve heard good things about Bluehost too. And so if you want a WordPress site hosted cheaply, they are a great company to use.

Andrew Lock: I do like Bluehost particularly because when you call their support … first of all, it’s inexpensive, but when you call their support, they have a real human answer the phone, and they are extremely helpful. I don’t like it when you have to go through all these layers of technical support. When I call Bluehost with a challenge, I am actually talking to someone who is intelligent, who can actually fix the problem without having to escalate it through 18 levels of support, which is so frustrating, isn’t it? And other companies, they’ll say, “Now, is your computer switched on?” “Yes. I’m not a complete dumbo.” They treat everybody with the same level of basic situation. So yes, I like Bluehost.

Andrew: All right. Back to the big board. Next big idea is to … well, next big step, of course, is to distribute your show. To get the show out there, to get people to watch, how do we do it?

Andrew Lock: Distribution means enabling as many people as possible to see your show. Now again, just to clarify this because I get a lot of questions around this. We’ve talked about having the show on a hosted site, WordPress, and with using a service like Vimeo or Blip. So in other words, people would come to your site to watch the show. That’s the ideal circumstance because you can have ads on the side. You can promote other products. You can interact with people. You can have the comments and so on. That’s the ideal situation, but we have to remember, how do we get people to that site in the first place?

Well, the key word is discovery, and the beautiful thing is, because there are so many video distribution channels out there like YouTube, and there are hundreds of others, if we distribute our video to those sites, it allows more people to discover the show, and then the aim, which is something that I always encourage you to do, is in the content of your show, always direct people back to your site. So, for example, in my show, knowing that people are going to be discovering it on YouTube and those other channels, iTunes and so on, I always say throughout the show, I’ll say things like “What do you think about this? Leave a comment below this episode at helpmybusiness.com” or “To get updates on this show for free, make sure you sign up for that service at helpmybusiness.com”.

So, I never assume that people are going to be watching it at helpmybusiness.com, even though that’s where I want them to view it ultimately, because that’s the hub of my business. But, like I say, it’s a discovery strategy, so I want people to be able to discover my show in as many places on line as possible. That’s why I make it available. Because I’ve heard people to say “Well, I want people to watch it on my site”. Well, that’s all very well, but you’ve got to have the traffic there to begin with. So, it’s kind of a chicken and egg situation. So, in order for as many people as possible to know about your show, get it out there, and allow them to discover it.

And a little, kind of extra tip on that is, the way that I, an extra way that I encourage people to come back to the site, this is an advanced strategy is, the version of my show that I distribute on these other platforms like YouTube and so on, with the exception of iTunes, is a short version that’s about, normally the show’s about 15 minutes. What I do is, I create about a 6 minute version that’s arbitrarily cut off after about 6 minutes. The number is not the most important thing. What is important is, the show just cuts off, a message comes on screen and it says “To view the remainder of this episode, visit helpmybusiness.com”. It’s actually a graphic on the screen, and that stays on there for about another 10 seconds.

Now, the reason I do that is because if someone is engaged enough after about 6 minutes with the show, they like me, they like what the content is and so on, I know that they’re going to do that. They’re going to go back to helpmybusiness.com and watch the rest of the show for free, and someone who’s merely curious, or you know, not that bothered or interested, they’re not going to do it. Which, that’s fine by me too. I’m not looking for those people. So, doing it that way, I get the benefit of discovery, but I don’t train people to watch the show on a continual basis on those channels because I don’t want that. I don’t want people to go to YouTube for each episode. I want them to come to my site where I have all these other monetization strategies.

Andrew Lock: That’s good advice. I didn’t think to do that, to just chop it off arbitrarily. I kept thinking “You know what? When we were on YouTube, we had to create a whole new video just for YouTube”. It was a lot of work. But this makes sense. Just, maybe we have somebody cut it off at exactly 20 minutes in, or 10 minutes in.

Speaker 1: That’s basically what I do. I would say shorter than 20 minutes. I would do like 10 minutes or less, and it’s a very simple job for an editor. In fact, he can, with that, pre-build graphic. He can churn those out in, you know, a minute per video. Very, very easy and quick to do that.

Andrew: Yea. All right. To distribute, you recommend a product called, I’m looking at my notes here. Traffic Geyser? I’ve never heard of this before. What does Traffic Geyser do?

Andrew Lock: Yea. Oh, really? OK.

Andrew: Never, yeah.

Andrew Lock: Traffic Geyser, I’m sure some people watching this will have heard of it. It’s been out there for a few years. Traffic geyser is the gold standard for video distribution. What it does is, you upload your episodes one by one, you know, when you’re ready for this, to the service. It’s an online service, so you have a login and so on. Traffic Geyser has logins which you, so you would register accounts on all of the video services that are appropriate for your niche, like YouTube and Traffic Geyser distributes to about 40 different video distribution sites. Once you’ve put your login information for those sites into Traffic Geyser one time, after uploading your video for the episode, with one push of a button, it will distribute that episode with the description, with the keywords, with the meta-tags that you specify, to all of those video sites, automatically.

So, it’s a huge time saver; it does a lot of other things, as well, that we don’t have time to discuss. It’s a premium service, I think it costs…you know, I can’t remember how much it costs. Maybe 100 or 200 bucks a month, something like that. But, if you’re serious about web TV, and getting massive exposure, Traffic Geyser is a must-have tool, and you can look at it at…

Andrew: We’ll include the link so people can go directly to it.

Andrew Lock: …yeah, try trafficgeyser.com. I think that’s my link for it…G-E-Y-S-E-R. It’s really a phenomenal tool.

Andrew: You’ve used it for dentistrysecrets.TV, a video program that you worked with. What were their results?

Andrew Lock: Actually, that’s a good example. Dentistry Secrets is a show for dentists. It’s a very niche show by a dentist, for dentists, to help them with their marketing. When we put that show on iTunes, we found that the iTunes audience – it kind of makes sense in hindsight – iTunes audience wasn’t the best for it, because it’s a very niche, specific show. If you think about the audience, the only people who are going to be interested in watching that show are dentists.

Andrew: Right.

Andrew Lock: So, what we found was, after using Traffic Geyser to distribute the show across relevant distribution channels, the number of people that watched Dentistry Secrets shot up by seven to eight times what it was previously, so, you know, the before and after…

Andrew: Seven to eight times!

Andrew Lock: …yeah, so there’s a massive difference for a tool that took less than 10 minutes to use, once a week.

Andrew: All right, there’s one other tool that I want to show called “Pixel Pipeline”. What is Pixel Pipeline?

Andrew Lock: Pixel Pipe is kind of like…

Andrew: Excuse me, Pixel Pipe.

Andrew Lock: …the poor man’s Traffic Geyser, if you like. It essentially does the same thing to a more limited range of video distribution sites. So, if you’re just starting out, you might like to use Pixel Pipe for free, but if you’re serious about it, Traffic Geyser has many, many more features besides the bigger distribution. It’s certainly a professional tool that works extremely well. I can’t say enough good things about it.

Andrew: All right. Back to the big board; the next big idea is, “Get paid,” and, of course, this is a big one, and for some people, the most important one, it makes the whole rest of it possible.

Andrew Lock: Yeah, the aim, of course, for most people doing a show, is to make money from it. Now, in some cases, you might be doing it for charity, or because it’s a hobby or a passion, which is fine, but I suspect that most people watching this are going to be more interested in doing it to get some financial benefit. Now, the sad reality is that most web TV shows out there are really struggling, and a lot of them give up because they are not making any money. The way that I approached it, in creating a show, was as a marketer. The reason why a lot of people give up is because they think that monetization…and this is an important point…they think that the way to monetize a show is by allowing the video sites, like Blip, for example, to include video ads in the episode.

Now, there are two main types of ads: there’s pre-roll ads, and there’s post-roll adds. Pre-roll ads mean an ad that is shown before the video, before your content starts. You can’t click away from it, you are forced to watch that ad. Post-roll ad is the same thing at the end of an episode. Now, obviously, pre-roll are the most popular type of ads, but here’s what studies have shown…and I discovered this from the most extensive survey that had ever been done, which was couple of years ago now, from MTV…they did a study to evaluate, “What is the effect on people, of including pre- roll ads on a piece of content? And they studied no ads, 15 seconds ads and 30 second ads that were a barrier before people watched the content. They found, this blew my mind, I figured it would be high but they found, I forget the exact figure but it was in the 40’s, it was 40-something percent of people will click away and refuse to watch the content with a 30 second ad.

To me, that is a disaster. To lose 40% of a perspective audience that had some level of interest before you even utter a word out of your mouth. That’s why a lot of people are frustrated – because those ads don’t pay a lot of money anyway. So I realized very early on that that was a strategy that I wanted to have no part of. I’ve never had ads in my shows for that reason.

The way I do it is I integrate sponsored messages in the content of the show. Now this is interesting because we’re actually coming full circle back to the 1950’s and ’60’s and anybody who watched TV in the States around that time would remember that you had whole episodes of shows, it was, “This show is brought to you by Kellogg’s,” or, “This show is brought to you by Ford,” and then they would tell you a little bit about (?), even in shows like American Idol with Coca-Cola and I think even Ford, actually, are sponsoring American Idol too.

Now, you don’t see an ad for Coca-Cola in the commercial break. They are just inherently sponsoring the show with product placement and occasional mentions and things like that. So that’s one, big source of revenue is including a sponsor message in the content of the show because then the content is just seamless. You don’t have a piece of content and then a break for ads, which encourages people to click away and then back to the content. The whole process is perceived by the viewer as content.

So even when I’m talking about a sponsor and I say, “I just want to give a shout out to our sponsor this week,” maybe it’s someone like Infusionsoft, who’s a great sponsor of my show, “Just want to let you know that they have a great system for customer management and marketing. If you’re interested in it, they’re providing a free video at the moment that you can download at such-and-such.”

Now when people hear that, they do not perceive that and they don’t judge it as an ad. It’s really interesting because they have a relationship with me as a presenter. They know, like and trust me and so they perceive it as content, which is perfect. It serves me and the audience.

Andrew: But they do know, with you, that you’re getting paid for it, that’s there’s no confusion that maybe you’re . . .

Andrew Lock: Oh, absolutely.

Andrew: In fact, you do it so well, I’ve told you before you and I started recording, my sponsors have told me to go watch you to learn how to do it right.

Andrew Lock: Well, I appreciate that. Yeah, to clarify, again, anybody can learn by watching the show. I start the episode by saying, “This episode is made possible by,” and then name the sponsor and then just one sentence about the sponsor. So when I get to the sponsor promotion part, again, it’s critical to understand this – the audience views it as content. In fact, I have never in the whole history of doing the show, had one, single person write a negative comment on the comments or e-mail me to say, “I didn’t like the ad,” or anything like that because they just don’t see it as an ad, which, really, it is.

Andrew: And you know what? What I notice from those commercials, I love Blip, we talked about Blip.TV being great service, and they have this big check box that says, “Check here if you want us to run ads for you on your videos and we’ll give you the money that you earn from them.” What you notice if you have any experience running those kinds of ads and real ads that you pitch within your program is not only are those pre-roll ads that they run going to turn people off, and you said 40% of people are not going to continue watching the video, but they don’t work and they don’t generate enough revenue for you. Ads that you pick yourself are better. And you actually, you have advice for someone who doesn’t know how to call up an advertiser and sell an ad, and you recommend two services. Can I bring up one of them on the screen right now?

Andrew Lock: Yes. Actually, just while you are doing that, the other thing to mention about, or to piggyback on what you said, is that when you have those pre-roll ads and you check the box for whatever video service that you are using to allow ads, I guarantee you that at this point in time, those ads are not going to be relevant to your content. That will happen eventually. But with your show, you’ll get ads for things like, I don’t know, a soap powder or some …

Andrew: Tampons suddenly coming in in front of your …

Andrew Lock: Yes.

Andrew: You have no idea what they’re going to run.

Andrew Lock: Some pill or potion. The relevance of an ad is extremely important to viewers. So if you have any type of ad, if it’s not relevant, they will absolutely hate it even more because they just think, “This is not even relevant to me.” Subconsciously, that’s what they are thinking. So for those reasons, I think we’ve probably labored the point, but pre-roll ads are an extremely bad idea.

Andrew: All right. This is one of the services that you recommend, just Commission Junction, CJ.com. You go on here. You can get Center for Affiliate Programs from some of the biggest brands. How do we use an affiliate program, Andrew Lock, in our video if we can’t … the way affiliate programs work, I should say, of course, is, and most people in the audience know, you just sign up for Commission Junction. You apply to promote one of these brands and one of these products. Once you are approved, you get to promote it with a special link. And you promote it any way you want. As long you deliver the result that the advertiser is looking for, you get paid.

Andrew Lock: Right.

Andrew: So if it’s get people to fill out a form, you get paid when they do that. If it’s get them to sign up for Netflix, you get paid when you get them to do that.

Andrew Lock: That’s it.

Andrew: That makes sense on the Web, but how do you do it in a video? How do you send people to your unique link?

Andrew Lock: It’s actually very easy in video. I’ll explain how the process works. You did a nice job of explaining affiliate programs. And just to clarify, this is a secondary source of income. We talked about sponsors. This is now another means to make money.

So the first thing is to find an advertiser that you personally like. I say that in all seriousness because please don’t promote anything that you don’t authentically believe is going to be valuable to the audience. Because I’ll tell you what would happen is first of all, there is a possibility that it might actually not be any good, perhaps if you are not familiar with it. And secondly, if the viewer has a bad experience as a result of your recommendation, who are they going to blame? They are not going to blame the service provider. They are going to blame you as the person that recommended it.

So that’s kind of a prerequisite that when I first started my show, I made that decision very strategically and deliberately that I would never, ever promote anything that I hadn’t personally used and loved. And that’s …

Andrew: Let’s suppose you get … I’m sorry to interrupt, but I know that there are a lot of people who buy into this idea of they are not going to promote anything unless they love it. But they don’t know how to get the companies that they love to take their calls and then how to get them to sign up and pay some money for advertising. What do you advise people?

Andrew Lock: That’s the beautiful thing about affiliate programs because you haven’t even got to talk to anybody. To acquire sponsors, then you need to pick up the phone. Or if you have a relationship with someone, it makes it a little easier on someone, and that’s something I go into a lot more detail about how to do that in my course.

But with affiliate programs, if you sign up as an advertiser on a service like Commission Junction, which is one of the most well-known, because Commission Junction attracts most of the well-known brands out there, it’s very easy within a few minutes to become qualified to promote a well-known product or brand.

And coming back to your earlier question, the way that you do it on a show is simply to register a unique domain name. So for example, let’s say, I’m looking at one on there on the left-hand side there. Let’s say I was promoting Priceline.com. Priceline provides a service for flights and car rental, things like that.

Andrew: Right.

Andrew Lock: Priceline, if they approve me in Commission Junction as an advertiser for their products are going to give me a long domain name with probably about a hundred characters, lots of squiggly letters and so on.

Andrew: [laughs] Right. They want to make sure that they give you an unique URL so that they can track you directly.

Andrew Lock: Yes a unique URL that’s how they track my clicks. What you can do is register another domain name, so I might register carrentaldeals.com for example and then when I go into my dashboard in the settings of the domain name I can forward carrentaldeals I think I said, forgot an example, I can forward carrentaldeals.com to that unique trackable link and then that disguises the long URL and it’s as simple as that. So then in the show I can say now I’ve been using a service from Priceline to get car deals, I use it every time I travel now and I highly recommend to you, I love it. I’ve had a really good experience, if you’re interested in trying it out for yourself go to carrentaldeals.com and the name would appear on the screen down here in the lower third section and in addition to that appearing on screen I would also have a clickable link, in the episode notes just below the video. So I get the benefit of the on screen visual plus the fact that they can actually go, and I’ll tell them or you can just click in the notes for this episode and it will take you directly there.

Andrew: That’s great advice for that and one thing that’s worked for me since you recommended of course WordPress there’s a plug-in for WordPress called redirection that allows you to create any unique URL that you want on your site and then redirect that to any other URL so.

Andrew Lock: Oh that’s cool.

Andrew: So you can do . . .

Andrew Lock: What’s the extension? Or what’s the actual domain name show as?

Andrew: So it would just be mixergy.com/flights is where I would tell people to go so I’d just say.

Andrew Lock: Oh, that’s great.

Andrew: And it would even track how many people click on it and give me a few other cool features.

Andrew Lock: What’s the plug-in called? I’m going to make a note.

Andrew: It’s called redirection.

Andrew Lock: Redirection plug-in.

Andrew: Yep

Andrew Lock: For WordPress, I love that, that’s great.

Andrew: And does all sorts of other stuff like sometimes if you have a typo in your URL and you fix it, you basically break the link for people who have the typo in their URL. Well with redirection you can redirect the typo to the fixed URL and a bunch of other things like that.

Andrew Lock: That’s a great tip, Andrew, thanks.

Andrew: Oh, thanks. You’ve given me so many tips that I haven’t known over the years.

Andrew Lock: [laughs]

Andrew: Kind of feels cool for me to tell you something and . . .

Andrew Lock: Yeah, no I love these little resources.

Andrew: Also the thing about CJ and you pointed it out a little bit when you picked out Priceline is a lot of their companies and already pretty well known people already know about Priceline if you tell them they may or may not use your URL, Clickbank though and this is another site you’ve used.

Andrew Lock: Hmm.

Andrew: Much more unique products on here, people are much more likely to need your URL to get to them because they’re not going to know another one, what’s Clickbank about?

Andrew Lock: Hundred percent yeah, the vast majority of products on Clickbank are actually information guides so in other words it’s a report, a guide, an eBook that you download and the nice thing, there are a couple on nice things. One that you pointed out already is that they tend to be much less well known and secondly the amount of money you can earn on them tends to be higher than products promoted that you might find on somewhere like CJ. The simple reason is because there’s more profit margin in informational products, so again whatever niche that you’re in, that you’re thinking about choosing, I guarantee that there will be products available, Clickbank is a massive marketplace so you’ll absolutely find information guides that you can promote from Clickbank.

And again it’s a very simple process, you know, search the market place on Clickbank, find some that you think are good and contact the owner or creator of that product tell them who you are, what you’re doing or what you’re planning on doing and ask them for a review copy. Review it, if you like it promote it, if you don’t like it don’t promote it, it’s as simple as that.

Andrew: You know, brilliant idea by the way, I didn’t even think of that and we absolutely need to just emphasize that. You can go nuts buying all of these different products from Click Bank trying to find the one that you love enough that you’re going to promote to people. It’s just going to be too expensive, too time consuming. To email and say I want a review copy takes no time at all. Most of these products, in fact I think almost all, on Click Bank are digital products. The makers don’t mind giving you another one because it doesn’t cost them any extra.

Andrew Lock: That’s right.

Andrew: It’s a good way for you to sample before you promote. Another good thing about Click Bank, and I want to hear your story too, Andrew, right after this before I finish this section. Another great thing about Click Bank that I’ve heard in my interviews is you’re going to make more money if you create your own product, I’ve heard and I’ve experienced at Mixergy, than if you sell others. But creating your own product is an unsure process. You don’t know what to create, what’s going to sell to your audience. You don’t know how good you are at selling it.

What I’ve heard people do is they find a product that others have created. Maybe they go to Click Bank. They try it. Then they try another, then they try another, then they try another. Then when they find one that really works they say now I understand what my audience is looking for. I’ll create my own product that’s similar but more customized to my audience. That’s one of the great things about Click Bank. Of course, once you create your product you can put it up on Click Bank and let other people promote it too.

Andrew Lock: Yeah, absolutely. There is definitely more money in creating your own product. Obviously there’s more work up front and so on. But for starting out and to get some revenue coming in Click Bank and Commission Junction are very easy to use tools that will enable you to get some income. The one big difference between the two of them, other than that Click Bank specializes in digital products, is that at Click Bank there’s no approval process in order to promote something. You can promote everything on Click Bank whereas on Commission Junction some of the companies are quite choosy and so some of them will deny you. Because either they don’t know you or they don’t think that, you know, you have the right type of site for their product and so on. Because most of these are big corporations. That’s another reason why Click Bank is such a great tool to work with.

Andrew: Can you tell the audience your experience with Click Bank and how much of an impact it had early on for you?

Andrew Lock: Well, yeah, you know as with any time kind of someone’s a trail blazer, which I have been online with web TV shows, you have to try a lot of different things. Which I have done over the years. I’ve tried, you know, tons of different strategies. Some work, some don’t. That’s really part of the purpose of this interview is to share just the stuff that works.

My experience with Click Bank was that occasionally I would discover a guide that I really liked and that I found great benefit from and that I felt was a good value for the money. When I recommended that to my viewers on the show, even in the early days when I didn’t have that many viewers, I would easily make anywhere from $500 to $1,000 to several thousand dollars by simply recommending something that was just something that I liked. I would have happily made the recommendation anyway because I like serving people. But to be able to get paid for it, well, that’s a nice icing on the cake.

It definitely proved to me that that’s a very easy way of adding an income stream to a show where you have an audience that trusts your recommendation. You never want to abuse that trust. Just always serve them well and keep them well informed with products that you know will be of value to them. They will absolutely love you for it.

Andrew: That’s a huge impact when you’re just getting started. To be able to not have to make those phone calls but just sign up to a site and get an advertiser.

Andrew Lock: Yeah, that’s right. Very easy.

Andrew: You’re doing hundreds, if not even $1,000 per product which is huge.

Andrew Lock: That’s right.

Andrew: All right, let’s go to the big board here. All right, final word. Here’s all we’ve got.

Andrew Lock: (Inaudible).

Andrew: Sorry, final word for me and then I’m going to give a final word from you.

Andrew Lock: More than one word is OK?

Andrew: Oh, I see. Final words, plural I should say.

Andrew Lock: Final words, words are allowed.

Andrew: One of the great things about doing video, and I know we hit you with a lot of different things to do and I know that it can seem a little overwhelming to do videos. But I’ll tell you if you keep it really simple and you don’t overwhelm yourself by trying to spend too much money or too much time on the equipment you can put it up pretty quickly. Once you put it up, one of the great things about video is people really connect with you. I mean, think about your favorite article yesterday. Can you even remember what it was? And if you can, can you remember that favorite article that you read yesterday, can you remember the author of it? Chances are, you can’t. You don’t connect with authors the way that you do with video creators. Right, you’re going to remember my face even if you don’t like the way that I look. Even if you think I did this in an odd way. You’re going to remember me.

And in time, more and more people get to know me as I do video, and that’s invaluable. It’s invaluable when you’re going to conferences and meeting people in your industry. Invaluable to know that they’ve already got a sense of who you are. They have an understanding, and they want to get to know you even further. It’s invaluable when your calling up someone and trying to do a business deal with them, to have them kind of get to know you. It’s really a powerful platform. It’s worth the effort.

And one of the reasons why I’m excited to have had Andrew Lock teach you this is, he kept it simple. He’s not going to overwhelm you the way other people do. Other people just love to show you how much they know about the bit rate and the frame rate and the video cost. It’s going to waste your time, keep it simple, and if you want, you can keep improving and improving. So, start of simple, improve, remember the value of this and come back and show both me and Andrew your work. And as Andrew mentioned several times, and Andrew you haven’t ever pushed it.

But you have mentioned, and I think it’s important for us to talk about it right here at the end. You have a program, where if anyone wants to go even deeper, they could go and learn it. And in fact, for maybe four people or so if they want to go into your studio, I understand, I don’t even know if you want to talk about this because there probably isn’t enough room for them, but there’s some kind of program if they want to come and talk to you personally and get some help from you personally, that is available to them. Let’s give a URL here for this, where’s this site if people want to go directly to you to learn more?

Andrew Lock: Thanks for mentioning it. This is StartYourOwnTVShow.com.

Andrew: OK.

Andrew Lock: And the simple reason this came about, is because, I was being barraged with emails.

Andrew: Did we give you time to get some water, no we didn’t.

Andrew Lock: That’s OK.

Andrew: I feel bad.

Andrew Lock: I was literally being barraged with emails all the time. People would say, “How can I do, what you’ve done with your show?” And so, I do believe that knowledge and experience that I’ve built over the years has a lot of value and that people should pay for that. So I created a course, I spent a lot of time creating the course. It’s a home study course with eight DVDs. Home study manuals, it’s extremely comprehensive, it comes in a big box. And it literally goes through the blueprint in far more detail than we’ve had time to do. And it’s step by step, do this, do this, do this. How to plan, produce, publish, promote, and profit. All the P’s, from a web TV show. And it’s the blueprint for people to follow, so that they don’t make the same mistakes that I made.

And that’s why I made that course available, and it’s based around an actual live two-day training that I did. So that’s the home study version and occasionally, and I just mentioned this to you when we were discussing this the other day. Occasionally, I open up a few spots, literally never more than four people. Who I will work with directly, and its a premium service, where literally I will produce their show for them, other than the content. They need to be knowledgeable about the subject, but we’ll create everything around that: graphics, the show design, the names of the segments, the titles, the audio, the look and feel of the show. We’ll record it, edit it, produce it, distribute it. Everything.

And if that is of interest to someone they can contact me through support@helpmybusiness.com. It’s obviously a lot of work. I enjoy doing it but I only work with a couple people at a time on that.

Andrew: It is a lot of work.

Andrew Lock: Yeah.

Andrew: It’s a lot of creative work, and it’s a lot of them coming up with their ideas and the birthing process of ideas is really tough.

Andrew Lock: It’s a very creative process, but I wanted to acknowledge what you said earlier too. In your own concluding words about the fact of what video does. First of all, both of us are proof that we are able to make a living and, I don’t want to speak for you but I hear you’re doing very well.

Andrew: You know what, I consider myself so frickin’ lucky to be able to do well with this.

Andrew Lock: Isn’t that awesome?

Andrew: Yes. I know that there are people who do even better, and they keep telling me about all the different ways that I can add. I just feel lucky to be able to do this at all, and I’m happy to be here. To do well in this space feels great, and I know that it’s possible, and I wouldn’t say that people should do this if I didn’t feel it myself. If I felt every day that going in was going to waste my time, it was going to cost me a lost of money, it was just a hellish experience, I would never do it. I love it. I love this work.

Andrew Lock: It’s so much fun, and the other thing is, I’m sure you’ve experienced this, too, is that unquestionably as people get to know you over time, they really do have a bond with you. They treat you like a celebrity if they see you at a live event. It’s no different to any kind of character or presenter on a real TV show. The bond that you get with an audience when they see you, they hear you, they see your gestures. When they interact with you in those multiple centers is so much more powerful than just communicating through email or just through audio.

I always suspected it, and now that I’ve been doing it for a few years, I’ve built a massively successful business through a Web TV show. Everything that I’ve done in the last five years or so is as a result of that Web TV show. So…

Andrew: You know what, that’s a good point, too. Business opportunities just come to you.

Andrew Lock: It works.

Andrew: People will, because they know you, because they trust you, because they’ve seen you produce consistently. I always say no to those opportunities because I’m so madly in love with this specific work, but absolutely you’re right. You get business proposals that you never would have discovered, that never would have landed in your lap, if people didn’t know that you existed.

Andrew Lock: Yeah. You become an authority in your niche. I’ve had speaking engagements all around the world. I’ve been flown around first class, stayed in luxury hotels literally all over the world. Last year I was in Asia, London, Singapore, other places in Europe all on someone else’s dime, and I love to travel. So, for me that’s been a beautiful thing. You’re absolutely viewed as an authority. You’re absolutely viewed as a celebrity, and the connection between your viewers and you is unlike any other type of communication.

So, for those reasons I know this type of format, video, Web TV shows will always be a central part of anything I do. It’s not just because I enjoy doing it, it’s because it really works in a very powerful way.

Andrew: All right. If you’re on the fence, you’ve seen what it’s done for us. You’ve seen how easy it is for you to get started. Go out there, try video and then send us some results. Show us what you’ve done with it. I’m Andrew. On behalf of myself and Andrew Lock, thank you all for watching. Bye.

Master Class:
How to get traffic and sales through Pinterest
(So you won’t get left behind)
Taught by Melanie Duncan of EntrepreneurESS Academy

Report issues here

Master Class:
Pinterest


About the course leader

It’s led by Melanie Duncan, who is becoming THE entrepreneur to talk to about how to use Pinterest for business. She is the founder of The EntreprenuerESS Academy, where she teaches women how to start and grow successful businesses online. She also offers Pinterest training in upcoming webinars.

Master Class Toolbox

Course Cheat Sheet

Ana-white.com

Melanie Duncan

Luxury Monograms

Entrepreuress

Pinterest Goodies

Free Resource List

PicMonkey

Birchbox.tv

Call to Action Pin

Luxury Monograms

SueB.do

FitMomsForLife

Jetsetter story

Tracking Recent Activity

Power of Pinning

Transcript

Download the transcript here

Andrew: This course is about how to get traffic and sales through Pinterest. The course is led by Melanie Duncan who is becoming the entrepreneur to talk to about how to use Pinterest for business. She’s the founder of the Entrepreneuress Academy where she teaches women how to start and grow successful businesses online. And, most recently, she launched this site, ThePowerofPinning.com, where she’s started to teach other people what she learned about using Pinterest in business. I’ll help facilitate. My name is Andrew Warner, founder of Mixergy.com where proven founders teach.

And, actually, before I fully finish this introduction, let’s go over some of the items here on the big board to let you guys know what’s coming up. We’re going to be talking about some of the basics, like adding a pin it button to your website. We’re also going to be talking about, you know, some of those before and other pictures that have worked in other media, watch how they work on Pinterest. We’re going to talk about contests. Let’s get rid of this. We’ll talk about how pin it to win it contests can help get more people to pin. And, this is something that I totally didn’t even know existed on Pinterest. In fact there are lots of things I didn’t know. In tracking your performance you’re going to see a simple tool that will show you what people are pinning and give you a sense of how much progress you are making.

A lot of this is completely new to me. In fact almost all of it. It’s completely new to a lot of people in the audience. It’s coming directly from a request from the audience who are saying hey, you know what, we’re seeing Pinterest grow and we don’t want to get left behind. Maybe we were a little slow with Twitter. Maybe we were a little slow with Facebook. But we’re not going to miss this. I went out and I looked for the person who could teach it to us. Not only is Melanie the person, there is no number two. I was looking to see you know what, if Melanie turned me down who do we go for? Who does my team start emailing? There was no number two.

Melanie, thank you for doing this program with us.

Melanie: It is my pleasure. I would never turn you down Andrew. I am so thrilled to be here and I’m so excited to go through all of this great information, all of this great training. Because I have personally seen how Pinterest can transform a business and I am very excited to hopefully give that opportunity to a lot of your audience as well.

Andrew: Well thank you. I’m looking forward to this too. Before we even get into the specific tactics let’s talk about what your life was like marketing online before and after Pinterest. Let’s just give people a sense of what can be done. You did something with Luxury Monograms, one of your brands. Can you tell us about it?

Melanie: Absolutely. I am first and foremost an online business owner. I have several small online businesses. I started my first business in college and through that I learned a lot about online marketing and social media and Facebook and paid traffic. I had a lot of good experience under my belt. Then a few years ago I moved out to New York City and I started a second business that sold personalized home decor online. I thought OK, marketing this is going to be a cinch. I’ve got this down, I know what I’m doing.

But I really, really struggled getting a good, consistent stream of traffic. I was even lucky enough to be featured on some like really big television shows. We were on Good Morning America. I remember a story specifically. We were featured on Nate Berkus and I was so excited. I thought OK, here is our perfect market. We’re going to be able to put our stuff right in front of them. You know, small businesses are always bootstrap so it was a really big financial investment because we had to actually give one of our products to each audience member. Giving 350 units of something, we had a lot at stake there.

I remember it was around the holidays and I was sitting on the couch with my husband, my parents were in town, we were getting ready to watch the show. They did this big dramatic, they lifted up this box to show our products we were giving away to the audience. I remember one of our pillows was upside down. I was just crushed. Even a little bit more frustrating than that is we didn’t see the consistency and the actual conversions from this big media attention. I think a lot of business owners, we think, you know, if we get that great feature. If we get that plug on that show or in that magazine, you know, our brand will just be set. It just wasn’t the case.

I knew that I needed to find a different solution. I needed to find something that was going to give me the consistency I wanted in terms of exposure and traffic. And, as we all really care about, that was going to convert. I didn’t want just a bunch of eyeballs or a bunch of “looky-loos” on my site, I wanted those conversions. And so it’s funny, I actually stumbled across Pinterest as a major referral traffic source kind of as an accident. And I wish I could tell you that it was just the sheer brilliance of my marketing mind, but I actually woke up one morning and there were more sales. I get emailed every time we had a sale in my inbox. And I thought OK that’s cool, maybe we were featured on some blog or have some great little press, didn’t think much of it.

The second day, there were actually even more orders which was interesting. So that kind of peaked my interest and I went on to Google Analytics and I couldn’t believe it, but out of nowhere, Pinterest had become one of my sites top traffic referrers. And we had been doing pretty well on Google and Facebook, so that was really saying something. So as I then began to move my business on to Pinterest, marketing it, trying some different tactics that I learned across other types of social media platforms, and applying them on Pinterest.

All of a sudden, our traffic shot through the roof. Our sales we’re better than ever, Pinterest became my sites number one traffic resource, and it also referred thousands of dollars in sales to this one particular one website that was just creeping, I mean painfully creeping along, and established it as a very successful another brand for me under my belt.

Andrew: I had no idea that … well I guess I kind of understood that maybe there was traffic to be had from Pinterest, but I thought, well no one’s clicking over there, their just enjoying the images there. What I had no idea was, was that there were actual sales coming from it. In fact, one of the tactics that I didn’t go over in the intro was specifically how to encourage sales and how to take advantage of the fact that Pinterest is a good place to generate traffic that converts into real orders, to real paying customers. All right, I want to get really into this; I know that there’s a lot that I can learn from it. So let’s go back to the big board here, and let’s go one step at a time here. And the first big tactic is to add a ‘pin it’ button to your website.

Melanie: Yes, and this is something that I recommend. I teach a lot of different audiences and I always say, if you’re just going to do one thing from this presentation, if you’re just going to walk away, maybe you’re still skeptical about Pinterest. I get it. I was skeptical in the beginning, so there’s just one thing I want you to do is to add this pin it button, and all you have to do is, you can go to pinterest.com/goodies, and they give you the code right there. But I really recommend adding the pin it button if you have a blog, under any great images, or at the bottom between each one of your blog posts. But specifically if you have a product based business this should be on your product pages. It’s something that personally has delivered a ton of sales and I think it’s really important to point out that it reminds people to pin it. And if you don’t have the pin it button, people can still pin things by having the bookmark let. But when they see that pin it button, it really encourages that action. It’s that powerful call to action that we always talk about in marketing.

Andrew: Mm-hmm.

Melanie: By having the pin it button on a product page, it reminds people and really engages them. And you want people pinning stuff off your site, whether it’s an image linking to a great blog post, whether it’s something off of your main website, or specifically if it’s something you’re selling, this is a great way because every time someone pins something, it’s introduced on to their news feed. And it shows to their entire follower base on Pinterest.

So this is something, it’s a onetime action that can provide you an endless amount of exposure and traffic. And you only have to do it one time and I think that’s pretty cool of a social media, because usually I feel like we’re kind of on that hamster wheel with social media, always trying to update every 3 hours, or constantly be engaging. That’s something that’s really exciting about Pinterest, instead of having all of your activity pushed down a stream like this, Pinterest is very virile, in fact, over 80% of pins are re-pins. So Pinterest kind of works more like this, so you get this great social engagement and constant exposure without you having to be the one constantly pushing the content.

Andrew: I see, so just go to their site, get the code, add that ‘pin it’ button to your site. People will pin more of your articles, more of your content on their accounts. And then their friends and followers will start hitting that pin it button. And you have an example of what happened to Anna White to this company …

Melanie: Yes, yes.

Andrew: What happened to them?

Melanie: So, she’s a blogger, she has a great blog. She teaches people how to make things; she does carpentry. But she actually doesn’t even have a Pinterest account, funny little loop hole here. She doesn’t have a Pinterest account. You can see on her page up at the top, she has that pin it button, just on her main homepage of her website. She also engages that pin it button through different posts, at the bottom of posts she does a lot of… She has great images that are tutorials that teach you how to build something. And so, she’s constantly adding that pin it button, encouraging her readers to be posting that content, to be re-circulating it. She gets over 6,000 visits a day from Pinterest.

Now, her main revenue is from her ads on her blog which probably many of your people in your audience can relate to. So, she’s just working off of ad revenue, but because she gets so much traffic from Pinterest, again, she put that button on there one time, had that done, 6,000 visits a day, and she can now support her entire family just with the ad revenue from that.

Andrew: There it is. I’m going to zoom in to make sure that people can see it because it took me a little while to catch it.

Melanie: Yeah.

Andrew: It’s right there at the top, pin, and she’s got 23,000 pins. Wow, more than [??]

Melanie: I love that. I think that’s a real cool opportunity for social proof. Pinterest will show you how many people have pinned something from that site.

Andrew: All right. Let’s go to the big board and take a look at the net big idea, which is to pin original content and actually let me read it the way you wrote it instead of the way I’ve got it up on the board. Where is that? Pin original content and link to a strategic web page. Tutorials, teaser information, graphics and videos convert well, you said.

Melanie: Yes. So, right in the beginning I want to debunk a major myth that a lot of people have about Pinterest because it’s totally wrong, and that is that service based businesses can’t use it for marketing. Originally, when I started to teach this, a lot of people would be so excited about it. They’d say, “That’s so great, but I don’t have a product based business.” It was like, “I wish I could use this, but I can’t.” I always say, “No, no, no, no, no.” Pinterest actually, I believe, it’s a little secret for you. I think it has even more of an opportunity for service based businesses than for product based businesses, and I want you to think about just how many more creative and inventive ways I’m going to be giving you some really specific examples of this.

Service based businesses have a tremendous opportunity to be using Pinterest to market. So, that’s very cool, and so the example I wanted to share with you all today is something that I use. I have a couple of different businesses online, but one of them I do business consulting. And so, it’s a service based business, and I created this pin, so this image that basically just said it was kind of my free gift that I give when you subscribe to my newsletter. And so, I made this fun, little, colorful pin, super easy. There are so many free online tools to make images these days that literally takes five seconds, and I just wrote out what my free gift was.

So, I said something like, “Click here”. I did a great call to action. “Click here to get the best online tools, software and programs.

Andrew: You know what, I think I’ve got that. This is what you created?

Melanie: Yes. Perfect.

Andrew: OK.

Melanie: So, now I don’t have to remember exactly.

Andrew: That’s pretty impressive that you did it from memory. I wasn’t sure if I should bring this one up yet, and as you were reading it, I knew that’s the one. OK.

Melanie: That’s the one. So, that’s the actual pin. When you clicked on that, it just took them to my opt-in page, so I have a video explaining why I wanted them to sign up for my newsletter, and this was the free gift that you got for signing up and I pinned it. In the beginning, I did a lot of testing because I wanted to test these different types of strategies across service based, product based, but this particular pin got me so many sign- ups for my newsletter. What happened was I posted it, and I had established a pretty decent audience or amount of followers on Pinterest at that point but nothing huge, maybe, a couple hundred.

But some of my followers had very large, sizeable audiences, and a lot of people think that only pretty images are successful on Pinterest. By successful, I mean that they go viral, they get a lot of re-pins, a lot of interaction, a lot of click through, but the fact is nine times out of ten it is useful or inspiring information over just pretty information or pretty pictures that gets the most engagement and the most circulation on Pinterest. That’s why I think service based businesses… their ears should really be perking up because if you are a service based business, the entire existence, you should be useful. That’s why someone should want your services because they’re useful.

And so, that particular pin was re-pinned by some major bloggers, and then I saw all of their re-pins shot off in different directions, and it became, for that particular opt-in page, a tremendous traffic source because people were clicking through, either saving it, re-pinning it to with their audience, or saying, “Oh, well, I could use some great tools.” Everyone wants tools for their business, and so that paired with an opt-in page for me. It was a very, very successful alliance between the two. And so, that’s original content to get back…

Andrew: Let me see if I understand this. What you’re doing is you’re basically creating an opt-in page, and when you ask people to pin it, the image that shows up on Pinterest is this image that we saw a moment ago that basically encourages more people to click that link and come over to your page, and some of them will pin the page.

Melanie: Not quite.

Andrew: OK.

Melanie: Actually, this is one that I uploaded onto my Pinterest account. So, I have a Pinterest account for that business…

Andrew: OK.

Melanie: …which I think we’re going to be talking about up next, about how you can actually do a personal or a business account on Pinterest. I have a business account for this particular company, and I uploaded this to my business account, to one of my [??]. So, you can upload anything from your computer. It doesn’t have to be off of a website.

Andrew: I see.

Melanie: So, I just created that in a graphics program and then uploaded it onto my Pinterest account. And then, from there my followers re-pinned and circulated it for me.

Andrew: I see. What they were doing was bringing people then to your Pinterest page where they were getting the tools and software and programs?

Melanie: No. That was linking directly to an opt-in page.

Andrew: All right. So, you know what, this just shows my ignorance of Pinterest. I didn’t realize you could do this. So, you can upload an image and say… When people click it, it sends them over to an opt-in page. I didn’t realize you could do that.

Melanie: Correct. A lot of people don’t, actually. So, you can upload something just from your computer, from your files, and you can edit it. If you don’t edit it – to edit it, you just hover it and a little edit button appears – but if you don’t edit it, it’s just a dead link. So, when someone clicks on it, if you’ve just uploaded it from your computer, there’s no original source for it to link to.

Andrew: I see.

Melanie: But you can go, edit it and have it link anywhere you want, and that’s why I really encourage people to not just re-pin cool stuff from blogs or other people. That’s one aspect, but make sure that you’re focusing on your own original content because as we talked about that 80% of re-pins, so you’ve got this virtual army that will recirculate your content for you. So, if you’re not creating content, you’re really missing out on a major opportunity there.

Andrew: All right. Now, I see. OK. All right. Now, I get how that works. All right. I also have a link here to PicMonkey. What do we do with them?

Melanie: So, this is just one of my favorite sites that I use, too. Very quickly, you can drag and drop a photo into this, and then you can put any text overlay. And so, I really encourage all of my clients to be creating their own pins, not just pinning other people’s stuff. I think that’s one of another misconceptions. People are like, “Oh, I just need to do lifestyle pins about my brand.” No, we should be looking at business owners for using Pinterest for marketing. We should be looking at specific ways to be adding value and driving traffic, encouraging people to get off of Pinterest and onto our site.

Ben Silverman, one of the founders, he actually says, “That’s great. That’s what they intended Pinterest to be was a way for people to discover great new services, great new products.” So, you’re not doing anything wrong by really encouraging people to come to your site because we don’t want them to just be playing around on Pinterest. We want people to be clicking over to your site, sign up for your newsletter, buying your products, commenting on your blog post. That’s what I really focus on teaching is the referral aspect as I’m sure you probably know, Pinterest is already referring more traffic than Google Plus, LinkedIn, YouTube. It’s already because of its simplistic nature, it’s an excellent referral traffic source in terms of social media.

Andrew: All right. That is a great site. It just looks so beautiful. It’s PicMonkey.

Melanie: Yep, PicMonkey, it’s free and it literally takes seconds. You put your photo in there. You can edit it. You can add effects. They have tons of fonts, text, so you can add a really great, just captivating image to hopefully encourage people to come over to whatever benefit you have on the other side, wherever you’re linking to.

Andrew: All right. Already you blow my mind, and already you opened up my eyes to something that I didn’t know was possible on Pinterest.

Melanie: Oh, yeah.

Andrew: This little site just seems so easy to master that I keep thinking, “Why are all of these people emailing me, asking me to do a whole session on this?” It’s Pinterest, go figure it out, but apparently, you can. Apparently, I can’t.

Melanie: There are a lot of missed opportunities. Yes.

Andrew: This is something that I didn’t have on the board before, but let’s get to it now. We brought it up. Create an account for your business. So, not just for yourself personally but for your business. You do it for yourself and your business?

Melanie: I do and this is hands down the most frequently asked question for me on all of my webinars, from all of my clients. Everyone asks, “Well, I have a personal one. Do I have to set up a business one? If I set up a business one, how do I do that?” I do, I say, “Unless you are a personal brand, that’s the one exception.” Unless you’re a personal brand, I really encourage people to set up a business account.

Now, that being said, it can be a little confusing because Pinterest isn’t like Facebook, where you have a personal account and a Facebook page. It’s one account, but there’s a way for you to create a Pinterest account and have it formatted more businesslike. When you’re setting up your account, where it says first and last name, you actually want to put the name of your business, whether it’s two or three letters. You want to fit it into that first and last name area

Andrew: I see.

Melanie: Because that’s what’s going to show on your actual account under your user name. So that’s important. I also encourage people to do a great product picture, to have an opportunity to upload a photo, so I really encourage people to do a great product picture, a great logo, something that helps people understand very quickly when they land on your page that this is a professional business. It’s not just a personal account because I think that’s important, people being in the right mentality when they come across your information.

Andrew: You know what; let’s take a look at yours. This is your personal Pinterest account right?

Melanie: Yes. So that’s my personal one and this is just what I use for fun, and I did start out, you can see, those two top boards: luxury and monograms, and [??]. Those are both my businesses, so I do have boards on there because I do a lot of cross testing. But I also have a lot of random information on here, you can see I have, fashion I like, I have recipes, I have makeup. Now this is all awesome information stuff that’s really cool, but it doesn’t really relate to my business and it’s not strategic. I’m a big believer in having a strategy behind the way you lay out your boards, very, very important. So you will see in a second on my actual Pinterest business accounts, it’s very different the way that I’ve laid out boards because I don’t want to just bombard people with tons of random information, that’s not effective.

So, this is one of my business accounts and you can see across the top, the first category I have, or the first board is basically like a online catalog of all of our famous throw pillows. Our best selling product is what’s been featured across, tons of press, was on Good Morning America. So it’s kind of our bread and butter of this brand, and so I wanted to make sure that was in a really prominent spot for people to see.

Andrew: And there it is. So, the first board, and I just clicked over to it and this is what’s pinned in there OK?

Melanie: Yes. Yeah, so you can see I basically just created a little virtual catalog right there with that board. In addition, on that main page of that Pinterest account, I also have a board that is bridal shower and wedding gifts. Because most of our customers buy our products as gifts, so what I’ve done is I created a board that is a combination of some of our most popular products that people buy as bridal shower and wedding gifts. But I’ve also interspersed other great suggestions that might be a great gift along side of, say, we’re encouraging them to buy monogram napkins as a bridal shower gift, I also on that board have some links to some really great napkin rings from Crate and Barrel or a beautiful type of linen spray. Basically, I’m adding value for this customer base, I know their interested in these products, but can you click on the bridal shower and beddings ….

Andrew: Yeah, let’s take a look at that together. So this is bridal shower that you were just talking about.

Melanie: Exactly. So, you can see this is kind of an infusion of my own products as well as other products. That’s a big thing, you don’t want to feel bad about pinning your own stuff, but if you can also add value in other ways, it makes people feel like they’re not being as strongly sold to. Which we seen on Pinterest can be very effective in marketing. Just really adding value, whether it’s from our own sources, or others.

Andrew: I see. All right, so that’s one business, and here’s the other business. Again, you’ve got a logo in place of the personal photo, you put the business name as the name in Pinterest …

Melanie: Right.

Andrew: … and you’ve created all these boards.

Melanie: Yeah so these boards, again, these speak more directly to my audience that I know is interested in this particular page. So these are business owners that I have a lot of, my top board on this page are on info graphics and education. And so if you click on that board, it’s all amazing social media information, strategy, resources for business owners. Now this … [??]

Andrew: Sorry the info graphics are so data heavy; because they’re so long that they were sucking up bandwidth from our conversation. Sorry, so what were you saying? There, it’s all loaded.

Melanie: I was just saying that, this is really important. It’s important to have different accounts for your different businesses, if they don’t cross relate. So one of my businesses is selling beautiful monogrammed home decor, another one is teaching online entrepreneurs about social media, strategy, and marketing. Those two on the same account would be very conflicting.

Andrew: Right.

Melanie: And I think that even these on a personal account mixed in with ideas for my next roof top barbeque. Would it really make a lot of sense to someone? I really believe you want clarity in marketing is everything. I think you want to be very clear and directive in what you point on your account. Don’t just pin random stuff. Don’t just pin random crap. Pin things that add value. A lot of people give me resistance about this in the beginning. They say, well, I think it’ll be fine. I’ll go and look at their board, and they’ve got this business account they’ve created but they have ideas for their daughter’s birthday party as one of the boards. I’m like no. You can’t do that. If you really want to be a professional brand that doesn’t mean that you have to lose your own voice or that you have to be super sponsored in everything that you promote on their, but you do want to make sure that there’s a consistency and the information that your sharing and the way that your sharing it.

Andrew: That is great advice. Next big idea, actually should we go back to the big board for the next big tactic?

Melanie: Let’s do it.

Andrew: Let’s do it. All right. Pin YouTube videos for more traffic?

Melanie: Yes.

Andrew: You’ve got an example of a big company that did this.

Melanie: Yeah, just a little company, Lionsgate. I’m sure people have heard of Lionsgate studios in Hollywood. You can actually pin videos directly off of YouTube. It’s super easy, you can pin them off of Vimeo as well. YouTube is what I normally reference because Lionsgate actually just pinned their videos. That’s all they did. They pinned their videos and within five days they went from 200,000 views to 400,000 just by pinning their videos. A lot of people are just starting to realize that you can put videos on Pinterest. Videos are killer on Pinterest, because when you pin them Pinterest puts this big play button in the middle of the image.

When you’re looking at a news stream on the Pinterest home page it just grabs your eye. I love that you brought this example because one really inventive way that I’ve seen some business doing it, this is Birchbox. They sell cosmetics. They basically are creating product usage and instructional boards with videos. Talk about delivering value. What they’ve done is made this whole board and it gives you ideas on how to use their products, certain techniques, instructional, maybe if their selling something not a lot of people know how to use.

This is also a fantastic opportunity for service based businesses. I mean talk about providing value, adding credibility, building a relationship. I think we all know how important video is to incorporate into an online marketing strategy. Pinterest gives you this great platform to not only beautifully classify it with boards in terms of what the contents relating to, but then just the viral exposure. Videos do phenomenally well on Pinterest.

Andrew: Just pin them from YouTube or now from Vimeo, get them in there, and watch the numbers go up.

Melanie: Exactly.

Andrew: As long as they are as useful as these videos. These are really beautiful. Let me just bring that up again, These guys have beautiful videos.

Melanie: People shouldn’t be intimidated by video. If you have an Apple computer, there’s already programs and software. It’s very easy to do, even if you don’t want to direct a camera, say you are a service based business. I’m sure your familiar with programs like screencast. You could basically just do a PowerPoint presentation. Maybe you’re a web designer, you could walk them through some of your web designs. There lots of ways to be streaming video content. It’s important, but really when your using Pinterest you’ve got a killer combination.

Andrew: Good point. Back to the big board. Let’s do it. Next big one is add a call to action. You can add a call to action on Pinterest?

Melanie: In the caption. You saw that one example we had of that tools that I gave away. I actually put a call to action because I was featuring text. Say maybe you’re not adding text to your image. You can put it in the caption, which is really neat, and research has shown that when you actually add, called action in the caption. It increases engagement by over 80 percent. Which is killer.

Andrew: I think we need to zoom in on this area right here. 80 percent increase.

Melanie: Yes. So Pinterally does a great job of providing us with a lot of feedback on what’s trending on Pinterest, what’s working, and this is something I always believe in every single one of my marketing efforts, having a strong directive call to action. I was not at all surprised because it’s something that I’ve been implementing with my pins from day one and it had significantly increased my traffic on this. That makes sense to me, but 80 percent. If you go on Pinterest–

Andrew: We’ll, include a link to this in the program notes. Sorry, what we’re you saying.

Melanie: I was going to say if you go onto Pinterest, you will not see any call to actions. I mean, no one, most people aren’t even putting captions. They’ll do, Pinterest requires you to put something in there so more times I see people put a little period because they’re required to do something but it’s this huge missed opportunity. I know we’re going to be talking about SEO coming up so I’ll leave that for now. But just in terms of putting a call to action in the caption. I mean 80%, you know, that’s significant. That’s definitely paying attention to and implementing.

Andrew: All right, let’s see how you’ve done this. Let me bring up a couple, I’ve got a couple of images here that I think could help us with that. First is, this is a call to action. Let me zoom out a little bit and it’s right on the bottom. That’s the kind of call to action that you want us to add?

Melanie: That’s a call to action in a caption. I, if I was going to have my choice I would tell you to always put it in the image but this is a video so I couldn’t actually put it into the image unless I was holding a sign with it or something. Since I couldn’t make an image for this I added it in the caption. Yes, that’s exactly what I recommend.

Andrew: It just says click here to sign up for a free webinar on how to use Pinterest for your business. Perfect place to promote this. Then it’s PowerPinning.com.

Melanie: (Inaudible). Yes, adding a link.

Andrew: That’s a simple call to action that you can add to video. You’ve got another example of a call to action.

Melanie: Yeah, I wanted to show you real fast. I have a link. People don’t realize this, you can add links. This is good to know because…

Andrew: Oh, that’s a hyperlink there.

Melanie: That’s a hyperlink and all I had to do was type in the URL. Pinterest automatically hyperlinks it for you. Again, no one is doing this. Talk about engagement. When people see a link they know what to do. People who are new to Pinterest might not realize that you click on the image to go to the source but people see a link, they know what to do. I really encourage you, pair your call to action with a link and you’re good.

Andrew: All right. Then here’s another example. This is more like what you’d like for us to do.

Melanie: Yes, this is what I really recommend. You can see this actually looks like a button because when they click the image it’s going to take them where I want this particular pin to link to. Like we talked about, you can edit it and have it link wherever you want as long as it’s your content. I think this is really cool because it actually looks like a button and is telling them what to do.

Andrew: You just click here. Let me read this to people who might be listening to the MP3 version. Power Pinning, learn to use Pinterest for your business to easily get traffic and customers. Then a big button that says click here now. I didn’t realize you could do that on Pinterest.

Melanie: Yeah, you can create the images. I think we’ve seen so far a real lack in creativity. When you’re creating an image you can incorporate so many great marketing aspects.

Andrew: All right, so add a call to action the way that we do anywhere else online. You can apparently do this on Pinterest and it’s working really well. Anything else before we go on to the next big idea?

Melanie: No, that’s it.

Andrew: All right, let’s hit it. Next one is use hash tags in your captions.

Melanie: Yes, tremendous, I’m not sure if you’ve heard, but tremendous SEO benefits for using Pinterest. Which is very exciting. I know I probably am preaching to the choir but SEO is what put my first business on the map. I mean changed my life so I’m a big believer in SEO. I’m not just Pinterest, that’s all you need. But you can use Pinterest to significantly increase your SEO rankings, or search engine optimization. A lot of different ways you can do that. You actually want to use key words when you’re setting up your account in your about section. You also want to use key words in your captions. Whatever words that you want to appear in search engines for, you want to be using those as much as you can. In addition you want to be using them in your board titles. Your actual boards that you’re pinning pins onto, so now you’ve got three places to be adding them.

I also encourage you to use hash tags. What that does is Pinterest then categorizes all of the results to appear under that term. If you click on the hash tag where you put the keyword it will actually pull up all topics that have used that hash tag.

Andrew: Let’s see, this is one way that you’ve done it at Luxury Monograms. I’ve got it with an arrow next to it, on the bottom in the caption. Let’s zoom in, zoom over. There it is. Hash tag, right on the bottom within the caption.

Melanie: Correct. To clarify, you don’t have to have a hash tag to get the key word benefit for SEO but I think it’s a really cool way to add navigation on Pinterest. Since they’re hyperlinking that it allows you to trend terms to kind of, it’s just a searchability feature. But definitely, definitely be using key words in your captions, as your board titles, and in your about section when you’re setting up your account.

Andrew: OK. All right, in fact let’s just quickly take a look. You do that here. You’ve got Luxury Monograms up here in the title, you’ve got it in the description here, and you’re also doing it in the board titles down here.

Melanie: Yeah, and this is, I’ve built up so many back links from Pinterest, because every time somebody pins something or re-pins something. These are all back links and they’re very, very valuable. It’s dramatically increased a lot of our main keywords in terms of getting us the top three results.

Andrew: When we say search engine optimization. Do we mean just optimizing your Pinterest boards in search engines or also your sites. No, you’re shaking your head, your saying no.

Melanie: I’m saying no. It’s not about optimizing your Pinterest account, it’s about optimizing your website.

Andrew: If you want people to come to your website when they search for, for example, Luxury Monograms, that’s what you want on the title of your Pinterest account, somewhere in the description, boards, and that will help get traffic to your site.

Melanie: Yes. Not just Luxury Monograms. That’s actually a great point you bring up, because a lot of people are confused by this. Yes, I want my business name, but more so than that, usually it’s pretty easy to rank for your business name, but that’s not the traffic that I want. I want the people that are searching for bridal shower gifts. I want them to come to my site. I want the people who are searching for monogrammed bedding. Those are the keywords that I’m talking about. The reason that you get those back links for your site is because, you should be, when your uploading anything, or when your pinning off of your site, those back links should be directing to your website.

That’s the big thing that I want to make sure that everyone walks away with. It’s not just getting people lots of followers on Pinterest. A lot of people have that misconception about social media. I don’t want them just on Pinterest. I want them on my site. Yes, you do want to make sure that all of the pins, whether you are creating images. You want to make sure that you are uploading that you are then linking to your home page, or linking to whatever respective product page makes sense and then when your actually pinning your own products or pinning images off of your website, those automatically should be linking to your site because that was the source.

Andrew: I’m glad I asked, that’s a great distinction. You do want that traffic on your site if you can get it.

Melanie: Yes.

Andrew: On to the big board and the next big idea is to add prices to your pins so they appear automatically in the gift section.

Melanie: Another brilliant thing that not enough people are doing. All you have to do is actually type the dollar sign and then the numeric value. I don’t even think you have to do a decimal. You just have to do the dollar sign and that Pinterest recognizes that your adding a price and they slap this great banner on the top left of your screen. I have to do it backwards, I think because we’re filming. The top left of your screen that, first of all grabs your attention. It’s this whole white image and it has the price across it so when it’s showing up on a news feed or a stream with different pins it catches your attention. It’s also really important because it helps us automatically understand this is something that’s for sale. There are a lot of people that are pinning pretty pictures, pretty images, I especially have a lot of real estate clients that are real estate agents, that are in the industry. I tell them if you are pinning a listing make sure you’re adding a price because otherwise people are going to think it’s some pretty home that was from architectural digest, instead of something that they could actually buy. A lot of reasons, for catching attention and for people to understand that this is something that’s for sale and their going to expect that to link directly to a product page. You’re already warming them up in terms of the buying process.

Andrew: Let’s show that too. I’ll zoom in on the image that I showed earlier and there it is. That’s how it shows up. We just need to add a price. Is that in the comment?

Melanie: Yes, in the captions area. Another really important reason to do this is on the Pinterest home page they have some navigation features on the top and one of them is a gift section and if you add a price your automatically put into the gift section. This might not apply to everyone but if you do have a product based business or a service based business that people could possibly gift. People search that area and that’s a great way to be found on this platform, let alone just by keyword searches.

Andrew: You told Jeremy, our producer here at Mixergy, about an e-commerce store at Cape Cod that did this really well.

Melanie: Yes.

Andrew: Can you tell the audience what happened to them?

Melanie: Yes. She has this great website. She sells a lot of great souvenirs, little knick knacks, things like that.

Andrew: What’s the site called? Sube du

Melanie: Sue be do.

Andrew: Sue be do. Let me bring that up. Here’s Sue be do. Now I can see what she’s selling.

Melanie: Basic e-commerce platform. Awesome site, basic, great souvenirs, kind of a wide range of stuff. She was an early adapter to Pinterest. Started using it and once she started to pin her products. She did a great job with her count, made different boards. She did a lot of strategies that I taught you about mixing your own products with other cool things, you know, other cool suggestions, really adding value. She did more orders in a month, in one single month from using Pinterest to market than in the entire previous year of her business.

Andrew: Wow. Wow.

Melanie: Yes.

Andrew: Is this one of her boards, see if we can bring that up? This is what helped do it?

Melanie: Yes. So, this is one of her boards. You see she’s put it in a subject category of anchors, obviously Kate caught a lot of nautical things, so she has included some great pictures of anchors, fun anchor things along with her products that feature anchors. So you can see kind of the cool way of mixing. This is something that I see Kate Spade is a really prominent brand that’s on Pinterest right now. And they do this. They’ll do kind of a general subject matter area for a board, and they’ll intersperse their own pins with other relevant pins or cool photography. Just a great way to add a lot of engagement and value for followers.

Andrew: I see. So it’s not supposed to be like a catalogue page with nothing but the things that you sell. It’s supposed to cover a topic. Some of the things that you sell.

Melanie: Well, yea that’s why you have a lot of boards. I mean, you can have dozens of boards. So, I really recommend having some. If you have a main subject area or a main product line that’s really successful for you, don’t be afraid to make a board of just that stuff. You know, you saw that I did that with Luxury Monograms, but you don’t want that to be the only content on your account. You want to be mixing in more stuff, you want to be adding suggestions and values like I said, so people don’t feel like you’re just cramping, you know, sales down their throats, but don’t be afraid also about directly pinning, adding prices, making it a shoppable experience for those followers.

Andrew: All right. Anything else before we go on to the next big idea?

Melanie: I think that’s it. I mean, more sales in one month than a year. If people aren’t sold, and I’ve actually heard numerous people report that. You know, we’re all trying to fight Pinterest, we don’t want another social media, you know, platform to keep up with but Pinterest is just too big and too effective to ignore.

Andrew: If its working, I want to know about it.

Melanie: Yes.

Andrew: And frankly, we’re not talking this excitedly about Google plus. So its not just that we’re getting carried away with whatever the latest thing is. We’re seeing that there’s something here.

Melanie: And I have a little secret for you.

Andrew: Yes.

Melanie: I’m always very on top of all the latest research and Pinterest actually refers more revenue per click than Facebook or Twitter.

Andrew: Really?

Melanie: A lot of people, it’s going to upset them to hear that, but yeah, it’s more revenue per click than Facebook or Twitter. So, if you’re using this for business intensive purposes, like that’s what you need to be paying attention to. Does it refer traffic, awesome, yes it does. We’re seeing it refer intensive traffic. Is it converting? Yes, it is.

Andrew: All right. Let’s go to the next big idea. Show before and after pictures with results and I’ve seen this, with results, with testimonials, and I didn’t notice this actually, in fact, until I pulled together some visuals for us to talk about. This is OK to do.

Melanie: Yes.

Andrew: It’s acceptable and its effective.

Melanie: Absolutely. I mean, who doesn’t love a good before and after transformation. I think all my favorite movies have some sort of, like, before and after makeover scene in them, you know. We love to see transformations. Those are exciting. Those are inspiring. And so, when we’re on a platform like Pinterest, that one of the main mediums is inspiring and, you know, exciting information. Transformation and before and afters are awesome. I mean, they’re so cool, especially if you’re in the realms of fitness.

But even if you do, like I said, any type of service based businesses, if you’re increasing your client’s traffic through the roof, if you’re increasing their productivity, like you can do a before and after. Here’s what their webpage looked like before they hired us. Here’s what it looks like after, I mean, I don’t know of anyone who doesn’t love a good transformation, and its, like you said, with testimonials, it can be an incredible way to really add credibility for people who maybe, are a little bit interested in your products or services, but they see an account like that. They see what you actually do, I mean, that’s powerful.

Andrew: Yeah, look. This is how powerful it is. And you know what, I didn’t think of this until I pulled it together from your notes to show here. And then to go, I mean this is just the usual before and after, but of course it gets retention, because these people look real.

Melanie: Right.

Andrew: But, what you’re saying beyond that, made even more sense and applied even more to our audience. It’s not just about before and after of the bodies, before and after of websites like you said, before and after of anything that you do. Fan-freaking-tastic. I love that.

Melanie: Good. Yeah. So, that was just a fitness, you know, someone that sells fitness DVD’s and that sort of training material, but yeah, it really applies to so many different industries and we really, we haven’t seen people fully tap into this, and I think it’s going to be a very exciting opportunity.

Andrew: Can you tell us a little bit about, this is fit moms for life?

Melanie: Yes.

Andrew: How are they doing with Pinterest? Specifically, any information on them?

Melanie: They do a lot of really great online marketing, online testimonials. That sort of thing. I know I’ve had a lot of different people look at different boards and I’ve asked them for their reactions. What is after seeing this. Again, I’m going to throw more research. I’m a huge research buff, if you can’t tell. I love, I think that numbers really speak volumes. More research has shown us that people after viewing a Pinterest board or after viewing a Pinterest account they convey more favorable feelings towards the brand. They also report a higher likelihood of purchasing from that brand.

This particular board, I was testing some different people on their feelings towards brands. Fitness is a huge area, Pinterest right now is still primarily females. More and more men every day, it’s just a matter of time. Right now, the large demographic is woman in their twenties to thirties to forties. The market, like I said, is constantly getting larger and larger in terms of the age group and the gender. Right now there’s still a lot of woman in that kind of twenty to forty range. Because of that fitness is a really important topic. We’ve got people having babies trying to get back to their pre-wedding weight. All of that type of stuff.

I had a few of my girlfriends look at this and are looking at the general types of products. Go to their normal websites, after they saw what the particular program or this particular coach was able to do, they told me hands down they were much more interested in purchasing his DVD’s. They were much more interested. They believed him. He became credible once they saw what he could do versus just hearing him say he could do something.

Andrew: I get that. I get it completely. It’s like when we first saw people on Facebook, or when we first saw companies who would email us, back in the day. It felt like they got it. It felt like they were part of our world.

Melanie: Yeah. We can see what they can do. I think that’s the biggest thing about before and afters. Don’t just tell me what you can do for me, show me what you can do.

Andrew: Specifically here it is in the show and it’s proof. We start every course with show me proof that your able to do something like this.

Melanie: Exactly.

Andrew: Alright. Back to the big board. Next big idea is create pin it to win it contests.

Melanie: Yes. Very, very, exciting. There’s a few different ways to do this depending how in depth you want to go or how large of a scope project you want. Something I did for Luxury Monograms, I did a pin, re-pin this to win a free pillow from us. It was a basic very simple re-pin and then from that I actually chose one of the people who had re-pinned it. I think we got a couple hundred different re-pins just from my one pin. You want to understand how it works. It’s viral, one person re-pins it, and then all of their followers see it, maybe, ten people out of their followers see it. You understand were I’m going. It can be very viral, very quickly. Especially when you’re just doing a just pin it. People can do that in a second. It’s no big effort for them.

Recently, we’re seeing a lot of businesses and brands go one step further, just for more added tractability and more exposure and just to make it more expressive. I think the example we’re going to talk about today is Jetsetter. They actually increased, was it 150% their traffic? Yes. What’s becoming more popular for people, or for brands using Pinterest contests is they actually have people make boards with their content. I hope I get this correctly. What Jetsetter did is they had people follow them on Jetsetter and then follow a particular board that had a bunch of different travel pins that they had uploaded and they had people create boards in different areas, like, I think it was cities or escape. A couple of different categories and they had people just generate boards and images from their site.

What this did is it really encouraged people to then create and curate their own boards. I think they had them name the boards something specific. It can be a multiple step process to do a full fledged contest like this. Jetsetter actually had them create these boards with these pins. Based upon, they had a couple of different winners that won free trips respective to the location they were. Focusing around whether it was somewhere exotic, metropolitan based. They got a ton of traffic from it, because one of the winning aspects was the board with the most followers. People were really promoting those boards, promoting those pins, posting the links on their Facebook accounts. Hey, I’m doing this Jetsetter contest. Follow me on Pinterest. So I can get another follower. They start to this whole rounded approach. Not only are more people following them on this account. That was one of the precursors, you had to follow them on Pinterest. But then, they’re creating all these boards, which is then publishing to all of their followers. They’re getting this incredible 150% increase in traffic. I would definitely take that.

Andrew: And this is, create boards based on images on Jetsetters’ website?

Melanie: Yes.

Andrew: OK.

Melanie: Yeah. What most businesses are doing is, they’ve created, on their Pinterest account, they’ve uploaded tons of pictures from destinations that they’re currently featuring. You know, Jetsetter does travel specials. So, probably a lot of them are just pinning content off of the actual Pinterest account. I’ve seen other brands do it, where they have you actually pin things off of their website. Jetset kind of works the same way, because Jetsetter…those pins are already linking, they’ve already put those on there, so whether it’s sourced directly off their website, or they’ve sourced them off of their Pinterest account, they’ve set it up to all lead to the same place.

Andrew: OK.

Melanie: So, they’re still getting those back-links, people are clicking through. They’re still landing, hopefully, on that page that’s promoting that travel special that reflects on the image that they’ve seen.

Andrew: All right. The key ideas, though, are: Follow us on Pinterest, which is great, and create boards around whatever topic it is that we, as a business, care about.

Melanie: Exactly.

Andrew: And that’s the way to get people engaged, that’s the way to get them to send traffic, and whether people end up with the exact Jetsetter formula or one of their own [??], the idea here is to create a contest to encourage people to do this, and then to reward them for doing it especially well. I like the way that they pick the winner: whoever has the most followers.

Melanie: Yeah, most followers. And then, they also…I think at least 10 of the pins on the board had to be from their site, but people could also post their own images, so it gives a whole…there are other categories for winning, like “most creative”. They had a couple different main categories, but you had to at least have 10 pins specifically from Jetsetter, to get that exposure. But they could then curate, and have this whole self- expression aspect to the contest, which people really get into, especially when it relates to something they’re passionate about, like travel.

Andrew: Yeah. Especially at this point, where we’re all still just really eager to play with Pinterest, to have something to do on there.

A: It’s so fun. My clients tell me time and time again, they’re like, “This is actually fun, like, am I doing something wrong? I usually don’t have fun.” I’m like, “I know, it is. It’s actually really fun.” I think that a lot of us, as entrepreneurs, we’re in this space because we love to express our creativity, and this is a social meet-up platform that just really provides that.

Andrew: You know what, I’ve got to tell you, I didn’t get the fun of it. I wasn’t sure what to do. I created an account; I was bumming out, because I had no interest in another network…

Melanie: Yep.

Andrew: …so I kept waiting and waiting, and then finally, I said, “All right. It’s so big, I’ve got to go play with it.” So, I went and created an account, and I was bumming out because I couldn’t get my name, because of course, someone else got my name on there.

Melanie: Right, right.

Andrew: And then you made me realize, who cares about my name? I didn’t even think to get one for Mixergy. As soon as we’re done, before I even publish it, I’m going to go get one for Mixergy, before someone else in the audience grabs it.

Melanie: Yay! Good!

Andrew: But, I was slow. I was slow, and, if not for the audience, if not for sitting and doing customer service emails, and seeing people request this, I would have totally missed it.

Melanie: Yeah, and you know, it’s easy to do. Don’t get too hard on yourself. I think Pinterest is a different animal. It’s a different social media animal, which, to me, is exciting, but to a lot of other people, if you just approach it with the same strategies that maybe you’re using on Facebook or on Twitter, you’re not going to see that return. It really is different.

Andrew: Yeah. All right. Last big idea: Track your performance. I didn’t know this. In fact, maybe I even discovered this by researching you and getting ready for it. There’s a way to actually see when people pin my stuff on Pinterest?

Melanie: Yep. I kind of [??]. It’s my ninja trick. You can go to pinterest.com/source…I think it’s forward slash, your website…so, it’s not actually “your website”, but whatever your website is, dot com.

Andrew: Right, so…

Melanie: pinterest.com/source/luxurymonograms.com. So, that’s the URL you want to do…

Andrew: And here’s what happens when you go to one of your other businesses. So, for me it would be pinterest.com/source/mixurgy.com. Of course, we’ll link to all this so you don’t have to remember it, if you’re not writing it down. It’s fine. And here is what happens when we do this for pinterest.com/source/entrepreneursacademy[SP] …I got is right so many times before we started, and you know…

Melanie: I just decided on that business name, because I wanted to hear people try to say it, let alone spell it.

Andrew: I should be able to. Entrepreneuress Academy. Here it is on the screen.

Melanie: I always think it’s funny they made “entrepreneur” such a hard word to spell, considering most entrepreneurs…we dropped out, we don’t like school, and they make our words so hard to spell.

Andrew: You know what? It’s not just us. My business book in college got the word entrepreneur misspelled. I know, because by college at that point I knew I was going to be an entrepreneur. I finally figured out how to spell it.

Melanie: Oh, my gosh.

Andrew: I think that’s why we all say start-up instead of entrepreneur.

Melanie: Yeah.

Andrew: We don’t know how to spell entrepreneur. Here’s what happens when we type in your site. This is what people pinned just moments, I guess, before I did the search.

Melanie: Yeah. I don’t know if it’s exactly live, but it’s updated all the time so it should be very relatively current. Can you scroll in that image, or is it just a still shot?

Andrew: You know what? I took just a still shot, but the internet is cooperating right now, so I’m going to bring it up right… The internet is cooperating. The internet at my office, I finally got them to up the bandwidth and they’re installing a whole new connection in this office just for me, just for these sessions.

Melanie: Oh, man. That’s a process. I went through that with one of our businesses, getting a dedicated line. Oh, my gosh. It’s a process.

Andrew: I got so desperate that I got an iPad so that I could connect to the iPad’s Internet as a backup. That didn’t work so well, even though the iPad has super fast internet, the latest one I got. I got one of these for wireless. None of it worked so they’re finally installing a whole other connection.

Melanie: Yeah. Yeah. It’s true. It’s an ongoing battle.

Andrew: It is.

Melanie: Once you have good internet, there’s nothing like it.

Andrew: No. There really isn’t. Then you suddenly download movies. I get to upload my movies, which is a big issue for me.

Melanie: Oh my gosh.

Andrew: All right. So, I’m going to scroll here.

Melanie: Yeah. What I want you to see, look and see if you notice anything.

Andrew: You know what? What’s catching my eye right now is that a bunch of people are pinning an image that has a Skitch icon. Oh, yeah. In fact, a lot of people are pinning something that has Skitch image on it.

Melanie: See, what this is showing you, it’s actually showing you in, we’re going to assume, close to real time, what people are pinning. This is giving me an idea. This is linking to, this entrepreneurs website has a blog. We’re uncovering all different types of topics, all different things. Do you think that particular post with that image was popular?

Andrew: Oh, yeah. Look, they’re writing their own captions on it. ‘Pin it on your Facebook page.’ This one says, ‘Integrate your Facebook and Pinterest marketing’. Same image, this one says, ‘Pinterest/Facebook’. Same image, this ones doing what you’re suggesting to do.

This is [Finoa] Albums and on to education, it’s how to link your Pinterest to your business Facebook page. Pinterest app for Facebook pages. Hash tag, photography, business, marketing, etc. Yeah, they’re all into this and they’re all expressing it in their own way.

Melanie: I did a blog post, and actually taught people how to integrate Pinterest into their Facebook business page.

Andrew: Uh-huh.

Melanie: Obviously, this was something that really resonated with a lot of people. This gives me a great idea. OK. A lot of people are really interested in learning about integrating their social media networks, which may or may not be obvious to me. You know?

There’s a lot of ways you can really see what people are responding to in terms of the content or in terms of the product offerings on your site. This is incredibly valuable market research as a business to understand what people are responding and sharing from your site.

Andrew: Oh, yeah. You know what, actually? If I were a competitor, of if I wanted to blog about this topic at all, I can come and see, well, what are people interested in here on your site?

Melanie: Exactly.

Andrew: I’ll create a blog post on that. If I were (?), I’d definitely look at this and say, hey, we need to cover this, and either get you to do a blog post on this topic…

Melanie: Right.

Andrew: …because that’s what people are pinning, or do one themselves.

Melanie: Yeah. This is just an incredibly valuable way to see. It doesn’t always translate. Maybe, you’ve got a really popular selling product, or you’ve got a really popular blog post in terms of a lot of comments, but like we said, Pinterest is different.

It’s important to understand what people are sharing onto Pinterest so that when you’re creating and curating your content to be putting onto Pinterest, it’s going to be in line with what you already see people naturally responding to on this platform.

Andrew: Yeah. I can see they’re responding to this image. I’ll click over later to this image of a woman with a purse in her hand. They’re responding to this document flow, excuse me, how to apply to my business and my life. Yeah, absolutely.

It’s giving me an insight into what they’re pinning on your site. It’s giving me an insight into what they care about. Is there a number here of how many pins you’re getting? Is there a way to see that?

Melanie: I don’t think it gives you the number, but when you’re on your actual Pinterest account in the, I believe it’s the upper left. Pinterest keeps moving it around, but you can actually see it’s an activity area.

If you click on it, it will show you what’s being re-pinned, what’s getting likes, what’s getting comments. That’s a great way for you to gauge activity. They do give you that resource on your count page.

Andrew: Oh, I see. OK. Is there anything else that we need to know about how to track?

Melanie: No. I really think that the main thing is to be looking for that URL so you see what… Maybe, you don’t have a Pinterest account for your business. I know most people don’t, and you can see, oh my gosh, I already have tons of pins or OK, I don’t have any pins yet but it’s a great way to gauge. People most times already have a few pins from their site which is cool to see.

Andrew: Right. So, even if we don’t have an account, the very first thing that we could do right now is see what people are pinning on our accounts by going to pinterest.com/source/ourwebsite.com or .eu or .whatever.

Melanie: Right.

Andrew: All right. Anything else that we didn’t cover before I give the last word and tell people how they can connect with you?

Melanie: I’m looking through my notes. No, I think we covered all the good stuff.

Andrew: We covered a whole lot in here.

Melanie: Yes.

Andrew: All right. So, here’s the thing. If I were in the audience, here’s what I would do. The final word is this. If I were in the audience and I got all this, I would feel overwhelmed. I’d feel like this is a whole other business for me to get into. They’ve given me now a bunch of different action items. I think I’ll put this off because I’ve got other things to do.

Melanie: Mm-hmm.

Andrew: But if you watched all the way to this point, then there’s an interest that you have in Pinterest. My suggestion to you is to take the advice that I keep hearing over and over again by people who have taken our sessions here and have gotten real results. They start by just picking one thing, and maybe it’s the easiest thing to do. Maybe, for you in the audience listening to me right now, it’s just spying to see what your competitor is getting pinned because you’re too anxious to check your own. Maybe, checking on your own or maybe, it’s, “Hey, I’m not about to make the mistake that Andrew is about to make or used to make, which is to not, at least, get an account for my business.” Do it. Go get an account for your business.

Maybe, it’s something else, whatever that first step is, take that first step. A second step I would suggest is to email Melanie and to say thank you for teaching the session. Thank you for being so friggin’ open. You teach a course yourself.

Melanie: Yes.

Andrew: There’s so many reasons why you could have said, “You know what, Andrew, I’m going to give these entrepreneurs who are listening to your program just one idea and let them come to my session and buy the rest if they really want the good stuff. But you really just gave us a lot of good, actionable, useful information. I’m going to say thank you, and I hope our audience will do that, too.

Melanie: Yeah. You can go to EntrepreneuressAcademy… Sorry, Facebook/EntrepreneuressAcademy.com if you want to engage on our page. I’m always posting lots of great updates, breaking research about Pinterest. Obviously, I’m very passionate about it, but I really, if you can believe it, have only scratched the surface. There’s so much to learn about using Pinterest, and there’s so much to gain from using it properly.

Andrew: All right. If we want to learn more about this from you, what website do we go to?

Melanie: Yeah. You can to go PowerofPinning.com and it’ll just be an opt- in. You can actually sign up right there, and I’ll send you tons of great information, and I have a whole webinar on it. Some of this same stuff we’ve covered today, but if you want to do a live webinar with me, you can go to PowerofPinning.com/webinar and find it there.

Andrew: PowerofPinning.com/webinar. Thank you so much for doing this session.

Melanie: All right. Thank you for having me. It’s been so fun.

Andrew: Yeah. It’s been terrific. Thank you and thank you all for watching.

Master Class:
How to avoid mistakes and increase conversions
(Even if you think you’re doing everything right)
Taught by Dan Siroker of Optimizely

Report issues here

Master Class:
Increase Conversions


About the course leader

Dan Siroker is the Co-founder and CEO of Optimizely, which makes it dramatically easier for you to improve your website through A/B testing.

Master Class Toolbox

Course Cheat Sheet

IGN

Live Chat

ContentSpree

Libertyville Dental Associates

ABC Family

Help Juice

HireYourVirtualAssistant

EasyJuiceRecipes

Wealth Care for Women

Transcript

Download the transcript here

Andrew: This course is about increasing your conversion rate. It’s led by Dan Siroker. He is the Co-founder and CEO of Optimizely, which makes it dramatically easier for you to improve your website through A/B testing. Super simple, as you guys will see in this session. I’ll help facilitate. My name is Andrew Warner. I’m the Founder of Mixergy.com, where proven founders like Dan teach.

In this session, here’s a breakdown of everything that we’re going to be covering. This is everything that’s in it for you. I want to call your attention to just a couple of points here, to make sure that you pay attention to them because I might have missed them if I were in your shoes.

First is, less is more. I’m going to put an exclamation point in front of it. In fact, I did miss that until Dan before the interview said, “Andrew, you’ve got to include that. You’ve got to make sure to talk about that.” Wait until you hear what he says about that. Also, the importance of humanizing your site. Put an exclamation point next to that. Even the Clinton/Bush people as you’ll see, made a mistake there.

I want you not to make that mistake, so we’ll talk about that and so much more in this session with Dan. Now, let’s go in and talk about… There it is. To the big board. I want people to understand what’s possible. Let’s start with the problem that many people have. In fact, this company right here made that mistake.

Well, what’s the mistake? Well, what’s the problem and how did IGN have that problem?

Dan: IGN is a great example of a company that’s transformed from what was traditionally known as a hippo syndrome, which is the highest paid person’s opinion, which is how decisions used to get made. They actually had an internal decision that they wanted to make the videos link at the top of their page, and if you scroll to the top you’ll see there’s a link to the videos page. They wanted to make that more prominent.

Andrew: There it is.

Dan: It’s the upper right there. They make a lot of money from video ads, they have a lot of traffic there. What they found, and what they eventually would have really hurt themselves with, was they wanted to move that link to the far left and make it much more prominent. Change the visual experience of that, make it a bit more standout.

What they realized, is actually after they made that move, that reduced the click-through rate of that link by 92%. 92% fewer people were clicking on the videos link, which meant 92% of people were less likely to watch a video, which meant 92% of people were less likely to watch a video ad, which is where they make a lot of revenue.

This is a sort of cautionary tale that says that these kinds of changes, that in the past might have been made by the guy with the most grey hairs in the room, should really actually be tested. You can do a lot to improve your website by taking a data driven approach to these kind of decisions.

Andrew: I see. You would think that taking that little video link, I could barely see it even though I prepared this. I put it up on my site.

Dan: Yeah.

Andrew: I don’t know if people can see it. It’s over in the upper right, little tiny thing. When they made that more prominent, it cut down the number of clicks. What you’re saying is, you just can’t predict this stuff.

Dan: Yeah. This is also the kind of thing that in hindsight, they actually kind of understood. The reality is, most of their traffic was returning visitors. Returning visitors were used to where things were before. They would actually gravitate to that.

The first thing they’d do when they’d come to IGN.com is to click on that link, and because it’s not there anymore, and because their audience is pretty fickle, they’re not going to go scanning around looking for where this new link is. It’s, oh, I guess the videos are no longer on the site, hit the back button, and go back to Facebook.

Andrew: I see. That’s an example of what’s possible if we don’t do what we’ll be talking about in this session. Let’s talk about the good thing. That if we do listen to everything that you and I are going to be talking about, in fact, everything that you talk about, what is possible? The example that you want to talk about is one that you experienced before you launched Optimizely.

This is you, right? There it is. You’re up there, upper right.

Dan: That’s our team. Yeah. That’s our team. Yep.

Andrew: That’s your team when you were working for Obama. What happened there? What were you able to do?

Dan: In 2008, I joined the Obama campaign as the Director of Analytics, where my mission was really to try to use the data that we had to make better decisions. In that, we did a lot of A/B testing, a lot of website optimization. We got a lot of value out of it. We were able to raise an additional $100 million in donations directly through the website, through our optimization efforts. It made it very clear to me that there’s a lot of value that you can get out of A/B testing, but you constantly had this bottleneck of requiring an engineer to be involved. We had used several products available at the time and none of them were simple enough for a marketer, for a non-technical, for a product manager or for an entrepreneur. That’s really the original inspiration for Optimizely. We’re trying to build the product I wish we had in 2008 to make it easy for anybody to do A/B testing.

Andrew: Do you have an example of one thing that you were able to do especially well back when you worked for Obama because you knew how to do A/B testing that our audience might be able to get similar results if they listen?

Dan: We actually worked pretty hard on understanding the entire funnel, so we saw that a lot of people were banding on our Splash page, but weren’t signed up for our email list. That was a shame because we did a great job of raising money from people who were on our email list. We actually ran an experiment where we improved the signup rate by changing the button to say “Learn More,” and we actually removed the videos. We actually assumed the videos on our page helped, turns out they hurt performance quite a bit. We changed to [??] picture of the family image of Barack and Michelle and Sasha and Malia and, in doing that, that was able to increase the signup rate by 40 percent, which after we ran the experiment, we looked at the impact throughout the rest of the campaign. That translated into hundreds of thousands of more volunteers who came from those email addresses [??] and more dollars and really had a tangible impact on the rest of the [??].

Andrew: Of course, today both candidates who are running for president, as I saw on CNN when it came on, both of them, their campaigns are using Optimizely to make sure that they optimize their sites and increase their conversions. Your software is now being used by both sides.

Dan: Not only political campaigns. We actually have over 2000 enterprises using us, including Starbucks, Crate & Barrel, eBay and a bunch of other businesses we’re really thrilled to be using our product.

Andrew: Let’s go to the Big Board and see what people can learn based on your experience. Everything that you learned by helping the Obama campaign, by helping Starbucks and other candidates, we’re going to condense and we’re going to bring it to the audience. First big idea is, Words Matter. You say?

Dan: Words matter. They really do matter. This is a lesson that surprised me time and time again, the impact of just a simple word change from one word to two words or focusing on the actual verbs of what you want somebody to do when it comes to your website and that by actually testing that and understanding that you can get a much better sense for what’s effective at convincing somebody to take some action on your website.

Andrew: For example, this site, what were they able to do with that understanding, Live Chat?

Dan: Live Chat Inc. is a startup and they actually ran an experiment using Optimizely to try to get more people to click on that big orange button. They started off with what most startups have on their website, which it says, “Free Trial.” Everything else is the same, it says, “Free Trial, 14 days. No credit card required.” They ran an experiment where they changed the two words, the words “Free Trial” to “Try it Free,” which is what it says today. In this case, the improvement they saw was a 15 percent lift in clicks, a 15 percent lift in signups and a much more effective way of getting people to actually follow through on their funnel. This is an interesting lesson here, which is you can generalize this to say, if you want somebody to do something on your website, tell them to do it. ‘Try it free’ is a verb, it’s like a sentence. You’re telling them, ‘Try it free. Just do it. Click it.’ ‘Free Trial,’ you’re not telling them what to do. That was a very interesting insight for this example.

Andrew: People from the Mixergy audience submitted their websites so that we could learn how to apply these ideas to actual sites. Here’s one called Content Spree. What would they do, based on what you just taught?

Dan: Content Spree’s actually a pretty good website. I think they have an opportunity here to actually improve the effectiveness of the two buttons down there on the left-hand side. It takes awhile to understand what they do, it seems like it’s a marketplace for content and they have two different audiences here. What I would recommend to them is actually try different calls to action that reduce the barrier to actually engaging with their product. For example, the “Start a Project” call to action feels like a big investment of one’s time. To start a project sounds like you’re going to have to go through lots of steps afterwards. But if you actually click it you realize it’s just a simple form afterwards. It turns out it actually seems like you can do it right away and just sort of start it for free. I would actually change that to, or test various versions of that button. Even as simple as, you know, get writing help free. Or get started today. Something that’s much lighter weight, doesn’t feel like you’re investing a lot of time. And is a simple way for people to understand whether that button is for them or not. Given that they have two different audiences.

Andrew: What about the idea that there are two, in fact let me bring this page back up, the idea that there are two calls to action here and the video. How do you feel about having a button that says find work and one that says start a project? Should it be unified?

Dan: I think it’s a challenge. I think part of it is that you’re asking a lot of the visitor to your website. You’re asking them to understand what you do as a business which is already in and of itself ambiguous. The other thing is you’re asking them to self identify which of the things you want from that business. In this case are you looking to find work or are you looking to actually get people to be a freelance writer for you?

I would actually suggest actually having two separate landing pages. Don’t actually force the issue on the home page. Have a landing page that’s entirely tailored to the experience of a potential write who’s a freelancer. And have a website that’s tailored entirely to the business that wants to hire that. If you frame it in those two different personas you can do a much better job of actually determining what’s the best thing to show a person on that particular page and have one clear call to action.

Andrew: OK, another site here from a viewer is Libertyville Dental Associates. What do you recommend for them? Let me zoom in.

Dan: Fortunately, Libertyville Dental Associates has a lot of room for improvement. Their website feels very much like a yellow pages listing. Which might work well in the yellow pages but doesn’t translate well online. The lesson here is words matter. If you look at the main call to action at the top it seems like what they really want you to do is to give them a phone call. It’s unclear because you don’t see that right away but they have their phone number at two different places. There’s no real other conversion event besides a phone call. I think what they actually really need to do is focus on telling people to call them. Having just a simple call to action that says call us today for a consultation. Or special deals if you call this week.

Give a reason to make a phone call and then tell people you want them to do that. Then make it very clear what the phone number is. The tag at the top there that says only $2,995 actually feels almost like an error or a warning. It comes up in a yellow box with red text which isn’t really welcoming. It’s not a call to action. Again, you’re saying what it is and not telling people what you want them to do.

Andrew: I see, OK. Emphasize a call to action. Use simple, clear language to express it. We saw that here. The call to action is the phone number but it’s really small. And we see it in this page. Let’s do one other one, quickly, from the audience and then we’ll move on to the next big idea. This is What Does Your Start Up Do, how can they make it simpler?

Dan: This one I really enjoy because my biggest question when I came to this website is what does this start up do? It seems like what they actually do is they help your conversions by creating a video. I do think they have an opportunity to improve the language on this page. The first big red flag to me is the fact that I think it has basically four question marks in the page right now. There’s the big tagging at the left. There’s the play question mark. Does your start up need a video question mark. What does your start up do question mark. Just from a sort of gestalt or the immediate reaction a visitor has coming to a website, having a bunch of question marks is not the most confidence inspiring reaction you get. Because you end up having more questions in your head than answers.

I would recommend, actually, making it very clear what they’re doing. In fact I think the more important thing here is that first sentence at the top. Boost your conversions with video. In some ways I think part of the challenge here is the name of their business is WDYSD, which stands for What Does Your Start Up Do. At the end of the day I would highly recommend removing the question marks and then focusing their call to action on what they have right now, which is good. Boost your conversions with video, which is very benefit oriented and a clear description of what they offer.

Andrew: OK. Great feedback. Let’s go on to the big board. The next one is you want us to focus on the call to action. Let me see where my notes are on that. There we go. Test differently out of focus on the call to action, explore before you refine. And you have an example from this site, ABC Family. Their new video page increased engagement but how much?

Dan: By 600%. So they learned a lot using optimizing on this page. They realized that what might work well in traditional media, on ABC Family, the television network, doesn’t necessarily translate well online. And so they ran several experiments and one of the things they learned was that what people were actually looking for when they come to their website is to catch up on episodes they’ve missed in the past. They’re not looking for an all new show they hadn’t seen before. And so that’s one of the things they tested and were actually able to dramatically improve engagement.

You can see there at the top, they say shows, watch, schedule, all of those things are new based off of what they realized from looking at the behavior people exhibited on their site, is that people are looking, you can actually if you moused over that there is a direct it’s sort of a navigational hierarchy, find the show you’re looking for, watch the entire episode of what you want and in some ways actually, one of the more interesting lessons learned here is that it kind of went counter to one of the things I shared earlier.

Earlier I told you if you want somebody to do something, tell them to do it. They actually ran an experiment, separate from this experiment that had this 600% increase, they ran a separate experiment, where all they tested was the phrase full episodes versus watch episodes and my gut would have said that watch episodes would have actually performed better but as it turns out because people just wanted to get the full episode that they hadn’t seen before the phrase full episodes increased the click rate by 10%, they increased the view through rate by 10% and for them, most importantly, increased the number of ads they showed during the television show by 10%.

Andrew: Sorry, actually, that part I didn’t get. So what you’re saying if full episodes increased, why is it that when I am looking at the site right now, why doesn’t it have a button for full episodes right now?

Dan: This is lower on the page. This is if you go to this particular episode.

Andrew: Oh, I see.

Dan: See it says full episode right there. In the past it said watch episodes and, again, this is another thing that was really surprising the impact of the seemingly small change. What it really resonated with was the fact that the words you use need to match what the people are looking for on your site. And the better you can do trying to describe and show what people are looking for the more effective you are going to be at converting them into visitors and into customers.

Andrew: By the way, you have ABC Family as a client?

Dan: Yeah.

Andrew: They increased they’re conversions or their engagement by that much or by using Optimizely?

Dan: Yes. And they have been very generous, we get free trips to Disneyland whenever we go down to LA.

Andrew: Really?

Dan: Yeah.

Andrew: Wow. All right, let’s go on to a future success story. Help Juice, doing very well, he wants to know what he can do based on what you just said, testing layout and focusing on the call to action. Let me zoom out, so that we can see his page a little bit better. This is what the site is.

Dan: So in this case, their website is pretty good. I think they tried to make an emphasis on the start your 30 day free trial. I think the bigger lesson that I want to impart with this particular website is to sort of expand before you refine. Which is the idea that if you just take your existing website and make small changes to it, small tweaks, you’ll really only get to a local maximum and I think this website has an opportunity to expand, basically try dramatically different layouts, figure out the bigger sort of macro design and user experience that sort of works the best and then once you’ve expanded then you can refine and then you can take small changes and sort of incrementally get better.

And in doing that, you really explore the entire solution space and have a better understanding at what works best for converting your visitors into customers. In this case it looks like they have an opportunity, they have a very visual website, I think they have an opportunity to change the layout pretty dramatically, I would recommend rearranging the page, maybe focusing on making the customers and testimonials more prominent. And actually just removing the screen shots and just giving one clear call to action. And really this is a good opportunity, you have good content, move it around, change the layout, and see what works best, then start refining.

Andrew: I was going to ask you what’s an easy way to do all that and, of course, it’s Optimizely. Because when I submitted my site to you, and we’ll see my site later on in the program, my concern was, I don’t want Dan telling me to do all this work that I could never get done because I have all this other stuff to do. I’d like to increase my conversion rate, but I also have to take care of my customers, make sure they’re happy. I also have to take care of my employees. There are all these other things to do, and I was asking, what’s a simple way to do it?

Actually, usually using Optimizely, we could move stuff around very easily and make these adjustments. In Emil’s case of Helpjuice, if you’re telling him to change the whole site, where can you get other templates that he can get to try out different designs? Is there a place he can go where you can just keep going through a bunch of different designs and seeing which one works, and then use Optimizely to optimize it?

Dan: Yeah. There are a couple options. In fact, in this case the hard part is actually generating the content in the first place and being able to actually have good visual and text content to use. Just removing and moving things around in Optimizely, and I’ll show this later, is actually very easy.

It’s a question of coming up with those ideas for what to move around. One thing that you can do, in fact, we’re doing this today with the Optimizely homepage, is to go to 99designs and submit your homepage for a contest to have people sort of come up with new ideas for it. In that, you actually can get a really good idea of some just dramatically different layouts.

The folks on 99designs are actually quite good at helping you think outside the box, because one of the biggest challenges businesses have is they get too invested with their existing solution. So, they don’t really think sort of laterally around, what are the different options out there? So, that’s a great source for inspiration.

Andrew: I see. All right. That’s where you guys are going at Optimizely.

Dan: We’re doing it today. The Optimizely homepage is up for redesign on 99designs right now.

Andrew: Cool. I’ve got it up on the screen because we’re going to be talking about them, I think, later on. All right. On to the big board. This is the one that I butchered, and you saw the board and you said, “Hey, wait. Before we even start, fix that.” Saying less is more, get rid of text, images, or even field-on forms that will improve your bottom line. Sorry, or even field-on forms, it will improve your bottom line.

Dan: Yeah.

Andrew: You gave us an example of this company. Let me bring that company up and show it to the audience. There it is. What is this site, and how did they do that?

Dan: I think this will really resonate with your audience, because this is a great example of how something in the past would have been decided using the Hitler Syndrome. That was actually something they were actually able to improve using basically a simple experiment.

First, let me explain what they do. They’re purpose is, it’s a start-up in the Northeast that helps people report issues in the neighborhood and then the city comes in and fixes them. They have a pretty small team. They’ve built this really interactive, dynamic map that every time somebody reports an issue, it jumps around on the map and shows you where those things are.

This is the kind of thing engineers got really excited about, because, oh, this is a cool visual way to show what we do. In fact, they wanted to try to prove that this was a good idea, and so they said, “All right. Let’s just compare it to a simple boiler plate, simple sentence with a simple form field.”

It turns out, they were really surprised to find what you’re showing us today, improved engagement over this thing that they had built by 8%. It actually improved it. What they thought would have actually been much worse than what they actually built, turns out to be better than what they would have spent a ton of time creating.

The lesson really here is less is more. It’s tempting to want to fill up your site with a lot of interactive, dynamic, fast-moving content, but at the end of the day, you’re competing just like everyone else is with the visitor’s back button.

If they come to your website and they don’t know what you’re doing, and they don’t understand what they need to do when they come to your website, they’re going to hit back and move on to the next thing that they’re doing. This is a great example of less is more.

Andrew: That’s a problem that I often have. If I feel that anyone might be confused, I add text to explain it.

Dan: Yeah.

Andrew: Then, if I feel like that’s too much, then I call attention to that text somehow. What you’re saying is, “Dude, just cut it out. See if you can shorten it.” This is really simple. This is almost like a Google homepage.

Dan: Yeah.

Andrew: It’s that simple.

Dan: Maybe it is because it sort of resembles a Google homepage, people are actually used to this design so they get comfortable with it.

Andrew: All right. Let’s take a look at one of our members who submitted a site. This is Petro Vera. This is not their homepage, but where the form that they want people to use when they request a quote. What do you think of this?

Dan: This is an interesting site. I do think that a couple small things they can do is, you know, in this particular forum, you get two by clicking offers from their homepage. I do think that, actually, if they made this forum, a light box that appeared on every other page where they linked to them, they’re also going to be more likely to get people to fill it out. But, in mind with a certain tactic here, that less is more, as much as you can, reduce the number of fields on this form. It’s shocking how directly it correlates, the number of form fields on a form, and the conversion rate of people filling out that form. Especially anything that’s optional.

Unless you really need it on your form, there’s no benefit to you, and you’re only reducing the number of people who fill out that form. If there are things that are really critical, the best solution is to split them up into multiple steps, because people…psychologically, once they’ve finished the entire step, they’re much more likely to follow through than if they fill out half a form. They’re much more likely to abandon it than if they filled out one page of multi-step process. You can look at Survey Monkey as a great example of that.

Andrew: This is the homepage. You’re saying, as soon as they click the free price quote, you suggest that this pops up on the page and…How do you know what…I guess I know how to cut back. It’s hard to say when it’s your own company, but in this case, ask for the phone number, ask for the name. You don’t even need to know the best time to call, you can figure that out later. The budget, you can talk to them on the phone and ask about that.

Dan: All right. And this is the kind of thing, too, that if you’re having trouble coping with having to remove form fields, just tell yourself, “I’m just going to run a simple experiment. Let’s just deal with the trade-off. Let’s run 20% of our topic. Give them a form without a bunch of these fields and see how that affects your conversion rate. If you realize that you’ve doubled your conversion rate, it’s going to be much more palatable to you to say, “Well, let’s nix the fields we don’t need.”

Andrew: All right. Here’s another person…oh, it didn’t come up. Let’s move on to this one. It’s probably because I was trying to bring up too many tabs at once, as you can see on the screen. Let’s go to this one fore now: restaurantengine.com. What do you think of that?

Dan: So, they have a great website. Good, clear action; good [xx] on the top. It’s immediately clear what they do. The recommendation that I have to them is to focus on what they are actually doing really well, which is this cold action [SP] at the top. If you scroll down, you actually realize this page is pretty gigantic, they’ve got a lot of stuff going on. They have a bunch of texts down below, and I would love to see the impact of running a simple experiment where they just compare what they have today with just, maybe the [xx] image at the top, and that’s it at all, and see how that impacts the number of people who convert on start your website.

Andrew: So, you’re saying to get rid of the testimonials, maybe get rid of the powerful website features, maybe get rid of the integrated social media, all that just to have… [SS]

Dan: It’s very easy to test. Exactly. Very easy to test. I think their video does a good job of explaining what they do, all your going to do is, by having people scroll down, all your going to do is have it more likely that people will not come back to the top and actually take the callback one. Just to see if that works. I think there are, you know, it’s nice they have a call to action at the very bottom, that might be an encouraging way to get people to convert, but again, it’s surprising to see…I’m sure they put a lot of work into this website, because it looks really beautiful, but you need to be willing to accept that, sometimes, less is more, and you’d be more effective at turning visitors into customers if you nix things on the range.

Andrew: OK. And it looks like the other sites are dirtydog [SP], but for some reason, it’s not coming up right now. So, let’s go on with this right now. Anything else on this topic, before we move on to the next big idea?

Dan: I think the last thing I’ll say about this topic is that “less is more” is universally applicable, not just to form fields, but to design, to visual interface, to everything that’s on your website. If you think about the trade-off between having something on your website and having something you want to click…if you want somebody to click something on your website, just get rid of the thing that’s not what you want to click. They’re more likely to click on the thing you want.

Andrew: I was just on with Jake[SP], and of course your camera, for some reason, on my screen just keep adjusting, so [??]

Dan: I think it wants to go widescreen so you can see our beautiful new office behind me.

Andrew: Yeah, congratulations on the new office.

Dan: Thanks. Yeah, we just moved to the top floor of a new building down here. It’s an old building, but a new office. [??].

Andrew: Let me pan around, just a little bit here, using my technology…see if it works. There, I’m looking over your shoulder.

Dan: That’s a beautifully optimized [??], and you can see on the other side we’ve got our [??]…

Andrew: There you go.

Dan: …Our nice little lounge area.

Andrew: You guys are just crushing it. I don’t know what I can say about how big you got, especially compared to competitors. This won’t go up today, so is there something you can say about how big you are?

Dan: Sure, yeah. We’re thrilled to announce that we very recently…there it goes again, widescreen again…we’re really thrilled…

Andrew: You’re going to have to keep working with that, like me. Now it’s time to just stick with CNN…

Dan: We’re thrilled to announce that we recently surpassed Google Website Optimizer. Now, we’re the fastest growing A/B testing tool in the world and this is according to BuiltWith, which is a service that surveys the top ten [??] websites, which is really exciting for us because, as I mentioned in the introduction, we had used Google Website Optimizer in the Obama campaign and constantly had this pain point of requiring a developer to be involved, of requiring some engineer to actually create the experiments. Now that we’ve actually gotten into a market that was originally really started in Google and evangelized this A/B testing for the masses, in most startups that you probably talk to, like three or four [??], Google will get into their market and crush them. We did the opposite. We joined a market that Google was already in and now we’ve beaten them. Today we’re announcing we raised another round of funding to go after [??] and we’re really excited to become the largest website optimization platform in the world.

Andrew: Congratulations. In such a short period of time, too. On to the big board and let’s get more people improving their conversions based on what you’ve learned. Next big idea is, Modernize Your Design. This is where the site that I brought up earlier comes in. Modernize your design so it doesn’t look like it’s from the 80s and you say put it on 99 Designs, which I showed earlier. Have you bought anything from 99 Designs yet? Let me bring them up.

Dan: We did. Our original logo came from 99Designs. The one that we use today, that’s on our homepage, and our original homepage design came from 99. We’ve since redesigned it several times and we’ve optimized it as well, but we’re big fans of 99 Designs. It’s a relatively inexpensive way for you to get a lot of creative input and for those who aren’t familiar with the model, you as a business or as a website can put your website or logo up for a contest and people around the world will compete to try to improve the design of your website. You only pay when you find a design you like and you want to use it. It’s a great way to outsource a design and bring your website up to a modern look and feel people have been accustomed to.

Andrew: I understand the bigger point, but what I’m curious about is why you specifically say 99Designs. I wanted to see if you guys had a relationship with them. There’s no affiliate connection there, there’s no relationship, as far as I can tell.

Dan: The co-founder of 99Designs is an adviser to the company, but we certainly don’t get any kickbacks for sending customers his way.

Andrew: Let’s bring up someone’s site from the audience. I hate to do this, but this is the example that you came up with. What are you [??] on their site?

Dan: They had a lot of things going for them, but the biggest challenge on this website is the reaction people will get looking at this when they’re used to seeing sites like the restaurant site you showed earlier where there’s a very clear compelling call to action, a greater visual, very clear this is for the iPhone, this is for the laptop. I think that the design of this, it lacks. I’m not a professional designer but I think the colors are definitely dated. The layout, there’s tons of text. Even the small things, if you see that free seven day trial badge over there, the background of that is white, but the background of the page is a slightly darker gray. Small things like that can have a big psychological impact on the way people perceive how serious you are as a business. I would recommend, this is an example of where it makes sense to go from the beginning and have 99 Designs, or any other contractor, designer you want take a fresh stab and try to improve the visual design of this page.

Andrew: I’m not sure people can see this so I’ll give them the website. It’s HireYourVirtualAssistant.com where you can see this. Fair point. Anything else on this topic before we go on to the big board and the camera again. Here we go. Take it around your office.

Dan: That sounds great. I do think it’s something that most websites probably can get a lot of value from, so it’s no harm in putting up a contest.

Andrew: Next big idea, Quit Wasting Prime Real Estate. We are wasting prime real estate? Tell your user what you want them to do right away. Anything else is distracting and taking away from prime real estate.

Dan: That’s right. This is the thing. There is this notion of above the fold on a website and I wouldn’t overemphasize the idea of above the fold. You don’t need to put everything you want somebody to do on the top of your site, but I do think that actually being very ruthless with every square inch of the top part of your site will pay dividends to you. And you can look at a company like Amazon, they actually optimize per dollar per square inch of their site. And they know that the real estate at the top of their site in terms of the opportunity of dollar per square inch is very, very high. And so they put the things that maximize the value to them as a business, recommendation, other products people liked, who’s looking at this, all at the top of their site because they know that’s the most likely place people will look when they come to your site.

Andrew: And a good example of that that you gave us earlier is Shopify [sp].

Dan: Yes, Shopify does a great, great job of this. Shopify gives you everything you need to know about them in a clear, unambiguous language, with a clear call to action. They’re telling people what you want them to do. Create your eCommerce store today with Shopify. They give you a form to do it right away, you don’t have to click to a separate page, there’s a video if you want a quick introduction, it’s tremendous. And the nice thing about how they’ve done this is they’ve then visually separate that, everything you need to know about Shopify at the top with the rest of the page where you can get additional information.

So if you scroll down you can still get more, you can get detailed information, you can validation that they’re in big publications, you can get a little bit of testimonial quotes, but you never need to scroll down. My guess is if they did the numbers on this and looked, probably a sizable percentage of their customer’s today might have never scrolled down on their homepage and they sign up right from the home page, got started and all they need to know is directly about the fold. So the lesson is really to maximize the value of your real estate.

Andrew: I’m going to say, on my screen though, I love Shopify but I’m surprised that the questions button is right above the button for create your own store.

Dan: That’s true.

Andrew: Had you noticed that?

Dan: I hadn’t noticed but that’s definitely a bad thing for them to do.

Andrew: I wonder if it’s just the screen that I’m using right now because I have never noticed that before. All right, but their using their real estate properly because everything that you need is basically, your telling me, is above the fold, I don’t have to scroll to do anything.

Dan: That’s exactly right.

Andrew: All right. Let’s take a look at someone from our audience and see how they do it. What do you think of this site? Barefoot Wallets.

Dan: They have a cool product and they are a sort of traditional eCommerce company and they don’t really tell people what you want them to do. You come to this page and you have a sense of what they do but you don’t really know what their selling, and it’s a real shame because their logo takes up probably 25% at the top of the page, they have this hero quick nab that’s been through a bunch of different products but there’s not real call to action. There’s no ‘Hey, learn more about why our Barefoot Wallets are better than traditional wallets’. Whatever it is that makes them unique doesn’t come across on the first thing you see when you come to their page.

And so, here I think they have an opportunity, again this sort of fits in with less is more, just feature one of your most popular products on your homepage, explain why it’s valuable, get somebody to engage with your website, click on that, learn more and then from that you can get people to look at other products on your site. It’s overwhelming to see all of these things going through so fast and my guess is that the vast majority of the people who visit this website hit the back button and go back to where they came from.

Andrew: All right. Back to the big board, let me bring it up here. There it is. Next big idea is show off benefits before you sell because customers want to know what’s in it for them. Benefits, benefits, benefits, I keep hearing that. You got an example of someone who does that well. Let me bring them up here, who are these guys and why do they do it well?

Dan: New Relic is a great company. They offer application performance management. And you wouldn’t know that from their homepage, which is actually OK, because what they’re actually selling on their homepage is the solution, it’s the benefit. The real benefit is what’s in the small text there, a slow app can kill your business, New Relic shows you what to fix. That’s the most compelling benefit but what they realize is who they’re selling to is mostly engineers, they’re IT guys, they’re people who don’t want to be sold to and so they actually get around, actually frankly they can convince people as one of their benefits is hey, just try New Relic and you’ll get a free T-shirt and their T-shirts pretty cool, it says data nerd and you can actually wear it around as a sort of badge of honor and that, I think, is a very compelling way to sell their product because they don’t come up, they’ve created a new category, application parts management, APM.

The way they sell their business to investors is probably very different than the way they sell to customers and I think that’s smart because you come to this website, you immediately see a benefit, well I get a free T- shirt, that’s a benefit, and the more you think about, you know what, a slow app could kill my business, let me learn more and engage with what they do. And so they have a tremendously high conversion rate on this, their new rocker customer’s of ours and we’re new customers of theirs and I think they’ve done a tremendous job of really convincing people what their benefits are directly on their homepage.

Andrew: Would you say in their case that they should explain what the product is somewhere up higher than this section right here, a slow app can kill your business, (?) shows you how to fix it?

Dan: I do think making that more prominent is something that they should probably consider. I do think the bigger lesson here is not so much that they made that less prominent than the free T-shirt because I’m sure they actually doing the numbers, I’m sure they found that offering a free T- shirt does a tremendous job of getting people to convert but part of the biggest benefit and the biggest reason to learn something from this is that this is a benefit, this isn’t a feature. They aren’t talking about oh yeah we have cool graphs and time series data and we monitor ever sequel command that your back end does, they’re talking about the benefit. The benefit is we will make sure that you can understand and fix a slow app because a slow app can kill your business. That’s really, really important.

Andrew: All right, and one of our users sent over this site, EasyJuiceRecipes.com and actually, this I think is the page that leads to this form, and this is the form that they want help with.

Dan: So and I think in your question you sort of, you’ve given away the challenge here. Is this page it’s not really clear what the benefit is, you don’t really know what they’re selling. And I think it’s admirable that they’ve taken the web 1.0 blink tag and transformed it into the web 2.0 aero-blink tag, and I think that definitely attracts people’s attention to the form. But the reality is I think they are trying to get away with gimmicks and tricks that tries to convince somebody to actually fill out their name and email address but the more effective way to do this is just convincing them the benefits of doing so.

And once somebody psychologically agrees that the benefits are something that they want, they’ll do whatever they need to fill out the form and submit. So here, I think they can get rid of a lot of the stuff on the website, maybe even get rid of those arrows, focus on what they’re actually offering as a benefit to the person who is actually signing up and I think that will dramatically improve the conversion rate on this page.

Andrew: All right, and a benefit that is, let’s read this, discover how to easily make more than 100 delicious and nutritious fruit and vegetable juices without the hassle of flipping through countless books and magazines and websites. So is this enough of a benefit that if they made it more prominent and didn’t have the arrow that you’d be happy with it?

Dan: I would say they could improve that by saying make 100’s of delicious and nutritious fruit juices. Get people hooked, get them to understand too is this even the right page for me. Once they read that I think chances are people are more likely to read that than that full on big sentences and once they’ve read that you can baby step them into the other benefits of well, actually the big benefit is now you don’t have to flip through all these old countless books and catalogs, you can do something that traditionally would have taken you a long time you can do it much more quickly but the challenge of having so much text there, it’s much more challenging to get somebody actually go through and read this whole big paragraph.

Andrew: So again, it’s also less is more, that less text will get more people to understand what the message is here?

Dan: That’s exactly right.

Andrew: All right, on to the big board and the next big idea is humanize your site. Humanize your site to increase rapport with visitors, be more visual. And you’ve got an example of someone who learned to do that well, let me bring up that site. Now actually this is my second time coming on this site, actually more than second time, I remember the first time it was different and I’ve got a screen shot of what that looks like. Should I bring that up or do you want to see this?

Dan: This is great and I can talk about what they’ve done because they’re one of our first big customers after the earthquake in Haiti and in fact they weren’t really customers, we worked with them pro bono, but they were able to actually dramatically improve the effectiveness of their fundraising online by really focusing on humanizing what they were doing. And they ran a series of experiments after the earthquake in Haiti to try to increase the amount of money they were able to raise for Haiti in relief. They started off, and they have actually changed their layout quite a bit, they started off with a really simple donation page, a page that just had a form, a bunch of form fields, some text and description and just by adding an image of relief workers working in Haiti they were able to improve the dollars per visitor, which is the average amount of money they raised per person coming to their website by 8%. So it’s 8% more money they’re raising for every visitor to their site, just by adding a picture that humanizes what they do online.

Andrew: Here’s an example of what I saw then. This is what you see when you go in for the first time or if you use incognito on Chrome and, again, it says, ‘Donate now,’ but there’s also a picture of a woman who I’m guessing is a worker there? Am I right? This is an example of what you’re talking about?

Dan: This particular image might be different, but I think this is a perfect example of showing what you’re actually doing by helping thousands of [??] rebuild, you actually see the face of the person, either the relief worker or the person you’re helping directly. By humanizing it, even just by putting a human face on it, I think there’s a psychological response people have, especially when what you’re offering is a very human thing. Here they’re not offering a cool new gizmo or gadget, what they’re offering you is to help another human being. By humanizing your site, you’ll be much more effective at getting somebody to connect with that message and then convert into a donor.

Andrew: I think I saw it one other place. I saw it a couple of places on the site, but this might be another example of it. Let’s see if I can bring it up here. Basically, when you hit the Donate button, there is, as you said, a form and also a photo of one of the workers at the top. I’ve got so many browser tabs up. Actually, when I opened them up in preparation for this session, Chrome said, “Are you sure you want to open up all these?” I had to say, “Yeah. I think I am.” Let’s see what happens. Loaded. Thank you, Chrome. “Each dollar you donate today will help to further sustain economic development in Haiti.” [??]. When you say humanize, you say bring the person in who you’re talking about.

Dan: Exactly. It makes a tremendous impact and, in this case, for the Clinton Bush Haiti Fund, it made a huge impact, but even for businesses that don’t support or do these noble, charitable causes, having a human face to what you do online really connects with visitors to your website.

Andrew: We even found that in courses, the usual way to do this stuff is to not have video and I can understand why. Video’s a big pain. There’s a lot there to keep track of, different video cameras, which sometimes do the thing that today our cameras are doing. Also, there’s a lot of movement, but what I found is when we just show the face of the person who’s teaching, the audience likes the session better. They connect with it better, they remember it more. As much of a pain as it is, we decided to keep it in.

Dan: I’m flattered. I’ll take that as a [??] to say that my face has a high conversion rate. Thank you.

Andrew: It’s [??] more than mine. Let’s do that. Going over to someone from our audience, this is a site that we got from one of our viewers, one of the fans at Mixergy. It’s Wealth Care for Women and your advice for this site is what?

Dan: It’s humanize it. This is a perfect example. In fact, I think [??] the opposite here. This is Wealth Care for Women. It’s personal, financial advice for divorcees, widows and other independent women. If you take a look at this picture, you see a picture of a man. You see the guy in the bottom right hand corner, the About plaque [SP], nothing against him, but if this is Wealth Care for Women, the first thing you should see is a picture of a woman, not a picture of Russ over in Atlanta. This is a great example of really trying to understand what somebody is looking for on your website and trying to connect with them on a very human level. By humanizing this website, it’ll be much more effective at connecting with its audience.

Andrew: That makes perfect sense, especially seeing what this site did. Absolutely. Just a photo of a woman here who’s helped, up at the top. On to the big board. Let me make sure that I increase my own conversions here. Now, the big board. Clarify what you’re signing up for, is what you’re saying. Clarify what they’re signing up for. This site.

Dan: I definitely think that site resonates well with that call to action. I’m going to show you the experience of creating an experiment using Optimizely and really try to bring home the point I made earlier that Optimizely’s designed for anybody, not just for engineers or technical folks. I’m going to show you the full experience. To get started you go to Optimizely.com and enter the URL you want to test into our homepage. When you do that, that will load Optimizely’s visual editor where you can actually see the page directly in context with our tool.

At the top, we have controls to manage the experiment and below we have the site that you want to optimize. In this case, this is a sign up form to confirm your email address, if you want to subscribe to Mixergy. As I move my mouse around, you can see there are different parts of the page that got highlighted and if I click on any part of the page, I can actually make changes to them. Here, I’m going to click on “Confirm your email to listen in,” and I get a series of options. In this case, I’m just going to, I say, “Edit element. Edit text,” and say, “Join the community of founders” and have a slightly different call to action, in this case, a call to action that might resonate to what people are looking for in your community and the fact that they’re looking to hear from founders, and with just a simple click of my mouse, I can create a variation of my website. I can quickly compare it to the original page and I’m up and running.

If I want to actually start this experiment, now, in less than 60 seconds, all I need to do is copy and paste this one line of JavaScript to my website. This line of JavaScript never changes and it’s unique to your account, so once it’s on your site, you never have to go back and pull it off and re-implement it and re-instrument your site, which is a great way for non-technical people to get this up and running and then drive the process after that. This is how ABC and Starbucks and SalesForce is able to actually give the power of testing directly to marketing, directly to product management without requiring IT to be part of the process every step of the way. I’m going to show you a couple more examples of some things you can do. I’m going to create a couple of variations.

Andrew: Specifically, what would you suggest that I do with this site?

Dan: The first thing that comes to mind is the smallest sentence here that says, “Don’t worry. If we spam, our founders would kick our butts before you do,” and then this little No Spam icon. What I found, we’ve worked with over 2000 customers who had over 60,000 experiments run through Optimizely, any time that refers saying you’re not going to do something, or don’t worry about the thing, the first thing people do is worry about that thing. By saying you’re not going to spam them, the first thing I’m worried about is, you’re going to spam me. What I would suggest is, using Optimizely you can click on this image and say, “Edit Element,” and say “Change Image.” I happen to have an image on my desktop that might actually work a bit better.

In this case, this image that was on my desktop is a simple image, very similar to your old image except for now it says, “Join the Community,” instead of “We won’t spam you,” [??] say you won’t spam. The image is there, the button’s the same, everything else is pretty much the same, but instead of saying, “I won’t spam you,” you tell people to, “Join the community.” What that’s done is actually uploaded that from my computer. I posted it on [??] on your behalf using Optimizely and so you don’t have to worry about a content management system. You don’t have to worry about underlying asset libraries, you can do that all directly in our editor. The other thing I recommend, and this is something that we do pretty well, it’s very unique in our visual editor, is that we allow you to dynamically rearrange parts of the page.

This is one of the biggest challenges with WYSIWYG editing is that the parts of your page are structurally bound by the HTML. Here, one hypothesis I have is that these quotes down below are actually really compelling and I want those to be much higher above the fold. I can actually click on this and say, “Rearrange.” What this will do is allow me to actually rearrange these elements. You see as I’m dragging, they’re rearranging dynamically on the page. I can see the container they’re in. I can see the other elements and now it will also dynamically move the other elements lower. You can actually take your page and, as I said earlier, expand before you refine. Really move things around, rearrange the layout, remove parts of the page, really visually change the experiences of the people who come to your website.

There, you can see, with just a couple of clicks I have the original page, I have the call to action, “Join the Community of Founders.” I have variation two, I say, “Join the Community,” and variation three, where I make the testimonials more prominent. These are all really good examples of things that you might want to test, but I think even bigger point that you made earlier is this is a great opportunity to use the services of 99Designs or even just to ask your audience too. Say, “Hey.” Actually, what you should do, Andrew, this would be great. Tell your audience to go to Optimizely, tell them to put this website in there and then create variations of this website, directly optimize and send them to you.

The way you can do that is actually, each one of these variations has a unique preview URL and so this actual URL that I just created of this new design, your audience can just take this URL and send it to you and you can directly see, on this particular site, what are the different things that you can do. It’s a great way to crowdsource using your audience.

Andrew: If you were going to suggest one thing, it’s to say, actually you’re suggesting a couple of things. You’re saying, get rid of the No Spam and just let people join the community and a call to action shouldn’t be, “Confirm your email to listen in,” it should be, “Join the community.”

Dan: That’s right.

Andrew: That’s because you’re saying, be clear about what people are signing up for. Tell them what it’s all about here.

Dan: You might say the tactical, and you’re actually doing this confirm your email address, but people aren’t coming to this page because they really want to [??] their email address. They’re coming just because they want to be part of this community that you’ve built. They’re other entrepreneurs or founders who share their secrets and their stories. I think that’s really what will resonate with people. So, from a message point of view, that’s probably more compelling.

Andrew: OK. All right. So, we’re going to try to do that. We’ll run a couple of experiments, and one thing you’ve told me and you wanted us to make sure to include this disclaimer in this session is you’ve got to test everything. You can’t ever know, but you’ve given us some ideas of what to test, and you’ve told us what’s worked for other people. So, I’ll test this. We’ll see. Will getting people to confirm their email addresses or messaging ads confirm your email address be better than joining your community or vice versa? I’m looking forward to seeing what those results are.

You know what actually, I should come up with another variation or two based on clear benefit, just being very clear about what people are signing up for, but I don’t think we’re doing a good job of that. In fact, can you go to the original page?

Dan: Yeah.

Andrew: I’ll tell you, I basically copied from Noah Kagan when he said confirm your email address. I said, all right, it seems to be working for him. He must have tested it, so I put that on our subscription form. That’s their subscription form that you’re looking at there.

Dan: Yeah. That’s exactly right.

Andrew: It says, confirm your email address instead of sign up. All right. We covered a lot of tactics here, and one thing a member recently told me helps him get a lot of value out of these programs is, he said, “Andrew, I don’t take every single tactic and use it all”, he says. “I just take the one that’s easy, and I start off with that. And then, I might do the next easy one and then the next one and then the next one and the next one.” So, maybe, instead of doing everything that you’ve heard here today, you can find one idea that especially had impact on you. Or maybe, an idea that was especially easy. Pick that one and start with it.

So, maybe, it’s humanizing your site. Remember the example of the site that added a photo of a person on it and how it increased its conversions. Maybe, you remember the concept of less is more. I almost left that out because I didn’t realize how important it was. Dan told me, include it. Maybe, that’s the one you want to start off with. Look at your site and see if there’s any text you can get rid of. See if there are any excess images you can get rid of or maybe it’s… Let me see, one other one, modernizing your design. Whichever it is, it doesn’t matter, pick one, implement it, get the results and then go back and do another and get more results and more results and more results. Along the way, let me know about your progress.

Thanks for being a part of it, and if you want to use Dan’s site to help increase your conversions, it’s just Optimizely.com. Go check it out. Thanks. Bye.

Master Class:
How to get the body you want
(So you can be more productive)
Taught by Adam Gilbert of MyBodyTutor

Report issues here

Master Class:
Health


About the course leader

Adam Gilbert is the founder of mybodytutor.com, the site that helps you stay consistent with your diet and exercise.

Master Class Toolbox

Course Cheat Sheet

Transcript

Download the transcript here

Andrew: This course is about how you can get the body you want and be more productive. The course is led by Adam Gilbert. He is the founder of, there’s the website, mybodytutor.com, the site that helps you stay consistent with your diet and exercise. That’s how they get you results. They keep you consistent.

I’m Andrew Warner, founder of Mixergy, where proven founders like Adam teach. This is what we’re going to be covering today. I want to run through some of the big ideas that we’re going to be covering, including “Find Your Why” and you’re going to see an old friend and how a 6-pack got him more productive. You’re also going to hear us talk about how to find your inner food critic, and when you do it’s going to help you cut out crappy food. We’re going to talk about indulgence, and if you’ve seen people eat crappy food, but still look great and say, “What? Maybe they’re just meant to look great?”

That section I want you to pay attention to, because I think it will explain it and will also explain how you can consistently stick with what Adam is going to talk to you about here today. Now I’m going to talk about texting, how texting can help you stay fit. I know it because a mutual friend of mine, Noah Kagan. Every time I sit down and talk to him, he seems to be texting and doing this, and we’ll talk about why. Adam, let’s bring you up.

Adam, thanks for doing this and as someone who’s seen these programs before you know this is what our audience wants to know. They want to know the before and after. Show me what you’ve been able to do for somebody. So maybe we’ll start with a person who I was mentioning earlier. Let me see if I can bring him up. This guy, our buddy Neville; what happened with him?

Adam: Sure, first off thanks for having me, man. I really appreciate it.

Andrew: Ah, thank you. Thanks for doing this.

Adam: Sure. So Neville, I’ve been a big fan of his blog for a long time and he had contacted me, this was probably a few years ago now, and he does all these crazy experiments. He did this homeless experiment. He does all these fun experiments.

Andrew: Where he decided he was going to sleep on the streets and be homeless for a while?

Adam: Right. It was really interesting. He’s a really interesting guy. He wanted to do an experiment where he’d get a 6-pack in a month. He came to and he was like, “Can you help me with this?” I usually don’t like doing that because I’m not a big believer in event dieting or just doing things short-term. It really is all about the consistency.

So, long story short, I mean I did it with him because I thought it’d be a fun interesting story, and he’s a friend. I was a fan of his, and that’s what the end result was. He looks absolutely amazing. I think the cool thing is very quickly, Nev is an entrepreneur himself, he realized just how powerful eating right and exercising consistently is. Not only is eating right and exercising consistently the key to getting the body you want, it also helps you to feel amazing, helps you to be more productive, helps you think more clearly, helps you be more focused. Nev actually said he was giving two more hours of productive work in a day, and I think that’s when he really changed.

Andrew: Two more hours! Now this we can show a before and after photo of, but two more hours is hard to visualize so I want to emphasize that. Two extra hours of productivity for this guy who loves being productive as it is.

Adam: Right. Right. I think that was a big breakthrough for him, when he realized just how much how we eat and how we exercise really impacts the way we feel. Then it became a question of, or it became a thing where the consistent diet and exercise was the goal that was to feel great. A wonderful side effect became the weight lost and became a 6-pack. You know, I mean, Neville swears by it. He credits me every time he does a lot of work. He really focuses on the diet, and that what I’m there to do.

Andrew: All right, so now that we know it’s possible, it’s not just this. It’s also the extra time. Neville is looking sexy, huh?

Adam: He looks good.

Andrew: He’s looking good. All right, we love Neville, he’s a good friend, but we love ourselves even more. We want to get the same kind of productivity, the same kind of health gains as he did. This is the first thing that you say we need to do, which is find our why. Understand the reason for doing this. In Neville’s case, what was his motivation?

Adam: He originally wanted a 6-pack, so his original goal was looking good, but it very quickly became feeling good. The problem with that is that it’s a very short-term goal, whether it’s getting ready for a wedding, or vacation, or the summer. Those are kind of events, and they’re fleeting and they go away. It’s much more powerful to have a very compelling ‘why’. So if you have a compelling ‘why’, I think for a lot of people especially watching this, it’s, “I want to be better at my business, have more energy, be more productive, be more confident, and I want to be more energized.” Those are great compelling ‘whys’. That’s important because if you don’t have that, it’s going to be hard to make the time, the effort to eat healthfully and exercise.

Andrew: So just saying to myself, “The reason I want to be healthier,” that’s an important enough tactic to keep on the board? Why?

Adam: I would say let’s make it more aspirational. Let’s make it more specific, like why do you want to be healthier. Is it because – you tell me.

Andrew: For me personally, I don’t know what kind of mindset I have, but I want to be more productive. I don’t want to be sluggish during my day and I do know that when I exercise I end up feeling like I can do anything. Hit me with a question, I can answer it. Hit me with a challenge, hit me in the stomach, something, I can take it all on. That’s the feeling that I want.

Adam: Right. And that comes from exercising. I think it’s very easy when we’re busy focusing on a start-up or anything really, we focus on what’s most pressing. Usually, health and fitness is not something that’s very pressing right away. Usually, it’s putting out fires, dealing with your business, dealing with the kids, dealing with family. Health and fitness is the first thing to go when we’re very busy. But my argument, my thesis is that when you focus on that first, everything else is much better.

Andrew: One of the reasons that I’ve wanted to do this course specifically, because this is a little bit out of our scope. But the reason I want to do this and talk about health is because I know when I, in business, was at my most depressed point when sales were going bad, when customers were going out of business, when I was doubting myself in the most vulnerable place possible – business, the one thing I thought I was really good at – I had nothing else. I had nothing else to say, “I’m a good person because.”

Then when I took up exercising, which I didn’t think was part of who I was, I thought that was for other people, I took up exercising and had something I could control completely, I could get better at it completely, and then if I was having a bad day I could watch myself do better and feel better about myself as a result of it. By the way, this camera, what’s happening with your camera, is pretty common with some brand of cameras. This would set me off normally but I had a nice run this morning so I’m feeling pretty good.

Adam: Good. It’s weird that it’s doing that actually, because I have a Mac, so I don’t know why it’s doing that.

Andrew: There we go, now that should work in both directions in regards to what the camera does. OK, do you want to share another set of visuals here from your site?

Adam: Sure. I want to make sure it’s very important to have a compelling ‘why’. What I suggest is really write down a list of five reasons why you really want to be healthy and fit. So whether it’s that you want to have more energy, work better, be more confident, try to be as specific as you possibly can. Try to make it a more lasting goal. For me, my main compelling motivation, it’s why I’ve been able to eat right, which is really 70% of the battle. A lot of people when they’re trying to lose weight, the first thing you hear them say is, “I need to get to the gym more.” But it’s really diet. Diet is 70% of losing weight, it’s that what, why, and how we eat. That’s really what we focus on. Having that compelling why is key. So just make sure you have it.

For me, at the end of the day, as much fun as eating junk food is, and believe me, my favorite food is hamburgers and fries and cookies, I love it, at the end of the day I always do feel better when I eat better. Said another way, I’ve never felt better eating poorly than I have from eating healthfully. So for me, my daily motivation is to feel as good as I possibly can. I talk to my clients. I try to help them with a lot of areas of their life, because really, health and fitness is all encompassing. One of the things I always ask them is, when your life is working really well, when you’re really on point, what three to five things were you doing every day? For me, it’s eating right, exercising, sleeping, and writing. When I do those four things every day, I’m much better able to do everything else. When I drop those critical balls, everything else falls. That’s what I try to help them do. My ?? is that when you focus on your diet and your exercise, you’ll be much better able to do everything else.

Andrew: This is the other visual I had for this section. This is other people that you’ve trained and that have gone through your program, what they look like before and after. Can you give me one example of an especially powerful ‘why’ before we move on to the next tactic?

Adam: I think one of the interesting things for me was when a client approached me, and she was a New York Times best selling diet book author. Clearly, she knows how to lose weight. But she [??] day in and day out and for her, she obviously wanted to get back to where she was and I think she was a little embarrassed because she’s a well known [??]. It’s great. It’s a huge confidence booster to me. This was a few years ago now and she credits my program with being the only one that’s been able to help her, but for her, her compelling why was to get back to where she was when she lost all that weight and wrote that book originally. That was a compelling why.

Andrew: Let’s go back to the big board and move on to the second big tactic, which is to, “Eat lean protein and carbs and complex carbs every three to four hours.”

Adam: This is getting more into the tactics of how to get to where you want to be. I always say this, but it’s really so key. One of my missions is to dispel this myth that there’s a secret to losing weight. That there’s a secret diet, that there is a secret pill or secret food. That is not the case, whatsoever. The secret is consistency. It is so not sexy, but it is so ridiculously effective. Do the right things day in and day out. As I always say, “The key to getting the body you want is eating right, exercising and doing those two things.” The types of foods I found to work really well are lean proteins. I think there’s a slide.

Andrew: Yeah. Here it is.

Adam: Lean proteins. Foods like chicken, turkey, fish, egg whites, cottage cheese, eggs, the yolks are great too, lentils, nut butter. Any lean protein. What we want to do is combine that with a complex carb. It’s very simple. Instead of white bread, we want whole wheat bread. I think there’s another slide I made for you guys, as well. It’s called complex carbs. There you go. Instead of white bread, we want whole wheat bread instead of regular pasta we want whole wheat pasta. Instead of white rice, we want brown rice and other great carbs like oatmeal, quinoa, yams, baked potatoes, sweet potatoes, cream of wheat. What we want to do is create meals that consist of lean proteins and complex carbs and eat those every three to four hours.

The reason why eating every three to four hours is so important, besides keeping our blood sugar stable, which is really the whole science behind it is when you go longer than that without food, your blood sugar drops, then when you eat, your blood sugar spikes. When your blood sugar spikes, that causes [??] excess insulin in your blood. The more practical reason is, I certainly know myself from my other clients, when you’re really hungry, when you’re ravenous, you’re usually not craving fish and brown rice. You’re usually craving sugary, salt, the emphatic foods.

Andrew: Yeah.

Adam: By eating every three to four hours it really makes it much easier to make good choices.

Andrew: Because we’re not starving and not feeling like, “I got to grab that candy bar. I’ve got to grab something that’s going to be sweet and satisfying this moment.”

Adam: Right. I would say this is a battle between our short-term irrational mind versus our long term rational mind. The hungrier we are, the more ravenous we are the more irrational, the more short term minded we’re going to think.

Andrew: What about vegetables? I’ve got a list here of vegetables to consider.

Adam: Vegetables are the secret to eating a lot. We all eat with our eyes so if you really want to feel full, want to feel more than satisfied, which is what we’re going for, then I would suggest loading up on vegetables. One of the things I do, especially for dinner is I’ll always load up on a salad, [??], or vegetables. Of course, we want to make sure that you’re careful with the dips and dressings because certainly a big bowl of broccoli with loaded cheese on it is not going to be that healthy. You can certainly use the little dips or a little dressing and combining that with the lean protein and complex carbs will really make it much easier to stay with [??]. That’s the whole idea.

One of the things that I was talking about, I have it somewhere, but a lot of people come to me. They tried all these diets, whether it’s the Paleo Diet or a cookie diet of shake diet or grapefruit diet and they all say they worked, but the thing is they worked while they were doing it but, of course, they’re not sustainable. If I eat lettuce and ketchup, I’ll lose weight but that’s not sustainable. You can’t keep that going. My whole belief is why not do something that you could actually stick with for the rest of your life.

That’s why my clients have been so successful and we have the track record we do is because the plan I’m asking my clients to do is very, very practical. It’s very realistic and it’s very doable. A lot of people will say, “I shouldn’t eat carbs. I shouldn’t eat this.” There’s nothing wrong with complex carbs like brown rice or whole wheat bread. The most important thing is that you actually can stick with it. Doesn’t matter if you do a diet for two weeks, lose however many pounds, only to gain it all back. I couldn’t’ care less about that. My goal’s long-term sustainable change.

Andrew: Every three to four hours, you’re saying, I need to take a little bit of lean protein and a little bit of complex carbs. How much?

Adam: What I would do is structure your day around a breakfast, a lunch and a dinner and then, if need be, have a snack in between breakfast and lunch and a snack in between lunch and dinner. Obviously, we don’t want to have large meals every three to four hours, so on a scale of one to five, if one is feeling ravenous and five is feeling stuffed, we want to feel like a three. Satisfied and light. The best way I know of how to do that is to really focus on eating slowly because it really takes our brain at least 20 minutes to process what we’ve eaten and, many times, I certainly know you’re a very busy guy, I’m a busy guy. We have to eat quickly and if we eat something in five minutes, we’re going to still feel hungry. Try to savor your food as much as possible. Try to put your fork and your knife down between every bite, take a sip of water between every bite. The more you can eat slowly and savor your food, the better.

Andrew: Here’s what I’ve been eating today. I was in such a rushed place I had some fat free cottage cheese, can you see that? Usually I would make toast with this, but I got those from CVS downstairs, just bread. This is no good, you’re saying? No dairy, milk, bread?

Adam: That’s rye bread?

Andrew: Yeah. Hearty rye bread. Beefsteak.

Adam: Bread is fine. That’s the thing. Bread is fine. If you’re going to have bread I like to say, ‘Have whole wheat bread, or rye bread is good, or pumpernickel bread is good, or spelt bread.’ You want to stay away from the white bread.

Andrew: I’m fine with that? What about dairy? What about cottage free cheese that I’ve got here?

Adam: Absolutely. Cottage cheese is a great, great source of protein. It’s low in sugar. It’s high in protein and that’s what we’re after. One of the things I find most fascinating is a lot of people come to me and they’ll talk about how they [??] that food and then when they’re actually eating their favorite food they’re just shoveling it into their mouths. What we want to do is really savor it. We want to really appreciate what we’re eating.

Andrew: I actually see it right here on the list. Egg whites and low fat cottage cheese, black beans and we’ll give, of course, this list to everyone who’s watching. Onto the big board then. Next big idea is, you say, next big tactic, “To take inventory on what you currently eat for snacks and meals then substitute the crap with lean protein, complex carbs that you see yourself committing to for five years.”

Adam: I’m all about long-term change here. I couldn’t care less about people who lose 100 pounds only to gain it back. My goal is to help people lose weight and keep it off for the rest of their lives.

Andrew: By the way, Adam, is someone vacuuming behind you?

Adam: No.

Andrew: Maybe, it was a fan or something.

Adam: You know what? It’s my computer. My computer is never adjusted focus [SP], and it’s never made this noise, ever.

Andrew: It happens.

Adam: [??].

Andrew: It’s painful for me but it happens. [??]. Go for it. Anyway, you were saying? Before I rudely interrupted.

Adam: One of the questions I’m a big fan of asking yourselves is, ‘Can I see myself doing this five years from now?’ See all these magazines, the gossip magazines, websites, whatever it is, all these people losing weight and what they’re doing to lose weight is clearly not sustainable. It’s like the person you see all of a sudden out of nowhere they post on Facebook, they show their six pack. Let’s see how that person looks six months from now. Do they still have that six pack? I guarantee nine times out of ten the way they did it was not in a sustainable way. Go into the snacks, what we want to do is, the best way to change a habit is to replace it as opposed [??].

What I would do is try to focus on doing less of something. You’re used to having three cookies, then let’s focus on having two for now. A lot of people try to go all or nothing and the all or nothing mentality meets nothing every single time. Being a perfectionist is not even the goal. It’s not achievable. Really what it is, it’s a defense mechanism to avoid the inevitable of doing the right things day in and day out. Saying I’m going to be perfect and having this out, is really what it does. It gives us an out so that when the discomfort is there we can say, ‘You know what? Screw this. I’m going to start something else. I’m going to start this vicious cycle again and again of doing something else for a little bit.’

Andrew: You had a client who wanted to lose 50 pounds. Can you tell us that story? What happened with that client?

Adam: This is an interesting client. This client was very [??], they were very excited and at first, especially, a lot of people always want to focus on exercise when they want to lose weight. You always hear that, but really diet is 70 percent of the key here. This person was asking me, ‘Should I eat organic blueberries or regular blueberries?’ To me that’s a very high level change that I don’t want to focus on yet. What I wanted to focus on was the candy, or the extra milkshakes, or the extra burgers and focus on the big ones, so to speak, so this way we could build momentum. It’s very important to focus on the big ones. If you’re eating blueberries or if you’re eating salad with a little dressing, that’s great. Don’t focus on that. Focus on where you can really improve. For most people it’s the emotional eating. This is a whole ‘nother topic and something we can get into now or we can get into after, if you want.

Andrew: Emotional eating? Yeah. Tell me about it and then we’ll also talk about these snacks and how they fit in.

Adam: Emotional eating’s really important. I think for guys, you typically think of Samantha from “Sex in the City” or something like that, watching TV eating a pint of [??].

Andrew: Right. I don’t think of myself doing that.

Adam: But guys when they do emotional eating they cringe because they don’t think they do. But we all emotional eat and really what emotional eating is, is eating to change the way we feel. Whether we’re stressed, we’re anxious, we’re sad, we’re frustrated, we’re angry. Whatever it is, we’re eating to change the way we feel and that’s really the key. I care about what you eat but I care more about why you’re eating it. That’s the key because that gets to the root cause of why we’re overeating in the first place, or why we’re eating indulgently in the first place.

Andrew: How do I find out why it is that I go to the vending machine in the middle of the day and get a snack?

Adam: That’s a good question. First I would encourage us to work on some tactics. The first tactic is all about the [??] and I’m a big fan of asking yourself questions because questions help us change our perspective, which is the whole idea. The question I want you to start asking yourself is, ‘Am I hungry or am I eating to change the way I feel?’ By asking yourself this question you realize, ‘Am I physically hungry or emotionally hungry?’ I created a slide for you that has physical hunger versus emotional hunger.

Andrew: Let’s come back. Maybe we come back to that in a moment. I’ve got it later on in the section. I don’t want to interrupt the flow, but I want to keep it all within the confined tactic that it’s going to be discussed in. I took us off track, let’s come back to this. These are the snacks that you’re recommending that when we take a look at the snacks that we eat during the day and we want to substitute good stuff, get rid of the crap and eat good stuff, these are the kinds of things that you want us to consider. Bag of almonds, apples.

Adam: Exactly. Cottage cheese, Greek yogurt, walnuts. Those are great snacks.

Andrew: They’re not the best. I got to tell you. These are an acquired taste. I’m showing you now the cottage cheese that I’ve got, that I eat here in the middle of the day. It took me a long time to love it. I really forced myself, like lifting weights everyday a little bit more until I learned to love it.

Adam: Slow and steady wins the race. The turtle always wins the race. It’s really important. Let’s say you’re used to having candy at 4:00, or 3:30. That’s the big time where a lot of people just snack mindlessly. Instead of having candy, first off, I always say fruit is nature’s candy. How about having fruit instead? Or if you really need that bag of M&Ms, why not have less M&Ms first, to start with? Andrew, do you think peanut butter is disgusting?

Andrew: No. Actually I like it. I was going to be a little combative there but I realized, ‘No. I like peanut butter.’

Adam: I think a lot of people don’t realize healthy food can be tasty and I think the key also is to really focus on all the foods you can eat as opposed to all the foods that you can’t eat. It’s not that you can’t ever eat them. We’ll go into that but there’s a lot of healthy foods. There really are.

Andrew: These are them, and peanut butter in addition to this?

Adam: [??] peanut butter. One of my favorite snacks is celery with natural peanut butter, almond butter. You can do a handful of cashews or handful of raw almonds or peanuts or any sort of nut. You could do some vegetables and humus. That’s a delicious snack.

Andrew: How many of them can I have and still, where’s Neville, and still get this?

Adam: Clearly getting a six pack is one of the most difficult things when it comes to fitness. It requires an extreme level of sacrifice and compromise and you really have to, what I like to call is, embrace discomfort a lot. Neville is definitely not my typical client, that’s why I was so hesitant to take him on. It was really more just for the experiment, because I knew him, but yes. When you’re going from that to that, it’s going to require an extreme level of discomfort.

Andrew: Meaning how many more or fewer nuts?

Adam: You don’t want to have more than a handful of nuts. You want to really make sure you’re not eating until you’re more than satisfied. Satisfied is the goal. When you eat more than that, when you’re trying to go for a six pack, it’s going to make a difference because the key to a six pack is just getting your body fat very, very low and everything you eat really counts, of course, when you go into that level.

Andrew: All right. Back to the big board?

Adam: Sure.

Andrew: Let’s do it. All right. Next you want us to pretend that we’re a New York Times food critic. What does that mean? What do you mean by that? You say that so that we can eat slowly to prevent binging on crappy foods. So tell me about that.

Interviewer: Right. I know I’m going all over the place. There’s just so much I want to cover, so much I want to talk about. With the New York Times food critic, that’s another tactic. Again, like I was saying, a lot of people will dream about food all day long. Then when they’re actually eating it, they’ll shovel it into their mouths. So what we want to do is just focus on eating very, very slowly. So I like to say, “Pretend you’re a New York Times food critic. Pretend you have to really focus on the taste, the texture, the smell, the experience, especially when we go out to eat.” A lot of us spend a lot of our money just going out to eat or whatever it is, and we’ll just kind of rush through or shovel the food into our mouths. Try to savor it as much as you can. It’s better for digestion. You’ll eat less, and you’ll appreciate the food more, too.

Andrew: You worked with Doug who had a lot of stress. Can you talk about him?

Adam: Sure. Doug was really stressed. His boss was being a real jerk, and he just couldn’t take it. He emailed me one time, and he’s like, ‘I really want a burger and fries right now.’ And I spoke to him about just the whole idea of pleasure versus satisfaction. Pleasure is really, really fleeting. The second you’re done eating cookie, the second you’re done eating a burger or whatever it is and as tasty as those are (and don’t get me wrong, those are my favorite foods) the second you’re done eating them thought, the good feelings they give us (I like to call it a “food trance” where the world feels perfect: there’s no problems, we have no stresses) the second we’re done eating it, those feelings go away.

Of course, what we’re left with is our annoying boss who’s still being annoying. So what I encouraged him to do was focus on really dealing with the problem. Again, this is kind of going back to emotional eating versus physical hunger. So that’s a little thing: just slow down. That’s important. But going back to Doug, Andrew, I think it’s very important to just focus on satisfaction. Satisfaction is lasting where pleasure is not. That’s a big insight for a lot of people: just thinking about that.

Andrew: You asked him, “How long did the meal last?” He said, “Two minutes.” You told him to slow it down. I could see myself getting competitive with that. How long should I allow a meal? Should I let it go nine minutes or eleven minutes? But once you give me a number, I start to get competitive and see if I could beat it tomorrow and then beat it again the next day. But the point is to slow it down.

Adam: Right. If you can make your meal last 20 minutes, then you’re good. Certainly being aware of this helps. It’s not a cure-all, but being aware of the fact that it takes at least 20 minutes for your brain to process what we’ve eaten does help a lot.

Andrew: I see. Right. All right. One more on this one or just right on to the next big idea? Any opinions on this?

Adam: I think emotional eating really encompasses all of these. So I think we should talk about the physical hunger versus emotional hunger if we can.

Andrew: OK. Let’s do it.

Adam: So can we pull up that slide with the emotional?

Andrew: Oh, I didn’t include that on the big board, did I? Let’s edit in real-time. We’re still going to come back to “Stop Craving” and we’re going to talk about…

Adam: Emotional hunger versus physical hunger.

Andrew: And just like that, there you go. Sorry. I’m doing all kinds of housekeeping while we’re talking. Let’s move on to this.

Adam: There you go. Once you get going, there’s just so much you want to cover.

Andrew: Good. Hit me.

Adam: So, physical hunger. Physical hunger is what we want to listen to. That comes on gradually. We usually feel it in our stomach. We might feel it in our head a little bit, but it’s definitely a physical sensation. Emotional hunger, and that’s what most of us really listen to even though we don’t want to, comes on suddenly. With emotional hunger, we crave something specific. A lot of times with emotional hunger, we’ll eat snack after snack and nothing will be satisfying us. That’s because we’re not actually physically hungry. We’re emotionally hungry. That’s really where it comes back to, just the pausing before you eat. Ninety five percent of this world feels hungry and then they just eat, whereas my most successful clients, and hopefully we’ll all get there together, feel hungry and then they pause and they think about what it is they’re hungry for. Is it for food or is it for something else? Once we realize we’re about to emotionally eat then I would suggest going to more questions and, as I said, I’m a big fan of questions because questions help us change our perspective.

So, the questions are, “What am I really hungry for, or what’s really bothering me?” The second question is, “What can I do about it?” The third question is, “Why don’t I do anything about it?” What we’re trying to do in the moment here, say for example, Doug, who has an annoying boss, what he’s doing is really just taking off the edge. He’s choosing food to suppress his feelings, whereas, what I would suggest is, “Let’s actually see if we can actually talk to his boss or whoever it is that’s annoying him.” In this case, it was his boss, and try to alleviate the problem. Try to really focus on doing that, but it’s like an annoying door to door marketer. They’re going to keep knocking until someone opens the door and I like to say, “Let’s just open the door soon as we can because as soon as we do that, those cravings will go away.” Cravings really are just our emotions talking and that’s a big part of what we want to try to do is understand why we’re eating in the first place.

Andrew: Our mutual friend Noah Kagan, emailed you and said, “Dude. I want to have a chocolate chip cookie right now.” What did you say to him?

Adam: Noah’s a great client. He’s doing amazing. With Noah we got a little deep. He is a really smart kid and smart guy and I think ultimately everything we do is really about happiness. I think people who start their companies or are part of [??] in our [??] tradition, whatever, I think it’s ultimately to make ourselves happier. If [??] eating a cookie, I think in the short term we think it’s going to make us happier. What I reminded Noah of, and I like to study happiness because I think that’s a big part of why we do what we do. The four stages of happiness are anticipation, savoring the actual moment or the experience as you’re going through it, expressing it as you’re going through it. As your experiencing it, it’s like, “Oh. This is amazing.” Then reflecting on it.

For a lot of people, I think, especially me, anticipation and the reflection, or the memory of it, is where you get the most happiness. The biggest bang for your buck, so to speak. What I asked Noah to do is, Here’s a question for you, Andrew. If you could go to your favorite restaurant tonight or in a month from now, when would you go? Let alone your busy schedule.

Andrew: A month from now, absolutely.

Adam: What about going on vacation? You can go on vacation in two months from now or this weekend. What would you choose?

Andrew: It’s hard to say. I just made that decision. I’m going to Guatemala in a few hours.

Adam: Really?

Andrew: To meet the guy who’s editing this video. I wanted to sit down with him and talk about how we can edit better, but also to hang out with Olivia in Guatemala.

Adam: Very cool. Let’s say you didn’t have this planned vacation.

Andrew: Then I definitely would not want to go to anywhere. This is unusual for me. I might say, “Let’s put it off for a couple of months.”

Adam: For you, it’s probably just because you’re so busy, but I think for a lot of people, I think it’s, a big part of vacation is anticipating. Getting to look forward to it. I’d rather go on vacation in a month from now as opposed to a week or go to my favorite restaurant in a few weeks as opposed to tonight because then I get to look forward to it. Then I get to also experience it and then, of course, I get to reminisce on it. With Noah, I said, ‘If you really want this cookie, let’s try to have it this weekend. This way you get to look forward to having the cookie and by then you probably won’t even really want [??].’ Essentially what it is, it’s a refrain. You’re just thinking of a way to pause that initial craving and look forward to it instead of using it against you.

Andrew: We have this issue. You tell us to think about the four stages of anticipation, savoring the moment as we experience it, expressing my happiness as we experience together. Actually, I’ve got to say I don’t understand. If I’m in a place where I just want a cookie, or in my case it wouldn’t be a cookie, I don’t love cookies. I love freakin’ potato chips, especially spicy jalapeno ones. If I want those spicy jalapeno things, what do you tell me to do? What are the four stages that will get me to stop wanting it right now?

Adam: That’s just something to think about. The problem is when you want potato chips, all you’re doing is you’re thinking about this short term discomfort of not having them as opposed to the long term benefits of not eating them. What I would do is say, “Let’s focus on the benefits of not eating potato chips.” The four stages of happiness is just something to think about, so if you really want the cookie, it’s an urge, this craving, allow yourself to have it this weekend. [??].

Andrew: I see. Don’t say, “Don’t have it.” Just say, “You know what, Andrew? You’re going to have this weekend, not the kind of jalapeno crappy ones that they sell here in your office building, but the really good ones that they have a block away from the apartment. That’s what you’re going to have. Just don’t give into it now because you’d much rather have it later the way that you want it.” You’re telling me to anticipate it and have that experience?

Adam: Right. This way you get to look forward to it. Again, it’s never about not eating your favorite foods. If you really want the potato chips or whatever it is, indulge it, but my whole thing is let’s pick and choose what is really and truly worth it. This way, when there’s something that’s really worth it, we can indulge guilt free as opposed to just those short term mid-afternoon snacks that we really don’t even want. What you’re doing right now, if you want cookies or potato chips, most likely is you’re emotional eating.

Andrew: The thing you’re telling me is, “Don’t say not to yourself.” Say, “Have it later,” instead of saying no to the chips. Right?

Adam: Right. This way you get to look forward to it.

Andrew: And you’re also telling me to consider that I might not be physically hungry, I’m emotionally hungry? In my case here at work it’s, “Man. I’ve got to get another interview done so that I could then go on to the 3rd or 15th interview,” or I have to figure out a way to say no to somebody who wants to partner up with me on something that’s super terrific and he’s a friend that I want to keep but I’ve got to say no without breaking his heart. Now I won’t say no now, I’ll go to the vending machine. You’re telling me, “Put it off until later, number one, and understand that it’s an emotional hunger, not a physical hunger?”

Adam: You’re not physically hungry. Exactly. That’s what I want you to do is pause before you eat and think about, “Are you physically hungry or emotionally hungry?” That’s a big question that can really help you a lot.

Andrew: Back onto the big board. We talked about, I didn’t highlight it, but we talked about how to stop cravings and the way to stop a craving is by saying, not now, but later. The next big idea is to indulge and you say, here’s from my notes, “Choose another way to reward yourself instead of eating junk food, but know when you can indulge.” When can I indulge, man?

Adam: This goes into two things. I think the deep psychology here and I think what a lot of people might realize or not, is the reason why we want to indulge in the first place is we’re viewing food as a reward. We feel that we deserve it, we work really hard, we’re entitled. I’m supporting my family, I’m doing this. There’s a lot of feelings of entitlement and that we deserve it. What I want to help you do is come up with another way to reward yourself because when you use food as a reward, obviously it’s going to be very hard to not have that reward. I would say, “How else can you reward yourself?” Whether it’s getting yourself a new shirt, getting a massage this weekend if you eat well. Whatever it is, allowing yourself to read a magazine, having conditional rewards really helps. I created a slide.

I’m a big fan of conditional rewards so if I do X, then I get to do Y. If I exercise, then I get to watch TV later on guilt free. If I eat as planned all week then I can buy a shirt, or whatever it is. Having these rewards, having these conditional rewards, makes it much easier to do that behavior that we really want to do. A lot of people would just wake up, they’ll log into Facebook for 45 minutes then they feel like crap. My argument is, Facebook is something you enjoy doing, but instead, use that as a reward. Say, “If I go to the gym or if I do this amount of work or if I eat healthfully, then I can get to log onto Facebook guilt free.”

Andrew: You have a client, by the way, do you want to talk about him? The one who wanted a whole pizza?

Adam: Sure.

Andrew: I’ll just read it, it’s right all in our notes. We did a lot of prep work so I’ve got the notes here from that. You have a client who lost four pounds in a week and rewarded himself with a whole pizza pie. What do you think of that?

Adam: Food is fuel. We can certainly enjoy food, but we don’t want to use food as a reward. Clearly, eating well all week and then losing weight and then rewarding yourselves with pizza or a whole pie is not going to help us get to where we want to be in the long-term. What I really helped him do was to come up with other ways to reward yourself.

Andrew: So that one big indulgence of, I don’t know where it came from, moment of frustration, a feeling that he worked so hard that he deserved something. Whatever it was he had a whole pie to reward himself that ruined a week’s worth of work?

Adam: Right. What we worked on was other ways he could reward himself. Soon as we unlocked that and soon as he realized that he was viewing food as a reward it became much easier to keep going because he wasn’t looking for food as a reward.

Andrew: So, the reward for him instead would be watching TV, buying a whole bunch of apps, it would be playing a video game for half a day on the weekend, but find some reward. If food is your reward, you’re craving some sense of appreciation and personal space. Go do it in another way.

Adam: Right. Or even allow yourself to indulge in really fresh foods, like fresh vegetables, fresh fruit, fresh fish. One of the things I find really interesting is when we’re really craving something, we’ll spend six or seven dollars on a pint of something. That’s when we’re highly irrational, but then when we’re very rational when we’re at the supermarket, we’re looking at healthy foods like vegetables and we’re like, ‘Oh. This is so expensive,’ but if you view healthy food as an investment rather than a cost, I think it makes it easier to choose healthier foods. That was just a little tangent there.

Andrew: That makes sense. I’m trying to think how many people would think of apples as an indulgence. I happen to and I’ll tell you why I do. I get these big bags of apples from Trader Joe’s. I don’t have to cut them at all, I just have them here like potato chips for when I’ll sit here. I’ll read Hacker News without any sense of guilt, at least until the bag is full and once that bag is full, I don’t want to eat anything because there’s no more room.

Adam: I don’t think people look at vegetables or fruit as an indulgence, but I think a lot of people are very focused on the price or the cost of healthy food and the whole argument is 1000 calories of Oreos is a lot cheaper than 1000 calories of vegetables. My only thing is, you think about it as an investment rather than a cost. It makes it much easier to justify the healthier food, which of course pays dividends in how you get to feel, in how you perform and how much more energy you’ll have.

Andrew: Anything else on this topic before we go to the next one?

Adam: We can also talk about worthwhile indulgences. There is a slide called Oprah.

Andrew: Called what?

Adam: It’s Oprah. It’s under the . . .

Andrew: I wanted to make sure that I had the right one. Yes.

Adam: There you go. A lot of people think, when they talk about how Oprah has all the money in the world and she can’t be fit, then how can I? I would argue that Oprah, the reason why she’s overweight is there’s a lot of emotional eating and she’s using food as a way to escape. The point of this slide though is, it’s not about never eating your favorite foods and it’s not about not having your favorite potato chips or what not. It’s about just being really conscious and being picky and being very selective.

Oprah, a few years ago, had this show called “The Biggest Give” and what she did was she had these contestants, I think she gave them $1 million each and they could use that million dollars and give it to two or three charities that they felt were deserving of it.

What I want you to do is think of the way Oprah did that show. It’s not that we can never indulge, we just want to be very picky. Allow yourself to have two or three worthwhile indulgences per week and this way when you have that short term discomfort of wanting those potato chips you can really ask yourself, “Is this really and truly worth it, or am I eating to change the way I feel?” That’s my whole thing. I’d much rather save myself for a really and truly worthwhile meal, for example, going to my favorite restaurant [??] a bag of potato chips that I can literally get in any corner of the world. That’s what we want to try to do, save ourselves for worthwhile indulgences.

Andrew: Next big tactic is, let me read it directly from the notes here, ‘Exercise is not complicated but you have to be consistent.’

Adam: The theme of this interview, hopefully, is consistency. I’d much rather you commit to doing 20 minutes three times a week and actually be able to do it than commit to a ridiculously, daunting exercise program that you’ll never do or you’ll do once. Consistency trumps all. In the book, “Powerful Engagement,” there was some really interesting studies and, where is it? The point was, what I want you to do is, when you commit to exercising, I want you to think about when and where you’ll actually exercise.

What a lot of people do is they’ll just say, “I want to try to exercise two or three times this week.” And that’s it. They don’t think about it again. What I want you to do is pretend it’s a really important meeting with a client or a perspective investor, whatever it is. Clearly, you wouldn’t miss that. What I want you to do is mark it down on your calendar and plan when and where you’ll actually work out. By doing that it really makes such a difference.

Andrew: Put it into my Google calendar. Say specifically when I’m going to be doing this.

Adam: Exactly. They found, though, [??] engagement so when you add that when and where, most people say when, but they don’t add that where. When women committed to when and where they’ll do a breast examination, 100% of them did it. There was another one where drug addicts had to write an essay and when they committed to when and where they’ll do it, 80% of them actually did the essay by just committing to when and where they would do it. It’s a big difference.

Andrew: I didn’t realize it was that powerful. The where part, I would never have thought of. You had a marathon runner who worked with you and she said this happens with a lot of marathon runners. I know it happens for me with races. She didn’t train unless she had a race. What did you do? What did you tell her?

Adam: I always say, “Something is better than nothing.” Clearly, this person thought it wasn’t worthwhile to train unless she was doing this daunting workout. The fact that it was a daunting workout actually made her never do it because it was so daunting in the first place. What I tried to encourage her to do is focus on baby steps, a little bit everyday, or a little bit a few times a week is far more effective than doing a ridiculous workout two or three times a month. We really worked on helping her change her mindset to that. That really goes hand in hand with this all or nothing mentality.

This all or nothing mentality, and dieters are notorious for this is, we decide we’re going to go on a diet on Sunday night. Monday comes, we do good. Tuesday we feel stressed. We have a cookie and then we put our hands in the air, we say, “Screw it.” Then we just say, “I’m starting tomorrow.” Then Wednesday comes, “I’m starting next Sunday.” Then it becomes a game of, “I’m starting next Sunday. I’m starting next Sunday.” It’s really easy to rationalize and justify our behavior. So, by just allowing yourself to make mistakes, allowing yourself to indulge, makes it much easier.

Andrew: I understand where she’s coming from, too. I used to have this that if I was training for a marathon and it felt important and then I’d exercise all the time to make sure that I did the marathon. Then afterwards I’d be exhausted or everything else didn’t seem big enough or important enough and so I wouldn’t do anything. I’d rest and then when it was time to get started I’d go, ‘Well, who cares? Just run. I’m not about to run a marathon.’ So you told her, ‘Just do something,’ and you also have this exercise. This 20-20-20 Workout?

Adam: For the 20-20 Workout, I think, a lot of people here will say they don’t have the time. They don’t have the time to focus on their diet and their exercise. Again, my argument is that when you make the time, we make time for what’s important to us. As busy as we are, we make time for what’s important to us. When you make the time for exercise, when you make the time for eating right, which is really the most important part of this, you will get so many dividends in so many other areas of your life.

One thing I recommend people do, especially if they’re traveling and they have no time to do anything, is my 20-20 Workout. The 20-20 Workout is, you can do 20 jumping jacks, 20 pushups and 20 crunches. You can also do the 20 times 4, which is adding squats in. You can really do that anywhere in the world, no matter were you are and take 12 minutes and it’s just a way to get yourself feeling good. That’s really important, keeping that momentum really helps a lot, as opposed to just doing really great for a few days then missing a workout and missing another workout then having to start all over again. Something is always better than nothing every single time.

Andrew: I’ve got this slide, too. This is another one of the 20-20 Workouts, 20-20-20 Workout. On to the last point. Let’s do it. Let me bring it up. Last one is to text, and I said that my buddy, Noah, texts you all the time. What’s he doing? How does that fit in with this?

Adam: Again, it’s very easy to rationalize and justify our poor choices. So what I do, what I offer with my program, what my company does is we help people stay consistent by providing daily and personal accountability. Otherwise, it’s just too easy to rationalize. What Noah does is he texts me after he eats, or email me and by doing this, it keeps him accountable and that’s really the key. It really makes such a difference.

Andrew: He eats. He takes a picture of it and he says, “Dude. This is what I just had.” That holds him accountable and makes him stop eating certain foods.

Adam: Just knowing someone else is there really makes a big difference. There was an interesting study done with trick or treaters and what they did was [??], but basically these trick or treaters would go to this door, there’d be a full bowl of candy with no one there and there would be a sign that would say, “Take one.” Of course, when there’s no one there who says, “Take one,” all these people just dump the whole bowl of candy into their bag and run away. Then what they found was when they put a mirror behind the bowl of candy, these people would actually only take one because they found that when you look at yourself before you do something you know you shouldn’t do, you hold yourself back. That’s exactly what I like to say we are is, we are your 24/7 mirror. We’re providing accountability so you can see what you’re doing so you have to own up to yourself and us, because again, it’s so easy to rationalize and justify our behavior.

Andrew: You say find a stranger to text? Why a stranger? Why shouldn’t it be a professional like you or a friend?

Adam: I think this was another way to get accountability besides my program. The problem with a friend is, my mom is a former high school English teacher. When it came time for me to take the SATs a long time ago, she wanted to tutor me, because she actually had an SAT tutoring business. Of course, when she tutored me I didn’t take her seriously at all, because she’s my mom. She couldn’t be honest, she couldn’t be objective with me so if you can’t get her whole accountability, as I like to call it, is actually more effective to get someone like a stranger because a friend is not going to be brutally honest with you and that’s really the key. A friend is not going to really tell you what you need to hear to get where you want to be.

Andrew: You’re saying get someone who’s not going to be flexible, who you’re going to respect and feel obligated to follow up with. Text them every single thing that you eat?

Adam: That would help. Yes. Most people probably don’t want to do that and services like mine exist, but if you can then certainly. Accountability works. There’s no question about it.

Andrew: If they can’t find a friend or don’t feel, as you’re saying, don’t find a friend. If they can’t find a stranger, come to this website right here, mybodytutor.com and you’ll help them do what? You’ll find somebody for them to text everything that they eat to?

Adam: Really what we do is, there’s a billion other health and fitness companies out there and as you were saying, Andrew, the key to getting the body you want, it’s not a secret. It’s eating right, exercising and doing those two things consistently. It’s the consistency part that’s so hard. It’s very easy to start a diet. It’s very hard to keep on going. What we help you do is stay consistent and that’s what we really focus on, is the consistency part. Every night clients will log onto our website. It’s a very easy to use website. You tell us what you ate, what you did for exercise, a few other questions and then every single morning you’re getting your very own tutor who’s writing back personal critique, personal suggestions and encouragement to make sure you’re staying on track and being consistent. If you’re not, we help you understand why, which is the key. It’s worked amazingly well for so many people and it’s exciting what we’ve been able to do.

Andrew: Actually, if they go to mybodytutor.com/mixergy, what do they get there?

Adam: What I’m going to do is I’m going to run a little contest for those who sign up for my newsletter. I will randomly select someone who signs up, they’ll win three months of coaching from us, which is a $447 value. We’ll work with them everyday to help them get to where they want to be and, of course, those who don’t win you’ll still get my newsletter, which I guarantee you will learn a lot from. We talk a lot about the psychology of weight loss, a lot about understanding why you’re eating and I’m very confident that you’ll enjoy the bonuses that I’ve made up for you.

Andrew: That’s at mybodytutor.com/mixergy and very soon you too could not only look like, where is that? Like Neville, but you could also be texting all the time when you eat and really hold yourself accountable. I saw Noah. We had this terrific dinner at this hotel over here, had a good group of people around the table. I ate my pasta and then I ate my wife’s pasta because she’s really good at not eating too much. Noah, who’s your client, he had a little bit of pasta and then he called the waiter over and he said, ‘I think I’m done with this.’

Adam: That’s my client, baby.

Andrew: First, he took a picture of it and then he said, “I think I’m done with this.” Before they even brought the dessert and put that little thing on his table, he said, “No. No. Don’t bring any of that over here.”

Adam: It’s much easier to say no when it’s not in front of you than when it’s right in front.

Andrew: I thankfully was doing a long run the next day, so I used that as an excuse, but I was, as soon as I saw that I said, “Where did you get that? Who are you texting? What is this about?” and that’s when he told me about you and he said, “Andrew, you got to have him on” and I appreciate you coming on here and I’m glad I had you on.

Adam: Another person you had on recently was Chris Savage.

Andrew: Chris Savage of Wistia.com, yes.

Adam: Yes. And, I mean, he’s a client of mine. Noah actually referred me to him and Chris has lost 30 lbs already with my Body[??] and, I mean, he is absolutely doing amazing and just every night he reports to me what he ate. He’s actually my client, I’ve worked with him personally. [??] coaches and every morning I’m running back critiques, suggestions and [??] daily personal accountability. I come on with this unlimited support and the system to monitor and check your progress, which really makes a huge difference.

Andrew: The down size, of course, is that all these guys end up being shirtless on the internet. Like Noah Kagan and people who are on his website and saw that he was sitting there with a shirt off. How professional is this?

I’m sure next time, well, who knows? Maybe, next time I see Chris Savage, he’ll also be shirtless. They’re all eager to show it off.

Anyway, I hope people who’ve take in this course, well, if they’re not going to be shirtless, will at least be fitter as a result of it and more than that. As much as I want them to be fit, I want them to achieve even more so I’m looking forward to hearing about their before and after, pictures, seeing those and I’m looking forward also to hearing if you’re watching this and have gone through this program and have done anything from this, I want to hear how your life has changed at all as a result of it.

Now, it’s always overwhelming at the end of these sessions, because you’ve been hit with so many different ideas. My one suggestion is find one thing that you can start with. Find an easy way to get started. It doesn’t have to be complicated. It doesn’t have to be every single thing but if you can find just one thing, you’ll start building that momentum.

All right. Thank you for watching and Adam, thank you for participating with this camera and whatever issues we had along the way, we made it all work. Thank you.

Adam: Thanks for having me, man. I know I spoke very quickly, covered a lot but like you said, pick one thing and it’ll help a lot.

Andrew: One thing.

Adam: There is a lot of stuff I want to go over but thank you. Thanks for having me. I really appreciate it.

Andrew: Thank you. Thank you all. Bye

Master Class:
How to build a profitable startup cheaply
(Even if you only have $100)
Taught by Chris Guillebeau of $100 Startup

Report issues here

Master Class:
$100 Startup


About the course leader

Chris Guillebeau spent less than $100 to build his business which includes UnconventionalGuides.com, a site that helps people do more about what their excited about.

Master Class Toolbox

Course Cheat Sheet

Recurly.com

Stripe.com

Transcript

Download the transcript here

Andrew: This course is about how to build a profitable start up, cheaply. The course is led by, let me bring him up on the screen, Chris Guillebeau. He is the founder of Unconventional Guides, a business with a goal of helping people do more of what they’re most excited about. And everything that you hear today is based on this great book, “The $100 Startup”, Chris’ latest book, “Reinvent the Way You Make a Living, Do More of What You Love and Create a New Future.”

Here’s the big board with everything that we’re going to be talking about today in this session. I want to just bring your attention to a couple of things here that I think you should pay a special attention to. First is this section right here, Give Them the Fish. If you’ve ever sold any information and you’ve found that people just weren’t buying, pay special attention to this section. In fact, if you’ve ever sold anything that people didn’t buy, I think you’ll want to hear that section. You’re also going to want to especially pay attention to this section here, Position Your Skills to Fit Your Niche. You’re going to hear the story of this woman who did something incredible in the PR industry, I won’t reveal it, but I want you to pay attention to that story.

If you’re thinking of starting a company and not sure whether to stay put or not, we’re going to talk about why you should decide that early. And we’re going to help you figure out who to market to and, there’s so much more here up on the screen, when to start. You’ll hear a story of someone who Chris met on a past trip and how he started, and why starting quickly worked for him and will do the same for you. You’re going to hear and get the specific rough awesome format and the way that you should be guaranteeing in order to increase sales, the kind of guarantee that you should give people. Chris, first of all, there’s a whole lot on this. I’m trying to pack it all in and explain everything that’s coming up, and I’m doing as good a job as I can with all this data. You really packed a lot into this book.

Chris: You know, the whole goal is for it to be data driven. The whole goal is to be something specific as opposed to, just go for it, because lots of resources are like, go for it, which is great. But then what do you do, you know?

Andrew: Yeah, in fact, you were in a situation like that. Let’s tell your story before we even get to all the people who you’ve profiled in the book and whose stories you told. Can you tell people where you were before you got started and what you ended up doing?

Chris: Yeah, it depends on where you want to begin from. Back in the day I never really had a job, I was pretty much unemployable. Every job I got, I didn’t do very well at. The last one I had I was age 20, and I was working at FedEx and there was snowstorm, and long story short, I just didn’t go into work. I was like, OK, I need to figure something else out. I didn’t necessarily want to be an entrepreneur; I didn’t really know what entrepreneurship was. I didn’t have a lot of higher goals or anything there. I just had to figure out a way to support myself, basically. I wanted to find a way, legally, morally, to pay the bills. This was way back in the day; this was the year 2000 or so.

At the time then, there was this great new website called eBay.com and I ended up selling things around my apartment. Which was great because I made like, $20 an hour. But then I ran out of things to sell around my apartment. So I started coffee, I saw other people selling coffee. I imported coffee and sold it, just all different kind of things. I learned how to do some website design, I learned how to do some work with affiliate marketing. Once Google Ad Work started, I learned how that worked. So I went into all these hodge podge of things. It still wasn’t very specific. I wasn’t actually building a business or anything, I was just, kind of hustling for myself and finding a way to pay the bills.

And then, I spent four years overseas in West Africa. That was a big turning point for myself and my wife, Jolie. After we came back to the states, that’s when I was, kind of like, OK, what am I going to do next? How do I really want to contribute something? I want to make a good income and support myself, but I also want to do something that’s meaningful. So that kind of lead me to where I am now.

Andrew: And you were able to do what? With everything that you’re about to teach us, you’re able to do this, this and this. What’s this business that you built?

Chris: Yeah, so I wrote the book, “The Art of Knowing Conformity”, started that in 2008. And then, the side business that’s related to it is UnconventionalGuides.com, which you mentioned. And a few other projects that are kind of peripheral to that, “The Travel Hacking Cartel”, couple of other different things. This business kind of started organically, it started in response to a lot of questions that I had. I noticed my community was asking the same kind of questions all the time and so I paid attention to that. So this business basically supports me as I travel the world. I work from about 20 countries every year. I’ve been on this quest to visit every country in the world, and I’m almost done with that. So, I do that. I meet fun people. I work all the time, but I do work I love. So, it’s kind of all related.

Andrew: Did you spend more than $100 to launch your company?

Chris: I don’t think I spent any money to launch my company. Well, I have to pay like $10 a year for a domain. At some point I probably got an email list. I think to grow my company I still… After it was successful, and when we say company, we’re being kind of facetious here because it’s really just me. I have a cat that works with me.

Andrew: [laughs] Which I saw. I don’t know that we’re being facetious. This looks like… This is a real company here.

Chris: I’m not so sure.

Andrew: [??] People are buying them. It started out with a blog, but it’s a good business, a solid business.

Chris: I know it’s a solid business. It just means I don’t have like a lot of employees.

Andrew: I see.

Chris: It’s like a flat structure.

Andrew: OK. All right. Let’s go to the big board here and take a look at some of the ideas from the book, the ones that we specifically picked out that our audience could use, starting out with find your point of conversions. Here, let me bring up someone here who… You know, this website?

Chris: That’s right. That’s the website of the V6 Ranch which is in California, halfway between San Francisco and Los Angeles.

Andrew: Mm-hmm.

Chris: And these guys have a great story. They had a furniture business, and the barn burned down. So, literally the business burned down. They always had people asking, “Can we come and stay at the ranch?” They didn’t have like business for that, but they made it happen. So, they decided to reopen kind of as a dude ranch. You can see on their website there.

Andrew: Mm-hmm.

Chris: As an alternate holiday. Instead of just going off to Hawaii, come here and you can ride horses around and things, but what I notice when I talk about them, it’s really interesting because I always ask business owners, like what’s your business all about, how does your business help people and try to focus on that question. A lot of business owners are very descriptive, but in Barbara’s case, Barbara and John are the co-owners of this, Barbara said something like, “Our mission is to help people be someone else for a day.” And so, we say, “Come with us and be a cowboy. Be a cow girl.”

I thought that was so much more powerful than the idea of just saying, “Come and stay with us and ride horses around, whatever.” It’s really like getting to the core need of happiness. So, we talked about convergence. They have this passion, this ranch that they’re very passionate about, but apparently with this passion they found a way to make it something useful and valuable as well. So, that’s really what convergence is about. It’s finding that overlapping circle between your passion and your skill and something that other people also value.

That’s what people miss sometimes in the whole follow your passion to the bank thing is that there’s lots of things that we can be very passionate about. You’re passionate about running. I’m somewhat passionate about running, not as much as you. I don’t know about you, but there hasn’t been a lot of people who come to me and say, “Chris, I’d like to pay you to run.” It’s just something I’m passionate about that I do on my own or you do, but in finding that overlapping part between your stuff and other people’s stuff, that’s how people make a successful business.

Andrew: And so, for them it was V6 Ranch. Their passion was, from what I remember from the story, they just loved horses, they loved the environment that they built here. What others cared about was the getaway. Do I have that right?

Chris: The getaway and the fantasy and the aspirational aspect of it. You know, the return to another way of life kind of thing. I think all of those things. Those are the deeper needs, but then they all kind of relate to a desire for escape or a desire for happiness.

Andrew: OK. Before I go on to the next one, what’s your passion then versus what others care about? How do you fill in these circles personally?

Chris: Yeah. Great question. So, I started writing my blog partly about this quest to visit every country in the world. I got a fair number of readers fairly quickly, and some of them said, “Well, this is great for you, but how does it help me?” That was a very valid question, I thought because I thought, “Well, I’m not sure how it’ll help. Maybe, there’s a certain inspirational element, but I’m not directly helping people through travel.

And so, the business model came about by helping other people to travel, helping people learn more specifically about self-employment. And so, once I began creating some specific resources, OK, you want to get started working for yourself. Here’s how you do it. You want to take those next steps. What are the next steps? Here’s how you do it. You want to travel around the world with frequent flyer miles. So, once I figured out how to connect that, that’s when I started having a lot more success.

Andrew: I see. All right. So, if I can overly simplify it, what you’re saying is your passion here… Let’s go back to this. Your passion, on the left side, is to travel. They don’t care about your traveling. It’s good for you, but they care about themselves traveling. And somewhere in between is what you merged and created right here, which is a place for people to hear about your stories, how you traveled, but also how they could do it themselves, and learn from what you’ve experienced.

Chris: Right. And yes, correct. I try to provide a variety of resources and solutions that answer those questions and those problems, and not all of them are paid. I try to do a lot of stuff that’s free, but then I also have stuff that’s paid for those who want that.

Andrew: I see. Yeah, actually very much of it is free. Then, of course, you’ve got those unconventional guides that are paid. All right. Let’s go back to the big board. Next is, “Position your skills to fit your niche.” And I’ve got two different people here we can talk about from the book. Scott Adams of Dilbert, or do you want to talk about WildKat? Who’s a better example here?

Chris: Let’s talk briefly about WildKat. I think her name was Kat Alder.

Andrew: Yep.

Chris: Oh great, you have her website there. One of the principles of the book, one of the things I learned as I talk with lots of different people, the principle is skill transformation, which basically means, if you’re good at something, you’re probably good at something else as well. And often, those related skills are what you’re going to create the business out of.

So if you’re a teacher, for example, you’re probably a good communicator, you’re good at crowd control, you’re good at discipline, you’re good at lesson planning and all these things that are related. Those skills may actually be what you use to crack the business.

In Kat’s case, you can see on this website, she’s got all these employees and colleagues, and she’s running this business on several different continents, I believe. But she got her start as a waitress in London. She’s originally from Germany. She was just working as a waitress in London and she was really good at it. She was good at communicating with people, and she got lots of compliments. She got big tips, and she was good at up- selling.

One day, someone said to her, “You know, you would be good at PR.” The fun story about that was, she said she didn’t even know what PR stood for. You she had to go back and look it up. Then she figured out it was public relations. So she started this public relations consultancy, basically using the same skills she had as a waitress. But, of course, making a lot more money and a lot more impact on the world as well.

Andrew: You know what? I wouldn’t have thought that there’s any connection between the skills that go into being a great waitress and the skills that go into doing PR. But once you find what that “thing” is about you, there’s so many other places that it could apply, and help you build a business.

Chris: Right, because being a good waitress is not just about bringing food. It’s about communicating about different things, being encouraging, helping people make decisions and all kinds of stuff.

Andrew: What about you? What’s your thing? I know what mine is. I’m insanely curious.

Chris: You’re insanely curious. That’s good.

Andrew: Yes.

Chris: What is my thing? I guess I’m also curious, but I can’t steal yours.

Andrew: [laughs] Sure, you can.

Chris: I guess I’m always interested in alternatives. I’m interested in if there’s more than one way to do something in almost every case, whether it’s higher education, travel or self-employment. So I’m always interested in figuring out if there’s alternatives, not necessarily the shortcuts, but what else can people do? I guess my central message is, you don’t have to live your life the way other people expect you to. You can do good things for yourself and for others. So I try to look at that through a variety of different lenses.

Andrew: I see. And I see it throughout your site all the time. That’s one of the reasons why I love your site. Where’s that manifesto? It used to be right down here. Do you know the one I’m talking about?

Chris: Oh, go back to the home page.

Andrew: Oh, I’m not on the home page. OK. There it is. This is the home page.

Chris: Yeah. It should be on the bottom there. There are two of them there. Scroll up just a little bit.

Andrew: Scroll up just a little bit.

Chris: The middle section.

Andrew: Ah, OK. Yes. That’s the one. “A Brief Guide to World Domination.”

Chris: Right.

Andrew: All right. Back to the big board.

Chris: Sure.

Andrew: “Learn the formula for success.” And here’s what I’ve got. I’ve got it here in my notes, right out of the book. “Passion or skill plus usefulness equals success.” So we need to have the passion, skill and we need to be useful. And I pulled out a story, I think, of someone who we can maybe talk about how this guy did it. Let me bring it down so the people can see.

Chris: Oh, is this Brandon, maybe? Brandon Pierce?

Andrew: Yeah, Brandon Pierce. Man, you’re so good with the names. I can’t even remember the names of every founder of every company that I’ve interviewed here on Mixergy. Yes, Brandon Pierce. Do you remember his story?

Chris: Yeah. He has a great story. This is a guy from Utah. He was an engineer, and he played music and taught music on the side. Just out of his own intense curiosity… He didn’t have a good solution for keeping up with billing and scheduling, and all these things that most music teachers are not necessarily good at, or want to spend their time at.

So he created his own solution, his own little software interface, and then he decided to offer it to the public, so it’s musicteachershelper.com. Basically, this service costs money, but it essentially saves the people money because it keeps up with their billing, and avoids missed payments and all these problems that teachers have. I forget how many customers he has now, but it’s at least a $300,000 a year business. It’s on a continuity model, so he’s getting paid every month. He left Utah with his family, and they moved to Central America for a couple of years. Now, the last I heard from him, he’s somewhere in Asia, just traveling together as a family, running this business, location independently.

Andrew: Wow.

Chris: It’s great. I find it very inspiring. So, passion plus usefulness. He was passionate about teaching music, but he thought, “But this is helping music teachers with this very critical need that they have, providing this solution which works for them.”

Andrew: You know what? It seems like, if you could just… We keep wanting to come up with the fun product, the next Instagram, but those are really hard to hit on. And those are really hard to make grow and to bank on. The ones that seem to work, the ideas that I’ve noticed work really, more predictably, are the ones that are usefulness. The ones that go to a customer and say, can you use this? Will your life change? Will you make more money as a result of it?

Chris: Right.

Andrew: Will you keep from losing money?

Chris: Right. Will it improve your life essentially?

Andrew: Right.

A: Right? So I would say the same thing. Don’t think innovation so much. Think usefulness. Yes, if you can make the next Instagram or the next iPhone, that’s great. But most of us aren’t going to do that. But we can still make the world a better place for a certain group of people by creating something that’s useful, and then that’s how we can get paid. That’s where our business will be.

Andrew: You know what? I was very stubbornly resistant to that at Mixergy. I kept wanting to do interviews. And I felt that if people listened to interviews, then their lives would be better, plus the stories of entrepreneurs who I interviewed are so fascinating that everyone should listen to them. And I still think they should. But what I kept hearing from the audience was, “Show me how I can use this. How could it improve my life? Make it more actionable.”

I kept saying, “No, you don’t want me to tell you exactly what to do. It’s not possible. It’s not possible that I could feed you every step.” Well, it turns out, it’s true. I can’t feed them every step, but they were right. They do want something that’s more useful, more actionable, something that gives them results similar to what Brandon’s doing Aries [sounds like], not just playing music for them. He’s saying, “Well, here’s how I can make your life specifically better, more useful.”

Chris: Mm-hmm.

Andrew: He does it by giving them billing and lessons. I guess he also even builds websites for them. Yeah, he builds…

Chris: Yeah. He does a bunch of stuff. I think he’s branched off to another creative [??] it’s music teaching, if it’s art teaching or something, but basically using the same platform, and essentially franchising himself in a different way. But that’s a good point you make. I think often, what people want and what they say they want are not always the same things. As we go through our projects, as we build the Mixergy massive interview archive, as I figure out what I’m supposed to do with my little business, we understand more about the intuitive needs of our customers, our audience or community. It just helps to refine things as you go along.

Andrew: All right. Let’s go on to this idea, “Give them the fish.” I’ve got an example here, before I even show it, how you went from travel ninja to frequent-flier master to travel hacking cartel, and I’ve got all those screenshots to show people. First, let’s take a step back and just explain, what does that concept mean? “Give them the fish.”

Chris: Sure. Well, that’s a good segue from the idea that what people want and what they say they want, are not always the same thing. We often assume, as business owners or blog sites, publishers, etc., that we know best. We think this is what people want, therefore we should give it to them.

The story that I take that from is this scenario of going to a restaurant and it’s the end of the week, and it’s been a busy week. You go to relax, and you have a glass of wine. Then the waiter comes out and says, “Our special tonight is the salmon.”

You say, “Oh, that sounds great. I would love that.” Then the waiter goes away and the chef comes out and says to you, “Good evening. I understand, Andrew, that you’ve ordered the salmon.” You say, “Oh, yes. That would be great.” And she says, “Have you ever made salmon before? Because it’s a little bit difficult.” And before you can say anything, she’s like, “OK. You go ahead and wash up and meet me back in the kitchen. I’ll get started. We’ll make this salmon together.”

Obviously, this scenario doesn’t actually happen, but if it did, you’d probably be kind of annoyed. You’d think, I go to the restaurant, I pay a big premium because I want everything to be provided for me. And I want to just sit there and enjoy the service. I want to enjoy the salmon, but instead, they’re making me do that. So it comes from this whole expression about, “Give a man a fish, and he’ll eat for a day.”

Andrew: Mm-hmm.

Chris: “Teach a man to fish, and he’ll eat for a lifetime.” I think that’s a great idea if you’re working with homeless fisherman, but if you’re trying to run a business, it’s a terrible idea. Most of us don’t actually want to learn to fish, we want the fish. I guess what I’m saying from that principle is, give people the fish. Figure out what they really want. Don’t take them back in the kitchen, necessarily. Bring them the fish on a platter. Figure out what that core thing is they’re looking for, and deliver it to them.

Andrew: So, you did that. Here, let’s see if I’ve got the chronology right. You launched this, then you launched this, [??] I mean let’s reach down. I intentionally kept that because, well, actually there, that’s the second one, and then you launched this. Let’s position that properly. There we go.

Chris: You should have [??] it’s better each time too, but

Andrew: Sorry, it looks better each time?

Chris: Yeah, the design gets better also. But go on.

Andrew: It does. So, tell me about this transition and how it fits in with giving people the fish.

Chris: Right, so in this first project you mentioned, Travel Ninja, I made a huge mistake. I assumed that everyone wanted to come back in the kitchen, with me. And, you know I go on all these crazy trips. I do like 16 segment itineraries and I fly around the world and, you know, 300,000 miles a year, and I made the big mistake of thinking: everyone wants to do that, you know, when clearly they don’t. And so I launched this product: “How to Become a Traveler Ninja” and it’s very, like, detailed and going into all these technical things, you know, and telling people how to book their around-the-world ticket with 16 segments. Anyway, I put the product out and it didn’t completely flop, but, the results were, you know, significantly inferior to what I was expecting. I mean I think I sold, like, you know, 45 copies on the first day, and I was expecting to sell like 300 or more. And then after that it just kind of fizzled, you know, one or two copies a day for a while, and, like, I was expecting much better results.

So, at first I thought: well maybe people don’t want information about travel, right? I thought they did, but maybe I just got it wrong. And what I realized later was: I just made it much too complicated. You know, most people don’t care about the details about how all these things work. They just want it to be done, you know, for them. Until the next product: “Frequent Flyer Master,” did a little bit better job of saying: Hey, you probably don’t want to be like me. You don’t want to necessarily go to all these countries, but, you know, could you use a free plane ticket, you know?

Is there somewhere in the world that you’d like to go? If that’s the case, then just buy this product. It’ll be very simple. You know, we have the ultimate guarantee. Basically, you’re going to earn at least 25,000 frequent flyer miles for one free plane ticket. You know, you buy this product for $50, that’s what you’ll get. So I was kind of giving them the fish. And so that did much better. I think this one product was essentially a $75,000 e-book. You know, during the first year – I have to double-check that – but somewhere in that range.

Andrew: So that did $75,000 in the first year?

Chris: Mm-hmm.

Andrew: All right, so even your flops – I mean, I wouldn’t call that a flop – but even the ones that aren’t grand slams do pretty well.

Chris: Yeah, well, that’s a successful one.

Andrew: Yeah.

Chris: [??] Yeah, you know, that’s great. You know, that’s fine. You know, like I said, I don’t have a team. You know, it’s a pretty small business. So then, I went for the third one, I went to build a successive [??] but on a continuity model. Instead of the number one suggestion, or the number one feedback that I heard about “Frequent Flyer Master” was “This is great, but we want more ongoing updates.” And so, I had some updates built in, like, I had an auto-responder series, but it wasn’t hugely detailed, and I also wasn’t incentivized [SP], you know, to go and, like, add a lot more information to it. And so “Travel Hacking Cartel”, you know, kind of similar promises “Frequent Flyer Master”, like: this is going to be easy, you don’t have to learn, you know, all the details if you don’t care. We’ll just tell you exactly what to do. But anyways on like a monthly continuity model.

Andrew: I see. And this you just keep giving them more and more and keep doing more and more for them.

Chris: Yeah. Keep giving them the fish, you know. And so lots of people come in and try. We have a fourteen day trial. I think right now there’s maybe between 2,000 and 3,000 active members with it. So, I figured out as I’ve gone along I figured out a little bit better about how to give people what they want.

Andrew: That’s impressive. All right, onto the big board again, and we did give them the fish. Lets talk about creative business based on the right passion, and, let me see actually here. There’s something that I wanted to show you. I didn’t know that she did this.

Chris: What’s that?

Andrew: How do you pronounce her name?

Chris: Mignon?

Andrew: Mignon. Mignon created a podcast called “Absolute Science,” and I didn’t even know it existed. I love podcasts. Why it didn’t it work? And then, we’ll show what she ended up doing afterwards that was right.

Chris: Yeah, well, it’s funny that you say you haven’t heard of it. That’s the thing, most people haven’t, you know. And I hadn’t either, until she told me the story. She said: I did this thing called “Absolute Science,” I’m like: oh, it sounds interesting but I’d never heard of it. According to her, you know, she was, you know, she had a technical background. I think she had an undergraduate degree in science or technical writing related to science or something. And, she’d always been kind of a science geek and so she created this podcast thinking, like, this’ll be really interesting. For whatever reason, it didn’t take off. And she enjoyed doing it, she put a lot of heart into it. You know, it just didn’t tip, and so then, I think you have another slide coming up, maybe . . . [??] . . . and here’s the podcast that probably everyone has heard of, Mignon Fogarty became grammar girl, and she founded this whole quick and dirty tips network.

There’s a lot of other podcasts associated with the network, but, by far the number one is Grammar Girl. This really took off. She’s done six books, she has hundred of thousands, if not a million or more, listeners. This one just, for whatever reason, connected more with the audience. Looking back, she talks about, “Well, absolute science. I was also passionate about it, but I found a broader, much more wide-ranging audience with Grammar Girl. So that’s what I ended up going with.”

It wasn’t like she was selling herself out. She was also passionate about good writing and the Grammar Girl was also a good fit. It just became a much more marketable thing than absolute science.

Andrew: And here’s a formula that you put in the book, “The $100 Startup”. You say, “Passion plus skill”, we talked about that earlier. And then, “Problem plus marketplace is what you want to look for to find the opportunity.” And in her case, she found a problem. People didn’t know how to use grammar properly. Frankly, I’m having trouble with it in this interview.

Chris: [laughs] Well, we all do. That’s the thing. We all have trouble.

Andrew: Right.

Chris: That’s why her show is so popular. It breaks down specific issues into these little bite-sized segments. Each show deals with one grammar issue. Most of them are in response to audience questions at this point. She’s covered a lot of stuff over the years. I don’t know if she runs out of things or what. Mostly, she just responds to a question and then gives a couple of examples. Then you go away having learned. Your life is made better through it, by listening.

Andrew: Yeah. Let me show this. This is also a screenshot from the book. I’m going to let people read this in the book itself, but I want to highlight this section.

What she did was, her passion was clear writing and the use of the English language. The skill that she had was she communicates well. She understands grammar rules in a fun way. The problem she was solving is the perception that studying grammar is difficult or boring, and I still have that perception. The opportunity was to educate an audience through stories and examples. I’ll just reveal the top there, so that people can see what I was looking at right down to there. This is the formula that I read.

Chris: Yeah. A good example is your perception that studying grammar is difficult or boring. I might still have that perception too, but she’s created this fun little avatar, Grammar Girl. You just download a podcast. You listen to it. You’re not committing to a whole course of study. You’re just committing to little bite-sized things. She overcomes that obstacle that way.

Andrew: Even the length of her programs, from what I understand, is specifically picked to keep it interesting and keep it moving.

Chris: Yeah.

Andrew: She doesn’t do hour and two-hour long programs the way I sometimes do. She keeps them in short bursts.

Chris: Well, everyone would listen to a two-hour program on Mixergy, but I don’t know if everyone would listen to two hours on Grammar Girl.

Andrew: I think they would. She’s fantastic.

Chris: They might.

Andrew: [laughs] So, thank you. All right. Next big idea is, “Decide to stay put or travel.” This is a big one for you. How does it… Before I get into the example that I pulled out that I want to talk about, in fact, I think there are two people that we should talk about here. Why is this one a big one for people to decide? How does it influence the business?

Chris: Well, I think…

Andrew: By the way, who is that? I see that on the side, you’re playing with someone.

Chris: Yeah. She keeps jumping up on my desk. This is Liberia [SP], my assistant. Whenever I start talking in my office, she thinks I’m calling her.

Andrew: Uh-huh.

Chris: [??] Sorry about that.

Andrew: So, you’ve got a cat who actually will come when you call her.

Chris: Yeah, but not when I want her necessarily. That’s the problem.

Andrew: I see. [laughs]

Chris: [??] and stare. What was your question, sorry?

Andrew: The question was, why is that an important question? I know that for me, for Mixergy, it’s an important question. It shapes the way that I run the business. I want to hear from you why it’s important for others.

Chris: Great. I think it’s important because not all business models are created equal. Some businesses are much easier to operate remotely, location independently or whatever you want to call it, than others. It’s not to say that one business is superior to the other. In the book, I talk with lots of people who have retail businesses that have established shops or something, and that’s fine. That’s great. But if you have a retail business, you’re not necessarily going to be able to travel the world all the time.

The other thing I think is important is, people have this perception that you can just go anywhere and start businesses and things. At least the way it is for me, I spend a lot of time at home working on things and building things. Then I’m able to travel. I’m able to maintain things. I can’t necessarily initiate a lot of things while traveling, so if it’s your goal to travel more, I think it’s good to figure out a little about the business model before you hit the road.

Andrew: I’ll get to the examples in a moment. But I’ll tell you that the reason it was important to me to decide that Mixergy needs to operate even as I travel, not so much because I want to travel all the time, and I get to travel a lot. But it’s because the previous company I had, Bradford and Reed, had a floor of office space in Manhattan, which I thought, “Yay, this is cool. This is what I want. In fact, I want more floors. I want to go bigger and bigger.” What I found was that there’s a certain lack of flexibility, inflexibility to build into a business that operates like that. It’s hard to let go of things. It’s hard to let go of frankly people when they’re just not appropriate anymore and I wanted the flexibility and I said, I’m going to build a business where if the economy goes bad I don’t have to worry about letting go of a floor of office space.

I want to know that I’ve got a business that if a new idea comes around I would quickly maneuver and jump on it. Or if one that was working for a while is suddenly bad I can avoid it. It gives me tremendous flexibility and it’s one of the decisions I made. It’s one of the decisions also, here let me go onto this, that Kyle Hepp made, too.

Interviewee: Yes, I think her name is Kyle.

Andrew: Kyle, excuse me.

Interviewee: Kyle Hepp. She’s a photographer who is based in Chile. I don’t remember if her husband is from there or not, but together they live in Chile, but they travel all over the world doing wedding photography and I’m trying to remember the exact story. I think she was a runner like you, and she actually got hit by a car or something, and fortunately she was OK, but of course she was injured and she had a job doing some content writing for AOL or something and then she lost that job.

Andrew: And her husband was laid off.

Chris: That’s right. Her husband was also laid off so they kind of went through this terrible month and then they took a trip. They said they never really traveled, they didn’t have a proper honeymoon and so they said, well we’re going to figure everything out, but let’s take our first big trip together first. I think they’d been married a couple of years or something at that point.

Then, they were in Italy together and she sent out some feelers and said, hey wedding photography, we’d love to do this. As I recall, I think while she was in Italy she got the email about booking a job for like $5000 and that was her first job that had come in and she was so excited. Then she tells her story about using the hotel phone to call both her mom and her dad separately and a phone call costs like $100 from this hotel room in Italy, but she was so excited that she did it.

So then they went back to Chile and just thought, well, we’ll just do this. We have some other bookings and we’ll do this until the money runs out. That was two or three years ago. Now all she does is travel and do the wedding thing.

Andrew: I wouldn’t think that someone who is a wedding photographer would be able to travel at all.

Chris: Yeah, and she said she was surprised, she was thinking, I’m based in Chile. I do couples in America and elsewhere who really want to hire me and pay those costs, but what she found is she had a certain style and she was also blogging and building community and referral and word of mouth, so she found that in fact they would value that.

Andrew: Let’s bring up one other person. This guy has an incredible story. Let’s bring up Brett’s site, there it is.

Chris: Oh yeah, that’s great and I could probably tell you the story better than the last one because I forgot some details there.

Andrew: Oh, we had it here in the notes. I think you did great.

Chris: OK, thanks. Thanks for pulling that out. Brett Kelly, he’s a self- described geek and he was a big fan of Evernote, the free software and he noticed that there was no English language manual for Evernote. It was just pretty simple. You can use Evernote without learning a lot, but there are lots of little tips and tricks and things.

Andrew: I’m actually running this, believe it or not, all these screen shots, when I plop a screen shot in it’s coming right off of Evernote.

Chris: Great.

Andrew: It’s in Evernote. I see that. There’s a lot you could do to it, you could do with Evernote, but most people don’t know. So yeah, so he wrote a book about it.

Chris: Right. So he wrote this book and he decided to sell it for $25 and at the time he was going through this situation. They were living in California, it’s expensive and his wife is working a couple different jobs and trading off with the kids at night, so they didn’t have a whole lot of time as a family and he said, OK, I’m going to put this up.

He had never made a product before by the way, so one, he had never made his own information product, he also didn’t have like a huge list or anything. He didn’t have a big audience. But he made this and put it up and his goal, I think he had something like a $10,000 goal over the course of the year.

Long story short he had $10,000 right in the launch, like a few days in, and it never stopped selling, it still sells. It sells like $300 a day, which is virtually all profit since he made, he owns it, and so I kept having to make corrections in the book about him, because at first he told me it was like an $80,000 a year business so I had that. Then a couple months later he comes back and he’s like it’s actually like $120,000 year now. Then it’s like $150,000. I’m like fine, I’m just going to say it makes a lot of money. That’s great.

Andrew: I think the copy that I saw and I’ve got a copy of the book before it was released, a copy of “The $100 Startup”. It says here, let me see, I think it’s $160,000 in revenue he did with it. He told his wife that if the book sold $10,000 then she should quit her night waitressing job and she was able to do it.

Chris: She did it. Right. So, now he works at home and she works at home and actually the odd twist is Evernote actually came and offered him a job. So Evernote locked [sounds like] the product, and he works for them as well, also from home. They gave him a job, and he gets to keep all the profit from the book, so it’s a pretty good deal.

Andrew: And they promote his book, too.

Chris: I know. It’s amazing…

Andrew: [laughs] It’s a great deal. All right. And it’s a business that’s very flexible. I looked at every part of his business. He runs it using just, basically, off-the-shelf solutions. The site, of course, is WordPress, as anyone can see. I think he was using, the program just escapes me, for a shopping cart.

Chris: Oh, it’s E-junkie or something.

Andrew: E-junkie. Exactly.

Chris: Yeah, it used to be E-junkie, which is amazing. E-junkie literally cost $5 or $10 a month to use. Like I say, he just put this up without a lot of background in it, and it’s done very well.

Andrew: There’s E-junkie right there. That’s all he’s using.

Chris: That’s right.

Andrew: All right. Has he been doing any traveling, by the way?

Chris: Has he, Brett?

Andrew: As far as you know? Brett.

Chris: He’s just starting to travel. Actually, he wants to travel now. So he came to the World Domination Summit last year, and I think he went to Mexico. He got a “WDS” tattoo, which was kind of random. I was like, “Wow. True fan.”

Andrew: WDS? Really? Your tattoo is on someone’s body?

Chris: I didn’t put it there. [laughs]

Andrew: Wow. That’s impressive.

Chris: It’s crazy.

Andrew: All right. Wait, I got chose. I meant to say choose. Choose your target… I know what I did. I connected these two.

Chris: Hmm.

Andrew: From the new demographic…what’s the new demographic?

Chris: A traditional demographic is what we’ve always thought about demographics: someone’s age, their gender, their background, their geography, their socio-economic status, income, etc. The new demographic is also called psychographic. It’s about grouping people together based on shared values, interests or world view.

A lot of the businesses that I talk to tend to do that. It’s one of those things where if you live in a small town, you have this certain hobby. Until the widespread adoption of the Internet and globalization, you didn’t necessarily know a lot of other people who are into that. But now, we can connect with people all over the world based on these shared interests.

My whole project… I do a lot of stuff with travel and self-employment, but really the broader message is one of freedom and independence, nonconformity and thinking for yourself, while also making the world a better place. These things are not very prone to traditional demographics.

I had a hard time in the beginning explaining. They were like, “Who is this project for?”

I’m like, “Well, it’s for these fun people who want to change the world.” They’re like, “That’s not our target market.”

A lot of businesses these days, I think, are finding more success in focusing on that psychographic. I don’t know what you consider your demographic, if it’s people that are interested in learning and growth, or if you think about actual demographics. I’m not sure.

Andrew: You know what? I don’t think of demographics so much as psychographics. Demographics would force me to say, “Well, I’m looking for guys who are 20 to 35 years old. Or maybe 20 to 25 years old, and they would be the target for me.” But it’s more psychographic, as you say. I’ve got a couple of examples here from your book, “The $100 Startup”, that explain it.

For me, there is a certain person who just loves self-improvement, who sees self-improvement as acquiring super powers. They want to read a book and then go out and use it, and see their lives change because of it. They want to know that they need to improve their memory. They read a memory book. They go and use it, and they see real results. People are impressed and their lives get better, and they generate more revenue from it.

Chris: Yeah.

Andrew: Or same thing for people skills. That’s who that psychographic is. Here’s someone else, Charlie Jordan, who created Kinetic Koffee.

Chris: Mm-hmm.

Andrew: Let’s zoom a little bit so people can see it. Instead of saying that he wanted to have, say, whites between 20 and 35 years old and, and location… I don’t even think he went with location. He did something else. Who did he target? Do you remember? I’ve got it here in my notes.

Chris: [??]

Andrew: I won’t put you on the spot. I’ll tell you exactly who he targeted.

Chris: Thanks.

Andrew: Kinetic Koffee Company focused on outdoor enthusiasts, and that’s why I got that shot.

Chris: Oh, right. OK, yeah.

Andrew: So that gave him a whole…Well, I’ll let you tell it.

Chris: No. You can probably tell it better than me. I was confused. I think it’s a husband and wife duo, or at least they’re partners, and I think Charlie is the woman, as I recall. I could be getting this totally wrong.

Andrew: No, you’re right. I’ve got to tell you, that confused me, too. I said, “I’m going to go and hunt for screenshots. I’m not going to ask anyone else to do this. I’ll go look online.” And thankfully, everyone in your book is totally Googleable [sic]. There was never just this John Doe. There’s one person, we’ll see him later on, who I don’t know if I got the right person. You’ll tell me. But everyone was totally Googleable [sic].

Chris: OK.

Andrew: And yes. I was a little confused by this, especially since in the photo, you can’t tell if Charlie is a man or a woman.

Chris: Right. Right. So I think I talked with her partner, her husband…

Andrew: I know I can zoom a little and see. That is a woman. OK, yes.

Chris: I think her partner’s name is Mark Ritz, as I recall.

Andrew: Jordan.

Chris: Yes, who knows. (?) what I’m doing.

Andrew: I thought . . .

Chris: So, I think you said something about targeting outdoor enthusiasts and targeting [??] . . .

Andrew: No, I take it back, I’m sorry. I don’t if it’s Jordan. I’m looking, here, at this and it say’s her name is Charlie Jordan, the former . . . Any way’s, the bigger message here is that they targeted a psychographic with their coffee company. What was that?

Chris: The thing is, coffee is very difficult compete in. There are coffee shops everywhere. There are distributors everywhere. They had always been very active in the outdoors, specifically, cycling, as I recall. Instead of trying to get their coffee in every grocery store, they tried to get it in every bike shop and not just every bike shops but then every wholesaler that sells to bike shops, bike events, triathlons, things like that. Basically, they took their coffee, which is s great product but there’s other kinds of great coffee out there and they applied that, specifically, to that psychographic people who identified with the outdoors.

Andrew: And here’s another person who did that and we don’t have spend, well, here we go. Jason Gillespie.

Chris: Yeah, Glassby, maybe, I’m not sure. I think it’s Glassby.

Andrew: Glassby.

Chris: Yeah. Here’s a good example, the whole Paleo craze, it’s, kind of, like a love, hate it kind of thing. I’m not Paleo, myself, but I really like, anything there’s like a craze, where’s people are really excited and passionate about it, there’s often a number of business models that can come from it. With Paleo, specifically, a lot of people are identifying with it but it’s complicated to follow, like, there’s a lot shopping that’s involved, there’s a lot of preparation, you have to plan. It’s hard to be a Paleo without a lot of planning and timing that goes into it.

Basically, he created a membership site, a membership program, called Paleo Plan, to help people. Once you make this commitment or you’re trying to follow this diet, he tells you everything you need to do; what you need to shop for, different recipes, how to make them, if you have more time, if you have less time. He’s really catering to that market that is interested in change following this formula but doesn’t know how to do.

Andrew: I see and that’s actually one of the pieces of advice that you give people. You say, ‘Look, not only choose the right new demographic to target but also once you do . . . One way do it is to latch onto a popular hobby, craze, or passion that people have,’ and in this case, he, specifically, did that, he said this Paleo diet is really big. Another way that you say to do it is to ask people and, here, you’ve got a list of questions, here are some of the kinds of questions that you suggest that people ask and you say you could use Survey Monkey to ask it. These are the kinds of questions that you want us to ask people to figure out, well, to do what.

Chris: It helps you to understand some specific information. Here’s the problem, often when we have a business idea, we talk to our friends, who aren’t necessarily the best target market. We talk to our friends and we’re like, “Hey Andrew, I have this idea.” Most of the time your going to be like, “Oh, that’s great. Good idea.” That’s what our friends do but if we can dig a little bit deeper and say like, “OK. I’ve got this situation,” like, trying to make this diet product. What’s your biggest problem with your health? What are you trying to improve the most? What’s the number one question you have about fitness? If I’m an authority in some area, what can I do to help you with travel? What can I do help you build your business? The more specific you ask; you get some really insightful answers back.

Andrew: We, actually, got a really, this first one here, I’ll leave it up on the screen for a moment, this is, “What is your biggest with . . .?,’ is a huge one for us and I wished that we would’ve asked it sooner and more frequently. It’s, ‘What’s your biggest problem with your company?’ and we asked that question and there’s two things that we learned from it and that’s why we’re doing this session, here, today, you and me. The first is, we got emails from people or we got responses from said, “What company? I don’t even have it. I’m trying to figure the next one is or what the first one should be,” and who knew. I though my audience was all entrepreneurs and probably is a majority entrepreneurs but there’s a big chunk of people who say, “Hey, my biggest problem is I don’t know how to launch or what to launch,” and that’s why so much of we’re talking about here is related to that.

The second is revenue. We hear in the world, so much, that in start up’s you build an audience and so on and I forgot the thing I keep telling my audience, that it’s important to bring in revenue and they keep reminding how important revenue is to them, especially, right now. It’s a bad economy; you want to bring in revenue to keep the business going. We’ve learned to do more sessions like that. In fact, when we first were looking to do courses, I sent an email to the audience saying, what is it that’s your biggest problem, what do you want to know and they told me that. A lot of people said, “Hey, I want to launch, ” a lot of said, “I want to generate revenue,” and we put a couple of course out on that and then we stopped. I wish we would’ve kept at asking those same questions. Let me on the board.

Chris: But then you did and you had the feedback. That’s why you ask, right? You ask because you’re probably going to get some results that surprise you and that’s good.

Andrew: And then the other big piece of advice that you have there is put together a possibilities list and decision making matrix. I put this together, here let me bring it up, this is yours. I put this together when I was trying to figure out what to do with Mixergy next. How do we bring in revenue with it? And for me, well describe yours and then I’ll talk a little bit about mine and how it lead me to doing courses.

Chris: So, this is just a model when you have competing ideas, you’ve got all these things you want to do, which most of us have no shortage of ideas. So it’s kind of a subjective matrix but it’s a way to kind of look at everything together and say OK, what’s most important now, what should I do? So I kind of list the ideas here on the left, here’s some things that I was thinking about maybe a couple years ago and then across the top I kind of rank them on a one to five scale based on what I assume their impact will be, what’s the significance of it, how much work is it going to take to do, that’s effort, profitability, how much money is it going to bring in, and then fit with vision, that’s kind of just overall alignment, is this in line with everything that we’re trying to do? How similar or different is it?

And then I look at those numbers and so mostly I’m just looking at the trends there and a couple things I saw, I had this, what I thought was a great idea to do small liable workshops and I thought “Oh, this would be kind of fun” but then once I kind of put it on the list I was like well, it’s kind of undesirable compared to the other things. And then I thought empire building kit, publishing guide, those kind of ranked towards the top. And so it doesn’t mean that you won’t do any of the other ideas. It doesn’t mean that you’ll do them in order, one through five, it just kind of helps you to see what your priorities are.

Andrew: Yeah. And I did this exact thing. I actually did it with Noah Kagan, who is the founder of App Sumo, I said ‘I wasn’t sure what to do next’, he brought up a Google Doc Spreadsheet and the two of us just put a list of all the possible ideas down, every single one, every time I said ‘Oh, we shouldn’t put that on’, he said ‘No, Andrew add it on there’. And we did the same kind of columns. How easy is it to launch? Which I wouldn’t have put on if it was just me doing it because I thought you want to do whatever you can, it doesn’t matter how tough it is, you’ll find a way.

But the truth is you want to find something that you can actually launch, otherwise, it’s going to be one of these never going to happen ideas. So we did the same thing and that’s how we ended up doing courses. Alright, let’s go onto the big board again. Next big idea is when to start and, of course, the answer is now. And I wanted to tell this one example of someone who did it early. This is Jen and Omar.

Chris: Jen and Omar from Columbus, Ohio. They were two young designers, they had just gotten out of design school and they were working day jobs but they also loved maps and they went on this road trip. And they were like it would be nice if we had, they weren’t even planning on making one, they were like we should buy a map of all the places we want to go and color things in. And long story short they didn’t find one that they liked and because they were designers they made their own. They printed 50 copies, or something like that. Fifty was the minimum so they printed one for themselves and they gave a few away to friends but they still had like 40 left.

And so, they created what was originally just a one page website selling these maps. They got mentioned on a couple of different design forums and within a day or two those maps had sold out. So they also had no intention or idea of starting a business necessarily but in response to that demand they created more maps. They did a couple other designs and now this is what they do full time from their apartment in Columbus.

Andrew: I just recorded an interview with the founder of a company called Cheddar Media, was the previous company. He built this up and he took it out. It was widgets for bloggers to put on their websites and he was either going to monetize it by running ads on it or charging bloggers. And he finally had this thing built and he takes out the bloggers and they say “We don’t pay for anything, there’s not much money in blogging, most people give us stuff for free” and so he goes, “Well, what if I do this?” and they go “Well, if you do this and this and this maybe I would pay you $7.” $7? And maybe? And so he realized all right that’s not going to work.

So then, he said the second option is advertising, I’ll give it to as many bloggers as possible and I’ll go and I’ll get advertising revenue. So he went out and talked to advertisers and said would you advertise? “Yeah”. “How much would you give me?” and the price that they gave him was shockingly low. And he went back and he figured how many bloggers would I need, how much traffic would they need to have, the idea got $300,000 of investor money to build it up, friends and family type investors, we’re not talking about he didn’t go to Sequoia, the guys who backed Yahoo!, the people who 300,000 is important to had to shut it down, explain to them why it didn’t work out all because this took a while to launch. And I hear that over and over again. His second company he actually ended up launching with nothing more than an Excel spreadsheet. He said I’m going to take an Excel spreadsheet, we’ll do a lot of it manual and I’ll see if anyone wants to buy it before we build the product.

Chris: Much better approach the second time, I think.

Andrew: Right. And that’s the way that I see over and over in my interviews. You need to launch. I could give you another example of Scott Case from “Startup America”, who had a similar problem. He spent, I think it was, a year building his first product, right out of school. He took it out. It took two years of just trying to hustle and getting people to buy it.

I said, “What’s the mistake that you made? Why couldn’t you sell it faster? You’re a great salesman.”

He said, “Well, Andrew, we just spent too long building it. We got out of touch with our customers. We should have just given it to them for free in the beginning, or sold it to them at a low price, and then gotten feedback.”

Chris: Yeah, something. Mm-hmm.

Andrew: Tell me if I got this image right. You told a story in your book about Nick, I hope I’m pronouncing his name right, Gattens [SP].

Chris: Yeah.

Andrew: Is he the guy that you told the story about in your book? I found his tweet.

Chris: Yeah. [laughs] That’s the same dude. Yeah.

Andrew: Look at that. You know what, I have to say, it just goes to show…

Chris: How do you find this stuff, Andrew? That’s amazing.

Andrew: You’re telling stories about real people. Usually people, I’ll go through their books and it’s always “a friend of mine” or some researcher somewhere, and I can’t go and back it up and substantiate any of it. With you, I was able to go out and…

Chris: It’s amazing that you did that. Yeah. So, this guy’s touring with the cover band, Rush. That’s a little side story. I met this guy on book tour. I think I met him first in Kentucky, and we talked about his job. He was a photographer.

I said, “Hey, how are things?” He said he was going to have this business and he has a little website. I always like to hear about what people are doing. So I had my iPhone with me and I’m like, “Oh, let me just pull it up and take a little look.” I think he was asking me for some advice or something, and so I said, “Let me see the website.”, because he said, “Nobody’s buying.”

I said, “Oh, let me see. Let’s take a look at it.” Basically, I go pull it up and he’s got this great portfolio, but there’s no way to buy. There’s no PayPal button. There’s no, “Here’s how you can purchase.” It was one of these obvious things. You’re like, “Well, maybe no one’s buying because there’s no way they can buy.”

So we talked through it some more and basically, he said later, “I realize I had everything ready. I just, for some reason, had this internal block. I wasn’t ready to put something out there for sale” which is very common, actually. A lot of people have every step but that last one.

The follow-up was, I saw him a few weeks later in West Virginia. There were five people there for that gig, which was crazy. There was a Rush cover band playing on the other side of the room, which was…

Andrew: Ah, now I get what the tweet is. OK.

Chris: Yep. That was the tweet. It was pretty bad, but it was good to see Nick because he was all excited, and he said, “I got this story to tell you. You know, after we went away from that meet up, I realized it wasn’t some technical issue. I thought it was a technical thing, like I just couldn’t get the code on my site right or something. That’s why I hadn’t put it up for sale. But I just realized I had this block, and I had to over come it. So I put the PayPal button on, and a couple days later a stranger came to my website. They clicked the buy button. They gave me $50.”

Andrew: Mm-hmm.

Chris: He talked about just how empowering that was and he was like, “That $50 meant so much to me because a stranger had just valued my work and chosen to exchange money for it.”

I hear this over and over, how empowering it is to get that first sale. The sooner, the sooner, the sooner you can get that sale, rather than spending $300,000 and waiting for years, and then testing something to hear it’s not going to work, the sooner the better. Then you can do so much more after that. Then you can tweak. Then you can do continuous improvements. You may not even pursue that business or whatever, and that’s fine. But that first sale is so valuable.

Andrew: Yeah. And it’s so easy to put a button up on your site from PayPal. You just log in. They give you these buttons. You put them on. And you can tell them exactly what happens after the button.

Chris: Mm-hmm.

Andrew: All right, so that answers the other question. Get the first sale as soon as possible, so let’s go back onto the big board. Here’s the next one. So we talked about, know when to start, get the first sale as soon as possible and then market before you manufacture. And here’s one, actually, where I couldn’t Google the guy.

Chris: Right.

Andrew: It’s the only time where you said, “The friend.”

Chris: Yeah. This guy doesn’t actually want to be known.

Andrew: OK.

Chris: That’s probably the only case where you couldn’t do it. As you said, you have the text here, which is great. It helps me remember. Basically, he created this specialty guide for the high-end car industry, except he didn’t actually create it. He just put an advertisement in a magazine. This goes back a few years, before a lot of online advertising.

Andrew: Uh-huh.

Chris: He just said, “I’ve got this guide. It’s going to be great. It’s going to tell you x, y, z. Here are the benefits, etc.” But he didn’t actually create the product, and then he received two orders. This was a high-end thing, so it was, what did I say, $900 or something?

Andrew: Yeah.

Chris: So he received the order and then he basically spent the next month making the product. He wrote to them and said, “We’re improving the product. We’re creating a 2.0 version. Of course, if you want your money back and you don’t want to wait, you can get it. But, please wait. If you can wait a little bit, we’re going to give you something that’s amazing.”

So both people, of course, chose to wait. Then he created the guide and delivered it to them.

Andrew: [laughs] And he knew exactly how much he was going to make, a minimum of what he would make because…

Chris: Right. Exactly.

Andrew: …he made the sales first.

Chris: Though the lesson isn’t necessarily to always do it that way. I would say the lesson is, think about your marketing as you manufacture. If you’re creating some online product that’s going to have a sales page, I would say write the sales page first. Write the sales page. Craft the offer. Figure that stuff out, then get busy creating the product. If you focus on the outcomes and what you’re really going to deliver to people and then create the product or the service based off of that, it’s going to be a lot easier than making this amazing product and then figuring out how to offer it.

Andrew: It’s so intimidating for people when they put it off, thinking that the process needs to be created, then figure out what to sell when it should be the opposite, and they’re just intimidated. It shouldn’t be that intimidating. You should just write it out.

Chris: Just be basic.

Andrew: As you talk.

Chris: It can be very simple. It can be very easy, and just then you can tweak it later like everything else. But if you can’t do that, then I think you have a real problem. I think you have a problem with the product or the service itself. If you’re really not sure how this thing is going to change people’s lives, then you’ve got a bigger problem. All right?

Andrew: Yeah. Years ago my brother and I created a software company together. Before we ever did Bradford & Reed, the greeting card company, we had this little software company that we ran out of my parents’ house. While he was building it, I would write the offers that we would send out. And then, if something looked good on a bullet point, then I’d go back to him and say, “Can you build that” And his answer almost always would be, “No, I can’t.” “How close can you get to it because I’ve got this bullet point that I know it’s going to be effective?

Chris: Yeah.

Andrew: All right. Back on to the big board here. Make them an offer they can’t refuse. Be like the godfather or be like these guys. Again, I’m pulling this right off of their website. Tour Saver? Do you remember their story?

Chris: Yep. These are two guys from Alaska. It’s a long process how it came about, but basically they created this coupon book. If you’re visiting Alaska, everything in Alaska is expensive to begin with, and this coupon book will get you all kinds of two for one deals, like genuine discounts, not like cheap things but things that will actually save you money. I really like how they did their pricing. There were some existing coupon books. They sold for $20 or less, and again they didn’t have very significant discounts, but these guys, Scott and his business partner- I forget the partner’s name – but Scott’s the guy I know. He really focused on getting like highly valuable, genuine deals, and then they priced the book at $100.

Their pitch was, you buy this book for $100 and just one of the coupons is going to pay for the cost of the book. And then, if you use one more, you’re saving money. So, they’ve essentially established now a monopoly over this business. I’m not sure how many copies they sell or what the exact numbers are, but it’s their full-time business. They’ve been doing it for a number of years now. Every year they put a new edition, but it also drives repeat business.

Andrew: And as you were telling the story, one of the things you said that they could have done was reduce the price, but instead of reducing the price and using that as a hook which would have been the easy way out, they said, “How do we make it such a good offer that it’s a no brainer?”

Chris: Right.

Andrew: It was something like, if you’re going to buy airline tickets anyway, this is going to save you enough money on the airline tickets that it pays for the book and then, of course, you have all of those other discounts that you’re going to save money with. That’s the kind of thing you’re looking for.

Chris: Mm-hmm. Yeah.

Andrew: All right. Let’s go on to the big board. There it is. All right. Use the rough awesome format, and I’ve got this up here on the screen. By the way, one of the things that I like about the $100 Startup is you don’t just have these big ideas. You give me specific ideas followed by specific points of action as you’ll see, as the audience will see in a moment, and then specific examples of people who are real people who have done this.

So, these aren’t just ideas that should maybe work, that should work in theory. They work for people. All right. Here it is.

Chris: Right.

Andrew: Sorry?

Chris: I was going to say, you can go ahead and find those people on Twitter.

Andrew: Right.

Chris: Like you said, no, it has to be specific because there’s so much generic information.

Andrew: Right.

Chris: It just has to be like your interviews. It has to be very actionable stuff.

Andrew: I try. You’re impressive as hell as you do this. All right. Here it is. This is the …

Chris: Right. OK. I forgot. I totally forgot the rough awesome format until I saw it here.

Andrew: This is the format that we use to do what?

Chris: This is the format that we use to persuade or to sell or to convince people of the value of something, so either in a sales page or any kind of pitch. Whatever your pitch is, points one through four, the first thing is … Let’s use the coupon book as an example since we talked about it. So, point one, this thing is so awesome. This coupon book is really great, and here’s your primary benefit. You buy this, you’re going to save so much money. Point two, seriously it’s really awesome.

Maybe, the secondary benefit is you’re going to learn about something you weren’t familiar with. You’re going to find some different opportunity. You’re going to have a great trip.

Then, you have to start thinking about the objections and the concerns. So, point three. By the way, you don’t have to worry about anything. You can get your money back. This product has been around a long time. You can Google us. You can read what other customers have said. Whatever the concerns are, that’s where you respond to that. And to wrap it up, see, it’s really awesome. What are you waiting for and that’s all about urgency and taking action, buy now, this offer will end or here’s why you want to take action now as opposed to thinking about it and waiting forever.

Andrew: So, if we’re writing that marketing letter or the web page that’s going to sell the product that we’re going to create, we haven’t even created it yet, but we want to start taking Chris’s advice and write out the offer. This is the way we do it. First, we think of the primary benefit. What’s the big benefit that they’re going to get if they buy this? Then, we think about the secondary benefit. In addition to that, there’s also this great reason to buy it.

And then, we think about their concerns, and then we ask for specific action. That’s the way that you want us to think about any ad copy or any way that we’re making a promotion in an offer.

Chris: Yeah. And by the way, the secondary benefit is always interesting because it kind of reinforces your attraction to something. You’re like, oh, this coupon book looks great and then your just having one other thing kind of just makes it better. It’s like, not only will I save money, I’ll also hear about all of these different offers.

Andrew: I think it’s something like, I think, at least, like going through their website, it was a travel guide.

Chris: Yeah.

Andrew: Not only are you going to save money, but you’re also going to know where to go in Alaska and what to do.

Chris: Right. Exactly. You can go see things together, bam, bam, and you don’t have to worry because look at what everybody has said about it.

Andrew: Right.

Chris: They have a good reputation, and isn’t it awesome? Order now.

Andrew: Right. Right. All right. There it is, and let’s go back up to the last big point. Offer an incredible guarantee. I’ve got one that you do.

Chris: OK.

Andrew: This always got my attention. One plane ticket every three months is what you promise people, not promise, guarantee that they’re going to get when they join the Travel Hacking Cartel.

Chris: Correct.

Andrew: So, how can you? Tell me about that before I can ask my question.

Chris: So, it’s just like when we say, “Think about the sales page first.” I always think about the offer first, and when I thought about the Travel Hacking Cartel, I was like, what would be the world’s greatest guarantee for this? If I’m guaranteeing that you can learn about free travel and not just learn about it but take advantage of it, what do you want to do? Do you want to earn these miles so that you can go somewhere? The miles exist to serve the purpose of traveling.

So, I thought, previously I had a product where I did one free plane ticket. This time this is a continuity model I keep on paying every month. So, I thought, OK, you’ll get four free plane tickets a year, 100,000 miles. You can use them however you want. Like if you want to fly first class to India or something, that’s one ticket, but the point is you’re going to earn all of these miles, and all you have to do is if you’re subscribed and you devote a good faith effort to spending 30 minutes a month following the deals and information, then that’s what you’re going to get.

If you don’t, you email me and tell me. We’ll figure something out. I’ll credit you the months. I’ll credit you miles. I’ll do personal consulting. Whatever I have to do or if you just want to cancel, I’ll make it easy for you to cancel. So, I’m trying to reassure the objections. I’m trying to be like, this service is great, and if you have some concerns, we have the world’s greatest guarantee.

Andrew: How do you even do something like that? How can you guarantee that someone’s going to get something that you can’t give them directly? I understand if you’re selling apples, you can guarantee the apples will be there.

Chris: Well, it’s somewhat on a good faith basis, and that’s what I say to people that ask about it. I say, well, if you’re having trouble, like I know we can do it because we’ve done it for so many people and there are all kinds of examples, but it is on a good faith basis. If you’re really not able to make it work, then you can write me and I’m going to help you personally. And then, in that case, I’ll be, let’s talk about your situation. What kind of programs are you part of? What are your travel goals? Have you seen this deal? This is going to help you. So, then we kind of do it step by step. Most people are not going to need that. The point is if you qualify for the service, then you’ll be able to do it for yourself.

Andrew: All right. I’ll bet you there are a lot of people watching this or saying, you know what, I don’t care what the offer is, the guarantee just sold me.

Chris: Right. Well, the whole idea is the guarantee plus social proof plus you put everything together, and different people respond to different things.

Andrew: I see. All right. You want that incredible guarantee coming from us, something so good that there’s no risk for them.

Chris: Whatever you can do that is the most powerful guarantee you can think of. I always hate to use Zappos as an example because everyone does, but everyone does because they’re so good about there’s this whole thing about you can return your shoes 364 days later if you have a one year guarantee. Apparently, people do that, but it’s the same thing. How can you do that? Well, they do it because most people are honest. They do it because it’s the cost of doing business and it generates good will for them, and every publication in the world writes about it for them.

Andrew: All right. Before I go them to check out your site and to get the book, do you have the book to hold up?

Chris: Do I have the book? It’s right here.

Andrew: Oh, you do have the original one.

Chris: I don’t know.

Andrew: There is, “The $100 Startup”.

Chris: I’m not so good with the camera. Anyway…

Andrew: You’ve got it on the screen here. First, let me say this to the audience, we always go through, a lot, a lot of different tactics in these sessions and it’s easy to say, ‘hey you know what Andrew didn’t cover it right’ or to say’ Andrew gave me too much I don’t even know where to get started’, and to be overwhelmed and to not do anything. So I’ve got this up on the big board here for a reason.

Pick just one, any one of the ideas that we’ve covered here today. Let me scroll up so you can actually see some of them. Just pick one and use it and I guarantee that you’re going to see a result or you call me up and Chris up and we’ll give you free consuta- [SP], no. [laughs] but I guarantee that you will get a result if you pick just one, think about your product. Is there a way that maybe you can give the fish to people instead of asking them to fish for themselves? Is there something you can do for them that you ordinarily would expect them to do for themselves? Is there a way of thinking of the demographic, or the psychographic, or the person who you’re going after that can help you get a leg up?

If you haven’t launched and you’re saying to yourself, “Hey, I came to this with a $100 startup and they didn’t tell me where to put my hundred dollars or whatever. Maybe you can recognize that you’re making an excuse and just say how do I get my sales? My first sale as soon as possible, maybe it’s even before you manufacture that you make your first sale. Maybe that’s the thing that helps you. Maybe you’ve been trying to think of how can I redo my ad copy and you just didn’t have a format and staring at that screen, a black screen has got you just full of writer’s block. Well then maybe the rough awesome format is going to help you. Maybe you want to experiment with an incredible guarantee.

Pick one, let’s go back to this, just pick any one of these ideas and use it, and then build on it and build on it and if I had to suggest one to use, I would say pick the easiest one because that’s the one that’s going to get you some momentum and get you results quickly.

All right, and finally I said I was going to show it up on the screen. I’ve got all these tabs up on the screen, including the one for “The $100 Startup”. This is an incredible book full of great ideas so why am I leaving it, because I’m going to Google $100 Startup. Let’s bring up the Amazon page for it . . . and there it is on Amazon. I recommend the Kindle version, I always like reading digital versions. Also check out unconventionalguides.com to see the pages in the guides that we’ve been talking about and to see how Chris presents his different guarantees and uses the marketing that he talked to you about and of course chrisguillebeau.com is where I first connected with you and learned from you. And I recommended if you’re on here guys just go right to the bottom and select this, The Brief Guide to World Domination. Let me do a better job of highlighting it.

Chris, thank you so much for doing this session with us

Chris: Of course, thank you for having me.

Andrew: Thank you, and thank you all for watching, looking forward to hearing how you picked that one first tactic and used it.

Who should we feature on Mixergy? Let us know who you think would make a great interviewee.